3 - Home
Before You
Use This
Machine
Before you can send or receive fax messages,
please take about 30 minutes to set up your machine.
Set up your machine using the following procedures.
Keep going...
COVER_EN.pm6
1
9/18/00, 1:29 PM
Installing the
Toner
Cassette
3. Pull the front cover release lever in the
1
direction indicated by the arrow and open
the front cover.
Note
T If you do not pull the lever, only the operation panel
will open.
5. Hold the toner cassette as shown in the
illustration and set it in the machine. Make
sure that the pins (marked with “p” in the
step 4 illustration) on either side of the
toner cassette slide along the guides inside
the machine.
1. Remove the plastic wrapping sheet from
the machine, and then remove all shipping
tape.
2. Open the operation panel and remove the
protective sheet, then re-close the
operation panel.
Note
T Please refer to the illustration printed on the protective sheet.
1
4. Prepare the toner cassette.
Important
T Do not touch the green drum.
1. Remove the toner cassette from its bag.
2. Hold the cassette horizontally and shake it
gently from side to side a few times to loosen
the toner.
Keep going...
SCHMIDT4_EN.pm6
1
9/18/00, 1:29 PM
6. Press down on the cassette until it locks
into place.
Note
T If you do not push the cassette in fully, the cover
will not close.
Installing the
Main Paper
Cassette
5. Load paper into the cassette, and then
2
replace the cassette cover.
Note
T The frosted side of the cover must be face up when
closed.
1. Pull the cassette out of the main unit.
2. Remove the 3 pieces of tape from the
cassette cover. Then remove the plastic
sheet from between the cassette cover and
the body of the cassette.
3. Open the cassette cover, and then remove
it from the cassette.
7. Close the front cover.
6. Install the cassette. Push it in firmly until it
locks into place.
4. If necessary, adjust the paper size.
Reference
T To change the paper size in the cassette, see Chapter
9, “Changing the Paper Size in the Main Cassette”
in the Advanced Features manual.
SCHMIDT4_EN.pm6
2
9/18/00, 1:29 PM
2
Attaching the
Quick Dial
Sheet
3
1. Unpack the Quick Dial sheet, then remove
the cover sheet from the Quick Dial keys.
2. Holding the Quick Dial sheet so that the
3
QWERTY layout faces up, fit the sheet over
the Quick Dial keys. Then affix the cover
sheet over the Quick Dial sheet.
Insert the tabs on either side of the Quick
Dial Cover into the slots on the machine.
Reference
T Upon shipment from the factory, this machine's
Quick Dial keys are arranged in a QWERTY layout. To change the layout, see Chapter 7, "Key Layout" in the Advanced Features manual.
Attaching the
Trays And Document Table
4
3
points indicated by the circles in the
illustration, then attach it to the fax
machine. Attach the Document Delivery
Tray.
The machine has three types of trays. Please
carefully refer to the illustrations when attaching
them. Make sure that the frosted side faces up.
1. Remove the trays and document table from
their shipping bags.
2. Attach the Print Delivery Tray. Insert it at an
angle so that the tabs fit in the slots provided.
4. Attach the Document Table.
Note
T Remove the glossy plastic coating sheets from the
display and other surfaces.
SCHMIDT4_EN.pm6
3. Hold the Document Delivery Tray at the
Keep going...
9/18/00, 1:29 PM
5. If necessary, pull out the extensions on the
Document Table and trays.
Connecting to
the Telephone Line
5
There are two similar sockets located at the rear
of the machine:
TEL1: For the optional handset or external telephone
LINE: For connecting to the telephone line
1. Insert the line cable into the socket labeled
“LINE”.
Connecting the
Power and
Switching On
6
1. Insert the power cable into the socket
located at the rear of the machine.
2. Plug the cable into a wall socket.
Warning
T Power requirements: 120 V, 60 Hz
T Insert the power plug securely into the wall socket.
T Make sure that the wall outlet is near the machine
and readily accessible.
T Do not connect other equipment to the same socket.
3. Turn the power switch on.
4
2. Connect the other end to your telephone line.
Before you can use the fax machine, you must
perform some simple initial settings.
SCHMIDT4_EN.pm6
4
9/18/00, 1:29 PM
Initial Settings &
Adjustments
The keys used for making settings are as follows.
key
7
Time:
[ 4:30]
Important
T If you press the [Cancel] key while making settings,
"Completed?" is displayed. To end setup, select
"Yes" by pressing W or V, then press the [OK] key.
If you select “No” and press the [OK] key, the
display returns to the screen for year entry if you
were entering the date and time. If you were making
some other setting, the display returns to the entry
that was being made.
Note
T You can enter uppercase characters from A to Z,
symbols, and spaces using the Quick Dial keys.
Numbers can be entered using the number keys.
T If you make a mistake, press the [Clear] key and try
again.
Press OK
Press the number keys to enter a 2-digit number for
the correct minute setting (00~59) and press the
[OK] key.
Quick Dial keys
(A~Z, Symbol)
5
Press OK
Enter the current hour setting (1~12). If the hour is
a single digit, press the V key to continue.
Press OK
Before using the machine, make the following
settings.
T Date and time
T Line type
T Your own name, fax header, and fax number
time.
Time:
[ 9:30]
[OK] key
The following display appears when the power
is turned on for the first time. Do not turn off the
power until you have completed the following
procedure.
Year:
[2000]
5. Use the number keys to enter the correct
Number keys
(0~9)
[Clear] key
Time:
[ 4:55]
Press OK
ZCKS200N
1. Use the number keys to enter the year, if
the year is correct, press the [OK] key.
Year:
[2000]
Press OK
2. Press the W or V key to select the correct
WV/OK
number for the date (01~31) and press the
[OK] key.
Press OK
4. Press the W or V key to select AM or PM for
the time you are going to enter, and then
press the [OK] key.
AM/PM:
[AM]
“Pulse” for the type of telephone line
connected to the fax machine, and then
press the [OK] key.
7. Enter your office, company, or personal
3. Use the number keys to enter the correct
Day:
[ 4]
6. Press the W or V key to select “Tone” or
Line Type:
WV/OK
Pulse [Tone]
month and press the [OK] key.
Month:
[January]
After "Function Accepted" flashes briefly in the
display, the next setting is displayed.
WV/OK
PM
name, or any other appropriate identification, and then press the [OK] key. You can
enter uppercase characters from A to Z,
symbols, and spaces using the Quick Dial
keys. Numbers can be entered using the
number keys.
Own Name[ABC]
OK
ABC COMPANY_■■■■■■■■
Reference
TFor details, see Chapter 3, “Initial Settings and
Adjustments” in the Basic Features manual.
TAlso see Chapter 3, "Entering Characters" in the
Basic Features manual.
UE USA H535
SCHMIDT4_EN.pm6
5
9/18/00, 1:29 PM
8. The name you just entered for Own Name
flashes in the Header display.
In the USA, law requires that the telephone
number of your fax machine be included in
your fax header.
Header[ABC]
OK
ABC COMPANY■■■■■■■■■
If you want to use the Own Name entry for the
Header entry, just press the [OK] key.
If you want to enter a different name for the
Header, use the A~Z keys to enter another name,
and then press the [OK] key.
Reference
TFor details, see Chapter 3, “Initial Settings and
Adjustments” in the Basic Features manual.
T Also see Chapter 3, "Entering Characters" in the
Basic Features Manual.
After Initial Settings
You can check and adjust these settings.
T To change the date and time, see Chapter 6, "Setting the Date and Time" in the Advanced Features
manual.
T To change the line type, see Chapter 7, "Line Type"
in the Advanced Features manual.
T To change your own name, fax header, and fax
number settings, see Chapter 3, "Initial Settings and
Adjustments" in the Basic Features manual.
Reference
TSee Chapter 10, “Installation” in the Advanced
Features manual for further information regarding
installation.
T If you are using NIC FAX, you will need to connect a LAN cable and make network settings. See
Chapter 1 in the NIC FAX KIT manual.
9. Use the number keys to enter your fax
6
number as it must be dialed from outside
the United States. (You cannot enter
pauses.)
Fax Number
+11234567890
OK
Note
T The format of the number is normally as follows:
International Dial Prefix, Your County Code, Your
Area Code, then you must add a Pause, followed
by your telephone number. Check the International
Dialing Prefix and the Country Code with your local telecommunications operator. The example
shown is for the United States; the codes to add are
1.
10.Press the [OK] key.
"Initial Setup Completed" will flash briefly
in the display.
Ready
100% 4:55AM
Set Orig./ Enter No.
Please keep this manual and any leftover
parts in a safe place.
SCHMIDT4_EN.pm6
6
9/18/00, 1:29 PM
7
That’s it!
Printed in China
UE USA H535-8670
SCHMIDT4_EN.pm6
7
9/18/00, 1:29 PM
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 1 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
FAX3900L
Operating Instructions
<Basic Features >
Z CK H 0 3 0N . e p s
Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future
reference.
For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 1 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
15-5, Minami Aoyama 1-chome,
Minato-ku, Tokyo 107-8544, Japan
Phone: +81-(0)3-3479-3111
Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense
that may result from the use of parts other than recommended parts.
For good copy quality, Ricoh recommends that you use
genuine Ricoh toner.
TONER CASSETTES
RICOH FAX TONER CASSETTE TYPE 1135 BLACK( United
States ) is recommended for the best performance.
RICOH FAX TONER CASSETTE TYPE 1136 BLACK( Canada )
is recommended for the best performance.
U.S.A.
RICOH CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006
Phone: +1-973-882-2000
Spain
RICOH ESPAÑA S.A.
Avda. Litoral Mar, 12-14,
08005 Barcelona
Phone: +34-(0)93-295-7600
The Netherlands
RICOH EUROPE B.V.
Groenelaan 3, 1186 AA, Amstelveen
Phone: +31-(0)20-5474111
Italy
RICOH ITALIA SpA
Via della Metallurgia 12,
37139 Verona
Phone: +39-045-8181500
United Kingdom
RICOH UK LTD.
Ricoh House,
1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham,
Middlesex, TW13 7HG
Phone: +44-(0)20-8261-4000
Germany
RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Mergenthalerallee 38-40,
65760 Eschborn
Phone: +49-(0)6196-9060
France
RICOH FRANCE S.A.
383, Avenue du Général de Gaulle
BP 307-92143 Clamart Cedex
Phone: +33-(0)1-40-94-38-38
Printed in China
UE USA H535-8600
Hong Kong
RICOH HONG KONG LTD.
21/F., Tai Yau Building,
181, Johnston Road,
Wan Chai, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-2862-2888
Singapore
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE.LTD.
260 Orchard Road,
#15-01/02 The Heeren,
Singapore 238855
Phone: +65-830-5888
FAX3900L Operating Instructions
Overseas Affiliates
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 1 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get
maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in
this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related
to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
Notes:
Some illustrations might be slightly different from your machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Laser Safety:
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical unit
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis
and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement or the optical subsystem is required.
Operator Safety:
This machine is considered a CDRH Class I laser device, safe for office/EDP use. The machine contains a 5-milliwat, 765 - 805 nanometer wavelength, GaAIAs laser diode. Direct (or indirect reflected)
eye contact with the laser beam may cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlock
mechanism have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
Warning:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Notes:
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
For good copy quality, Ricoh recommends that you use genuine Ricoh toner.
Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other
than genuine Ricoh parts in your Ricoh office product.
Important
Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable
for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating
the machine.
Power Source:
AC120V, 60Hz
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above.
Declaration of Conformity
Product Name: Facsimile
Model Number: FAX3900L
Responsible party: Ricoh Corporation
Address: 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006
Telephone number: 973-882-2000
This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1)This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 1 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
USA
❖ FCC Requirements
1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the cover of this equipment is a label that
contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number
(REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.
2. This equipment uses the following USOC jack: RJ11C
3. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone
line. Excessive REN's on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to
an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the REN's should not exceed five (5.0).
Contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
4. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you
in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not
practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be
advised your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
5. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company
will provide advance notice in order to make necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.
6. In the event of operation problems (document jam, copy jam, communication error indication),
refer to the solving problems section in this manual.
7. If you cannot correct the problem, please contact the RICOH CORP. CUSTOMER SUPPORT
DEPT. at 1-800-FASTFIX for repair and warranty information. If it is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request you to disconnect the equipment from the
network until the problem is resolved.
8. This equipment cannot be used telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party
Line Service is subject to state tariffs.
❖ WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO
EMERGENCY NUMBERS:
1. Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up.
2. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning hours or late evenings.
CANADA
The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment
meets telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements as prescribed in
the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The department does not
guarantee the equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions
may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier.
Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user disconnect the equipment.
User should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,
telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the
maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on
an interface may consist of any combination of device subject only to the requirement that the sum of
the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
b means POWER OFF.
Copyright © 2000 Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 1 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get
maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in
this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related
to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
Notes:
Some illustrations might be slightly different from your machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Laser Safety:
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical unit
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis
and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement or the optical subsystem is required.
Operator Safety:
This machine is considered a CDRH Class I laser device, safe for office/EDP use. The machine contains a 5-milliwat, 765 - 805 nanometer wavelength, GaAIAs laser diode. Direct (or indirect reflected)
eye contact with the laser beam may cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlock
mechanism have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
Warning:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Notes:
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
For good copy quality, Savin recommends that you use genuine toner.
Savin shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other
than genuine parts in your office product.
Important
Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable
for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating
the machine.
Power Source:
AC120V, 60Hz
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above.
Declaration of Conformity
Product Name: Facsimile
Model Number: 3740/9940
Responsible party: SAVIN CORPORATION
Address: 333 Ludlow Street, Stamford, CT 06904
Telephone number: 203-967-5000
This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1)This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 1 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
USA
❖ FCC Requirements
1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the cover of this equipment is a label
that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence
number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.
2. This equipment uses the following USOC jack: RJ11C
3. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone
line. Excessive REN's on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to
an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the REN's should not exceed five (5.0).
Contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
4. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you
in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not
practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be
advised your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
5. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company
will provide advance notice in order to make necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.
6. In the event of operation problems (document jam, copy jam, communication error indication),
refer to the solving problems section in this manual.
7. If you cannot correct the problem, please contact the SAVIN CORPORATION at 1-203-967-5000 for
repair and warranty information. If it is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request you to disconnect the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.
8. This equipment cannot be used telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party
Line Service is subject to state tariffs.
❖ WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO
EMERGENCY NUMBERS:
1. Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up.
2. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning hours or late evenings.
CANADA
The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment
meets telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements as prescribed in
the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The department does not
guarantee the equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions
may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier.
Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user disconnect the equipment.
User should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,
telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the
maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on
an interface may consist of any combination of device subject only to the requirement that the sum of
the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
b means POWER OFF.
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page i Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
How to Read this Manual
How to Read this Manual
Symbols
In this manual, the following symbols are used:
R WARNING:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in
death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety Information section.
R CAUTION:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in minor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injury
when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this
symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety
Information section.
* The statements above are notes for your safety.
Important
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be
damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.
Preparation
This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before operating.
Note
This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misoperation.
Limitation
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
{
}
Keys built into the machine's operation panel.
i
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page ii Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for this machine ......................................................................... 1
Basic Features (This Manual) ....................................................................... 1
Advanced Features ....................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction
Part Names................................................................................................. 3
Operation Panel ......................................................................................... 5
Symbols and Conventions Used in This Manual.................................... 8
2. Faxing
Transmission Modes................................................................................. 9
Suitable Document Types....................................................................... 10
Memory Transmission and Immediate Transmission.......................... 11
Memory Transmission .................................................................................
Canceling a Memory Transmission.............................................................
Immediate Transmission .............................................................................
Canceling an Immediate Transmission .......................................................
11
13
14
15
Very Fine Detail Faxing ........................................................................... 16
Resolution ................................................................................................... 16
Dialing....................................................................................................... 17
Entering Numbers Directly ..........................................................................
Entering Pauses..........................................................................................
Switching to Tone Signals ...........................................................................
Using Quick Dial..........................................................................................
Using Speed Dial ........................................................................................
Using Groups ..............................................................................................
17
18
18
18
19
20
Reception Modes..................................................................................... 22
How to Select the Reception Mode............................................................. 22
3. Setup
Initial Settings and Adjustments............................................................ 23
Initial Settings .............................................................................................. 24
Storing and Editing Fax Numbers.......................................................... 27
Storing Quick Dial Numbers ........................................................................
Editing Quick Dial Numbers ........................................................................
Deleting Quick Dial Numbers ......................................................................
Printing a Quick Dial Key Label...................................................................
Quick Dial Key Labels .................................................................................
Storing Speed Dial Numbers.......................................................................
Editing Speed Dial Numbers .......................................................................
Deleting Speed Dial Numbers.....................................................................
ii
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page iii Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Storing and Editing a Group of Fax Numbers ..................................... 37
Storing a Group of Fax Numbers ................................................................ 37
Editing a Group ........................................................................................... 40
Deleting a Group ......................................................................................... 43
Entering Characters ................................................................................ 46
Entering Symbols ........................................................................................ 46
Wild Card .................................................................................................... 46
4. Troubleshooting
Loading Paper in the Main Paper Cassette........................................... 49
Adjusting the Volume and Sounds the Machine Makes ...................... 51
If an Indicator Lights on the Operation Panel....................................... 53
Communication Problems ...................................................................... 54
Clearing a Document Jam ...................................................................... 55
Clearing a Copy, Fax, or Print Jam ........................................................ 56
Print Delivery Tray.......................................................................................
Inside the Machine ......................................................................................
Cassette Entrance.......................................................................................
Upper Rear Unit ..........................................................................................
56
56
57
58
Error Messages........................................................................................ 60
Solutions to Common Problems............................................................ 62
5. Appendix
Options..................................................................................................... 67
INDEX........................................................................................................ 68
iii
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page iv Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
iv
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 1 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Manuals for this machine
This machine is provided with a Basic Features manual and an Advanced Features manual. Please consult the manual that suits your needs.
Basic Features (This Manual)
The Basic Features manual explains the most frequently used fax functions and
operations.
Advanced Features
The Advanced Features manual describes more advanced functions, and also
explains settings for key operators.
❖ Chapter 1 Transmission Options
Explains transmission features such as scheduling transmission for a specific
time, setting personal codes, sending confidential documents; and storing
documents for pick-up by polling transmission.
❖ Chapter 2 Communication Information
Explains how to obtain information about stored documents, confidential
documents, and memory-locked documents; explains how to print the Journal.
❖ Chapter 3 Other Transmission Features
Discusses special dialing features, switching between G3 and G4 communication; and explains advanced transmission features such as broadcasting and
batch transmission.
❖ Chapter 4 Reception Features
Explains various reception features. You can find out about receiving documents in telephone mode, and printing two pages of received documents on
one page.
❖ Chapter 5 Copying
Read this chapter when you would like to know about copying operations
and functions.
❖ Chapter 6 Facsimile User Tools
Explains about programming frequently used functions for Quick Dial Key
and User Function Key.
❖ Chapter 7 Key Operator Settings
Explains a variety of settings that can be made by the fax machine's key operator to control and monitor usage of the machine. You can find out about setting up the phone line type, and how to store the Memory Locked ID and the
Confidential ID.
1
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 2 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
❖ Chapter 8 Troubleshooting
Discusses troubleshooting topics such as printing the help list, clearing jams,
and reading reports.
❖ Chapter 9 Maintaining Your Machine
Explains about loading paper in the optional bypass feeder, cleaning the rollers and scanner and so on.
❖ Chapter 10 Installation
Explains installation considerations, connection to a telephone line, and connecting the power.
❖ Chapter 11 Appendix
Lists specifications and the machine's advanced communication features.
2
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 3 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
1. Introduction
Part Names
Z CK H 0 1 0N . e p s
1. Optional Second Paper Cassette
3. Print Delivery Tray
The optional second paper cassette holds
more paper.
Copies, incoming faxes, and prints are
delivered here. The tray can be extended
for large paper sizes.
2. Main Paper Cassette
The main paper cassette holds copy paper.
3
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 4 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Introduction
1
4. Document Delivery Tray
11. Memory Card Cover
Scanned documents are stacked on the
document delivery tray.
Protects the machines optional memory
card.
5. Operation Panel
12. Front Cover Release Lever
Key panel for operating the machine.
Pull this lever to release the front cover.
6. Optional Handset
7. Document Guide
13. G4 Interface Unit
Match the document guide to the size of
your original documents.
8. Document Table
Document table holds up to 50 sheets
which are fed one at a time. Place your
original documents here.
9. Optional Bypass Feeder
Expands paper delivery capability to
handle A4, Legal and F4 sizes.
10. Auto Document Feeder (ADF)
Set multi-page documents here to have
them automatically scanned in one page
at a time.
4
Allows the fax machine to be connected
for G4 (ISDN) communication.
14. Front Cover
15. Rear Covers
16. Ventilation Port
Provides ventilation for internal parts of
the machine in order to prevent overheating.
17. Main Switch
The main switch turns your machine on
and off.
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 5 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Operation Panel
Operation Panel
1
Z CK S 0 1 0N . e p s
1. Add Toner indicator
Blinks when toner is about to run out and
lights continuously when toner has run
out.
2. Add Paper indicator
Lights when a cassette is empty or the paper cassette is not fully inserted.
Key
Function
F1
Prints a transmission management
report.
F2
Switches stamping off/on.
F3
Not programmed
F4
Not programmed
3. Receive File indicator
5. {Resolution} key
Lights when an incoming document is received into memory, and flashes when
confidential or memory-locked document is received. (See P.53 “If an Indicator
Lights on the Operation Panel”).
Selects the scanning resolution or the
halftone scanning mode. When the Detail
mode, Fine mode, or Halftone mode is selected, the corresponding indica tor
lights. Standard mode is selected when
no indicator is lit.
The Detail and Fine modes offer progressively higher scanning resolutions. The
Halftone mode is used for faxing photographs or drawings that contain halftones.
4. User Function keys
There are four User Function keys.
Four User Function keys are provided to
store frequently used functions and operations.
The following functions are registered by
default:
6. {User Tools} key
Press to access User Tool Settings and
customize various functions.
5
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 6 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Introduction
7. {Cancel} key
17. {Quick Dial} keys
Press when you want to cancel an operation or return to the previous display.
There are 30 Quick Dial keys. Use them to
store individual fax numbers (see P.27
“Storing and Editing Fax Numbers”), or to
enter characters (see P.46 “Entering Characters”). In addition, you can use the
Quick Dial keys to register functions such
as groups, programs, and auto documents.
You can select either a QWERTY key
board layout (as shown in the illustration) or an ABC layout. See Chapter 7,
"Key Layout" in the Advanced Features
manual.
When attaching the Quick Dial label,
make sure you remove the Quick Dial
cover (transparent).
8. Control panel display
1
Guides you through tasks and informs
you of the status of the machine. Messages appear here.
9. Scroll Keys
Use these keys to move the cursor in the
display, or to change the display.
10. {OK} key
Press to answer "Yes" to a question displayed on the display.
11. {Job Information} key
Press to search for information on a specific job.
12. {Trans. Option} key
Press to change the transmission option
settings. The indicator lights when option settings are changed.
13. {Reception Mode} key
Press to select the reception mode. When
the Manual Receive indicator is on, Manual Receive is selected.
14. {Help} key
Press the Help key when you want to
print a help list.
15. {G4} key
When the optional G4 unit is installed,
press to select G3 or G4 mode. When the
indicator is lit, G4 is selected.
16. {Memory} key
Press to select Immediate Transmission.
When the Memory indicator is not lit, Immediate Transmission is selected, and
when the indicator is lit, Memory Transmission is selected.
18. Status Indicators
These indicators keep you informed
about the current status of the unit.
• hAlarm
When the alarm indicator flashes,
check the display and read the message to identify a problem (such as paper jam or open cover).
• mCommunicating
Lights during fax transmission or reception.
19. {Pause/Redial} key
Inserts a pause when you are dialing or
storing a fax number, or redials the last
number dialed when pressed by itself.
(The redial feature does not work once
you have started dialing a new number.)
20. {On Hook Dial} key
Press to dial a phone call from the keypad
without lifting the external telephone or
taking the handset off the hook (if the machine is equipped with the optional telephone or handset).
21. {Clear} key
Press to delete the last character or digit
entered, or press 0 or 1 to move the cursor, and then press the {Clear} key to delete whatever is at the cursor.
6
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 7 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Operation Panel
22. {Speed Dial/Tel Directory} key
26. {Copy} key
Press when you want to use the Speed
Dial or Telephone Directory feature.
Press to copy the document currently
loaded in the feeder.
23. {p} (Tone) key
27. {Stop} key
If your telephone line uses pulse dialing,
press this button to switch temporarily to
tone dialing if you want to use telephone
services that utilize telephone touch
tones.
Stops transmissions or document scanning, reception, and long copy runs. The
machine finishes printing out the current
page, then stops.
24. Number keys
Press to start transmission, copy operation, or output of reports.
Use the number keys to dial fax numbers,
to enter the number of copies, and so
forth.
1
28. {Start} key
25. {Energy Saver/3Clear Modes} key
Energy Saver: Hold down for 2 seconds
to select or deselect energy saver mode.
When the machine is not used or no data
is received for a fixed period, the machine goes into energy saver mode automatically.
Clear Modes: Press to clear any selected
settings and return the machine to its previous condition.
7
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 8 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Introduction
Symbols and Conventions Used in This
Manual
1
❖ Documents:
A document is anything you put
on the document table of your machine, whether you are faxing it or
copying it.
❖ Prints:
A print is anything that comes out
of the machine, whether: a received fax or a copy you made.
❖ Procedures:
Procedures are described step by
step. Perform them in order. When
you see a display, it always shows
what comes after performing the
step it accompanies. Other illustrations accompanying steps help
you find the right key or handle, or
show you how to perform the step.
A This is a step in a procedure.
THIS CORRESPONDS TO
THE PANEL DISPLAY.
8
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 9 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
2. Faxing
Transmission Modes
There are two types of transmission.
❖ Memory Transmission
When a fax document is stored in
memory, then transmission starts
automatically.
It is convenient when you would
like to take documents back in a
hurry.
You can send the same message to
more than one destination in a single operation. This technique is referred to as Broadcasting.
Important
❒ If there is a power failure, the power switch is turned off, or the plug
is pulled out for more than 1 hour,
all documents stored in memory
are deleted. As soon as power is restored, the Power Failure Report is
printed to help you identify delete d d oc u men t s . S e e C h a pt e r 8
"Power Failure Report" in the Advanced Features manual.
G DR H 2 3 0E . e p s
Receiver
Transmitter (This machine)
Receiver
Receiver
GDRH230E
❖ Immediate Transmission
The machine dials immediately,
and transmits the fax while scanning.
It is convenient when you would
like to send a document immediately, and would like to check whether
you have successfully connected
with the other party's fax machine.
A fax document is not stored in
memory.
G DR H 2 4 0E . e p s
Transmitter
(This machine)
Receiver
GDRH240E
9
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 10 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Faxing
Suitable Document Types
Never load damaged originals in the
ADF (Auto Document Feeder) for
scanning. Always check the stack of
originals before loading.
• Always check the sheets and remove staples, pins, paper clips, or
any other type of fasteners.
2
• If the sheets are curled or folded,
flatten them.
• Separate all the sheets to ensure
that they will not jam or double
feed during scanning.
• If the sheets are heavily creased,
torn, punched with holes for binding, or patched together with tape,
make copies and then load the copies in the ADF.
• Before loading a stack of originals,
make sure that they are all the
same size. Do not mix sheets of different sizes.
• Before loading a stack of originals,
always fan them to remove static
cling.
• To protect fragile or legal documents from damage due to document jams, copy such documents
and then load the copies for scanning.
10
Important
❒ Never place the following types of
originals in the ADF:
• Sheets marked with crayon,
paint, charcoal, or soft pencil.
• Sheets pasted up with tape or
glue.
• Specially treated paper, including thermal paper, OHP sheets,
vinyl sheets or film, waxed paper, carbon paper, deed paper,
or paper treated with silicone
oil.
• Paper that is not perfectly dry. If
documents have ink or correction fluid that is still wet, all
them to dry thoroughly before
loading them into the ADF.
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 11 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Memory Transmission and Immediate Transmission
Memory Transmission and Immediate
Transmission
Memory Transmission
Memory Transmission is convenient
because:
• Fax documents can be scanned
much more quickly. Your scanned
document is stored in the memory,
a n d th en s en t a u to m a ti c a l l y ,
meaning you do not have to wait
for your document to send.
• While your fax document is being
sent, another user can operate the
machine (people do not have to
wait long to use the fax machine).
• You can send the same document
to more than one place with the
same operation.
• There are two kinds of Memory
Transmission: Parallel and Normal. Parallel Memory Transmission is the default. See Chapter 3,
"Parallel Memory Transmission" in
the Advanced Features manual.
Limitation
❒ If 0% is displayed, you cannot perform Memory Transmission. Send
your document using Immediate
Transmission.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
2
The display should look like this:
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Set Orig./ Enter No.
Note
❒ If the display is blank, press the
{Energy Saver} key to exit Energy Saving mode.
B Fan your document stack (maximum: 50 pages, 20 lb) to make
sure all pages are loose, and then
tap the edges to square the stack.
T ST S 0 1 0N . e p s
Limitation
❒ All pages set in the feeder must
be of the same size.
Note
❒ If your document jams while it is
being scanned, press the {Stop}
key, and then refer to P.55 “Clearing a Document Jam” for instructions on how to safely remove the
original.
11
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 12 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Faxing
C Insert
the document facedown
into the feeder until the machine
beeps. Then adjust the guides to
match the width of the document.
Z CK Y 0 1 0N . e p s
F Dial the number in one of the following ways.
Dest.1
OK to Add
0123456789_kkkkkkkkk
Number keys
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
Quick Dial
06
07
*
GFDIAL1N
GFDIAL0N
Speed Dial
Group
Example:
Note
❒ You can dial before you set the
document. Place the document
after you dial the number and
go to step G.
❒ Set your document straight in
the feeder. If you set more than
15 sheets, make sure the leading
ends of the documents are even.
Z ck y 8 0 0n . e p s
D The display will look like this:
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Enter Fax Number
E If the memory indicator is not lit,
press the {Memory} key.
12
Example: Speed Dial 10
Speed Dial
1
0
GFDIAL2N
*1
*2
Method *1 Quick
Dial key 08.
Method *2 {F4} key
and 1 number key.
In this example, Group Dial is programmed in Quick Dial 08.
In this example, the {F4} key is
programmed as the Group key,
and Group dial number 1 is programmed.
Note
❒ If you want to erase a digit of
the phone number, press the
{Clear} key.
❒ The number of pages that you
can store in memory depends
on the original document images and the scan settings. You can
store up to 160 standard pages
(ITU-T No.1 chart, Resolution:
Standard, halftone mode: off).
Reference
Programming Quick Dial: see
P.27 “Quick Dials”.
Programming Speed Dial: see
P.27 “Speed Dials”.
Programming Group Dial: see
P.37 “Storing and Editing a Group
of Fax Numbers”
Programming Group key: see
P.37 “Programming groups in the
{Group} key”
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 13 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Memory Transmission and Immediate Transmission
G Press the {OK} key to enter another fax number.
Dest.2
OK to Add
9876543210_kkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ Repeat steps F and G until all
destinations are entered.
❒ If you enter only one destination, press the {Start} key.
❒ The machine stores your message and dials the first number
(or, if you selected Send Later, it
will return to standby mode and
the fax document will be sent at
the time that you selected).
H Press the {Start} key.
The machine dials the other party's
number.
0123456789
File No.001
P.001
Note
❒ If the other party's line is busy,
your machine will redial.
❒ If the other party's fax machine answers, both machines connect and
your machine sends the document.
The other party's Own Name or Own
Fax Number appears on the upper line.
❒ If your line goes through a local
switchboard (a PBX) remember to
dial the exit code. Press the {Pause}
key immediately after the code. If
the number includes a country
code, press the {Pause} key after the
country code, and then dial the rest
of the number. Pauses are displayed as a dash (-) on the display.
The File number. is used for managing
documents in memory, and is required
when canceling transmission of a document or printing out its contents.
Canceling a Memory
Transmission
Before the {Start} key is pressed
A Press the {Stop} key or {Clear Modes}
2
key, or remove the document set in
the feeder.
While the document is being scanned in
A Press the {Stop} key.
All parts of the document that
have been scanned in are cleared.
Confirm and press the {OK} key.
During transmission
A Confirm the destination.
The destination name or fax number for the current transmission is
displayed.
B Press the {Stop} key.
Cancel Trans.? hi/OK
[Yes]
No
C Confirm and press the {OK} key.
Transmission is canceled.
13
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 14 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Faxing
While the document is awaiting
transmission
Immediate Transmission
Limitation
❒ Pages already being sent to the
destination cannot be canceled,
even if you cancel the transmission. The transmission may be sent
before you can cancel it, even if
you start canceling the transmission before it is fully sent.
2
A Press the {Job Information} key, and
confirm that "1. Cancel TX/RX" is
displayed.
Job Information
1.Cancel TX / RX
hi
B Press the {OK} key.
File No. To Cancel
No.[_kk] (Browsehi)
C Display the file you want to delete.
Enter the file number with the number keys, or search using 0 or 1.
If you are unable to find the file, it
has already been sent.
Cancel File?
NO.005
hi/OK
D If the document you want to delete is displayed, press the {OK}
key.
Cancel?
[Yes]
No
hi/OK
E Confirm and press the {OK} key.
14
Trans.Cancelled
File Deleted
Immediate Transmission is convenient when:
• You wish to send a document immediately as it is scanning.
• You wish to quickly check whether
you have successfully connected
with the other party's fax machine.
• Your machine's memory is getting
full.
The machine dials immediately after
you press the {Start} key. The message is scanned and transmitted page
by page w ithout being stored in
memory.
Note
❒ You can only specify one destination for Immediate Transmission.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
The display should look like this:
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Set Orig./ Enter No.
Note
❒ The Memory indicator should
be out. If the Memory indicator
is lit, press the {Memory} key.
B Place the document facedown in
the feeder.
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Enter Fax Number
Note
❒ Do not load more than 50 pages
into the feeder at one time.
❒ You can set the document at any
point up until you press the
{Start} key.
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 15 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Memory Transmission and Immediate Transmission
C Dial the other party's number.
Dest.
Press Start
0123456789_kkkkkkkkk
If you want to erase a digit of the
number, press the {Clear} key and
enter the correct number.
D Press the {Start} key.
0123456789
Dialing...
The machine dials and connects to
the other party's machine. The
number that you dialed and the
other party's Own Name or Own
Fax Number is displayed.
After the transmission, the machine returns to standby mode.
Canceling an Immediate
Transmission
Before the {Start} key is pressed
A Press the {Stop} key or {Clear Modes}
2
key.
If a document is set in the feeder,
remove it.
While dialing or during transmission
A Press the {Stop} key.
However, the part that has already
been scanned is sent to the other
party. After you have canceled the
transmission, remove the document from the feeder.
Note
❒ If you install the optional handset or an external telephone,
you can send the document
manually. Simply pick up the
handset and dial.
15
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 16 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Faxing
Very Fine Detail Faxing
To ensure that text, diagrams and images stand out clearly in your document, the machine automatically
detects the image density and makes
adjustments.
2
However, if you need to send a document which requires optimum clarity , s el ect th e re so l u tio n s etti n g
appropriate to your needs.
You can select different settings for
each page of your document. Simply
change the settings for page 2 while
page 1 is being scanned.
Limitation
❒ High resolution images and text
are scanned into the machine. If
the other party's machine does not
support the resolution at which
you are sending, this machine automatically switches to a resolution supported by the other party's
machine. This machine can send
documents in Standard, Detail,
and Fine resolution. It can receive
documents in Standard and Detail
resolution.
Resolution
The {Resolution} key gives you control over document quality. The indicators above the button show the
current setting. Choose a setting that
matches your document.
❖ Standard:
Standard quality. Use for most
printed or typewritten documents.
This is selected when the other resolution indicators are not lit.
16
❖ Detail :
High quality. Use for documents
with small print or fine details. Detail resolution is twice the clarity of
Standard resolution.
❖ Fine :
Very high quality. Use this for high
quality reproduction. Fine resolution is four times the clarity of
Standard resolution.
❖ Halftone:
Use this for optimum quality if
your document contains photographs or diagrams with complex
shading patterns or gray tones. If
you choose this setting, resolution
will automatically be Detail.
Note
❒ You can confirm the resolution for
previously sent documents in the
Journal.
❒ Faxing at a higher resolution requires more time. Frequent use of
high resolution could cause an increase in your phone bill, especially for long distance transmissions.
❒ There are two methods for sending
documents that contain photographic images - Image priority
and Speed priority. If you select
Speed priority, you can send your
image faster, but the quality of the
image may be inferior to when
sending with Image priority. See
C h ap ter 7 , " Us er P ar am eter s"
(switch 10, bit 7) in the Advanced
Features manual.
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 17 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Dialing
Dialing
The number keys, Quick Dial, Speed
Dial, and Group dial can all be used
for dialing.
Entering Numbers Directly
Enter numbers directly using the
number keys (1234567890*#) on the
right side of the operation panel.
Press the {Pause} key or {p} (Tone)
key to enter a pause or tone.
Note
❒ Maximum length of a fax number:
254 digits.
❒ Maximum number of documents
that can be stored for Memory
Transmission: 100
❒ Maximum number of destinations
per Memory Transmission: 140
❒ The combined total number of destinations that can be stored is 300.
However, only 197 destinations
can be specified if all of the destinations specified are different.
C Enter the number with the number keys.
Note
❒ The number you entered appears in the display.
❒ If you want to enter another
destination, press the {OK} key
and repeat step C above.
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
2
❒ You can enter a pause, tone, or
dial options.
Reference
Pause: see P.18 “Entering Pauses”.
Tone: see Chapter 3, "Tone Signals" in the Advanced Features
manual.
D Press the {Start} key.
0123456789
File No.001
P.001
❒ The maximum destinations you
can specify with the number keys
is 67. However, this limitation is
subject to memory capacity.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Carefully
place your document
into the document table and select any settings you require.
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Enter Fax Number
17
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 18 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Faxing
-Limitations when dialing with
the number keys:
• Destinations entered with the number keys are stored in the machine's
internal memory (separate to document storage memory) until they
have finished sending. You can store
up to 67 destinations for Memory
Transmission (including Polling Reception), Transfer Stations and End
Receivers when making Transfer
Requests, and Groups. (Quick Dials
and Speed Dials are not included.)
Example: If 60 destinations have
already been registered with the
number keys for Groups, you can
register another 7 destinations for
Memory Transmission with the
number keys.
2
• The remaining memory for storing
documents appears in the display.
Because destinations are stored in
a different memory, the remaining
memory in the display does not
change when you store new destinations.
Entering Pauses
When dialing an outside line through a
PBX, you must enter a number, such as
"0", at the beginning of the number, and
it may take a moment after you have dialed the number before a connection is
made to an outside line. If this occurs,
enter a pause after the "0". If you enter a
pause, a 2-second pause is inserted before the outside number is dialed.
Note
❒ A pause is shown as a "-" character
on the display.
18
❒ You can enter a pause in numbers
stored in Quick Dials and Speed
Dials.
Limitation
❒ You cannot enter a pause at the beginning of a fax number
Switching to Tone Signals
This feature allows a machine connected to a pulse dialing line to send
tone signals (for example if you want
to use a special service on a tone dialing line). For details on basic services,
please contact your service representative. This feature is not necessary
with a Tone dialing line. See Chapter
3, "Tone Signals" in the Advanced
Features manual.
Using Quick Dial
You can specify destinations simply
be pressing the Quick Dial.
You must program the destination's
fax number in a Quick Dial beforehand.
Additionally, you can store a name
for the destination in Quick Dials.
Note
❒ To store, edit, or delete a Quick Dial, see P.27 “Storing and Editing Fax
Numbers”.
❒ To check the contents of all Quick
Dials, print the Quick Dial list. See
Chapter 6, "Lists You Can Print
Out Yourself" in the Advanced
Features manual.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Carefully
place your fax docum ent into the auto document
feeder and select any settings you
require.
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Enter Fax Number
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 19 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Dialing
C Press the Quick Dial that is programmed with the destination.
Dest.1
OK to Add
a01 ABC COMPANY
Note
❒ When a name is stored for the
destination, the name is displayed, and when no name is
stored, the fax number is displayed.
❒ If you want to enter another
destination, press the {OK} key
and repeat step C above or enter
a number manually.
❒ When dialing another destination using a Quick Dial, you do
not need to press the {OK} key.
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Stop} key, and the display will
return to that in step B.
D Press the {Start} key.
ABC COMPANY
File No.001
P.001
Using Speed Dial
You can specify destinations simply
be pressing the {Speed Dial} key and a
Speed Dial code (00 to 99).
You must store the destination's fax
number in a Speed Dial beforehand.
Additionally, you can store a name
for the destination in Speed Dials.
Note
❒ To store, edit, or delete Speed Dial
entries, see P.27 “Storing and Editing Fax Numbers”.
❒ To check the contents of all Speed
Dials, print the Speed Dial list. See
Chapter 6, "Lists You Can Print
Out Yourself" in the Advanced
Features manual.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Carefully
place your fax docum ent into the auto document
feeder and select any settings you
require.
2
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Enter Fax Number
C Press the {Speed Dial} key.
Speed Dial:Enter No.
[b_k]
D Using the number keys, enter the
Speed Dial number (00 to 99) that
is programmed with the destination.
Dest.1
OK to Add
b00 DEF COMPANY
Note
❒ When a name is stored for the
destination, the name is displayed, and when no name is
stored, the fax number is displayed.
❒ If you want to enter another
destination, press the {OK} key
and repeat steps C and D above.
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Stop} key, and the display will
return to that in step B.
E Press the {Start} key.
DEF COMPANY
File No.001
P.001
19
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 20 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Faxing
Using Groups
You can store multiple destinations as
a single Group and simply specify a
particular Group.
You must store the destinations' fax
number in a Group beforehand.
Additionally, you can store destination names and a Group name in
Groups.
2
Limitation
❒ Quick Dials programmed with
Groups cannot be used for any other function.
❒ You cannot use Immediate Transmission to send Groups. You can
only use Memory Transmission.
Note
❒ To store, edit, or delete Groups, see
P.37 “Storing and Editing a Group of
Fax Numbers”.
❒ To check the contents of all
Groups, print the Group Dial list.
See Chapter 6, "Lists You Can Print
Out Yourself" in the Advanced
Features manual. The method for
specifying Groups differs according to the way they were programmed.
• When programmed in a Quick
Dial: Press the Quick Dial.
• When not programmed in a
Quick Dial: First, Program the
Group function in a User Function key. When you want to
specify a destination, press the
Group key, and then press the
Group number. (See Chapter 6,
"User Function Keys" in the Advanced Features manual.)
20
❒ You can program the Group function in User Function keys {F1} to
{F4}. (See Chapter 6, "User Function Keys" in the Advanced Features manual.)
When specifying a Group with a Quick
Dial
Make sure that the Memory indicator
is lit, and if it is not lit, press the {Memory} key to light it.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Carefully
place your fax docum ent into the auto document
feeder and select any settings you
require.
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Enter Fax Number
C Press the Quick Dial that is programmed with the destination.
Dest.1
OK to Add
a01:Gp.D1 GROUP 1
Note
❒ If you want to specify another
Group, press the {OK} key, and
then repeat step C above.
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key, and the display will
return to that in step B.
D Press the {Start} key.
Storing...Memory 99%
File No.001
P.001
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 21 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Dialing
When specifying a Group with the Group
key
Confirm that the Memory indicator is
not lit, and if it is not lit, press the
{Memory} key to light it.
E Press the {Start} key.
Storing...Memory 99%
File No.001
P.001
Note
❒ Before using the {Group} key, you
must program the Group function
in a User Function key. (See Chapter 6, "User Function Keys" in the
Advanced Features manual.)
2
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Carefully
place your fax document into the auto do cum ent
feeder and select any settings you
require.
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Enter Fax Number
C Press the User Function key pro-
grammed with the Group function.
Group Dial:Enter No.
[Gp.D_]
D Enter the Group number (1 to 7)
with the number keys.
Dest.1
OK to Add
G1 GROUP 1
Note
❒ If you want to specify another
Group, press the {OK} key, and
then repeat step C above.
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key, and the display will
return to that in step B.
21
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 22 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Faxing
Reception Modes
The machine can treat incoming fax
documents and telephone calls in two
ways.
❖ Manual Receive
2
Use this mode if your line is shared
by a fax machine and a telephone
but you wish to answer all calls
yourself and decide whether they
are fax documents or telephone
calls. You must manually hit the
{Start} key to receive a fax.
The machine will ring continuously until you answer the call, so you
have to be near the machine at all
times. The Manual Receive indicator is lit when the machine is in this
mode.
❖ Auto Receive
Use this mode if you have a dedicated fax line. The machine assumes all calls are fax documents.
It will ring once to alert you of an
incoming call, and then starts receiving.
22
How to Select the Reception
Mode
The Manual Receive indicator is lit
when the machine is in Manual Receive mode. To switch to a different
mode, follow the steps below.
A Press the {Reception Mode} key.
Reception Mode hi/OK
[Auto Sense]
B Press 0 or 1 to select the reception mode.
Reception Mode hi/OK
Manual Receive
C Press the {OK} key.
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Set Orig./ Enter No.
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 23 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
3. Setup
Initial Settings and Adjustments
If you have not already the initial procedure (or if you need to change the
initial settings), you must enter a few
settings and make a few adjustments
before connecting your machine to
the telephone line.
❖ Own Name
This should be your name or company name, in 20 characters or less.
During communication, if the other party's fax machine supports
Own Name, this replaces the Own
Fax Number that follows. This
name will appear on the display of
the other party's Fax machine, and
the name registered on that machine will appear on yours.
Limitation
❒ The registered name will not be
used unless the other party has
a same machine of the same
make that supports the Own
Name feature.
❖ Fax Header
This is ordinarily the telephone
number of the line your machine is
connected to. Your fax header can
be up to 32 characters long, and is
printed on the header of every
pa g e y ou s en d . In th e Un ited
States, a fax header containing the
telephone number is required by
law.
❖ Own Fax Number (Required by international law)
This is your fax machine's phone
number, which must include country and area codes, in 20 characters
or less. During any communication, your Own Fax Number appears on their display. (Conversely
their Own Fax Number appears on
your display.)
Important
❒ When sending a fax, your Own Fax
Number is required by international law. You cannot legally connect a fax machine to the telephone
system if the Own Fax Number is
not programmed. Further, the Fax
Header and the date and time of
transmission must be included in
the header of all pages faxed to,
from, or within the United States.
Note
❒ You can confirm the Own Name,
Fax Header, and Own Fax Number
settings in the User Parameters
List.
23
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 24 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Setup
E Press the {OK} key.
Initial Settings
During the course of this procedure
you will have to enter letters and other characters.
Use the number keys to enter numbers. Use Quick Dial keys for entering
letters, the {OK} key to accept a character, the {Space} or {Symbol} key
(depending on your fax machine's
configuration) to enter spaces, and
the {Symbol} key to enter symbols
(P.46 “Entering Characters”).
3
Note
❒ Make sure the machine is in standby mode before making the following settings.
Storing and Editing Programmed Data
The following procedure describes
how to make initial settings.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
B Press 0 or 1 to display "3. Setup".
User Tools Main Menu
3.Setup
hi
C Press the {OK} key.
Setup:
1.Monitor Volume
Confirm that "1. Own Name" is
displayed.
Fax Information:
1.Own Name
F Press the {OK} key.
Own Name[ABC]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
G Enter your Own Name.
Own Name[ABC]
OK
MAIN OFFICE_kkkkkkkk
Note
❒ If you want to erase a character
of the name, press the {Clear}
key.
Reference
P.46 “Entering Characters”
H Press the {OK} key.
Your Own Name is programmed.
Fax Information:
1.Own Name
D Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Fax In-
hi
I Press 0 or 1 to display "2. Fax
Header".
Fax Information:
2.Fax Header
hi
hi
hi
J Press the {OK} key.
The programmed Own Name is
displayed.
formation".
Setup:
4.Fax Information hi
24
Header[ABC]
OK
MAIN OFFICEkkkkkkkkk
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 25 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Initial Settings and Adjustments
K Enter your Fax Header.
P Press the {OK} key.
If your Fax Header is the same as
your Own Name, go to step L.
Header[ABC]
OK
MAIN OFFICEkkkkkkkkk
L Press the {OK} key.
hi
key to return to standby display.
3
Deleting Programmed Data
hi
M Press 0 or 1 to display "3. Own
Fax Number".
Fax Information:
3.Own Fax Number
Fax Information:
3.Own Fax Number
Q Press the {User Tools}
Your Fax Header is programmed.
Fax Information:
2.Fax Header
Your Own Fax Number is programmed.
hi
N Press the {OK} key.
The following procedure describes
how to delete programmed data.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
B Press 0 or 1 to display "3. Setup".
Fax Number
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
O Enter your Own Fax Number.
Fax Number
OK
0123456789_kkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ The format of the number is
normally as follows: International Dial Prefix, Your Country
Code, Your Area Code (do not
insert a pause after your Area
Code), followed by your telephone number. Check the International Dialing Prefix and the
Country Code with your local
telecommunications operator.
Characters you can enter include
numerals 0-9, plus signs (+), and
spaces.
User Tools Main Menu
3.Setup
hi
C Press the {OK} key.
Setup:
1.Monitor Volume
hi
D Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Fax Information".
Setup:
4.Fax Information hi
E Press the {OK} key.
Fax Information:
1.Own Name
hi
25
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 26 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Setup
F Press 0 or 1 to display the item
you want to delete.
Fax Information:
3.Own Fax Number
hi
G Press the {OK} key.
Fax Number
OK
0123456789kkkkkkkkkk
3
H Press the {Clear} key.
Fax Number
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
I Press the {OK} key.
The programmed information is
deleted.
Fax Information:
3.Own Fax Number
J Press
hi
the {User Tools} key to return to standby mode.
26
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 27 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Storing and Editing Fax Numbers
Storing and Editing Fax Numbers
You can store numbers that you often
use in the ma chine's memory . A
stored number will remain in memory even if the power is cut.
You can store numbers in two ways.
❖ Quick Dials
Each fax number is assigned to its
own key. To dial that number, just
press the key. You can store up to
30 numbers in this way.
❖ Speed Dials
The number is given a two-digit
code. To dial the number, press the
{Speed Dial} key and enter the
code. There are 100 Speed Dial
codes available, numbered 00 to
99.
Storing Quick Dial Numbers
The following procedure describes
how to store fax numbers in Quick
Dial keys.
Limitation
❒ You cannot store fax numbers in
Quick Dials used for groups and
programs.
Note
❒ The combined total number of fax
numbers that can be stored is 30.
❒ Maximum number of digits per fax
number: 254
❒ Maximum number of characters
per name: 20
❒ You can confirm fax numbers stored
in Quick Dials on the Quick Dial
List (See Chapter 6, "Printing Dial
Lists" in the Advanced Features
manual).
❒ You can print a Quick Dial label
show in g the c ontents o f ea ch
Quick Dial (See Chapter 6, "Printing a Quick Dial Label" in the Advanced Features manual).
❒ You can use the Quick Dial keys to
store individual fax numbers, or to
register functions such as groups,
programs, and auto documents.
3
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
B Press the {OK} key.
Program / Delete:
1.Prog. Quick Dialhi
Confirm that "1. Prog. Quick Dial"
is displayed.
C Press the {OK} key.
Press Key to Program
(Browsehi)
D Display the number of the Quick
Dial key you want to store.
Press a Quick Dial key, or search
using 0 or 1.
a01
Fax No.
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ If a Quick Dial has already been
stored, the contents are displayed.
Press 0 or 1 to select a Quick
Dial that is not programmed, then
press the {OK} key.
27
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 28 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Setup
E Enter
the fax number with the
number keys.
a01
Press OK
9876543210_kkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ If you want to erase a digit of
the number, press the {Clear}
key.
❒ If you press the {Pause/Redial}
key, the last 10 fax numbers dialed are displayed. Press 0 or
1 to select the fax number you
want to specify, and then press
the {OK} key.
3
❒ Make sure a Dial Option is
stored in one of the User Function keys, and then enter the
other party's fax number and
press the User Function key that
contains the Dial Option. You
can specify SUB or SEP, SID,
PWD, and sub-addresses (See
Chapter 3, "Dial Options" in the
Advanced Features manual).
F Press the {OK} key.
The fax number is programmed.
a01[ABC]
Name
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
G Enter the name.
a01[ABC]
OK
ABC COMPANY_kkkkkkkk
28
H Press the {OK} key.
The name is programmed.
Note
❒ When the optional G4 unit is installed, "G3/G4: Select" is displayed. Press 0 or 1 to select
G3 or G4, and then press the
{OK} key.
Label Insert:
Yes
[No]
hi/OK
I Press 0 or 1 to select either "Yes"
or "No".
Note
❒ Label insertion allows the receiver's nam e that is prog ra mm ed in Q u ic k D i a l or
Speed Dial to be printed on the
fax when it is received at the
other end. See Chapter 3, "Label
Insertion" in the Advanced Features manual.
Label Insert:
[Yes]
No
hi/OK
J Press the {OK} key.
Program / Delete:
1.Prog. Quick Dialhi
If you want to store another Quick
Dial, go to step C.
K Press the {User Tools}
key to return to the standby mode.
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 29 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Storing and Editing Fax Numbers
Editing Quick Dial Numbers
The following procedure describes
how to edit fax numbers stored in
Quick Dial keys.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
B Press the {OK} key.
Program / Delete:
1.Prog. Quick Dialhi
Confirm that "1. Prog. Quick Dial"
is displayed.
C Press the {OK} key.
Press Key to Program
(Browsehi)
D Display the Quick Dial key you
want to edit.
Press a Quick Dial key or search
using 0 or 1.
Program?
hi/OK
a01 ABC COMPANY
E Press the {OK} key.
a01
Press OK
9876543210kkkkkkkkkk
F Press the {Clear} key and enter the
Note
❒ The previously entered fax
number flashes. Pressing the
{Clear} key deletes all digits of
the number. If you want to delete a single digit, press 0 or 1
to move the cursor to the digit to
b e d e l e te d, t h e n p r e s s t h e
{Clear} key.
❒ If you do not want to change the
number, go to step G.
3
❒ After programming a user function key with a Dial Option and
registering a fax number, you
can press that key and program
the SUB, SEP, SID, PWD, or subaddress.
G Press the {OK} key.
The fax number is changed.
a01[ABC]
/OK
ABC COMPANYkkkkkkkkk
H Enter the name.
a01[ABC]
OK
DEF COMPANY_kkkkkkkk
Note
❒ If you do not want to change the
name, go to step I.
❒ The previously entered name
flashes. Pressing the {Clear} key
deletes all characters of the
name. If you want to delete a
single character, press 0 or 1
to move the cursor to the character to be deleted, then press
the {Clear} key.
new number.
a01
Press OK
5432109876_kkkkkkkkk
29
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 30 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Setup
I Press the {OK} key.
Deleting Quick Dial Numbers
The name is changed.
Label Insert:
[Yes]
No
hi/OK
Note
❒ When the optional G4 unit is installed, "G3/G4: Select" is displayed. Press 0 or 1 to select
G3 or G4, then press the {OK}
key.
3
J Press 0
or 1 to select "Yes" or
"No".
Note
❒ Label insertion allows the receiv er's nam e that is pro g r a m m ed i n Q u i c k Di a l o r
Speed Dial to be printed on the
fax when it is received at the
other end. See Chapter 3, "Label
Insertion" in the Advanced Features manual.
Label Insert:
Yes
[No]
hi/OK
K Press the {OK} key.
Program / Delete:
1.Prog. Quick Dialhi
If you want to edit another Quick
Dial, go to step C.
L Press
the {User Tools} key to return to standby mode.
30
The following procedure describes
how to delete fax numbers stored in
Quick Dial keys.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "2. Del.
Quick Dial".
Program / Delete:
2.Del. Quick Dial hi
D Press the {OK} key.
Press Key to Delete
(Browsehi)
E Display the Quick Dial key that
you want to delete.
Press a Quick Dial key or search by
pressing 0 or 1.
Delete?
hi/OK
a01 ABC COMPANY
The number of the Quick Dial key
and the fax number or name are
displayed.
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 31 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Storing and Editing Fax Numbers
F Press the {OK} key.
The stored data (fax number and
name) is deleted.
Program / Delete:
2.Del. Quick Dial hi
If you wan t to delete another
Quick Dial key, go to step D.
G Press
the {User Tools} key to return to standby mode.
Printing a Quick Dial Key Label
To print a template that can be used to
make labels for Quick Dial keys, perform the following procedure.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
B Press 0 or 1 to display "2. Reports / Lists".
3
User Tools Main Menu
2.Reports / Lists hi
C Press the {OK} key.
D Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Quick
Dial Label".
Reports / Lists
4.Quick Dial Labelhi
E Press the {OK} key.
F Press the {Start} key.
The Quick Dial label is printed.
Once the label is printed, the machine returns to the standby mode.
31
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 32 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Setup
Quick Dial Key Labels
The Quick Dial key label will have the destination, Group, Program, or Auto
Document name programmed in Quick Dials.
Note
❒ A protective transparent film is attached to the operation panel. Peel off the
film and place the Quick Dial key labels onto the operation panel.
G FW T L B 0N . e p s
P. 1
***
3
QUICK KEY LABEL ( FEB. 1. 2001 9:13AM )
Time printed
***
FAX HEADER: ABC COMPANY
01:
abc com
pany
02:
03:
BCD. com cde com
pany
pany
04:
05:
06:
07:
08:
09:
10:
Group 1
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
MAP
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:
Printout of Quick Dial numbers assigned to keys,
including programmed names (up to 20 characters)
01:
02:
03:
04:
05:
06:
07:
08:
09:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:
Labels without printed names. (Write in names yourself.)
abc comp BCD. comp cde comp
any
any
any
Group 1
MAP
PLEASE CUT THE SHEET INTO THREE LABELS ALONG THE DOTTED LINE,
AND PUT LABELS ON THE QUICK DIAL PANEL.
Printout of Quick Dial numbers assigned to keys, including programmed names (up to 16 characters)
GFWTLB0N
32
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 33 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Storing and Editing Fax Numbers
Storing Speed Dial Numbers
If you store numbers in Speed Dials,
you can specify the fax number simply by pressing the {Speed Dial} key,
and entering a two-digit Speed Dial
number.
The following procedure describes
how to store fax numbers in Speed
Dials.
Note
❒ The combined total number of
Speed Dial numbers that can be
stored is 100.
❒ You can specify numbers from 00
to 99.
❒ The maximum number of digits
per fax number is 254.
❒ The maximum number of characters per name is 20.
❒ You can confirm the contents of
Speed Dial numbers in the Speed
Dial list. (See Chapter 6, "Printing
Dial Lists" in the Advanced Features manual.)
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "3. Prog.
Speed Dial".
Program / Delete:
3.Prog. Speed Dialhi
E Display the number of the Speed
Dial you want to store (00 to 99).
Enter the Speed Dial number with
the number keys, or search using
0 or 1.
b01
Fax No.
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ If you want to delete a digit of
the number, press the {Clear}
key and enter the correct number.
3
❒ If a Speed Dial number has already been stored, the contents
are displayed. Press 0 or 1 to
select an unprogrammed number, then press the {OK} key.
F Enter
the fax number with the
number keys.
b00
Press OK
5432109876_kkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ If you want to delete a digit of the
number, press the {Clear} key.
G Press the {OK} key.
The fax number is programmed.
b00[ABC]
Name
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
H Enter the name.
b00[ABC]
OK
DEF COMPANY_kkkkkkkk
D Press the {OK} key.
Enter No.to Program
[b_k]
(Browsehi)
33
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 34 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Setup
I Press the {OK} key.
The name is programmed.
Label Insert:
Yes
[No]
hi/OK
Note
❒ When the optional G4 unit is installed, "G3/G4: Select" is displayed. Press 0 or 1 to select
G3 or G4, and then press the
{OK} key.
3
J Press 0
or 1 to select "Yes" or
"No".
Note
❒ Label insertion allows the receiv er's nam e that is pro g r a m m ed i n Q u i c k Di a l o r
Speed Dial to be printed on the
fax when it is received at the
other end. See Chapter 3, "Label
Insertion" in the Advanced Features manual.
Label Insert:
[Yes]
No
hi/OK
K Press the {OK} key.
Program / Delete:
3.Prog. Speed Dialhi
If you want to store another Speed
Dial number, go to step D.
L Press
the {User Tools} key to return to standby mode.
Editing Speed Dial Numbers
The following procedure describes
how to edit programmed Speed Dial
numbers.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "3. Prog.
Speed Dial".
Program / Delete:
3.Prog. Speed Dialhi
D Press the {OK} key.
Enter No.to Program
[b_k]
(Browsehi)
E Display the Speed Dial
number
you want to edit (00 to 99).
Enter the Speed Dial number with
the number keys or search using 0
or 1.
Program?
hi/OK
b00 DEF COMPANY
Note
❒ If you want to delete a digit of
the number, press the {Clear}
key and enter the correct number.
❒ The Speed Dial number and the
fax number or name are displayed.
34
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 35 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Storing and Editing Fax Numbers
F Press the {OK} key.
b00
Press OK
5432109876kkkkkkkkkk
G Press the {Clear} key and enter the
fax number.
b00
Press OK
9876543210_kkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ If you do not want to change the
number, press the {OK} key and
go to step I.
❒ If you want to erase a digit of
the number, press the {Clear}
key.
H Press the {OK} key.
The fax number is changed.
b00[ABC]
/OK
DEF COMPANYkkkkkkkkk
I Enter the name.
b00[ABC]
OK
ABC COMPANY_kkkkkkkk
Note
❒ The previously entered name
flashes. Pressing the {Clear} key
deletes all characters of th e
name. If you want to delete a
single character, press 0 or 1
to move the cursor to the character to be deleted, then press
the {Clear} key.
J Press the {OK} key.
The name is changed.
Note
❒ When the optional G4 unit is installed, "G3/G4: Select" is displayed. Press 0 or 1 to select
G3 or G4, and then press the
{OK} key.
Label Insert:
[Yes]
No
3
hi/OK
K Press 0 or 1 keys to select "Yes"
or "No".
Note
❒ Label insertion allows the receiver's nam e that is prog ra mm ed in Q u ic k D i a l or
Speed Dial to be printed on the
fax when it is received at the
other end. See Chapter 3, "Label
Insertion" in the Advanced Features manual.
Label Insert:
Yes
[No]
hi/OK
L Press the {OK} key.
Program / Delete:
3.Prog. Speed Dialhi
If you want to edit another name,
go to step D.
M Press the {User Tools}
key to re-
turn to standby mode.
35
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 36 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Setup
Deleting Speed Dial Numbers
The following procedure describes
how to delete fax numbers in Speed
Dials.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
3
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Del.
Speed Dial".
Program / Delete:
4.Del. Speed Dial hi
D Press the {OK} key.
Enter No. to Delete
[b_k]
(Browsehi)
E Display the Speed Dial number
you want to delete (00 to 99).
Enter the Speed Dial number with
the number keys or search using 0
or 1.
Delete?
hi/OK
b00 DEF COMPANY
The Speed Dial number and the fax
number or name are displayed.
Note
❒ If you want to delete a digit of
the number, press the {Clear}
key and enter the correct number.
36
F Press the {OK} key.
The programmed data (fax number and name) is deleted.
Program / Delete:
4.Del. Speed Dial hi
If y ou wa nt to del ete an other
name, go to step D.
G Press the {User Tools}
turn to standby mode.
key to re-
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 37 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Storing and Editing a Group of Fax Numbers
Storing and Editing a Group of Fax
Numbers
If you regularly broadcast documents
to the same set of destinations, you
can combine these numbers into a
group. Then just select the group and
each number will be dialed in sequence automatically.
There are two ways of programming
Groups:
❖ Programming groups in Quick Dial
keys
If you program a group in a Quick
Dial key , you can specify that
group by pressing a Quick Dial
key. However, if you use Quick
Dial keys to program groups, you
will b e a ble to program fewer
Quick Dial keys .
Limitation
❒ You cannot store another function (Quick Dials, Auto Documents, or Programs) in a Quick
Dial key already u sed for a
group. Also, you cannot store
groups in a Quick Dial key already used for another function.
❖ Programming groups in the {Group}
key
To program a group in the {Group}
k ey, yo u mu s t fir s ta s si g n th e
Group feature to a Function key.
To send a fax, press the {Group}
key, an d then en ter the group
number (1 to 7).
Storing a Group of Fax
Numbers
You can register the following items
in a Group:
• Destination fax numbers
• Group name (up to 20 characters)
3
You can enter destination numbers by
Quick Dial keys, Speed Dials, or the
number keys.
Note
❒ You can register up to 7 Groups
with 140 numbers each.
❒ The combined maximum number
of destinations you can register in
all Groups is 129. This 129 can be
composed of up to 30 Quick Dial
numbers, 50 Speed Dial numbers
and 49 numbers entered directly
with the number keys.
❒ The number of destinations that
can be registered with the number
keys depends on how the machine
is used. In theory you can register
up to a combined maximum of 76
destinations with the number keys
for all groups. However, if you
register 76 items with the number
keys, Memory Transmission becomes unavailable, only register
up to 75 items with the number
keys.
37
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 38 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Setup
❒ If you register the same destination
more than once with a Speed Dial
or Quick Dial in Groups, it is only
counted as one item. However, if
you register two or more identical
destinations with the ten keys they
will be counted as two or more
items.
❒ If all destinations are different, you
may not be able to store 140 destinations in a Group.
❒ It is recommended that you print
the Group Dial list and keep it
when you register or change destinations. See Chapter 6, "Printing
Dial Lists" in the Advanced Features manual.
3
Group2 Group1
Registered items
Quick Dial: [01], [02], [03]
Speed Dial: [01], [02], [03]
Ten Key: 0312345678
Quick Dial: [04], [05]
Speed Dial: [04], [05], [06]
Ten Key: 0312345678, 0451119999
10 numbers
Quick Dial: [01], [05]
Speed Dial: [01], [02], [08]
Ten Key: 0312345678, 0451119999
Total Numbers
Quick Dial: [01], [03], [05]
Speed Dial: [01], [02], [10]
Ten Key: 0312345678
14 numbers
Group 2 Group 1
Registered items
Total Numbers
❒ How to count numbers.
❒ This section describes how to program a Group.
38
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "5. Prog.
Group Dial".
Program / Delete:
5.Prog. Group Dialhi
D Press the {OK} key.
Enter No./ Press Key
[Gp.D_]
(Browsehi)
E Display the number of the group
you want to store (1 to 7).
Enter the group number with the
number keys, or search using 0 or
1.
Gp.D1:#1
Fax No.
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ If a group has already been
stored, the contents are displayed. Press 0 or 1 to select a
group number that is not programmed, then press the {OK}
key.
❒ If a group is programmed, but
no name is specified, the group
number only is displayed on the
lower line of the display.
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 39 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Storing and Editing a Group of Fax Numbers
F Specify the destination using one
of the following three methods:
K Enter the group name.
Enter the fax number with the
number keys.
If you do not want to program a
group name, press the {OK} key
and go to step M.
Gp.D1:#1
Press OK
0123456789_kkkkkkkkk
Gp.D1[ABC]
Name
Group A_kkkkkkkkkkkk
Press a Quick Dial key.
Gp.D1:#1
Press OK
a01 ABC COMPANY
Press the {Speed Dial} key and enter a Speed Dial number.
Gp.D1:#1
Press OK
b00 DEF COMPANY
Note
❒ If you specify a Quick Dial or
S peed Di al tha t is n ot pr o grammed, " This key is Not
Programmed" is displayed. Respecify the destination.
G Press the {OK} key.
The destination is programmed.
H Press the 0 or 1 to select "Add"
or "Exit".
Program?
[Add] Delete
hi/OK
Exit
Note
❒ When the optional G4 unit is installed, "G3/G4: Select" is displayed. Press 0 or 1 to select
G3 or G4, and then press the
{OK} key.
I Press the {OK} key.
If you selected "Exit", go to step K.
J Repeat steps F to I and program a
destination.
Note
❒ If you want to delete a character
of the name, press the {Clear}
key.
3
L Press the {OK} key.
The group name is programmed.
Assign to Key? hi/OK
Yes
[No]
M Press 0
or 1 to select "Yes" or
"No" to be programmed in the
Quick Dial.
Assign to Key? hi/OK
[Yes]
No
N Press the {OK} key.
If you selected "No", go to step Q.
Press Quick Dial Key
[a_k]
O Press
the Quick Dial key you
want to program.
Press Quick Dial Key
[a02]
P Press the {OK} key.
Program / Delete:
5.Prog. Group Dialhi
Q Press the {User Tools}
turn to standby mode.
key to re-
39
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 40 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Setup
Editing a Group
You can add destinations or edit the
group name for programmed groups.
To edit a destination:
• For destinations programmed in
Quick Dials or Speed Dial, edit the
contents of the programmed Quick
Dial or Speed Dial.
• For destinations programmed
with the number keys, delete the
destination you want to edit from
the group, and then program the
new destination.
3
E Display the number of the group
you want to edit (1 to 7).
Enter the group number with the
number keys, or search using 0 or
1.
Program?
Gp.D1 Group A
hi/OK
F Press the {OK} key.
Change Dest.?: hi/OK
[Yes]
No
G Press 0 or 1 to select "No".
Editing a Group Name
The following procedure describes
how to edit a group name.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
Confirm that "1. Program/Delete"
is displayed.
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "5. Prog.
Group Dial".
Program / Delete:
5.Prog. Group Dialhi
D Press the {OK} key.
Enter No./ Press Key
[Gp.D_]
(Browsehi)
Change Dest.?: hi/OK
Yes
[No]
H Press the {OK} key.
Gp.D1[ABC]
/OK
Group Akkkkkkkkkkkkk
I Press the {Clear} key and enter the
new name.
Gp.D1[ABC]
OK
Group B_kkkkkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ If you want to delete a character
of the name, press the {Clear}
key.
❒ If you press the {Cancel} key,
the display will return to that
shown for step C.
❒ If you are finished, press the
{User Tools} key.
J Press the {OK} key.
The name is changed.
40
Assign to Key? hi/OK
Yes
[No]
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 41 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Storing and Editing a Group of Fax Numbers
K Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes" if the
g r o u p w a s p ro g ra m m e d i n a
Quick Dial, or select "No" if it was
not.
Assign to Key? hi/OK
[Yes]
No
L Press the {OK} key.
If you selected "No" ,go to step N .
Press Quick Dial Key
[a02]
Note
❒ If you want to edit a programmed Quick Dial key, press
the Quick Dial key and then the
{OK} key.
M Press the {OK} key.
Program / Delete:
5.Prog. Group Dialhi
If you want to program another
group name, go to step D.
N Press
the {User Tools} key to return to standby mode.
Adding a Fax Number to a Group
The following procedure describes
how to add a destination to a group.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "5. Prog.
Group Dial".
Program / Delete:
5.Prog. Group Dialhi
D Press the {OK} key.
Enter No./ Press Key
[Gp.D_]
(Browsehi)
3
E Display the number of the group
to which you want to add a number (1 to 7).
Enter the group number with the
number keys, or search using 0 or
1.
Program?
Gp.D1 Group A
hi/OK
F Press the {OK} key.
Change Dest.?: hi/OK
[Yes]
No
G Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes" and
press the {OK} key.
Program?
[Add] Delete
hi/OK
Exit
Note
❒ If you have finished adding destinations, select "Exit" and go to
step L.
H Press 0 or 1 to select "Add" and
press the {OK} key.
Gp.D1:#5
Fax No.
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
41
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 42 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Setup
I Specify the destination using one
of the following three methods:
Enter the fax number with the
number keys.
Gp.D1[ABC]
/OK
Group Akkkkkkkkkkkkk
Gp.D1:#5
Press OK
0123456789_kkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ If you want to change the group
name, press the {Clear} key and
enter the new name.
Press a Quick Dial key.
3
M Press the {OK} key.
Gp.D1:#5
Press OK
a01 ABC COMPANY
Press the {User Tools} key and enter a Speed Dial number.
Gp.D1:#5
Press OK
b00 DEF COMPANY
Note
❒ If you specify a Quick Dial or
S peed Di al tha t is n ot pr o grammed, " This key is Not
Programmed" is displayed. Respecify the destination.
J Press the {OK} key.
The destination is added.
Note
❒ When the optional G4 unit is installed, "G3/G4: Select" is displayed. Press 0 or 1 to select
G3 or G4, and then press the
{OK} key.
K To
add another destination, repeat steps G to J.
L If you have finished adding destinations, select "Exit".
Program?
hi/OK
Add Delete [Exit]
N Press the {OK} key.
Assign to Key? hi/OK
Yes
[No]
O Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes" if the
g ro u p w a s p r o g r a m m e d in a
Quick Dial, or select "No" if it was
not.
Assign to Key? hi/OK
[Yes]
No
P Press the {OK} key.
If you selected "No", go to step Q.
Press Quick Dial Key
[a02]
Note
❒ If you want to edit a programmed Quick Dial, press the
Quick Dial, and then the {OK}
key.
Q Press the {OK} key.
Program / Delete:
5.Prog. Group Dialhi
If you want to add another destination to the group, go to step D.
R Press the {User Tools}
turn to standby mode.
42
key to re-
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 43 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Storing and Editing a Group of Fax Numbers
F Press the {OK} key.
Deleting a Group
The following procedure describes
how to delete a destination from a
group.
• When you delete a destination
from a group programmed in a
Quick Dial or a Speed Dial, the
contents of the Quick Dial or Speed
Dial are not deleted.
To delete a destination from a group
Change Dest.?: hi/OK
[Yes]
No
G Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes" and
press the {OK} key.
Program?
[Add] Delete
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "5. Prog.
Group Dial".
Program / Delete:
5.Prog. Group Dialhi
D Press the {OK} key.
or 1 to select "Delete"
and press the {OK} key.
Select Destination
withhi
I Press 0 or 1 to display the destination you want to delete.
Delete?
hi/OK
a01 ABC COMPANY
J
Press the {OK} key.
Program?
hi/OK
Add [Delete] Exit
K To delete another destination, repeat steps H to J.
Enter No./ Press Key
[Gp.D_]
(Browsehi)
E Display the group number for the
destination you want to delete (1
to 7).
Enter the group number with the
number keys, or search using 0 or
1.
Program?
Gp.D1 Group A
3
H Press 0
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
hi/OK
Exit
hi/OK
L If you are finished deleting destinations, press 0 or 1 to select
"Exit", and then press the {OK}
key.
Gp.D1[ABC]
/OK
Group Akkkkkkkkkkkkk
M Press the {OK} key.
Assign to Key? hi/OK
Yes
[No]
43
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 44 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Setup
N Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes" if the
g r o u p w a s p ro g ra m m e d i n a
Quick Dial, or select "No" if it was
not.
O Press the {OK} key.
If you selected "No", go to step Q.
Press Quick Dial Key
[a02]
3
Note
❒ If you want to edit a programmed Quick Dial key, press
the Quick Dial key and then the
{OK} key.
P Press
the {OK} key to return to
standby mode.
Program / Delete:
5.Prog. Group Dialhi
If you want to delete another destination from the group, go to step
D.
Q Press
the {User Tools} key to return to standby mode.
To erase an entire group
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "6. Del.
Group Dial".
Program / Delete:
6.Del. Group Dial hi
D Press the {OK} key.
Enter No./ Press Key
[Gp.D_]
(Browsehi)
E Display the number of the group
you want to delete (1 to 7).
Enter the group number with the
number keys, or search using 0 or
1.
Delete?
Gp.D1 Group A
hi/OK
F Press the {OK} key.
The entire group is deleted.
Program / Delete:
6.Del. Group Dial hi
G Press the {User Tools}
key to return to standby display.
44
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 45 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Storing and Editing a Group of Fax Numbers
-To change and delete Quick
Dials programmed as groups:
To store an entire group under a different Quick Dial key, or to delete the
group from the Quick Dial key altogether, perform the following procedure:
A Press the {User Tools} key.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
3
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
Press the {OK} key, and then press
0 or 1 to display "5. Prog. Group
Dial".
Press the {OK} key.
Enter the group number (1 to 7).
Press the {OK} key.
Press 0 or 1 to select "No", and
then press the {OK} key.
Press the {OK} key.
If you want to change the Quick
Dial key, press "Yes", and if you
want to delete the Quick Dial key,
press "No".
Press the {OK} key.
If you selected "No" in step I, the
Quick Dial key is deleted. Go to
step M.
If you want to change the Quick
Dial key, press the new Quick Dial
key.
Press the {OK} key.
The Quick Dial key is changed.
Press the {User Tools} key to return
to standby mode.
45
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 46 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Setup
Entering Characters
Use the number keys to enter numbers. Use Quick Dial keys for entering
letters, and the {Symbols} key for entering symbols.
If at any time you make a mistake
when entering a character or digit,
press the {Clear} key to delete it. To
correct a character or number already
entered, use 0 or 1 to reach the mistake, enter the new character, and
then press the {Clear} key to delete
the mistaken character.
3
Note
❒ You can switch the character input
mode between uppercase letters
(ABC) and lowercase letters (abc)
by pressing the {ABC/abc} key. You
can input symbols regardless of
this mode.
❒ With the QWERTY keyboard layout, the {ABC/abc} key is key 21,
and with the ABC layout it is key
29. The {Symbol} key is key 30 with
both layouts.
Entering Symbols
A Press the {Symbol} key.
B Press 0 or 1 to scroll through the
symbols.
Note
❒ You can enter the following
symbols: – _ (space) . , ( ) / @ &
$!"'#*%+:;<=>?^[]`{|}∼
C Press the {OK} key.
46
Wild Card
Using wild cards, you can greatly enhance the effectiveness of the following features:
• Authorized Reception
• Memory Lock
• Multi-copy Reception
• Specified Cassette Selection
• Forwarding
In each of these features, you have to
store the Own Name or Own Fax
Number setting of the various terminals that you normally receive fax
documents from. Then, when your
machine detects an incoming call, it
checks the Own Name or Own Fax
Number setting of the other terminal
and acts accordingly.
When you use Own Name with these
features, you can program wild cards
to greatly expand the number of terminals that you can specify.
For example, if you wish to accept
documents from all 150 branches of
XYZ Company (using Authorized Reception), and forward them on to
head office (using Forwarding), you
do not have to store the Own Name of
each branch of XYZ Company. Program "XYZ" as a wild card for each of
these functions. If the Own Name settings of all XYZ branches contain
"XYZ", incoming documents from
those branches will be accepted and
sent on to the head office.
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 47 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Entering Characters
Note
❒ This feature cannot recognize
spaces. If you store MAN as a wild
card, and a terminal with an Own
Name including MANCHESTER,
HUMAN, or HUMANE calls you,
your machine will recognize MAN
as a wild card and accept and/or
forward the document.
Reference
See Chapter 7, "Authorized Reception" (switch 10, bit 7) in the Advanced Features manual.
3
See Chapter 7, "Forwarding" in the
Advanced Features manual.
Own Name and Own Fax Number,
see P.23 “Initial Settings and Adjustments”.
47
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 48 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Setup
3
48
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 49 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
4. Troubleshooting
Loading Paper in the Main Paper Cassette
The following procedure describes
how to load paper in the main paper
cassette.
B Lift up the cassette cover and remove it.
Z CK Y 4 7 0N . e p s
Important
❒ When loading paper, be careful
not to pinch your fingers inside the
machine.
❒ Before loading paper, make sure
that the machine is not outputting
a copy or received document.
Reference
For paper sizes, paper direction,
and the number of sheets that can
be loaded in the main paper cassette, see Chapter 11, "Document
and Paper Specifications" in the
Advanced Features manual.
C Remove any remaining paper.
Z CK Y 4 9 0N . e p s
For information on how to load the
optional bypass feeder, see Chapter
9, "Loading Paper in the Optional
Bypass Feeder" in the Advanced
Features manual.
A Pull out the main paper cassette
and place it on a flat surface.
Z CK Y 1 8 0N . e p s
D If the metal base plate is raised,
push it firmly down until it locks
into place.
Z CK Y 0 4 0N . e p s
Note
❒ Remove any paper that may
have dropped inside the machine in the area vacated by the
paper cassette.
49
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 50 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Troubleshooting
E Prepare
a stack of blank paper.
For smoother operation, square
the edges by tapping the paper
stack on the bench.
H Replace
the cassette. Push it in
firmly until it locks into place.
Z CK Y 2 3 0N . e p s
T ST S 0 1 0N . e p s
4
F Load the paper into the cassette.
Z CK Y 0 5 0N . e p s
Note
❒ Do not load paper above the paper level marks inside the cassette.
G Replace the cassette cover.
Z CK Y 0 6 0N . e p s
Note
❒ The frosted side of the cover
must be faceup when closed.
50
Note
❒ If you cannot close the cassette,
check that the metal base plate
is not raised.
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 51 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Adjusting the Volume and Sounds the Machine Makes
Adjusting the Volume and Sounds the
Machine Makes
You can change the beeper (monitor) volume for the following features:
On Hook
The sound that indicates on hook dialing.
Transmission
The sound that indicates transmission.
Reception
The sound that indicates reception.
Dialing
The sound that indicates dialing.
Key Tone
The sound that indicates a key being pressed.
Alarm
The sound that indicates something has gone wrong.
4
The following procedure describes how to adjust the volume for the above features.
Note
❒ Make sure that the machine is in standby mode.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
B Press 0 or 1 to display "3. Setup".
User Tools Main Menu
3.Setup
hi
C Press the {OK} key.
Confirm that "1. Monitor Volume" is displayed.
Setup:
1.Monitor Volume
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
Monitor Volume:
1.On Hook
hi
E Press 0 or 1 to select the item you want to adjust, and then press the {OK}
key.
On Hook:
hi/OK
Low---l---High
51
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 52 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Troubleshooting
F Press 0 or 1 to adjust the volume.
On Hook:
hi/OK
Low-----l-High
G Press the {OK} key.
The volume is adjusted.
Monitor Volume:
1.On Hook
hi
If you want to adjust another item, repeat steps E to G.
H Press the {User Tools} key to return to standby mode.
4
52
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 53 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
If an Indicator Lights on the Operation Panel
If an Indicator Lights on the Operation
Panel
Whenever you see the file receive indicator or the alarm indicator light,
always read the document in the control panel display.
❖ The Receive File indicator is lit:
You have received a fax document
which is now stored in the machine. See Chapter 4, "Printing
Documents That Have Been Received into Memory (Substitute
Reception)"in the Advanced Features manual.
4
❖ The Communicating indicator is lit.
You are sending or receiving a fax.
See P.5 “Operation Panel”.
❖ The Alarm indicator flashes.
An error has occurred. Read the
message in the display and take
appropriate action. See P.5 “Operation Panel”.
53
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 54 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Troubleshooting
Communication Problems
If "Transmission Failed / OK" appears in the display: Press the {OK}
key.
Causes:
Transmission Failed
/OK
• A poor line caused the communication to fail.
• The line is noisy. Try to retransmit.
• The other machine is out of order.
Ask the other party to check their
machine.
4
54
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 55 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Clearing a Document Jam
Clearing a Document Jam
When an original is jammed, "Clear
Misfed Orig. Storing Stopped, /
OK" is displayed. Perform the follow-
ing procedure to solve the problem.
C Close
the operation panel completely. Make sure that it clicks
and locks into place.
Z CK Y 1 0 0N . e p s
Note
❒ If copies, documents, or prints are
jammed, follow the procedure on
the next page.
A Open
the operation panel to an
angle of about 45°.
4
Z CK Y 0 8 0N . e p s
B Remove the original.
Z CK Y 0 9 0N . e p s
Important
❒ Do not pull out the document
without opening the operation
panel, or you will damage the
scanning mechanism.
55
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 56 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Troubleshooting
Clearing a Copy, Fax, or Print Jam
When "Clear Misfed Paper" is displayed, follow the procedure below
to solve the problem.
To clear original jams, see the previous page.
Important
❒ The transfer roller and surrounding area inside the machine becomes hot during printing. To
avoid injury when removing paper
jams, do not touch any parts other
than those specified in this manual.
4
Note
❒ If paper jams occur in the optional
second paper cassette or optional
byp ass feeder. (See chap ter 8,
"Clearing a Copy Fax, or Print Jam"
in the Advanced Features manual.).
Inside the Machine
A Pull the front cover release lever
towards you and open the front
cover.
Note
❒ If you do not pull the lever, only
the operation panel will open.
Z CK Y 1 2 0N . e p s
Z CK Y 6 0 0N . e p s
Print Delivery Tray
A Fold the tray up (1) and remove
any jammed paper (2).
Z CK Y 1 1 0N . e p s
B
Z CK Y 1 3 0N . e p s
56
Remove the toner cassette.
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 57 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Clearing a Copy, Fax, or Print Jam
C Remove
F Push the front cover closed until
Z CK Y 1 4 0N . e p s
Z CK Y 1 7 0N . e p s
any jammed paper underneath.
D Replace
the toner cassette by
aligning it with the guide rails
and sliding it into place.
Z CK Y 1 5 0N . e p s
you hear it lock into place.
4
Cassette Entrance
A Remove the main paper cassette
and place it on a flat surface.
Z CK Y 1 8 0N . e p s
E Confirm that the toner cassette is
locked into position.
Z CK Y 1 6 0N . e p s
B Lift the document delivery table
and remove any jammed paper
from inside the machine.
Z CK Y 2 0 0N . e p s
57
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 58 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Troubleshooting
C Return the document delivery table to its original position.
Z CK Y 2 1 0N . e p s
Upper Rear Unit
A Pull
the document table toward
the front of the machine.
Z CK Y 2 4 0N . e p s
D Push down on the paper until you
4
hear the base plate lock into place.
Z CK Y 9 0 0N . e p s
B Open
the lower rear cover and
then upper rear cover as shown in
the illustration.
Z CK Y 2 5 0N . e p s
E Replace the main paper cassette.
Z CK Y 2 3 0N . e p s
C Remove any jammed paper.
Z CK Y 2 6 0N . e p s
58
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 59 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Clearing a Copy, Fax, or Print Jam
D Close
the upper rear cover and
th e n t he lo w e r r e a r c o v e r a s
shown in the illustration.
Z CK Y 2 7 0N . e p s
4
E Return the document table to its
original position.
59
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 60 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Troubleshooting
Error Messages
The following messages may appear while you are operating or programming
the machine.
Message
Problem/Solution
No Files Exist
No polling reception operations have been programmed.
There are no documents in memory waiting for transmission.
Incorrect file number. Check the file number and try again.
4
Cannot Combine:(currently selected function)
Appears when you attempt to select a function that cannot
be used in combination with another currently selected
function.
This Key is in Use as a
Group Dial
This Quick Dial Key has a Group stored in it.
This Key is in Use as a
Program
This Quick Dial Key has a Keystroke Program stored in it.
This Key is in Use as a
Quick Dial
This Quick Dial Key has a Quick Dial stored in it.
This Key is Not Programmed
Either:
• This Quick Dial Key does not contain a number.
• This Quick Dial Key does not contain a Keystroke Program.
This Speed Dial No. is
Not Programmed
This Speed Dial number does not contain a number.
This Dest. is Already
Selected
Either:
• This number is already included in this Group.
• The same destination was specified more than once.
60
Insert Pause "_" After
Area Code
You must add a pause after your area code when you input
your fax terminal's own telephone number.
Replace Toner
The toner cassette is empty. Install a new cassette.
Clear Misfed Orig.
A document is jammed in the feeder.
Clear Misfed Paper
Paper is jammed in the printer.
Close Front Cover
Close Rear Cover
A cover is not closed properly. Check that all covers are
closed.
Machine is in Use.
Please Wait.
Machine cannot print a list/file, because the plotter is not
ready.
Call Service.
Machine is out of order. Contact your service representative.
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 61 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Error Messages
Message
Problem/Solution
Check Paper Size. Press
OK to Correct.
The size of the installed paper does not match the currently
selected paper size.
Press the {OK} key, and then set the paper size or install the
appropriate paper.
This Dial is in Use.
Cannot Delete.
This Dial is in Use.
Cannot Change.
This Quick Dial is being used (such as for a Send Later
Transmission).
Some Page(s) are Blank
An almost entirely blank document was scanned. Check
your document.
Reset Toner Correctly
The toner cassette is not set correctly.
Toner is Almost Empty
The toner cassette is nearly empty.
Copy Mode Locked
Copy mode is disabled. Enable it with the User Parameters.
Change ADF Pad
Replace the ADF separation pad.
4
61
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 62 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Troubleshooting
Solutions to Common Problems
Problem
Required Action
STANDBY MODE
Nothing happens when the
switch is turned on.
Check the power cord. Is it properly plugged into the outlet?
"Set Orig. / Enter No."
is not displayed.
Switch the power on.
Plug it in firmly.
If the Power indicator does not light, check that the power
cord is plugged in.
If the Energy Saver indicator lights, press the Energy Saver
key.
The display does not show the
Ready condition, or the machine
stops during an operation.
4
Does "Clear Misfed Orig." or "Clear Misfed
Paper" appear in the display?
Clear the misfed paper.
Reference
See P.55 “Clearing a Document Jam” , and P.56 “Clearing a
Copy, Fax, or Print Jam”.
Does "Load Paper " appear in the display?
Load paper into the paper tray. See P.49 “Loading Paper in the
Main Paper Cassette”.
Does "Close Front Cover" or "Close Rear Cover" appear in the display?
Close all covers.
Is the Add Toner indicator on?
Load a new toner cassette.
TRANSMISSION
The original is not pulled into
the auto document feeder.
You did not feed the document far enough into the feeder.
Insert the document into the feeder until it stops.
Retransmit.
Do user maintenance, especially rollers (2) and (6). See the illustration in Chapter 9, "Cleaning the Rollers and Exposure
Glass" in the Advanced Features manual.
The telephone line is disconnected.
Check that the line is connected properly.
The telephone line type setting is incorrect.
Check the telephone line type setting.
The dialed number does not contain a PSTN access code or
a pause.
Include the outside line access number and a pause before
the telephone number.
62
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 63 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Solutions to Common Problems
Problem
Required Action
The original is not pulled into
the auto document feeder.
The dialed number did not have enough pauses between the
outside line access number and the telephone number.
Try adding more pauses after the outside line access number.
Frequent original misfeeds
(Multifeeds)
Incorrect positioning of originals. Position the document in
the feeder correctly. See P.11 “Memory Transmission”.
Incorrect alignment of originals. Align the edges of the document. See P.10 “Suitable Document Types”.
Curled pages. Flatten the document. See P.10 “Suitable Document Types”.
Incorrect document type. Use a proper document type. See
P.10 “Suitable Document Types”.
4
Mixed document types. The pages must all be of the same
type.
Static electricity on the originals. Shuffle the document. See
P.11 “Memory Transmission”.
Do user maintenance, especially rollers (2) and (6). See the illustration in Chapter 9, "Cleaning the Rollers and Exposure
Glass" in the Advanced Features manual.
Frequent original misfeeds
(Non-feeds)
Copier silicone oil on the originals. Wait a few minutes, then
try again.
Incorrect alignment of originals. Align the edges of the document. See P.11 “Memory Transmission”.
Curled pages
Flatten the document. See P.10 “Suitable Document Types”.
Incorrect document type. Use a proper document type. See
P.10 “Suitable Document Types”.
More than 50 pages in the feeder. Do not load more than 50
pages in the automatic document feeder at once.
Do user maintenance, especially rollers (2) and (6). See the illustration in Chapter 9, "Cleaning the Rollers and Exposure
Glass" in the Advanced Features manual.
Transmission cannot take place; The document is jammed in the feeder.
"Clear Misfed Orig." ap- Remove the jammed document. See P.55 “Clearing a Docupears.
ment Jam” .
The document may be longer than the maximum limit.
Make sure that none of your originals exceed this limit.
Do user maintenance, especially rollers (2) and (6). See the illustration in Chapter 9, "Cleaning the Rollers and Exposure
Glass" in the Advanced Features manual.
63
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 64 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Troubleshooting
Problem
Required Action
Transmission cannot take place.
Before taking action, wait until
the machine is in standby mode,
then press the {Stop} key.
The other machine is out of order.
Check the error report.
Ask the other party to check their machine and correct the
fault.
The line is noisy.
Check that the dial tone is sent out.
Try to retransmit.
Consistent difficulty in communicating with a particular terminal
Consistent poor image quality
when communicating with a
particular terminal
4
There are some bad lines between you and that other terminal.
Store that terminal's number as a Quick Dial Key or Speed
Dial Code.
Then call a service technician.
Inform them of the nature of the problem and give the Quick
Dial Key or Speed Dial Code that you stored the number in.
RECEPTION
The telephone keeps ringing and
no fax is printed.
You are in Manual Receive mode.
Change to Auto Receive mode. See P.22 “Reception Modes”.
Power is switched off.
Switch the power on.
RECEPTION/COPYING
No printout; the Add Paper indi- The cassettes are empty.
cator is lit.
Add Paper. See P.49 “Loading Paper in the Main Paper Cassette”.
No printout; Clear Misfed
Paper appears.
The printer has jammed.
Clear the jam. See P.56 “Clearing a Copy, Fax, or Print Jam”.
Copies are blank.
The original must be placed facedown in the document feeder.
Position the original correctly. See P.11 “Memory Transmission”.
Copy paper misfeeds occur frequently.
Is the proper paper in the paper cassette?
Paper size and weight must be within the standards set for
this machine.
Is folded, wrinkled, damp, or curled paper in the paper cassette?
Always use dry, undamaged paper.
Is the paper set properly in the paper cassette?
Always load paper correctly. See P.49 “Loading Paper in the
Main Paper Cassette”.
Make sure that there is not too much paper in the trays; do
not fill them up over the load limit mark.
64
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 65 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Solutions to Common Problems
Problem
Required Action
Copy paper misfeeds occur frequently.
Are there any pieces of misfed paper or other foreign objects
in the machine?
Make sure that the paper path is completely clear of paper
and other material after a misfeed.
Are you copying onto recycled paper?
Fan the stack of recycled paper and load it in the paper tray.
Stripes on copies.
The exposure glass is dirty.
Clean the exposure glass. See Chapter 9, "Cleaning the Rollers and Exposure Glass" in the Advanced Features manual.
TELEPHONING
You cannot receive phone calls;
the unit only rings once then
goes into receive mode.
You are in Auto Receive mode.
You cannot receive phone calls;
the unit does not ring.
The telephone line is not connected.
4
Change to Manual Receive mode. See P.22 “Reception
Modes”.
Connect the modular cord.
65
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 66 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
Troubleshooting
4
66
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 67 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
5. Appendix
Options
❖ PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE180 (Second Paper Cassette)
A second paper feed unit can be added to the base machine.
❖ BYPASS FEEDER TYPE180
A third paper feed unit can be added to the base machine.
❖ ADF MAINTENANCE KIT TYPE 210
This is a maintenance kit for the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).
❖ FAX EXPANSION CARD TYPE20
A 2-Mbyte memory card can be added.
❖ FAX EXPANSION CARD TYPE40
A 4-Mbyte memory card can be added.
❖ ISDN INTERFACE UNIT TYPE 190 (G4 Unit)
This allows you to send and receive using the ISDN (Integrated Service Digital Network).
❖ NIC FAX KIT TYPE 210
This allows you to fax documents over the Internet using a LAN (Local Area
Network).
❖ PDU KIT TYPE 210
This allows you to fax documents over the Internet using a PSTN (Public
Switched Telephone Network).
❖ HANDSET TYPE 100
This allows you to dial fax numbers without having to use the operation panel.
❖ MECHANICAL COUNTER TYPE 210
This is a tamper-proof mechanical counter whose reading cannot be changed
by the user.
67
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 68 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
INDEX
A
E
Editing
Fax Numbers, 27
Group, 40
Quick Dial Numbers, 29
Speed Dial Numbers, 34
{Energy Saver/3Clear Modes} key, 7
Entering
Characters, 46
Symbols, 46
Entering Numbers Directly , 17
Error Messages , 60
Add Paper indicator, 5
Add Toner indicator, 5
Auto Document Feeder (ADF), 4
C
Canceling a Memory Transmission, 13
Before the start key is pressed , 13
During Transmission , 13
While the document is awaiting
transmission, 14
While the document is being scanned in, 13
Canceling an Immediate Transmission, 15
Before the start key is pressed , 15
While dialing or during transmission, 15
{Cancel} key, 6
Characters, 46
Entering, 46
CLEAR COPY, 56
Clearing a Jam, 56
Document, 55
Inside the machine , 56
{Clear} key, 6
Communication Problems, 54
Control panel display, 6
{Copy} key , 7
CSI → Own Fax Number, 23
F
Fax Header, 23
Faxing , 9
Front Cover, 4
Front Cover Release Lever, 4
G
G4 Interface Unit, 4
{G4} key, 6
Group, 20
Adding a Fax Number to, 41
Deleting, 43, 44
Deleting a Destination From, 43
Editing, 40
Specifying with Group key, 21
Specifying with Quick Dial, 20
Group Name, Editing, 40
Group of Fax Numbers, Storing , 37
D
Deleting
Quick Dial Numbers , 30
Speed Dial Numbers , 36
Dialing, 17
Document Delivery Tray, 4
Document Guide, 4
Document Jam, 55
Document Table, 4
H
{Help} key, 6
I
Immediate Transmission, 9, 14
Indicators
Check Display, 53
Manual Receive, 22
Memory, 11
Receive File, 53
Initial Settings, 23
Introduction, 3
J
{Job Information} key, 6
68
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 69 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
M
Main Paper Cassette, 3
Main Switch, 4
Manual Receive indicator, 22
Memory Card Cover, 4
{Memory} key, 6
Memory Transmission, 9, 11
N
Number keys, 7
O
{OK} key, 6
{On Hook Dial} key, 6
Operation Panel, 4, 5
Optional Bypass Feeder, 4
Optional Handset, 4
Optional Second Paper Cassette, 3
Own Fax Number
(Required by international law), 23
Own Name, 23
P
Paper, 49
Loading , 49
Part Names, 3
{Pause/Redial} key, 6
Pauses, Entering, 18
Print Delivery Tray, 3
Programmed Data
Deleting, 25
Storing and Editing, 24
Programming
Fax Header , 23
Fax Numbers , 27
Group, 37
Own Fax Number, 23
Own Name , 23
Quick Dial Numbers , 27
Speed Dial Numbers , 33
Q
Quick Dial, 18, 27
Quick Dial Key Labels, 31
{Quick Dial} keys, 6
Quick Dial Number
Deleting, 30
Editing, 29
Storing, 27
R
Rear Covers, 4
Receive File indicator, 5
Reception Mode
Auto Receive, 22
Manual Receive, 22
{Reception Mode} key, 6
Resolution, 16
{Resolution} key, 5
RTI → Own Name, 23
S
Scroll Keys, 6
Sending a Fax, 11
Solutions to Common Problems , 62
Speed Dial, 19, 33
Speed Dial Numbers
Deleting, 36
Editing, 34
Storing, 33
{Speed Dial/Tel Directory} key, 7
{Start} key, 7
Status Indicators, 6
{Stop} key, 7
Storing and Editing Fax Numbers, 27
Suitable Document Types, 10
Switching to Tone Signals, 18
Symbols , 8
Entering, 46
T
{p} (Tone) key, 7
Transmission
Immediate, 14
Memory, 11
Transmission Modes, 9
{Trans. Option} key, 6
Troubleshooting , 49
Clearing a Document Jam, 55
Clearing Copy, Fax or Print Jam, 56
Common Problems, 62
Communication Problems, 54
Error Messages, 60
Indicators, 53
Loading Paper, 49
Volume Adjustment, 51
TTI → Fax Header, 23
U
User Function keys, 5
{User Tools} key, 5
69
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 70 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
V
Ventilation Port, 4
Volume Control, 51
W
While the document is being scanned in, 13
Wild Cards, 46
70
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 71 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
MEMO
71
Shm4ENfaxF.book Page 72 Wednesday, September 13, 2000 3:13 PM
MEMO
72
UE
USA
H535
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 1 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
FAX3900NF
Operating Instructions
<Basic Features>
ZCKH030N.eps
Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future
reference.
For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 1 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
15-5, Minami Aoyama 1-chome,
Minato-ku, Tokyo 107-8544, Japan
Phone: +81-(0)3-3479-3111
Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense
that may result from the use of parts other than recommended parts.
For good copy quality, Ricoh recommends that you use
genuine Ricoh toner.
TONER CASSETTES
RICOH FAX TONER CASSETTE TYPE 1135 BLACK( United
States ) is recommended for the best performance.
RICOH FAX TONER CASSETTE TYPE 1136 BLACK( Canada )
is recommended for the best performance.
Spain
RICOH ESPAÑA S.A.
Avda. Litoral Mar, 12-14,
08005 Barcelona
Phone: +34-(0)93-295-7600
The Netherlands
RICOH EUROPE B.V.
Groenelaan 3, 1186 AA, Amstelveen
Phone: +31-(0)20-5474111
Italy
RICOH ITALIA SpA
Via della Metallurgia 12,
37139 Verona
Phone: +39-045-8181500
United Kingdom
RICOH UK LTD.
Ricoh House,
1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham,
Middlesex, TW13 7HG
Phone: +44-(0)20-8261-4000
Germany
RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Mergenthalerallee 38-40,
65760 Eschborn
Phone: +49-(0)6196-9060
France
RICOH FRANCE S.A.
383, Avenue du Général de Gaulle
BP 307-92143 Clamart Cedex
Phone: +33-(0)1-40-94-38-38
Printed in China
UE USA H537-8600
Hong Kong
RICOH HONG KONG LTD.
21/F., Tai Yau Building,
181, Johnston Road,
Wan Chai, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-2862-2888
Singapore
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE.LTD.
260 Orchard Road,
#15-01/02 The Heeren,
Singapore 238855
Phone: +65-830-5888
FAX3900NF Operating Instructions
Overseas Affiliates
U.S.A.
RICOH CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006
Phone: +1-973-882-2000
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 1 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get
maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in
this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Please read the Safety Information in the Advanced Features manual before using this machine. It contains important information related to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
Notes:
Some illustrations might be slightly different from your machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Laser Safety:
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical unit
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis
and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement or the optical subsystem is required.
Operator Safety:
This machine is considered a CDRH Class I laser device, safe for office/EDP use. The machine contains a 5-milliwat, 765 - 805 nanometer wavelength, GaAIAs laser diode. Direct (or indirect reflected)
eye contact with the laser beam may cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlock
mechanism have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
Warning:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Notes:
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
For good copy quality, Ricoh recommends that you use genuine Ricoh toner.
Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other
than genuine Ricoh parts in your Ricoh office product.
Important
Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable
for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating
the machine.
Power Source:
AC120V, 60Hz
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above.
Declaration of Conformity
Product Name: Facsimile
Model Number: FAX3900NF
Responsible party: Ricoh Corporation
Address: 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006
Telephone number: 973-882-2000
This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1)This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 1 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
USA
❖ FCC Requirements
1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the cover of this equipment is a label
that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence
number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.
2. This equipment uses the following USOC jack: RJ11C
3. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone
line. Excessive REN's on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to
an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the REN's should not exceed five (5.0).
Contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
4. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you
in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not
practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be
advised your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
5. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company
will provide advance notice in order to make necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.
6. In the event of operation problems (document jam, copy jam, communication error indication),
refer to the solving problems section in this manual.
7. If you cannot correct the problem, please contact the RICOH CORP. CUSTOMER SUPPORT
DEPT. at 1-800-FASTFIX for repair and warranty information. If it is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request you to disconnect the equipment from the
network until the problem is resolved.
8. This equipment cannot be used telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party
Line Service is subject to state tariffs.
❖ WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO
EMERGENCY NUMBERS:
1. Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up.
2. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning hours or late evenings.
CANADA
The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment
meets telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements as prescribed in
the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The department does not
guarantee the equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions
may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier.
Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user disconnect the equipment.
User should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,
telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the
maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on
an interface may consist of any combination of device subject only to the requirement that the sum of
the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
b means POWER OFF.
Copyright © 2000 Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page i Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
How to Read this Manual
How to Read this Manual
Symbols
In this manual, the following symbols are used:
R WARNING:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in
death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety Information section in the Advanced Features manual.
R CAUTION:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in minor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injury
when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this
symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety
Information section in the Advanced Features manual.
* The statements above are notes for your safety.
Important
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be
damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.
Preparation
This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before operating.
Note
This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misoperation.
Limitation
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
{
}
Keys built into the machine's operation panel.
i
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page ii Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for this machine ......................................................................... 1
Basic Features (This Manual) ....................................................................... 1
Advanced Features ....................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction
Part Names................................................................................................. 3
Operation Panel ......................................................................................... 5
Symbols and Conventions Used in This Manual.................................... 8
2. Faxing
Transmission Modes................................................................................. 9
Suitable Document Types....................................................................... 10
Memory Transmission and Immediate Transmission..........................
Memory Transmission.................................................................................
Canceling a Memory Transmission.............................................................
Immediate Transmission .............................................................................
Canceling an Immediate Transmission .......................................................
Very Fine Detail Faxing ...........................................................................
Resolution ...................................................................................................
Dialing.......................................................................................................
Entering Numbers Directly ..........................................................................
Entering Pauses..........................................................................................
Switching to Tone Signals...........................................................................
Using Quick Dial..........................................................................................
Using Speed Dial ........................................................................................
Using Groups ..............................................................................................
Reception Modes.....................................................................................
How to Select the Reception Mode.............................................................
ii
11
11
13
14
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
18
19
20
22
22
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page iii Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
3. Setup
Initial Settings and Adjustments............................................................
Initial Settings..............................................................................................
Storing and Editing Fax Numbers..........................................................
Storing Quick Dial Numbers........................................................................
Editing Quick Dial Numbers ........................................................................
Deleting Quick Dial Numbers ......................................................................
Printing a Quick Dial Key Label...................................................................
Quick Dial Key Labels .................................................................................
Storing Speed Dial Numbers.......................................................................
Editing Speed Dial Numbers .......................................................................
Deleting Speed Dial Numbers.....................................................................
Storing and Editing a Group of Fax Numbers .....................................
Storing a Group of Fax Numbers ................................................................
Editing a Group ...........................................................................................
Deleting a Group .........................................................................................
Entering Characters ................................................................................
Entering Symbols ........................................................................................
Wild Card ....................................................................................................
23
24
27
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
37
40
43
46
46
46
4. Troubleshooting
Loading Paper in the Main Paper Cassette........................................... 49
Adjusting the Volume and Sounds the Machine Makes ...................... 51
If an Indicator Lights on the Operation Panel....................................... 53
Communication Problems ...................................................................... 54
Clearing a Document Jam ......................................................................
Clearing a Copy, Fax, or Print Jam ........................................................
Print Delivery Tray.......................................................................................
Inside the Machine ......................................................................................
Cassette Entrance.......................................................................................
Upper Rear Unit ..........................................................................................
Error Messages........................................................................................
55
56
56
56
57
58
60
Solutions to Common Problems............................................................ 62
5. Appendix
Options ..................................................................................................... 67
INDEX........................................................................................................ 68
iii
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page iv Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
iv
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 1 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Manuals for this machine
This machine is provided with a Basic Features manual and an Advanced Features manual. Please consult the manual that suits your needs.
Basic Features (This Manual)
The Basic Features manual explains the most frequently used fax functions and
operations.
Advanced Features
The Advanced Features manual describes more advanced functions, and also
explains settings for key operators.
❖ Chapter 1 Transmission Options
Explains transmission features such as scheduling transmission for a specific
time, setting personal codes, sending confidential documents; and storing
documents for pick-up by polling transmission.
❖ Chapter 2 Communication Information
Explains how to obtain information about stored documents, confidential
documents, and memory-locked documents; explains how to print the Journal.
❖ Chapter 3 Other Transmission Features
Discusses special dialing features, switching between G3 and G4 communication; and explains advanced transmission features such as broadcasting and
batch transmission.
❖ Chapter 4 Reception Features
Explains various reception features. You can find out about receiving documents in telephone mode, and printing two pages of received documents on
one page.
❖ Chapter 5 Copying
Read this chapter when you would like to know about copying operations
and functions.
❖ Chapter 6 Facsimile User Tools
Explains about programming frequently used functions for Quick Dial Key
and User Function Key.
❖ Chapter 7 Key Operator Settings
Explains a variety of settings that can be made by the fax machine's key operator to control and monitor usage of the machine. You can find out about setting up the phone line type, and how to store the Memory Locked ID and the
Confidential ID.
1
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 2 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
❖ Chapter 8 Troubleshooting
Discusses troubleshooting topics such as printing the help list, clearing jams,
and reading reports.
❖ Chapter 9 Maintaining Your Machine
Explains about loading paper in the optional bypass feeder, cleaning the rollers and scanner and so on.
❖ Chapter 10 Installation
Explains installation considerations, connection to a telephone line, and connecting the power.
❖ Chapter 11 Appendix
Lists specifications and the machine's advanced communication features.
2
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 3 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
1. Introduction
Part Names
ZCKH010N.eps
1. Optional Second Paper Cassette
3. Print Delivery Tray
The optional second paper cassette holds
more paper.
Copies, incoming faxes, and prints are
delivered here. The tray can be extended
for large paper sizes.
2. Main Paper Cassette
The main paper cassette holds copy paper.
4. Document Delivery Tray
Scanned documents are stacked on the
document delivery tray.
3
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 4 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Introduction
5. Operation Panel
Key panel for operating the machine.
6. Optional Handset
7. Document Guide
1
Match the document guide to the size of
your original documents.
8. Document Table
Document table holds up to 50 sheets
which are fed one at a time. Place your
original documents here.
9. Optional Bypass Feeder
Expands paper delivery capability to
handle A4, Legal and F4 sizes.
10. Auto Document Feeder (ADF)
Set multi-page documents here to have
them automatically scanned in one page
at a time.
11. Memory Card Cover
Protects the machines optional memory
card.
12. Front Cover Release Lever
Pull this lever to release the front cover.
13. G4 Interface Unit
Allows the fax machine to be connected
for G4 (ISDN) communication.
14. Front Cover
15. Rear Covers
16. Ventilation Port
Provides ventilation for internal parts of
the machine in order to prevent overheating.
17. Main Switch
The main switch turns your machine on
and off.
4
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 5 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Operation Panel
Operation Panel
1
ZCKS012N.eps
Mail Addr.
Mail RX
1. Add Toner indicator
Key
Function
F1
Prints a transmission management
report.
F2
Initiates entry of an E-mail address.
Lights when a cassette is empty or the paper cassette is not fully inserted.
F3
Immediately checks for and receives any incoming E-mail.
3. Receive File indicator
F4
Switches stamping off/on.
Blinks when toner is about to run out and
lights continuously when toner has run
out.
2. Add Paper indicator
Lights when an incoming document is received into memory, and flashes when
confidential or memory-locked document is received. (See P.53 “If an Indicator
Lights on the Operation Panel”).
4. User Function keys
There are four User Function keys.
Four User Function keys are provided to
store frequently used functions and operations.
The following functions are registered by
default:
5. {Resolution} key
Selects the scanning resolution or the
halftone scanning mode. When the Detail
mode, Fine mode, or Halftone mode is selected, the corresponding indicator
lights. Standard mode is selected when
no indicator is lit.
The Detail and Fine modes offer progressively higher scanning resolutions. The
Halftone mode is used for faxing photographs or drawings that contain halftones.
5
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 6 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Introduction
6. {User Tools} key
17. {Quick Dial} keys
Press to access User Tool Settings and
customize various functions.
There are 30 Quick Dial keys. Use them to
store individual fax numbers (see P.27
“Storing and Editing Fax Numbers”), or to
enter characters (see P.46 “Entering Characters”). In addition, you can use the
Quick Dial keys to register functions such
as groups, programs, and auto documents.
You can select either a QWERTY key
board layout (as shown in the illustration) or an ABC layout. See Chapter 7,
"Key Layout" in the Advanced Features
manual.
When attaching the Quick Dial label,
make sure you remove the Quick Dial
cover (transparent).
7. {Cancel} key
1
Press when you want to cancel an operation or return to the previous display.
8. Control panel display
Guides you through tasks and informs
you of the status of the machine. Messages appear here.
9. Scroll Keys
Use these keys to move the cursor in the
display, or to change the display.
10. {OK} key
Press to answer "Yes" to a question displayed on the display.
11. {Job Information} key
Press to search for information on a specific job.
12. {Trans. Option} key
Press to change the transmission option
settings. The indicator lights when option settings are changed.
13. {Reception Mode} key
Press to select the reception mode. When
the Manual Receive indicator is on, Manual Receive is selected.
These indicators keep you informed
about the current status of the unit.
• hAlarm
When the alarm indicator flashes,
check the display and read the message to identify a problem (such as paper jam or open cover).
• mCommunicating
Lights during fax transmission or reception.
19. {Pause/Redial} key
Press the Help key when you want to
print a help list.
Inserts a pause when you are dialing or
storing a fax number, or redials the last
number dialed when pressed by itself.
(The redial feature does not work once
you have started dialing a new number.)
15. {G4} key
20. {On Hook Dial} key
14. {Help} key
When the optional G4 unit is installed,
press to select G3 or G4 mode. When the
indicator is lit, G4 is selected.
16. {Memory} key
Press to select Immediate Transmission.
When the Memory indicator is not lit, Immediate Transmission is selected, and
when the indicator is lit, Memory Transmission is selected.
6
18. Status Indicators
Press to dial a phone call from the keypad
without lifting the external telephone or
taking the handset off the hook (if the machine is equipped with the optional telephone or handset).
21. {Clear} key
Press to delete the last character or digit
entered, or press 0 or 1 to move the cursor, and then press the {Clear} key to delete whatever is at the cursor.
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 7 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Operation Panel
22. {Speed Dial/Tel Directory} key
Press when you want to use the Speed
Dial or Telephone Directory feature.
23. {p} (Tone) key
1
If your telephone line uses pulse dialing,
press this button to switch temporarily to
tone dialing if you want to use telephone
services that utilize telephone touch
tones.
24. Number keys
Use the number keys to dial fax numbers,
to enter the number of copies, and so
forth.
25. {Energy Saver/3Clear Modes} key
Energy Saver: Hold down for 2 seconds
to select or deselect energy saver mode.
When the machine is not used or no data
is received for a fixed period, the machine goes into energy saver mode automatically.
Clear Modes: Press to clear any selected
settings and return the machine to its previous condition.
26. {Copy} key
Press to copy the document currently
loaded in the feeder.
27. {Stop} key
Stops transmissions or document scanning, reception, and long copy runs. The
machine finishes printing out the current
page, then stops.
28. {Start} key
Press to start transmission, copy operation, or output of reports.
7
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 8 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Introduction
Symbols and Conventions Used in This
Manual
1
❖ Documents:
A document is anything you put
on the document table of your machine, whether you are faxing it or
copying it.
❖ Prints:
A print is anything that comes out
of the machine, whether: a received fax or a copy you made.
❖ Procedures:
Procedures are described step by
step. Perform them in order. When
you see a display, it always shows
what comes after performing the
step it accompanies. Other illustrations accompanying steps help
you find the right key or handle, or
show you how to perform the step.
A This is a step in a procedure.
THIS CORRESPONDS TO
THE PANEL DISPLAY.
8
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 9 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
2. Faxing
Transmission Modes
There are two types of transmission.
❖ Memory Transmission
When a fax document is stored in
memory, then transmission starts
automatically.
It is convenient when you would like
to take documents back in a hurry.
You can send the same message to
more than one destination in a single operation. This technique is referred to as Broadcasting.
Important
❒ If there is a power failure, the power switch is turned off, or the plug
is pulled out for more than 1 hour,
all documents stored in memory
are deleted. As soon as power is restored, the Power Failure Report is
printed to help you identify deleted documents. See Chapter 8
"Power Failure Report" in the Advanced Features manual.
GDRH230E.eps
Receiver
Transmitter (This machine)
Receiver
Receiver
GDRH230E
Note
❒ Using the Internet Fax feature of
your fax machine, you can also
scan documents and send them
over the Internet as E-mail, as well
as receive document images sent
as E-mail by another Internet Fax
machine or PC. See the NIC FAX
KIT manual for details.
❖ Immediate Transmission
The machine dials immediately, and
transmits the fax while scanning.
It is convenient when you would
like to send a document immediately, and would like to check whether
you have successfully connected
with the other party's fax machine.
A fax document is not stored in memory.
GDRH240E.eps
Transmitter
(This machine)
Receiver
GDRH240E
9
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 10 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Faxing
Suitable Document Types
Never load damaged originals in the
ADF (Auto Document Feeder) for
scanning. Always check the stack of
originals before loading.
• Always check the sheets and remove staples, pins, paper clips, or
any other type of fasteners.
• If the sheets are curled or folded,
flatten them.
• Separate all the sheets to ensure
that they will not jam or double
feed during scanning.
• If the sheets are heavily creased,
torn, punched with holes for binding, or patched together with tape,
make copies and then load the copies in the ADF.
• Before loading a stack of originals,
make sure that they are all the
same size. Do not mix sheets of different sizes.
• Before loading a stack of originals,
always fan them to remove static
cling.
• To protect fragile or legal documents from damage due to document jams, copy such documents
and then load the copies for scanning.
2
10
Important
❒ Never place the following types of
originals in the ADF:
• Sheets marked with crayon,
paint, charcoal, or soft pencil.
• Sheets pasted up with tape or
glue.
• Specially treated paper, including thermal paper, OHP sheets,
vinyl sheets or film, waxed paper, carbon paper, deed paper,
or paper treated with silicone
oil.
• Paper that is not perfectly dry. If
documents have ink or correction fluid that is still wet, all
them to dry thoroughly before
loading them into the ADF.
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 11 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Memory Transmission and Immediate Transmission
Memory Transmission and Immediate
Transmission
Reference
See Chapter 2, "Transmission" in
the NIC FAX KIT manual for how
to scan and send documents as Email.
Memory Transmission
Memory Transmission is convenient
because:
• Fax documents can be scanned
much more quickly. Your scanned
document is stored in the memory,
an d t h en s en t aut o m at i c al l y,
meaning you do not have to wait
for your document to send.
• While your fax document is being
sent, another user can operate the
machine (people do not have to
wait long to use the fax machine).
• You can send the same document
to more than one place with the
same operation.
• There are two kinds of Memory
Transmission: Parallel and Normal. Parallel Memory Transmission is the default. See Chapter 3,
"Parallel Memory Transmission" in
the Advanced Features manual.
2
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
The display should look like this:
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Set Orig./ Enter No.
Note
❒ If the display is blank, press the
{Energy Saver} key to exit Energy Saving mode.
B Fan your document stack (maximum: 50 pages, 20 lb) to make
sure all pages are loose, and then
tap the edges to square the stack.
TSTS010N.eps
Limitation
❒ If 0% is displayed, you cannot perform Memory Transmission. Send
your document using Immediate
Transmission.
Note
❒ If your document jams while it is being scanned, press the {Stop} key,
and then refer to P.55 “Clearing a
Document Jam” for instructions on
how to safely remove the original.
Limitation
❒ All pages set in the feeder must
be of the same size.
11
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 12 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Faxing
C Insert
the document facedown
into the feeder until the machine
beeps. Then adjust the guides to
match the width of the document.
ZCKY010N.eps
F Dial the number in one of the following ways.
Dest.1
OK to Add
0123456789_kkkkkkkkk
Number keys
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
Quick Dial
06
07
*
GFDIAL1N
GFDIAL0N
Speed Dial
Group
Example:
Note
❒ You can dial before you set the
document. Place the document
after you dial the number and
go to step G.
❒ Set your document straight in
the feeder. If you set more than
15 sheets, make sure the leading
ends of the documents are even.
Zcky800n.eps
D The display will look like this:
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Enter Fax Number
E If the memory indicator is not lit,
press the {Memory} key.
12
Example: Speed Dial 10
Speed Dial
1
0
GFDIAL2N
*1
*2
Method *1 Quick
Dial key 08.
Method *2 {F4} key
and 1 number key.
In this example, Group Dial is programmed in Quick Dial 08.
In this example, the {F4} key is
programmed as the Group key,
and Group dial number 1 is programmed.
Note
❒ If you want to erase a digit of
the phone number, press the
{Clear} key.
❒ The number of pages that you
can store in memory depends
on the original document images and the scan settings. You can
store up to 160 standard pages
(ITU-T No.1 chart, Resolution:
Standard, halftone mode: off).
Reference
Programming Quick Dial: see
P.27 “Quick Dials”.
Programming Speed Dial: see
P.27 “Speed Dials”.
Programming Group Dial: see
P.37 “Storing and Editing a Group
of Fax Numbers”
Programming Group key: see
P.37 “Programming groups in the
{Group} key”
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 13 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Memory Transmission and Immediate Transmission
G Press the {OK} key to enter another fax number.
Dest.2
OK to Add
9876543210_kkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ Repeat steps F and G until all
destinations are entered.
❒ If you enter only one destination, press the {Start} key.
❒ The machine stores your message and dials the first number
(or, if you selected Send Later, it
will return to standby mode and
the fax document will be sent at
the time that you selected).
H Press the {Start} key.
The machine dials the other party's
number.
0123456789
File No.001
P.001
Note
❒ If the other party's line is busy,
your machine will redial.
❒ If the other party's fax machine answers, both machines connect and
your machine sends the document.
The other party's Own Name or Own
Fax Number appears on the upper line.
❒ If your line goes through a local switchboard (a PBX) remember to dial the exit
code. Press the {Pause} key immediately after the code. If the number includes
a country code, press the {Pause} key
after the country code, and then dial
the rest of the number. Pauses are displayed as a dash (-) on the display.
The File number. is used for managing
documents in memory, and is required
when canceling transmission of a document or printing out its contents.
Canceling a Memory
Transmission
Before the {Start} key is pressed
A Press
2
the {Stop} key or {Clear
Modes} key, or remove the document set in the feeder.
While the document is being scanned in
A Press the {Stop} key.
All parts of the document that
have been scanned in are cleared.
Confirm and press the {OK} key.
During transmission
A Confirm the destination.
The destination name or fax number for the current transmission is
displayed.
B Press the {Stop} key.
Cancel Trans.? hi/OK
[Yes]
No
C Confirm and press the {OK} key.
Transmission is canceled.
13
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 14 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Faxing
While the document is awaiting
transmission
Immediate Transmission
Limitation
❒ Pages already being sent to the
destination cannot be canceled,
even if you cancel the transmission. The transmission may be sent
before you can cancel it, even if
you start canceling the transmission before it is fully sent.
2
A Press
the {Job Information} key,
and confirm that "1. Cancel TX/
RX" is displayed.
Job Information
1.Cancel TX / RX
hi
B Press the {OK} key.
File No. To Cancel
No.[_kk] (Browsehi)
C Display the file you want to delete.
Enter the file number with the number keys, or search using 0 or 1.
If you are unable to find the file, it
has already been sent.
Cancel File?
NO.005
hi/OK
D If the document you want to delete
is displayed, press the {OK} key.
Cancel?
[Yes]
No
hi/OK
E Confirm and press the {OK} key.
Trans.Cancelled
File Deleted
14
Immediate Transmission is convenient when:
• You wish to send a document immediately as it is scanning.
• You wish to quickly check whether
you have successfully connected
with the other party's fax machine.
• Your machine's memory is getting
full.
The machine dials immediately after
you press the {Start} key. The message
is scanned and transmitted page by
page without being stored in memory.
Note
❒ You can only specify one destination for Immediate Transmission.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
The display should look like this:
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Set Orig./ Enter No.
Note
❒ The Memory indicator should
be out. If the Memory indicator
is lit, press the {Memory} key.
B Place the document facedown in
the feeder.
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Enter Fax Number
Note
❒ Do not load more than 50 pages
into the feeder at one time.
❒ You can set the document at any
point up until you press the
{Start} key.
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 15 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Memory Transmission and Immediate Transmission
C Dial the other party's number.
Dest.
Press Start
0123456789_kkkkkkkkk
If you want to erase a digit of the
number, press the {Clear} key and
enter the correct number.
D Press the {Start} key.
0123456789
Dialing...
The machine dials and connects to
the other party's machine. The
number that you dialed and the
other party's Own Name or Own
Fax Number is displayed.
After the transmission, the machine returns to standby mode.
Canceling an Immediate
Transmission
Before the {Start} key is pressed
A Press
2
the {Stop} key or {Clear
Modes} key.
If a document is set in the feeder,
remove it.
While dialing or during transmission
A Press the {Stop} key.
However, the part that has already
been scanned is sent to the other
party. After you have canceled the
transmission, remove the document from the feeder.
Note
❒ If you install the optional handset or an external telephone,
you can send the document
manually. Simply pick up the
handset and dial.
15
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 16 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Faxing
Very Fine Detail Faxing
To ensure that text, diagrams and images stand out clearly in your document, the machine automatically
detects the image density and makes
adjustments.
However, if you need to send a document which requires optimum clarit y, sele ct the resolution se tting
appropriate to your needs.
You can select different settings for
each page of your document. Simply
change the settings for page 2 while
page 1 is being scanned.
2
Limitation
❒ High resolution images and text
are scanned into the machine. If
the other party's machine does not
support the resolution at which
you are sending, this machine automatically switches to a resolution supported by the other party's
machine. This machine can send
documents in Standard, Detail,
and Fine resolution. It can receive
documents in Standard and Detail
resolution.
Resolution
The {Resolution} key gives you control over document quality. The indicators above the button show the
current setting. Choose a setting that
matches your document.
❖ Standard:
Standard quality. Use for most
printed or typewritten documents.
This is selected when the other resolution indicators are not lit.
16
❖ Detail :
High quality. Use for documents
with small print or fine details. Detail resolution is twice the clarity of
Standard resolution.
❖ Fine :
Very high quality. Use this for high
quality reproduction. Fine resolution is four times the clarity of
Standard resolution.
❖ Halftone:
Use this for optimum quality if
your document contains photographs or diagrams with complex
shading patterns or gray tones. If
you choose this setting, resolution
will automatically be Detail.
Note
❒ You can confirm the resolution for
previously sent documents in the
Journal.
❒ Faxing at a higher resolution requires more time. Frequent use of
high resolution could cause an increase in your phone bill, especially for long distance transmissions.
❒ There are two methods for sending
documents that contain photographic images - Image priority
and Speed priority. If you select
Speed priority, you can send your
image faster, but the quality of the
image may be inferior to when
sending with Image priority. See
Chapter 7, "User Parameters"
(switch 10, bit 7) in the Advanced
Features manual.
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 17 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Dialing
Dialing
The number keys, Quick Dial, Speed
Dial, and Group dial can all be used
for dialing.
Entering Numbers Directly
Enter numbers directly using the
number keys (1234567890*#) on the
right side of the operation panel.
Press the {Pause} key or {p} (Tone)
key to enter a pause or tone.
Note
❒ Maximum length of a fax number:
254 digits.
❒ Maximum number of documents
that can be stored for Memory
Transmission: 100
❒ Maximum number of destinations
per Memory Transmission: 140
❒ The combined total number of destinations that can be stored is 300.
However, only 197 destinations
can be specified if all of the destinations specified are different.
❒ The maximum destinations you
can specify with the number keys
is 67. However, this limitation is
subject to memory capacity.
Reference
When sending documents as Email, see Chapter 2, "Transmission" in the NIC FAX KIT manual
for how to enter E-mail addresses.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Carefully
place your document
into the document table and select any settings you require.
2
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Enter Fax Number
C Enter the number with the number keys.
Note
❒ The number you entered appears in the display.
❒ If you want to enter another
destination, press the {OK} key
and repeat step C above.
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
❒ You can enter a pause, tone, or
dial options.
Reference
Pause: see P.18 “Entering Pauses”.
Tone: see Chapter 3, "Tone Signals" in the Advanced Features
manual.
D Press the {Start} key.
0123456789
File No.001
P.001
17
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 18 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Faxing
-Limitations when dialing with
the number keys:
• Destinations entered with the number keys are stored in the machine's
internal memory (separate to document storage memory) until they
have finished sending. You can store
up to 67 destinations for Memory
Transmission (including Polling Reception), Transfer Stations and End
Receivers when making Transfer
Requests, and Groups. (Quick Dials
and Speed Dials are not included.)
Example: If 60 destinations have already been registered with the number
keys for Groups, you can register another 7 destinations for Memory
Transmission with the number keys.
• The remaining memory for storing
documents appears in the display.
Because destinations are stored in a
different memory, the remaining
memory in the display does not
change when you store new destinations.
2
Entering Pauses
When dialing an outside line through a
PBX, you must enter a number, such as
"0", at the beginning of the number, and
it may take a moment after you have dialed the number before a connection is
made to an outside line. If this occurs,
enter a pause after the "0". If you enter a
pause, a 2-second pause is inserted before the outside number is dialed.
Note
❒ A pause is shown as a "-" character
on the display.
❒ You can enter a pause in numbers
stored in Quick Dials and Speed
Dials.
18
Limitation
❒ You cannot enter a pause at the beginning of a fax number
Switching to Tone Signals
This feature allows a machine connected to a pulse dialing line to send tone
signals (for example if you want to use
a special service on a tone dialing line).
For details on basic services, please contact your service representative. This
feature is not necessary with a Tone dialing line. See Chapter 3, "Tone Signals"
in the Advanced Features manual.
Using Quick Dial
You can specify destinations simply
be pressing the Quick Dial.
You must program the destination's fax
number in a Quick Dial beforehand.
Additionally, you can store a name
for the destination in Quick Dials.
Note
❒ To store, edit, or delete a Quick Dial, see P.27 “Storing and Editing Fax
Numbers”.
❒ To check the contents of all Quick
Dials, print the Quick Dial list. See
Chapter 6, "Lists You Can Print
Out Yourself" in the Advanced
Features manual.
Reference
When sending documents as Email, see Chapter 2, "Transmission" in the NIC FAX KIT manual
for how to enter E-mail addresses.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 19 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Dialing
B Carefully place your fax document
into the auto document feeder and
select any settings you require.
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Enter Fax Number
C Press the Quick Dial that is programmed with the destination.
Dest.1
OK to Add
a01 ABC COMPANY
Note
❒ When a name is stored for the
destination, the name is displayed, and when no name is
stored, the fax number is displayed.
❒ If you want to enter another
destination, press the {OK} key
and repeat step C above or enter
a number manually.
❒ When dialing another destination using a Quick Dial, you do
not need to press the {OK} key.
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Stop} key, and the display will
return to that in step B.
D Press the {Start} key.
ABC COMPANY
File No.001
P.001
Using Speed Dial
You can specify destinations simply
be pressing the {Speed Dial} key and a
Speed Dial code (00 to 99).
You must store the destination's fax
number in a Speed Dial beforehand.
Additionally, you can store a name
for the destination in Speed Dials.
2
Note
❒ To store, edit, or delete Speed Dial
entries, see P.27 “Storing and Editing Fax Numbers”.
❒ To check the contents of all Speed
Dials, print the Speed Dial list. See
Chapter 6, "Lists You Can Print
Out Yourself" in the Advanced
Features manual.
Reference
When sending documents as Email, see Chapter 2, "Transmission" in the NIC FAX KIT manual
for how to enter E-mail addresses.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Carefully place your fax document
into the auto document feeder and
select any settings you require.
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Enter Fax Number
C Press the {Speed Dial} key.
Speed Dial:Enter No.
[b_k]
19
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 20 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Faxing
D Using the number keys, enter the
Speed Dial number (00 to 99) that
is programmed with the destination.
Dest.1
OK to Add
b00 DEF COMPANY
2
Note
❒ When a name is stored for the
destination, the name is displayed, and when no name is
stored, the fax number is displayed.
❒ If you want to enter another
destination, press the {OK} key
and repeat steps C and D above.
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Stop} key, and the display will
return to that in step B.
E Press the {Start} key.
DEF COMPANY
File No.001
P.001
Using Groups
You can store multiple destinations as
a single Group and simply specify a
particular Group.
You must store the destinations' fax
number in a Group beforehand.
Additionally, you can store destination names and a Group name in
Groups.
Limitation
❒ Quick Dials programmed with
Groups cannot be used for any other function.
❒ You cannot use Immediate Transmission to send Groups. You can
only use Memory Transmission.
20
Note
❒ To store, edit, or delete Groups, see
P.37 “Storing and Editing a Group of
Fax Numbers”.
❒ To check the contents of all
Groups, print the Group Dial list.
See Chapter 6, "Lists You Can Print
Out Yourself" in the Advanced
Features manual. The method for
specifying Groups differs according to the way they were programmed.
• When programmed in a Quick
Dial: Press the Quick Dial.
• When not programmed in a
Quick Dial: First, Program the
Group function in a User Function key. When you want to
specify a destination, press the
Group key, and then press the
Group number. (See Chapter 6,
"User Function Keys" in the Advanced Features manual.)
❒ You can program the Group function in User Function keys {F1} to
{F4}. (See Chapter 6, "User Function Keys" in the Advanced Features manual.)
When specifying a Group with a Quick
Dial
Make sure that the Memory indicator
is lit, and if it is not lit, press the {Memory} key to light it.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Carefully
place your fax document into the auto document
feeder and select any settings you
require.
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Enter Fax Number
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 21 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Dialing
C Press the Quick Dial that is programmed with the destination.
Dest.1
OK to Add
a01:Gp.D1 GROUP 1
Note
❒ If you want to specify another
Group, press the {OK} key, and
then repeat step C above.
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key, and the display will
return to that in step B.
D Press the {Start} key.
Storing...Memory 99%
File No.001
P.001
When specifying a Group with the Group
key
Confirm that the Memory indicator is
not lit, and if it is not lit, press the
{Memory} key to light it.
C Press the User Function key pro-
grammed with the Group function.
Group Dial:Enter No.
[Gp.D_]
D Enter the Group number (1 to 7)
2
with the number keys.
Dest.1
OK to Add
G1 GROUP 1
Note
❒ If you want to specify another
Group, press the {OK} key, and
then repeat step C above.
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key, and the display will
return to that in step B.
E Press the {Start} key.
Storing...Memory 99%
File No.001
P.001
Note
❒ Before using the {Group} key, you
must program the Group function
in a User Function key. (See Chapter 6, "User Function Keys" in the
Advanced Features manual.)
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Carefully
place your fax document into the auto document
feeder and select any settings you
require.
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Enter Fax Number
21
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 22 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Faxing
Reception Modes
The machine can treat incoming fax
documents and telephone calls in two
ways.
❖ Manual Receive
Use this mode if your line is shared
by a fax machine and a telephone
but you wish to answer all calls
yourself and decide whether they
are fax documents or telephone
calls. You must manually hit the
{Start} key to receive a fax.
The machine will ring continuously until you answer the call, so you
have to be near the machine at all
times. The Manual Receive indicator is lit when the machine is in this
mode.
2
❖ Auto Receive
Use this mode if you have a dedicated fax line. The machine assumes all calls are fax documents.
It will ring once to alert you of an
incoming call, and then starts receiving.
Reference
To receive Internet Fax documents,
see Chapter 2, "Reception" in the
NIC FAX KIT manual.
22
How to Select the Reception
Mode
The Manual Receive indicator is lit
when the machine is in Manual Receive mode. To switch to a different
mode, follow the steps below.
A Press the {Reception Mode} key.
Reception Mode hi/OK
[Auto Sense]
B Press 0 or 1 to select the reception mode.
Reception Mode hi/OK
Manual Receive
C Press the {OK} key.
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Set Orig./ Enter No.
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 23 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
3. Setup
Initial Settings and Adjustments
If you have not already the initial procedure (or if you need to change the
initial settings), you must enter a few
settings and make a few adjustments
before connecting your machine to
the telephone line.
❖ Own Name
This should be your name or company name, in 20 characters or less.
During communication, if the other party's fax machine supports
Own Name, this replaces the Own
Fax Number that follows. This
name will appear on the display of
the other party's Fax machine, and
the name registered on that machine will appear on yours.
Limitation
❒ The registered name will not be
used unless the other party has
a same machine of the same
make that supports the Own
Name feature.
❖ Fax Header
This is ordinarily the telephone
number of the line your machine is
connected to. Your fax header can
be up to 32 characters long, and is
printed on the header of every
page you send. In the United
States, a fax header containing the
telephone number is required by
law.
❖ Own Fax Number (Required by international law)
This is your fax machine's phone
number, which must include country and area codes, in 20 characters
or less. During any communication, your Own Fax Number appears on their display. (Conversely
their Own Fax Number appears on
your display.)
Important
❒ When sending a fax, your Own Fax
Number is required by international law. You cannot legally connect a fax machine to the telephone
system if the Own Fax Number is
not programmed. Further, the Fax
Header and the date and time of
transmission must be included in
the header of all pages faxed to,
from, or within the United States.
Note
❒ You can confirm the Own Name,
Fax Header, and Own Fax Number
settings in the User Parameters
List.
❒ In order to send and receive documents using the Internet Fax feature, you must have your network
administrator make E-mail server
settings and configure the fax machine for connection to your LAN.
See Chapter 1, "Getting Ready" in
the NIC FAX KIT manual.
23
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 24 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Setup
E Press the {OK} key.
Initial Settings
During the course of this procedure
you will have to enter letters and other characters.
Use the number keys to enter numbers. Use Quick Dial keys for entering
letters, the {OK} key to accept a character, the {Space} or {Symbol} key
(depending on your fax machine's
configuration) to enter spaces, and
the {Symbol} key to enter symbols
(P.46 “Entering Characters”).
3
Note
❒ Make sure the machine is in standby mode before making the following settings.
Storing and Editing Programmed Data
The following procedure describes
how to make initial settings.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
B Press 0 or 1 to display "3. Setup".
User Tools Main Menu
3.Setup
hi
C Press the {OK} key.
hi
F Press the {OK} key.
Own Name[ABC]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
G Enter your Own Name.
Own Name[ABC]
OK
MAIN OFFICE_kkkkkkkk
Note
❒ If you want to erase a character
of the name, press the {Clear}
key.
H Press the {OK} key.
Your Own Name is programmed.
Fax Information:
1.Own Name
hi
formation".
Setup:
4.Fax Information hi
hi
I Press 0 or 1 to display "2. Fax
Header".
Fax Information:
2.Fax Header
D Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Fax In-
24
Fax Information:
1.Own Name
Reference
P.46 “Entering Characters”
A Press the {User Tools} key.
Setup:
1.Monitor Volume
Confirm that "1. Own Name" is
displayed.
hi
J Press the {OK} key.
The programmed Own Name is
displayed.
Header[ABC]
OK
MAIN OFFICEkkkkkkkkk
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 25 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Initial Settings and Adjustments
K Enter your Fax Header.
P Press the {OK} key.
If your Fax Header is the same as
your Own Name, go to step L.
Header[ABC]
OK
MAIN OFFICEkkkkkkkkk
L Press the {OK} key.
hi
key to return to standby display.
3
Deleting Programmed Data
hi
M Press 0 or 1 to display "3. Own
Fax Number".
Fax Information:
3.Own Fax Number
Fax Information:
3.Own Fax Number
Q Press the {User Tools}
Your Fax Header is programmed.
Fax Information:
2.Fax Header
Your Own Fax Number is programmed.
hi
N Press the {OK} key.
Fax Number
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
O Enter your Own Fax Number.
Fax Number
OK
0123456789_kkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ The format of the number is
normally as follows: International Dial Prefix, Your Country
Code, Your Area Code (do not
insert a pause after your Area
Code), followed by your telephone number. Check the International Dialing Prefix and the
Country Code with your local
telecommunications operator.
Characters you can enter include
numerals 0-9, plus signs (+), and
spaces.
The following procedure describes
how to delete programmed data.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
B Press 0 or 1 to display "3. Setup".
User Tools Main Menu
3.Setup
hi
C Press the {OK} key.
Setup:
1.Monitor Volume
hi
D Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Fax Information".
Setup:
4.Fax Information hi
E Press the {OK} key.
Fax Information:
1.Own Name
hi
25
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 26 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Setup
F Press 0 or 1 to display the item
you want to delete.
Fax Information:
3.Own Fax Number
hi
G Press the {OK} key.
Fax Number
OK
0123456789kkkkkkkkkk
3
H Press the {Clear} key.
Fax Number
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
I Press the {OK} key.
The programmed information is
deleted.
Fax Information:
3.Own Fax Number
J Press the {User Tools}
turn to standby mode.
26
hi
key to re-
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 27 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Storing and Editing Fax Numbers
Storing and Editing Fax Numbers
You can store numbers that you often
use in the machine's memory. A
stored number will remain in memory even if the power is cut.
You can store numbers in two ways.
❖ Quick Dials
Each fax number is assigned to its
own key. To dial that number, just
press the key. You can store up to
30 numbers in this way.
❖ Speed Dials
The number is given a two-digit
code. To dial the number, press the
{Speed Dial} key and enter the
code. There are 100 Speed Dial
codes available, numbered 00 to
99.
Reference
You can also program E-mail addresses as Quick Dials, Speed Dials, and Group Dials. See Chapter
4, "Registering E-mail Addresses"
and Chapter 5, "Address Book
(Quick Dial, Speed Dial, Group Dial)" in the NIC FAX KIT manual.
Storing Quick Dial Numbers
The following procedure describes how
to store fax numbers in Quick Dial keys.
Limitation
❒ You cannot store fax numbers in
Quick Dials used for groups and
programs.
3
Note
❒ The combined total number of fax
numbers that can be stored is 30.
❒ Maximum number of digits per fax
number: 254
❒ Maximum number of characters
per name: 20
❒ You can confirm fax numbers
stored in Quick Dials on the Quick
Dial List (See Chapter 6, "Printing
Dial Lists" in the Advanced Features manual).
❒ You can print a Quick Dial label
showing the contents of each
Quick Dial (See Chapter 6, "Printing a Quick Dial Label" in the Advanced Features manual).
❒ You can use the Quick Dial keys to
store individual fax numbers, or to
register functions such as groups,
programs, and auto documents.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
27
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 28 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Setup
B Press the {OK} key.
Program / Delete:
1.Prog. Quick Dialhi
Confirm that "1. Prog. Quick Dial"
is displayed.
C Press the {OK} key.
Press Key to Program
(Browsehi)
3
D Display the number of the Quick
Dial key you want to store.
Press a Quick Dial key, or search
using 0 or 1.
a01
Fax No.
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ If a Quick Dial has already been
stored, the contents are displayed.
Press 0 or 1 to select a Quick
Dial that is not programmed, then
press the {OK} key.
E Enter
the fax number with the
number keys.
a01
Press OK
9876543210_kkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ If you want to erase a digit of the
number, press the {Clear} key.
❒ If you press the {Pause/Redial}
key, the last 10 fax numbers dialed are displayed. Press 0 or
1 to select the fax number you
want to specify, and then press
the {OK} key.
28
❒ Make sure a Dial Option is stored
in one of the User Function keys,
and then enter the other party's fax
number and press the User Function key that contains the Dial Option. You can specify SUB or SEP,
SID, PWD, and sub-addresses (See
Chapter 3, "Dial Options" in the
Advanced Features manual).
F Press the {OK} key.
The fax number is programmed.
a01[ABC]
Name
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
G Enter the name.
a01[ABC]
OK
ABC COMPANY_kkkkkkkk
H Press the {OK} key.
The name is programmed.
Note
❒ When the optional G4 unit is installed, "G3/G4: Select" is displayed. Press 0 or 1 to select G3
or G4, and then press the {OK} key.
Label Insert:
Yes
[No]
hi/OK
I Press 0 or 1 to select either "Yes"
or "No".
Note
❒ Label insertion allows the receiver's
name that is programmed in Quick
Dial or Speed Dial to be printed on
the fax when it is received at the
other end. See Chapter 3, "Label Insertion" in the Advanced Features
manual.
Label Insert:
[Yes]
No
hi/OK
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 29 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Storing and Editing Fax Numbers
J Press the {OK} key.
Program / Delete:
1.Prog. Quick Dialhi
If you want to store another Quick
Dial, go to step C.
K Press the {User Tools}
key to return to the standby mode.
Editing Quick Dial Numbers
The following procedure describes
how to edit fax numbers stored in
Quick Dial keys.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
B Press the {OK} key.
Program / Delete:
1.Prog. Quick Dialhi
Confirm that "1. Prog. Quick Dial"
is displayed.
C Press the {OK} key.
Press Key to Program
(Browsehi)
D Display the Quick Dial key you
want to edit.
Press a Quick Dial key or search
using 0 or 1.
Program?
hi/OK
a01 ABC COMPANY
E Press the {OK} key.
3
a01
Press OK
9876543210kkkkkkkkkk
F Press the {Clear} key and enter the
new number.
a01
Press OK
5432109876_kkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ The previously entered fax number flashes. Pressing the {Clear}
key deletes all digits of the number. If you want to delete a single
digit, press 0 or 1 to move the
cursor to the digit to be deleted,
then press the {Clear} key.
❒ If you do not want to change the
number, go to step G.
❒ After programming a user function
key with a Dial Option and registering a fax number, you can press that
key and program the SUB, SEP,
SID, PWD, or sub-address.
G Press the {OK} key.
The fax number is changed.
a01[ABC]
/OK
ABC COMPANYkkkkkkkkk
29
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 30 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Setup
H Enter the name.
K Press the {OK} key.
a01[ABC]
OK
DEF COMPANY_kkkkkkkk
Note
❒ If you do not want to change the
name, go to step I.
❒ The previously entered name
flashes. Pressing the {Clear} key
deletes all characters of the name.
If you want to delete a single character, press 0 or 1 to move the
cursor to the character to be deleted, then press the {Clear} key.
3
I Press the {OK} key.
hi/OK
Note
❒ When the optional G4 unit is installed, "G3/G4: Select" is displayed. Press 0 or 1 to select
G3 or G4, then press the {OK}
key.
J Press 0
or 1 to select "Yes" or
"No".
Note
❒ Label insertion allows the receiver's name that is program m ed in Quick Dial o r
Speed Dial to be printed on the
fax when it is received at the
other end. See Chapter 3, "Label
Insertion" in the Advanced Features manual.
Label Insert:
Yes
[No]
30
If you want to edit another Quick
Dial, go to step C.
L Press the {User Tools}
key to re-
turn to standby mode.
Deleting Quick Dial Numbers
The following procedure describes
how to delete fax numbers stored in
Quick Dial keys.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
The name is changed.
Label Insert:
[Yes]
No
Program / Delete:
1.Prog. Quick Dialhi
hi/OK
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "2. Del.
Quick Dial".
Program / Delete:
2.Del. Quick Dial hi
D Press the {OK} key.
Press Key to Delete
(Browsehi)
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 31 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Storing and Editing Fax Numbers
E Display the Quick Dial key that
you want to delete.
Press a Quick Dial key or search by
pressing 0 or 1.
Delete?
hi/OK
a01 ABC COMPANY
The number of the Quick Dial key
and the fax number or name are
displayed.
F Press the {OK} key.
The stored data (fax number and
name) is deleted.
Program / Delete:
2.Del. Quick Dial hi
If you want to delete another
Quick Dial key, go to step D.
G Press the {User Tools}
turn to standby mode.
key to re-
Printing a Quick Dial Key Label
To print a template that can be used to
make labels for Quick Dial keys, perform the following procedure.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
B Press 0 or 1 to display "2. Reports / Lists".
3
User Tools Main Menu
2.Reports / Lists hi
C Press the {OK} key.
D Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Quick
Dial Label".
Reports / Lists
4.Quick Dial Labelhi
E Press the {OK} key.
F Press the {Start} key.
The Quick Dial label is printed.
Once the label is printed, the machine returns to the standby mode.
31
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 32 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Setup
Quick Dial Key Labels
The Quick Dial key label will have the destination, Group, Program, or Auto
Document name programmed in Quick Dials.
Note
❒ A protective transparent film is attached to the operation panel. Peel off the
film and place the Quick Dial key labels onto the operation panel.
GFWTLB0N.eps
P. 1
***
3
QUICK KEY LABEL ( FEB. 1. 2001 9:13AM )
Time printed
***
FAX HEADER: ABC COMPANY
01:
abc com
pany
02:
03:
BCD. com cde com
pany
pany
04:
05:
06:
07:
08:
09:
10:
Group 1
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
MAP
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:
Printout of Quick Dial numbers assigned to keys,
including programmed names (up to 20 characters)
01:
02:
03:
04:
05:
06:
07:
08:
09:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:
Labels without printed names. (Write in names yourself.)
abc comp BCD. comp cde comp
any
any
any
Group 1
MAP
PLEASE CUT THE SHEET INTO THREE LABELS ALONG THE DOTTED LINE,
AND PUT LABELS ON THE QUICK DIAL PANEL.
Printout of Quick Dial numbers assigned to keys, including programmed names (up to 16 characters)
GFWTLB0N
32
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 33 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Storing and Editing Fax Numbers
Storing Speed Dial Numbers
If you store numbers in Speed Dials,
you can specify the fax number simply
by pressing the {Speed Dial} key, and entering a two-digit Speed Dial number.
The following procedure describes
how to store fax numbers in Speed
Dials.
Note
❒ The combined total number of
Speed Dial numbers that can be
stored is 100.
❒ You can specify numbers from 00 to 99.
❒ The maximum number of digits
per fax number is 254.
❒ The maximum number of characters per name is 20.
❒ You can confirm the contents of
Speed Dial numbers in the Speed
Dial list. (See Chapter 6, "Printing
Dial Lists" in the Advanced Features manual.)
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "3. Prog.
Speed Dial".
Program / Delete:
3.Prog. Speed Dialhi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Display the number of the Speed
Dial you want to store (00 to 99).
Enter the Speed Dial number with
the number keys, or search using
0 or 1.
b01
Fax No.
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ If you want to delete a digit of
the number, press the {Clear}
key and enter the correct number.
❒ If a Speed Dial number has already been stored, the contents
are displayed. Press 0 or 1 to
select an unprogrammed number, then press the {OK} key.
3
F Enter
the fax number with the
number keys.
b00
Press OK
5432109876_kkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ If you want to delete a digit of
the number, press the {Clear}
key.
G Press the {OK} key.
The fax number is programmed.
b00[ABC]
Name
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
H Enter the name.
b00[ABC]
OK
DEF COMPANY_kkkkkkkk
Enter No.to Program
[b_k]
(Browsehi)
33
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 34 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Setup
I Press the {OK} key.
The name is programmed.
Label Insert:
Yes
[No]
hi/OK
Note
❒ When the optional G4 unit is installed, "G3/G4: Select" is displayed. Press 0 or 1 to select
G3 or G4, and then press the
{OK} key.
3
J Press 0
or 1 to select "Yes" or
"No".
Note
❒ Label insertion allows the receiver's name that is program m ed in Quick Dial o r
Speed Dial to be printed on the
fax when it is received at the
other end. See Chapter 3, "Label
Insertion" in the Advanced Features manual.
Label Insert:
[Yes]
No
hi/OK
K Press the {OK} key.
Program / Delete:
3.Prog. Speed Dialhi
If you want to store another Speed
Dial number, go to step D.
L Press the {User Tools}
turn to standby mode.
34
key to re-
Editing Speed Dial Numbers
The following procedure describes
how to edit programmed Speed Dial
numbers.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "3. Prog.
Speed Dial".
Program / Delete:
3.Prog. Speed Dialhi
D Press the {OK} key.
Enter No.to Program
[b_k]
(Browsehi)
E Display the Speed Dial number
you want to edit (00 to 99).
Enter the Speed Dial number with
the number keys or search using 0
or 1.
Program?
hi/OK
b00 DEF COMPANY
Note
❒ If you want to delete a digit of
the number, press the {Clear}
key and enter the correct number.
❒ The Speed Dial number and the
fax number or name are displayed.
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 35 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Storing and Editing Fax Numbers
F Press the {OK} key.
b00
Press OK
5432109876kkkkkkkkkk
G Press the {Clear} key and enter the
fax number.
b00
Press OK
9876543210_kkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ If you do not want to change the
number, press the {OK} key and
go to step I.
❒ If you want to erase a digit of
the number, press the {Clear}
key.
H Press the {OK} key.
The fax number is changed.
b00[ABC]
/OK
DEF COMPANYkkkkkkkkk
I Enter the name.
b00[ABC]
OK
ABC COMPANY_kkkkkkkk
Note
❒ The previously entered name
flashes. Pressing the {Clear} key
deletes all characters of the
name. If you want to delete a
single character, press 0 or 1
to move the cursor to the character to be deleted, then press
the {Clear} key.
J Press the {OK} key.
The name is changed.
Note
❒ When the optional G4 unit is installed, "G3/G4: Select" is displayed. Press 0 or 1 to select
G3 or G4, and then press the
{OK} key.
Label Insert:
[Yes]
No
3
hi/OK
K Press 0 or 1 keys to select "Yes"
or "No".
Note
❒ Label insertion allows the receiver's name that is program m ed in Qu ic k Dial or
Speed Dial to be printed on the
fax when it is received at the
other end. See Chapter 3, "Label
Insertion" in the Advanced Features manual.
Label Insert:
Yes
[No]
hi/OK
L Press the {OK} key.
Program / Delete:
3.Prog. Speed Dialhi
If you want to edit another name,
go to step D.
M Press the {User Tools}
key to re-
turn to standby mode.
35
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 36 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Setup
Deleting Speed Dial Numbers
The following procedure describes
how to delete fax numbers in Speed
Dials.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
3
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Del.
Speed Dial".
Program / Delete:
4.Del. Speed Dial hi
D Press the {OK} key.
Enter No. to Delete
[b_k]
(Browsehi)
E Display the Speed Dial number
you want to delete (00 to 99).
Enter the Speed Dial number with
the number keys or search using 0
or 1.
Delete?
hi/OK
b00 DEF COMPANY
The Speed Dial number and the fax
number or name are displayed.
Note
❒ If you want to delete a digit of
the number, press the {Clear}
key and enter the correct number.
36
F Press the {OK} key.
The programmed data (fax number and name) is deleted.
Program / Delete:
4.Del. Speed Dial hi
If you want to delete another
name, go to step D.
G Press the {User Tools}
turn to standby mode.
key to re-
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 37 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Storing and Editing a Group of Fax Numbers
Storing and Editing a Group of Fax
Numbers
If you regularly broadcast documents
to the same set of destinations, you
can combine these numbers into a
group. Then just select the group and
each number will be dialed in sequence automatically.
There are two ways of programming
Groups:
❖ Programming groups in Quick Dial
keys
If you program a group in a Quick
Dial key, you can specify that
group by pressing a Quick Dial
key. However, if you use Quick
Dial keys to program groups, you
will be able to program fewer
Quick Dial keys .
Limitation
❒ You cannot store another function (Quick Dials, Auto Documents, or Programs) in a Quick
Dial key already used for a
group. Also, you cannot store
groups in a Quick Dial key already used for another function.
❖ Programming groups in the {Group}
key
To program a group in the {Group}
key, you must firstassign the
Group feature to a Function key.
To send a fax, press the {Group}
key, and then enter the group
number (1 to 7).
Storing a Group of Fax
Numbers
You can register the following items
in a Group:
• Destination fax numbers
• Group name (up to 20 characters)
You can enter destination numbers by
Quick Dial keys, Speed Dials, or the
number keys.
3
Note
❒ You can register up to 7 Groups
with 140 numbers each.
❒ The combined maximum number
of destinations you can register in
all Groups is 129. This 129 can be
composed of up to 30 Quick Dial
numbers, 50 Speed Dial numbers
and 49 numbers entered directly
with the number keys.
❒ The number of destinations that
can be registered with the number
keys depends on how the machine
is used. In theory you can register
up to a combined maximum of 76
destinations with the number keys
for all groups. However, if you
register 76 items with the number
keys, Memory Transmission becomes unavailable, only register
up to 75 items with the number
keys.
❒ If you register the same destination
more than once with a Speed Dial or
Quick Dial in Groups, it is only counted as one item. However, if you register two or more identical destinations
with the ten keys they will be counted
as two or more items.
37
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 38 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Setup
Quick Dial: [01], [03], [05]
Quick Dial: [01], [05]
Speed Dial: [01], [02], [08]
Ten Key: 0312345678,
0451119999
Group1
Group2
10 numbers
Ten Key: 0312345678
Registered items
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "5. Prog.
Group Dial".
Program / Delete:
5.Prog. Group Dialhi
D Press the {OK} key.
Enter No./ Press Key
[Gp.D_]
(Browsehi)
E Display the number of the group
you want to store (1 to 7).
Enter the group number with the
number keys, or search using 0 or
1.
Gp.D1:#1
Fax No.
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Quick Dial: [01], [02], [03]
Speed Dial: [01], [02], [03]
Ten Key: 0312345678
Quick Dial: [04], [05]
Speed Dial: [04], [05], [06]
Ten Key: 0312345678,
0451119999
❒ This section describes how to program a Group.
38
A Press the {User Tools} key.
Speed Dial: [01], [02], [10]
Total Numbers
Group 2
Group 1
Registered items
14 numbers
3
Total Numbers
❒ If all destinations are different, you
may not be able to store 140 destinations in a Group.
❒ It is recommended that you print
the Group Dial list and keep it
when you register or change destinations. See Chapter 6, "Printing
Dial Lists" in the Advanced Features manual.
❒ How to count numbers.
Note
❒ If a group has already been
stored, the contents are displayed. Press 0 or 1 to select a
group number that is not programmed, then press the {OK}
key.
❒ If a group is programmed, but
no name is specified, the group
number only is displayed on the
lower line of the display.
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 39 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Storing and Editing a Group of Fax Numbers
F Specify the destination using one
of the following three methods:
Enter the fax number with the
number keys.
Gp.D1:#1
Press OK
0123456789_kkkkkkkkk
Gp.D1:#1
Press OK
a01 ABC COMPANY
Press the {Speed Dial} key and enter a Speed Dial number.
Gp.D1:#1
Press OK
b00 DEF COMPANY
Note
❒ If you specify a Quick Dial or
Sp eed Dial that is not programmed, "This key is Not
Programmed" is displayed. Respecify the destination.
G Press the {OK} key.
The destination is programmed.
H Press the 0 or 1 to select "Add"
or "Exit".
K Enter the group name.
If you do not want to program a
group name, press the {OK} key
and go to step M.
3
Note
❒ If you want to delete a character
of the name, press the {Clear}
key.
L Press the {OK} key.
The group name is programmed.
Assign to Key? hi/OK
Yes
[No]
M Press 0
or 1 to select "Yes" or
"No" to be programmed in the
Quick Dial.
Assign to Key? hi/OK
[Yes]
No
N Press the {OK} key.
If you selected "No", go to step Q.
hi/OK
Exit
Note
❒ When the optional G4 unit is installed, "G3/G4: Select" is displayed. Press 0 or 1 to select
G3 or G4, and then press the
{OK} key.
I Press the {OK} key.
destination.
Gp.D1[ABC]
Name
Group A_kkkkkkkkkkkk
Press a Quick Dial key.
Program?
[Add] Delete
J Repeat steps F to I and program a
Press Quick Dial Key
[a_k]
O Press
the Quick Dial key you
want to program.
Press Quick Dial Key
[a02]
If you selected "Exit", go to step K.
39
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 40 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Setup
P Press the {OK} key.
D Press the {OK} key.
Program / Delete:
5.Prog. Group Dialhi
Q Press the {User Tools}
key to re-
turn to standby mode.
Editing a Group
3
You can add destinations or edit the
group name for programmed groups.
To edit a destination:
• For destinations programmed in
Quick Dials or Speed Dial, edit the
contents of the programmed Quick
Dial or Speed Dial.
• For destinations programmed with
the number keys, delete the destination you want to edit from the
group, and then program the new
destination.
Editing a Group Name
The following procedure describes
how to edit a group name.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
Confirm that "1. Program/Delete"
is displayed.
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "5. Prog.
Group Dial".
Program / Delete:
5.Prog. Group Dialhi
40
Enter No./ Press Key
[Gp.D_]
(Browsehi)
E Display the number of the group
you want to edit (1 to 7).
Enter the group number with the
number keys, or search using 0 or 1.
Program?
Gp.D1 Group A
hi/OK
F Press the {OK} key.
Change Dest.?: hi/OK
[Yes]
No
G Press 0 or 1 to select "No".
Change Dest.?: hi/OK
Yes
[No]
H Press the {OK} key.
Gp.D1[ABC]
/OK
Group Akkkkkkkkkkkkk
I Press the {Clear} key and enter the
new name.
Gp.D1[ABC]
OK
Group B_kkkkkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ If you want to delete a character
of the name, press the {Clear}
key.
❒ If you press the {Cancel} key,
the display will return to that
shown for step C.
❒ If you are finished, press the
{User Tools} key.
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 41 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Storing and Editing a Group of Fax Numbers
J Press the {OK} key.
Adding a Fax Number to a Group
The name is changed.
Assign to Key? hi/OK
Yes
[No]
K Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes" if the
gr ou p w as p rog rammed in a
Quick Dial, or select "No" if it was
not.
Assign to Key? hi/OK
[Yes]
No
L Press the {OK} key.
Press Quick Dial Key
[a02]
Note
❒ If you want to edit a programmed Quick Dial key, press
the Quick Dial key and then the
{OK} key.
M Press the {OK} key.
Program / Delete:
5.Prog. Group Dialhi
If you want to program another
group name, go to step D.
turn to standby mode.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
3
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "5. Prog.
Group Dial".
If you selected "No" ,go to step N .
N Press the {User Tools}
The following procedure describes
how to add a destination to a group.
key to re-
Program / Delete:
5.Prog. Group Dialhi
D Press the {OK} key.
Enter No./ Press Key
[Gp.D_]
(Browsehi)
E Display the number of the group
to which you want to add a number (1 to 7).
Enter the group number with the
number keys, or search using 0 or
1.
Program?
Gp.D1 Group A
hi/OK
F Press the {OK} key.
Change Dest.?: hi/OK
[Yes]
No
41
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 42 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Setup
G Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes" and
press the {OK} key.
Program?
[Add] Delete
The destination is added.
hi/OK
Exit
Note
❒ If you have finished adding destinations, select "Exit" and go to
step L.
3
H Press 0 or 1 to select "Add" and
press the {OK} key.
Gp.D1:#5
Fax No.
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
I Specify the destination using one
of the following three methods:
Enter the fax number with the
number keys.
Gp.D1:#5
Press OK
0123456789_kkkkkkkkk
Press a Quick Dial key.
Gp.D1:#5
Press OK
a01 ABC COMPANY
Press the {User Tools} key and enter a Speed Dial number.
Gp.D1:#5
Press OK
b00 DEF COMPANY
Note
❒ If you specify a Quick Dial or
Sp eed Dial that is not programmed, "This key is Not
Programmed" is displayed. Respecify the destination.
42
J Press the {OK} key.
Note
❒ When the optional G4 unit is installed, "G3/G4: Select" is displayed. Press 0 or 1 to select
G3 or G4, and then press the
{OK} key.
K To
add another destination, repeat steps G to J.
L If you have finished adding destinations, select "Exit".
Program?
hi/OK
Add Delete [Exit]
M Press the {OK} key.
Gp.D1[ABC]
/OK
Group Akkkkkkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ If you want to change the group
name, press the {Clear} key and
enter the new name.
N Press the {OK} key.
Assign to Key? hi/OK
Yes
[No]
O Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes" if the
g rou p was p rog rammed in a
Quick Dial, or select "No" if it was
not.
Assign to Key? hi/OK
[Yes]
No
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 43 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Storing and Editing a Group of Fax Numbers
P Press the {OK} key.
If you selected "No", go to step Q.
Press Quick Dial Key
[a02]
Note
❒ If you want to edit a programmed
Quick Dial, press the Quick Dial,
and then the {OK} key.
Q Press the {OK} key.
If you want to add another destination to the group, go to step D.
key to re-
turn to standby mode.
Deleting a Group
The following procedure describes
how to delete a destination from a
group.
• When you delete a destination
from a group programmed in a
Quick Dial or a Speed Dial, the
contents of the Quick Dial or Speed
Dial are not deleted.
To delete a destination from a group
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
B Press the {OK} key.
Group Dial".
Program / Delete:
5.Prog. Group Dialhi
D Press the {OK} key.
Enter No./ Press Key
[Gp.D_]
(Browsehi)
3
E Display the group number for the
Program / Delete:
5.Prog. Group Dialhi
R Press the {User Tools}
C Press 0 or 1 to display "5. Prog.
destination you want to delete (1
to 7).
Enter the group number with the
number keys, or search using 0 or
1.
Program?
Gp.D1 Group A
hi/OK
F Press the {OK} key.
Change Dest.?: hi/OK
[Yes]
No
G Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes" and
press the {OK} key.
Program?
[Add] Delete
hi/OK
Exit
H Press 0
or 1 to select "Delete"
and press the {OK} key.
Select Destination
withhi
I Press 0 or 1 to display the destination you want to delete.
Delete?
hi/OK
a01 ABC COMPANY
43
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 44 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Setup
J
Press the {OK} key.
To erase an entire group
Program?
hi/OK
Add [Delete] Exit
A Press the {User Tools} key.
K To delete another destination, re-
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
L If you are finished deleting desti-
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
peat steps H to J.
nations, press 0 or 1 to select "Exit", and then press the {OK} key.
3
Gp.D1[ABC]
/OK
Group Akkkkkkkkkkkkk
M Press the {OK} key.
N Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes" if the
group was programmed in a Quick
Dial, or select "No" if it was not.
O Press the {OK} key.
If you selected "No", go to step Q.
Press Quick Dial Key
[a02]
Note
❒ If you want to edit a programmed
Quick Dial key, press the Quick
Dial key and then the {OK} key.
P Press
the {OK} key to return to
standby mode.
Program / Delete:
5.Prog. Group Dialhi
If you want to delete another destination from the group, go to step D.
turn to standby mode.
44
Group Dial".
Program / Delete:
6.Del. Group Dial hi
Assign to Key? hi/OK
Yes
[No]
Q Press the {User Tools}
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "6. Del.
key to re-
D Press the {OK} key.
Enter No./ Press Key
[Gp.D_]
(Browsehi)
E Display the number of the group
you want to delete (1 to 7).
Enter the group number with the
number keys, or search using 0 or
1.
Delete?
Gp.D1 Group A
hi/OK
F Press the {OK} key.
The entire group is deleted.
Program / Delete:
6.Del. Group Dial hi
G Press the {User Tools}
key to return to standby display.
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 45 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Storing and Editing a Group of Fax Numbers
-To change and delete Quick
Dials programmed as groups:
To store an entire group under a different Quick Dial key, or to delete the
group from the Quick Dial key altogether, perform the following procedure:
A Press the {User Tools} key.
B Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
C Press the {OK} key, and then press
0 or 1 to display "5. Prog. Group
Dial".
D Press the {OK} key.
E Enter the group number (1 to 7).
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press 0 or 1 to select "No", and
then press the {OK} key.
H Press the {OK} key.
I If you want to change the Quick
Dial key, press "Yes", and if you
want to delete the Quick Dial key,
press "No".
J Press the {OK} key.
If you selected "No" in step I, the
Quick Dial key is deleted. Go to
step M.
K If you want to change the Quick
Dial key, press the new Quick Dial
key.
L Press the {OK} key.
The Quick Dial key is changed.
M Press the {User Tools} key to return
to standby mode.
3
45
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 46 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Setup
Entering Characters
Use the number keys to enter numbers. Use Quick Dial keys for entering
letters, and the {Symbols} key for entering symbols.
If at any time you make a mistake
when entering a character or digit,
press the {Clear} key to delete it. To
correct a character or number already
entered, use 0 or 1 to reach the mistake, enter the new character, and
then press the {Clear} key to delete
the mistaken character.
3
Note
❒ When Mail Address input is selected, you can enter the "@" symbol
and periods in E-mail addresses
with the Quick Dial keys. See
Chapter 1, "Operation Panel" in the
NIC FAX KIT manual.
❒ You can switch the character input
mode between uppercase letters
(ABC) and lowercase letters (abc)
by pressing the {ABC/abc} key. You
can input symbols regardless of
this mode.
❒ With the QWERTY keyboard layout, the {ABC/abc} key is key 21,
and with the ABC layout it is key
29. The {Symbol} key is key 30 with
both layouts.
Entering Symbols
A Press the {Symbol} key.
B Press 0 or 1 to scroll through the
symbols.
Note
❒ You can enter the following
symbols: – _ (space) . , ( ) / @ &
$!"'#*%+:;<=>?^[]`{|}∼
46
C Press the {OK} key.
Wild Card
Using wild cards, you can greatly enhance the effectiveness of the following features:
• Authorized Reception
• Memory Lock
• Multi-copy Reception
• Specified Cassette Selection
• Forwarding
In each of these features, you have to
store the Own Name or Own Fax
Number setting of the various terminals that you normally receive fax
documents from. Then, when your
machine detects an incoming call, it
checks the Own Name or Own Fax
Number setting of the other terminal
and acts accordingly.
When you use Own Name with these
features, you can program wild cards
to greatly expand the number of terminals that you can specify.
For example, if you wish to accept
documents from all 150 branches of
XYZ Company (using Authorized Reception), and forward them on to
head office (using Forwarding), you
do not have to store the Own Name of
each branch of XYZ Company. Program "XYZ" as a wild card for each of
these functions. If the Own Name settings of all XYZ branches contain
"XYZ", incoming documents from
those branches will be accepted and
sent on to the head office.
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 47 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Entering Characters
Note
❒ This feature cannot recognize
spaces. If you store MAN as a wild
card, and a terminal with an Own
Name including MANCHESTER,
HUMAN, or HUMANE calls you,
your machine will recognize MAN
as a wild card and accept and/or
forward the document.
Reference
See Chapter 7, "Authorized Reception" (switch 10, bit 7) in the Advanced Features manual.
3
See Chapter 7, "Forwarding" in the
Advanced Features manual.
Own Name and Own Fax Number,
see P.23 “Initial Settings and Adjustments”.
47
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 48 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Setup
3
48
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 49 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
4. Troubleshooting
Loading Paper in the Main Paper Cassette
The following procedure describes how
to load paper in the main paper cassette.
Important
❒ When loading paper, be careful
not to pinch your fingers inside the
machine.
B Lift up the cassette cover and remove it.
ZCKY470N.eps
❒ Before loading paper, make sure
that the machine is not outputting
a copy or received document.
Reference
For paper sizes, paper direction,
and the number of sheets that can
be loaded in the main paper cassette, see Chapter 11, "Document
and Paper Specifications" in the
Advanced Features manual.
C Remove any remaining paper.
ZCKY490N.eps
For information on how to load the
optional bypass feeder, see Chapter 9, "Loading Paper in the Opt i o n a l B y p as s F e e d e r " i n t h e
Advanced Features manual.
A Pull out the main paper cassette
and place it on a flat surface.
ZCKY180N.eps
D If the metal base plate is raised,
push it firmly down until it locks
into place.
ZCKY040N.eps
Note
❒ Remove any paper that may
have dropped inside the machine in the area vacated by the
paper cassette.
49
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 50 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Troubleshooting
E Prepare
a stack of blank paper.
For smoother operation, square
the edges by tapping the paper
stack on the bench.
G Replace the cassette cover.
ZCKY060N.eps
TSTS010N.eps
4
F Load the paper into the cassette.
ZCKY050N.eps
Note
❒ The frosted side of the cover
must be faceup when closed.
H Replace
the cassette. Push it in
firmly until it locks into place.
ZCKY230N.eps
Note
❒ Do not load paper above the paper level marks inside the cassette.
50
Note
❒ If you cannot close the cassette,
check that the metal base plate
is not raised.
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 51 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Adjusting the Volume and Sounds the Machine Makes
Adjusting the Volume and Sounds the
Machine Makes
You can change the beeper (monitor) volume for the following features:
On Hook
The sound that indicates on hook dialing.
Transmission
The sound that indicates transmission.
Reception
The sound that indicates reception.
Dialing
The sound that indicates dialing.
Key Tone
The sound that indicates a key being pressed.
Alarm
The sound that indicates something has gone wrong.
4
The following procedure describes how to adjust the volume for the above features.
Note
❒ Make sure that the machine is in standby mode.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
B Press 0 or 1 to display "3. Setup".
User Tools Main Menu
3.Setup
hi
C Press the {OK} key.
Confirm that "1. Monitor Volume" is displayed.
Setup:
1.Monitor Volume
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
Monitor Volume:
1.On Hook
hi
E Press 0 or 1 to select the item you want to adjust, and then press the {OK} key.
On Hook:
hi/OK
Low---l---High
51
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 52 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Troubleshooting
F Press 0 or 1 to adjust the volume.
On Hook:
hi/OK
Low-----l-High
G Press the {OK} key.
The volume is adjusted.
Monitor Volume:
1.On Hook
hi
If you want to adjust another item, repeat steps E to G.
H Press the {User Tools} key to return to standby mode.
4
52
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 53 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
If an Indicator Lights on the Operation Panel
If an Indicator Lights on the Operation
Panel
Whenever you see the file receive indicator or the alarm indicator light,
always read the document in the control panel display.
❖ The Receive File indicator is lit:
You have received a fax document
which is now stored in the machine. See Chapter 4, "Printing
Documents That Have Been Received into Memory (Substitute
Reception)"in the Advanced Features manual.
4
❖ The Communicating indicator is lit.
You are sending or receiving a fax.
See P.5 “Operation Panel”.
❖ The Alarm indicator flashes.
An error has occurred. Read the
message in the display and take
appropriate action. See P.5 “Operation Panel”.
53
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 54 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Troubleshooting
Communication Problems
If "Transmission Failed / OK" appears in the display: Press the {OK}
key.
Causes:
Transmission Failed
/OK
• A poor line caused the communication to fail.
• The line is noisy. Try to retransmit.
• The other machine is out of order.
Ask the other party to check their
machine.
4
54
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 55 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Clearing a Document Jam
Clearing a Document Jam
When an original is jammed, "Clear
Misfed Orig. Storing Stopped, /
OK" is displayed. Perform the follow-
ing procedure to solve the problem.
C Close
the operation panel completely. Make sure that it clicks
and locks into place.
ZCKY100N.eps
Note
❒ If copies, documents, or prints are
jammed, follow the procedure on
the next page.
A Open
the operation panel to an
angle of about 45°.
4
ZCKY080N.eps
B Remove the original.
ZCKY090N.eps
Important
❒ Do not pull out the document
without opening the operation
panel, or you will damage the
scanning mechanism.
55
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 56 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Troubleshooting
Clearing a Copy, Fax, or Print Jam
When "Clear Misfed Paper" is displayed, follow the procedure below
to solve the problem.
To clear original jams, see the previous page.
Important
❒ The transfer roller and surrounding area inside the machine becomes hot during printing. To
avoid injury when removing paper
jams, do not touch any parts other
than those specified in this manual.
4
Inside the Machine
A Pull the front cover release lever
towards you and open the front
cover.
Note
❒ If you do not pull the lever, only
the operation panel will open.
ZCKY120N.eps
Note
❒ If paper jams occur in the optional
second paper cassette or optional
bypass feeder. (See chapter 8,
"Clearing a Copy Fax, or Print Jam"
in the Advanced Features manual.).
ZCKY600N.eps
Print Delivery Tray
A Fold the tray up (1) and remove
any jammed paper (2).
ZCKY110N.eps
B Remove the toner cassette.
ZCKY130N.eps
56
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 57 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Clearing a Copy, Fax, or Print Jam
C Remove
F Push the front cover closed until
ZCKY140N.eps
ZCKY170N.eps
any jammed paper underneath.
D Replace
the toner cassette by
aligning it with the guide rails
and sliding it into place.
ZCKY150N.eps
you hear it lock into place.
4
Cassette Entrance
A Remove the main paper cassette
and place it on a flat surface.
ZCKY180N.eps
E Confirm that the toner casstte is
locked into position.
ZCKY160N.eps
B Lift the document delivery table
and remove any jammed paper
from inside the machine.
ZCKY200N.eps
57
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 58 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Troubleshooting
C Return the document delivery table to its original position.
ZCKY210N.eps
Upper Rear Unit
A Pull
the document table toward
the front of the machine.
ZCKY240N.eps
D Push down on the paper until you
4
hear the base plate lock into
place.
ZCKY900N.eps
B Open
the lower rear cover and
then upper rear cover as shown in
the illustration.
ZCKY250N.eps
E Replace the main paper cassette.
ZCKY230N.eps
C Remove any jammed paper.
ZCKY260N.eps
58
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 59 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Clearing a Copy, Fax, or Print Jam
D Close
the upper rear cover and
then the lo wer rear cover as
shown in the illustration.
ZCKY270N.eps
4
E Return the document table to its
original position.
59
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 60 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Troubleshooting
Error Messages
The following messages may appear while you are operating or programming
the machine.
Reference
See Chapter 6, "Error Messages" in the NIC FAX KIT manual for network errors that may occur when using Internet Fax.
Message
Problem/Solution
No Files Exist
No polling reception operations have been programmed.
There are no documents in memory waiting for transmission.
Incorrect file number. Check the file number and try again.
4
Cannot Combine:(currently selected function)
Appears when you attempt to select a function that cannot
be used in combination with another currently selected
function.
This Key is in Use as a
Group Dial
This Quick Dial Key has a Group stored in it.
This Key is in Use as a
Program
This Quick Dial Key has a Keystroke Program stored in it.
This Key is in Use as a
Quick Dial
This Quick Dial Key has a Quick Dial stored in it.
This Key is Not Programmed
Either:
• This Quick Dial Key does not contain a number.
• This Quick Dial Key does not contain a Keystroke Program.
This Speed Dial No. is
Not Programmed
This Speed Dial number does not contain a number.
This Dest. is Already
Selected
Either:
• This number is already included in this Group.
• The same destination was specified more than once.
60
Insert Pause "_" After
Area Code
You must add a pause after your area code when you input
your fax terminal's own telephone number.
Replace Toner
The toner cassette is empty. Install a new cassette.
Clear Misfed Orig.
A document is jammed in the feeder.
Clear Misfed Paper
Paper is jammed in the printer.
Close Front Cover
Close Rear Cover
A cover is not closed properly. Check that all covers are
closed.
Machine is in Use.
Please Wait.
Machine cannot print a list/file, because the plotter is not
ready.
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 61 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Error Messages
Message
Problem/Solution
Call Service.
Machine is out of order. Contact your service representative.
Check Paper Size. Press
OK to Correct.
The size of the installed paper does not match the currently
selected paper size.
Press the {OK} key, and then set the paper size or install the
appropriate paper.
This Dial is in Use.
Cannot Delete.
This Quick Dial is being used (such as for a Send Later
Transmission).
This Dial is in Use.
Cannot Change.
Some Page(s) are Blank
An almost entirely blank document was scanned. Check
your document.
Reset Toner Correctly
The toner cassette is not set correctly.
Toner is Almost Empty
The toner cassette is nearly empty.
Copy Mode Locked
Copy mode is disabled. Enable it with the User Parameters.
Change ADF Pad
Replace the ADF separation pad.
4
61
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 62 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Troubleshooting
Solutions to Common Problems
Problem
Required Action
STANDBY MODE
Nothing happens when the
switch is turned on.
Check the power cord. Is it properly plugged into the outlet?
"Set Orig. / Enter No."
is not displayed.
Switch the power on.
Plug it in firmly.
If the Power indicator does not light, check that the power
cord is plugged in.
If the Energy Saver indicator lights, press the Energy Saver
key.
The display does not show the
Ready condition, or the machine
stops during an operation.
4
Does "Clear Misfed Orig." or "Clear Misfed
Paper" appear in the display?
Clear the misfed paper.
Reference
See P.55 “Clearing a Document Jam” , and P.56 “Clearing a
Copy, Fax, or Print Jam”.
Does "Load Paper" appear in the display?
Load paper into the paper tray. See P.49 “Loading Paper in the
Main Paper Cassette”.
Does "Close Front Cover" or "Close Rear Cover" appear in the display?
Close all covers.
Is the Add Toner indicator on?
Load a new toner cassette.
TRANSMISSION
The original is not pulled into
the auto document feeder.
You did not feed the document far enough into the feeder.
Insert the document into the feeder until it stops.
Retransmit.
Do user maintenance, especially rollers (2) and (6). See the illustration in Chapter 9, "Cleaning the Rollers and Exposure
Glass" in the Advanced Features manual.
The telephone line is disconnected.
Check that the line is connected properly.
The telephone line type setting is incorrect.
Check the telephone line type setting.
The dialed number does not contain a PSTN access code or
a pause.
Include the outside line access number and a pause before
the telephone number.
62
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 63 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Solutions to Common Problems
Problem
Required Action
The original is not pulled into
the auto document feeder.
The dialed number did not have enough pauses between the
outside line access number and the telephone number.
Try adding more pauses after the outside line access number.
Frequent original misfeeds
(Multifeeds)
Incorrect positioning of originals. Position the document in
the feeder correctly. See P.11 “Memory Transmission”.
Incorrect alignment of originals. Align the edges of the document. See P.10 “Suitable Document Types”.
Curled pages. Flatten the document. See P.10 “Suitable Document Types”.
Incorrect document type. Use a proper document type. See
P.10 “Suitable Document Types”.
4
Mixed document types. The pages must all be of the same
type.
Static electricity on the originals. Shuffle the document. See
P.11 “Memory Transmission”.
Do user maintenance, especially rollers (2) and (6). See the illustration in Chapter 9, "Cleaning the Rollers and Exposure
Glass" in the Advanced Features manual.
Frequent original misfeeds
(Non-feeds)
Copier silicone oil on the originals. Wait a few minutes, then
try again.
Incorrect alignment of originals. Align the edges of the document. See P.11 “Memory Transmission”.
Curled pages
Flatten the document. See P.10 “Suitable Document Types”.
Incorrect document type. Use a proper document type. See
P.10 “Suitable Document Types”.
More than 50 pages in the feeder. Do not load more than 50
pages in the automatic document feeder at once.
Do user maintenance, especially rollers (2) and (6). See the illustration in Chapter 9, "Cleaning the Rollers and Exposure
Glass" in the Advanced Features manual.
Transmission cannot take place; The document is jammed in the feeder.
"Clear Misfed Orig." ap- Remove the jammed document. See P.55 “Clearing a Docupears.
ment Jam” .
The document may be longer than the maximum limit.
Make sure that none of your originals exceed this limit.
Do user maintenance, especially rollers (2) and (6). See the illustration in Chapter 9, "Cleaning the Rollers and Exposure
Glass" in the Advanced Features manual.
63
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 64 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Troubleshooting
Problem
Required Action
Transmission cannot take place.
The other machine is out of order.
Before taking action, wait until
the machine is in standby mode,
then press the {Stop} key.
Check the error report.
Ask the other party to check their machine and correct the
fault.
The line is noisy.
Check that the dial tone is sent out.
Try to retransmit.
Consistent difficulty in communicating with a particular terminal
Consistent poor image quality
when communicating with a
particular terminal
4
There are some bad lines between you and that other terminal.
Store that terminal's number as a Quick Dial Key or Speed
Dial Code.
Then call a service technician.
Inform them of the nature of the problem and give the Quick
Dial Key or Speed Dial Code that you stored the number in.
RECEPTION
The telephone keeps ringing and
no fax is printed.
You are in Manual Receive mode.
Change to Auto Receive mode. See P.22 “Reception Modes”.
Power is switched off.
Switch the power on.
RECEPTION/COPYING
No printout; the Add Paper indi- The cassettes are empty.
cator is lit.
Add Paper. See P.49 “Loading Paper in the Main Paper Cassette”.
No printout; Clear Misfed
Paper appears.
The printer has jammed.
Copies are blank.
The original must be placed facedown in the document feeder.
Clear the jam. See P.56 “Clearing a Copy, Fax, or Print Jam”.
Position the original correctly. See P.11 “Memory Transmission”.
Copy paper misfeeds occur frequently.
Is the proper paper in the paper cassette?
Paper size and weight must be within the standards set for
this machine.
Is folded, wrinkled, damp, or curled paper in the paper cassette?
Always use dry, undamaged paper.
Is the paper set properly in the paper cassette?
Always load paper correctly. See P.49 “Loading Paper in the
Main Paper Cassette”.
Make sure that there is not too much paper in the trays; do
not fill them up over the load limit mark.
64
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 65 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Solutions to Common Problems
Problem
Required Action
Copy paper misfeeds occur frequently.
Are there any pieces of misfed paper or other foreign objects
in the machine?
Make sure that the paper path is completely clear of paper
and other material after a misfeed.
Are you copying onto recycled paper?
Fan the stack of recycled paper and load it in the paper tray.
Stripes on copies.
The exposure glass is dirty.
Clean the exposure glass. See Chapter 9, "Cleaning the Rollers and Exposure Glass" in the Advanced Features manual.
TELEPHONING
You cannot receive phone calls;
the unit only rings once then
goes into receive mode.
You cannot receive phone calls;
the unit does not ring.
You are in Auto Receive mode.
4
Change to Manual Receive mode. See P.22 “Reception
Modes”.
The telephone line is not connected.
Connect the modular cord.
65
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 66 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
Troubleshooting
4
66
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 67 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
5. Appendix
Options
❖ PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE180 (Second Paper Cassette)
A second paper feed unit can be added to the base machine.
❖ BYPASS FEEDER TYPE180
A third paper feed unit can be added to the base machine.
❖ ADF MAINTENANCE KIT TYPE 210
This is a maintenance kit for the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).
❖ FAX EXPANSION CARD TYPE20
A 2-Mbyte memory card can be added.
❖ FAX EXPANSION CARD TYPE40
A 4-Mbyte memory card can be added.
❖ ISDN INTERFACE UNIT TYPE 190 (G4 Unit)
This allows you to send and receive using the ISDN (Integrated Service Digital Network).
❖ HANDSET TYPE 100
This allows you to dial fax numbers without having to use the operation panel.
❖ MECHANICAL COUNTER TYPE 210
This is a tamper-proof mechanical counter whose reading cannot be changed
by the user.
67
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 68 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
INDEX
A
E
Add Paper indicator, 5
Add Toner indicator, 5
Auto Document Feeder (ADF), 4
Editing
Fax Numbers, 27
Group, 40
Quick Dial Number, 29
Speed Dial Numbers, 34
{Energy Saver/3Clear Modes} key, 7
Entering
Characters, 46
Symbols, 46
Entering Numbers Directly, 17
Error Messages, 60
C
Canceling a Memory Transmission, 13
Before the start key is pressed, 13
During Transmission, 13
While the document is awaiting
transmission, 14
While the document is being scanned in, 13
Canceling an Immediate Transmission, 15
Before the start key is pressed, 15
While dialing or during transmission, 15
{Cancel} key, 6
Characters, 46
Entering, 46
CLEAR COPY, 56
Clearing a Jam, 56
Document, 55
Inside the machine, 56
{Clear} key, 6
Communication Problems, 54
Control panel display, 6
{Copy} key, 7
CSI → Own Fax Number, 23
F
Fax Header, 23
Faxing, 9
Front Cover, 4
Front Cover Release Lever, 4
G
G4 Interface Unit, 4
{G4} key, 6
Group, 20
Adding a Fax Number to, 41
Deleting, 43, 44
Deleting a Destination From, 43
Editing, 40
Specifying with Group key, 21
Specifying with Quick Dial, 20
Group Name, Editing, 40
Group of Fax Numbers, Storing, 37
D
Deleting
Quick Dial Numbers, 30
Speed Dial Numbers, 36
Dialing, 17
Document Delivery Tray, 3
Document Guide, 4
Document Jam, 55
Document Table, 4
H
{Help} key, 6
I
Immediate Transmission, 9, 14
Indicators
Check Display, 53
Manual Receive, 22
Memory, 11
Receive File, 53
Initial Settings, 23
Introduction, 3
68
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 69 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
J
{Job Information} key, 6
M
Main Paper Cassette, 3
Main Switch, 4
Manual Receive indicator, 22
Memory Card Cover, 4
{Memory} key, 6
Memory Transmission, 9, 11
N
Number keys, 7
O
{OK} key, 6
{On Hook Dial} key, 6
Operation Panel, 4, 5
Optional Bypass Feeder, 4
Optional Handset, 4
Optional Second Paper Cassette, 3
Own Fax Number (Required by
international law), 23
Own Name, 23
P
Paper, 49
Loading, 49
Part Names, 3
{Pause/Redial} key, 6
Pauses, Entering, 18
Print Delivery Tray, 3
Programmed Data
Deleting, 25
Storing and Editing, 24
Programming
Fax Header, 23
Fax Numbers, 27
Group, 37
Own Fax Number, 23
Own Name, 23
Quick Dial Numbers, 27
Speed Dial Numbers, 33
Q
Quick Dial, 18, 27
Quick Dial Key Labels, 31
{Quick Dial} keys, 6
Quick Dial Number
Deleting, 30
Editing, 29
Storing, 27
R
Rear Covers, 4
Receive File indicator, 5
Reception Mode
Auto Receive, 22
Manual Receive, 22
{Reception Mode} key, 6
Resolution, 16
{Resolution} key, 5
RTI → Own Name, 23
S
Scroll Keys, 6
Sending a Fax, 11
Solutions to Common Problems, 62
Speed Dial, 19, 33
Speed Dial Numbers
Deleting, 36
Editing, 34
Storing, 33
{Speed Dial/Tel Directory} key, 7
{Start} key, 7
Status Indicators, 6
{Stop} key, 7
Storing and Editing Fax Numbers, 27
Suitable Document Types, 10
Switching to Tone Signals, 18
Symbols, 8
Entering, 46
69
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 70 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
T
{p} (Tone) key, 7
Transmission
Immediate, 14
Memory, 11
Transmission Modes, 9
{Trans. Option} key, 6
Troubleshooting, 49
Clearing a Copy, Fax or Print Jam, 56
Clearing a Document Jam, 55
Common Problems, 62
Communication Problems, 54
Error Messages, 60
Indicators, 53
Loading Paper, 49
Volume Adjustment, 51
TTI → Fax Header, 23
U
User Function keys, 5
{User Tools} key, 6
V
Ventilation Port, 4
Volume Control, 51
W
While the document is being scanned in, 13
Wild Cards, 46
70
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 71 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
MEMO
71
Smt4EN-BasicNIC-F_FM.book Page 72 Thursday, September 14, 2000 7:56 PM
MEMO
72
UE
USA
H537
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 1 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
FAX3900L/3900NF
Operating Instructions
<Advanced Features>
ZCKH030N.eps
Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future
reference.
For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 1 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
15-5, Minami Aoyama 1-chome,
Minato-ku, Tokyo 107-8544, Japan
Phone: +81-(0)3-3479-3111
Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense
that may result from the use of parts other than recommended parts.
For good copy quality, Ricoh recommends that you use
genuine Ricoh toner.
TONER CASSETTES
RICOH FAX TONER CASSETTE TYPE 1135 BLACK( United
States ) is recommended for the best performance.
RICOH FAX TONER CASSETTE TYPE 1136 BLACK( Canada )
is recommended for the best performance.
Spain
RICOH ESPAÑA S.A.
Avda. Litoral Mar, 12-14,
08005 Barcelona
Phone: +34-(0)93-295-7600
The Netherlands
RICOH EUROPE B.V.
Groenelaan 3, 1186 AA, Amstelveen
Phone: +31-(0)20-5474111
Italy
RICOH ITALIA SpA
Via della Metallurgia 12,
37139 Verona
Phone: +39-045-8181500
United Kingdom
RICOH UK LTD.
Ricoh House,
1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham,
Middlesex, TW13 7HG
Phone: +44-(0)20-8261-4000
Germany
RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Mergenthalerallee 38-40,
65760 Eschborn
Phone: +49-(0)6196-9060
France
RICOH FRANCE S.A.
383, Avenue du Général de Gaulle
BP 307-92143 Clamart Cedex
Phone: +33-(0)1-40-94-38-38
Printed in China
UE USA H535-8700
Hong Kong
RICOH HONG KONG LTD.
21/F., Tai Yau Building,
181, Johnston Road,
Wan Chai, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-2862-2888
Singapore
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE.LTD.
260 Orchard Road,
#15-01/02 The Heeren,
Singapore 238855
Phone: +65-830-5888
FAX3900L/3900NF Operating Instructions
Overseas Affiliates
U.S.A.
RICOH CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006
Phone: +1-973-882-2000
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 1 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get
maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in
this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Please read the Safety Information in the Advanced Features manual before using this machine. It contains important information related to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
Notes:
Some illustrations might be slightly different from your machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Laser Safety:
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical unit
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis
and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement or the optical subsystem is required.
Operator Safety:
This machine is considered a CDRH Class I laser device, safe for office/EDP use. The machine contains a 5-milliwat, 765 - 805 nanometer wavelength, GaAIAs laser diode. Direct (or indirect reflected)
eye contact with the laser beam may cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlock
mechanism have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
Warning:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Notes:
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
For good copy quality, Ricoh recommends that you use genuine Ricoh toner.
Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other
than genuine Ricoh parts in your Ricoh office product.
Important
Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable
for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating
the machine.
Power Source:
AC120V, 60Hz
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above.
Declaration of Conformity
Product Name: Facsimile
Model Number: FAX3900L/3900NF
Responsible party: Ricoh Corporation
Address: 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006
Telephone number: 973-882-2000
This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1)This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 1 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
USA
❖ FCC Requirements
1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the cover of this equipment is a label that
contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number
(REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.
2. This equipment uses the following USOC jack: RJ11C
3. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone
line. Excessive REN's on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to
an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the REN's should not exceed five (5.0).
Contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
4. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you
in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not
practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be
advised your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
5. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company
will provide advance notice in order to make necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.
6. In the event of operation problems (document jam, copy jam, communication error indication),
refer to the solving problems section in this manual.
7. If you cannot correct the problem, please contact the RICOH CORP. CUSTOMER SUPPORT
DEPT. at 1-800-FASTFIX for repair and warranty information. If it is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request you to disconnect the equipment from the
network until the problem is resolved.
8. This equipment cannot be used telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party
Line Service is subject to state tariffs.
❖ WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO
EMERGENCY NUMBERS:
1. Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up.
2. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning hours or late evenings.
CANADA
The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment
meets telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements as prescribed in
the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The department does not
guarantee the equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions
may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier.
Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user disconnect the equipment.
User should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,
telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the
maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on
an interface may consist of any combination of device subject only to the requirement that the sum of
the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
b means POWER OFF.
Copyright © 2000 Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 1 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get
maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in
this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Please read the Safety Information in the Advanced Features manual before using this machine. It contains important information related to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
Notes:
Some illustrations might be slightly different from your machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Laser Safety:
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical unit
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis
and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement or the optical subsystem is required.
Operator Safety:
This machine is considered a CDRH Class I laser device, safe for office/EDP use. The machine contains a 5-milliwat, 765 - 805 nanometer wavelength, GaAIAs laser diode. Direct (or indirect reflected)
eye contact with the laser beam may cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlock
mechanism have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
Warning:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Notes:
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
For good copy quality, Savin recommends that you use genuine toner.
Savin shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other
than genuine parts in your office product.
Important
Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable
for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating
the machine.
Power Source:
AC120V, 60Hz
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above.
Declaration of Conformity
Product Name: Facsimile
Model Number: 3740/9940
Responsible party: SAVIN CORPORATION
Address: 333 Ludlow Street, Stamford, CT 06904
Telephone number: 203-967-5000
This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1)This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 1 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
USA
❖ FCC Requirements
1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the cover of this equipment is a label
that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence
number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.
2. This equipment uses the following USOC jack: RJ11C
3. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone
line. Excessive REN's on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to
an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the REN's should not exceed five (5.0).
Contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
4. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you
in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not
practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be
advised your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
5. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company
will provide advance notice in order to make necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.
6. In the event of operation problems (document jam, copy jam, communication error indication),
refer to the solving problems section in this manual.
7. If you cannot correct the problem, please contact the SAVIN CORPORATION at 1-203-967-5000 for
repair and warranty information. If it is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request you to disconnect the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.
8. This equipment cannot be used telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party
Line Service is subject to state tariffs.
❖ WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO
EMERGENCY NUMBERS:
1. Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up.
2. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning hours or late evenings.
CANADA
The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment
meets telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements as prescribed in
the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The department does not
guarantee the equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions
may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier.
Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user disconnect the equipment.
User should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,
telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the
maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on
an interface may consist of any combination of device subject only to the requirement that the sum of
the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
b means POWER OFF.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page i Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Notice
Note to users in the United States of
America
-Warning
-Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur
in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one more of the
following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
• Increase the separation between
the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an
outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for
help.
Note to users in Canada
-Note:
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au
Canada
-Avertissement:
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B
est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
i
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page ii Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
-Notice about the Telephone
Consumer Protection Act
(Valid in USA only).
The Telephone Consumer Protection
Act of 1991 among other things
makes it unlawful for any person to
send any message via a telephone fax
machine unless such message clearly
contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on
the first page of the transmission, the
date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity,
or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the
sending machine or such business,
other entity or individual. This information is transmitted with your document by the TTI (Transmit Terminal
Identification) feature. In order for
you to meet the requirement, your
machine must be programmed by following the instructions in the accomp a n y in g O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l. I n
particular, please refer to the chapter
of Installation. Also refer to the TTI
(Transmit Terminal Identification)
programming procedure to enter the
business identification and telephone
number of the terminal or business.
Do not forget to set the date and time.
Thank you.
(For this machine, TTI is called Fax
Header.)
Although this equipment can use either loop disconnect or DTMF signalling, only the performance of the
DTMF signalling is subject to regulatory requirements for correct operation. It is therefore strongly
recommended that the equipment is
set to use DTMF signalling for access
to public or private emergency services. DTMF signalling also provides
faster call set up.
ii
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page iii Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Safety Information
When using your equipment, the following safety precautions should always be
followed.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols are used:
R WARNING:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, could result in death or serious injury.
R CAUTION:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not
followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.
R WARNING:
• Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and never use an extension cord.
• Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the
power cable or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged.
• To avoid hazardous electric shock or laser radiation exposure, do not
remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this manual.
• Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug,
not the cable) if any of the following conditions exists:
• You spill something into the equipment.
• You suspect that your equipment needs service or repair.
• Your equipment's cover has been damaged.
• Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust might ignite
when exposed to an open flame.
• Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer or at appropriate collection sites.
• Dispose of the used toner cartridge in accordance with the local regulation.
iii
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page iv Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
R CAUTION:
• Protect the equipment from dampness or wet weather, such as rain, snow,
and so on.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the equipment.
While moving the equipment, you should take care that the power cord will
not be damaged under the equipment.
• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the
plug (not the cable).
• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside
the equipment.
• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner cartridge out of the reach of children.
• For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the equipment or expended
supply waste at household waste collection points. Disposal can take place
at an authorized dealer or at appropriate collection sites.
• The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts with a
label indicating the “hot surface”. Otherwise it could cause a personal burn.
• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and functionality, and we recommend that you only use the expendable supplies available at an authorized dealer.
iv
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page v Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Important Safety Instructions
Grounding
In order to prevent potentially hazardous electrical shock, provide means of
connecting to the protective grounding conductor in the building, wiring those
grounding conductors of power cable and 3 pins plug.
Caution
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always
be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
• Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl,
kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Avoid using a telephone during an electrical storm. There may be a remote
risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Do not use a telephone in the vicinity of a gas leak to report the leak.
• Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this manual. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions.
Save these instructions.
Certalnes mesures de sécurité doivent être prises pendant l'utilisation de matérial téléphonique afin de réduire les risques d'incendle , de choc électrique et de
blessures. En voici quelquesunes:
• Ne pas utiliser l'appareil près de l'eau, p.ex., près d'une balgnoire, d'un lavabo, d'un évier de cuisine, d'un bac à laver, dans un sous-sol humide ou près
d'une piscine.
• Éviter d'utiliser le téléphone (sauf s'il s'agit d'un apparell sans fil) pendant un
orage électrique. Ceci peut présenter un risque de choc électrique causé par la
foudre.
• Ne pas utiliser l'appareil téléphonique pour signaler une fulte de gaz s'il est
situé près de la fuite.
• Utiliser seulement le cordon d'alimentation et le type de piles indiqués dans
ce manual. Ne pas jeter les piles dans le feu: elles peuvent exploser. Se conformer aux ègrlements pertinents quant à l'élimination des piles.
Conserver ces instructions.
v
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page vi Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
ENERGY STAR Program
As an ENERGY STAR Partner, we have determined
that this machine model meets the ENERGY STAR
Guidelines for energy efficiency.
The ENERGY STAR Guidelines intend to establish an international energy-saving system for
developing and introducing energy-efficient office equipment to deal with environmental issues, such as global warming.
When a product meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency, the Partner shall
place the ENERGY STAR logo onto the machine model.
This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated with office equipment by means of energy-saving features, such as Low-power mode.
• Low-power Mode
At the factory, this fax machine is set to enter the low power mode after no operation takes place for more than 5 minutes. To exit the low power mode, press
the {Energy Saver/3Clear Modes} key. The machine starts printing in about 40
seconds in the Energy Saving Standby mode, or in about 30 seconds in the Fax
Standby Mode.
❖ Specification
Specification
Power consumption
Default time
Without NIC FAX KIT installed
1.7 W
5 min
With NIC FAX KIT installed
4.3 W
Recycled Paper
Please contact your sales or service representative for recommended recycled
paper types that may be used in this machine.
vi
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page vii Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
How to Read this Manual
How to Read this Manual
Symbols
In this manual, the following symbols are used:
R WARNING:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in
death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety Information section.
R CAUTION:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in minor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injury
when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this
symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety
Information section.
* The statements above are notes for your safety.
Important
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be
damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.
Preparation
This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before operating.
Note
This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misoperation.
Limitation
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
{
}
Keys built into the machine's operation panel.
vii
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page viii Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for this machine ......................................................................... 1
Advanced Features (This Manual) ................................................................ 1
Basic Features .............................................................................................. 1
1. Transmission Options
Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later) ................................................. 3
Personal Codes ......................................................................................... 4
Fax Header Print ........................................................................................ 5
Sending Confidential Messages .............................................................. 6
Leaving a Document to Be Picked Up by Others (Polling Transmission)... 8
Calling to Request a Message (Polling Reception) .............................. 10
Transfer Request .....................................................................................
Specifying an End Receiver ........................................................................
SUB Code Transmission.........................................................................
SEP Code Polling Reception ..................................................................
12
13
14
15
Mail Option ............................................................................................... 16
2. Communication Information
Canceling Transmission or Reception .................................................. 17
Printing a File List ................................................................................... 18
Printing a Stored Message ..................................................................... 19
Printing a Confidential Fax Message..................................................... 20
Printing a Memory-locked Message ..................................................... 21
Printing the Journal................................................................................. 22
Mail Reception ......................................................................................... 23
3. Other Transmission Features
Handy Dialing Functions ........................................................................
Chain Dial....................................................................................................
Telephone Directory....................................................................................
Redial ..........................................................................................................
Dial Options.................................................................................................
On Hook Dial ............................................................................................
Manual Dial...............................................................................................
25
25
26
27
28
29
30
Selecting G3 or G4 .................................................................................. 31
Tone Signals ............................................................................................ 32
Using the {p} (Tone) Key.......................................................................... 32
viii
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page ix Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Transmission Functions .........................................................................
Stamp..........................................................................................................
Closed Network Transmission ....................................................................
Label Insertion.............................................................................................
No Document, No Dial ................................................................................
Blank Sheet Detect .....................................................................................
More Transmission Functions ...............................................................
If Memory Runs Out While Storing a Document .........................................
Checking the Transmission Result..............................................................
Broadcasting Sequence ..............................................................................
Sending a Fax Straight Away......................................................................
Broadcasting: Checking Progress...............................................................
Auto Redial..................................................................................................
Batch Transmission.....................................................................................
Dual Access ................................................................................................
ECM (Error Correction Mode) .....................................................................
Parallel Memory Transmission....................................................................
Printed Reports........................................................................................
File Reserve Report (Switch 03, Bit 2) ........................................................
Communication Result Report
(Memory Transmission) (Switch 03, Bit 0) ................................................
Communication Failure Report
(On if Communication Result Report is Off) (Switch 03, Bit 0)..................
Transmission Result Report (Switch 03, Bit 5) ...........................................
Report Formats ...........................................................................................
33
33
33
34
34
35
36
36
36
37
37
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
40
40
40
41
4. Reception Features
General .....................................................................................................
Immediate Reception ..................................................................................
Memory Reception .....................................................................................
Printing Documents That Have Been Received into Memory
(Substitute Reception)...............................................................................
Receiving Messages in Telephone Mode ...................................................
Printing Options ......................................................................................
Center Mark ................................................................................................
Checkered Mark..........................................................................................
TSI Print ......................................................................................................
CIL/TID Print ...............................................................................................
Reception Time ...........................................................................................
Two In One..................................................................................................
Reverse Order Printing ...............................................................................
If Incoming Messages Do Not Fit on Paper...........................................
Breaking Down Large Format Messages....................................................
43
43
43
44
45
46
46
46
46
46
47
47
47
48
48
ix
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page x Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
5. Copying
Copying .................................................................................................... 49
6. Facsimile User Tools
Programs..................................................................................................
Storing a Program .......................................................................................
Using a Program .........................................................................................
Editing a Program ......................................................................................
Editing the Program Name..........................................................................
Deleting a Program ....................................................................................
Storing an Often Used Document (Auto Document)............................
Storing an Auto Document .........................................................................
Sending an Auto Document as an Attachment ...........................................
Editing an Auto Document ..........................................................................
Editing an Auto Document Name................................................................
Deleting an Auto Document ........................................................................
User Function Keys.................................................................................
Assigning User Function Keys ....................................................................
Using a User Function Key .........................................................................
Editing a User Function Key........................................................................
Deleting a User Function Key .....................................................................
Lists You Can Print Out Yourself...........................................................
Printing Dial Lists ........................................................................................
Printing a Quick Dial Label .........................................................................
Printing a Keystroke Program List ........................................................
Printing an Auto Document ....................................................................
51
51
52
52
52
53
54
54
55
56
56
57
58
58
60
60
61
62
62
62
63
64
Printing a User Function Key List ......................................................... 65
Setting the Date and Time ..................................................................... 66
Summer Time / Daylight Saving Time ................................................... 67
Changing the Paper Size Setting ........................................................... 68
Selecting the Display Language ............................................................ 69
x
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page xi Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
7. Key Operator Settings
Function List ...........................................................................................
Using Key Operator Settings..................................................................
Counters .....................................................................................................
Resetting the PAD Counters ..................................................................
71
74
74
75
Authorized Reception ............................................................................. 76
Multi-Copy Reception.............................................................................. 79
Memory Lock ........................................................................................... 81
Specified Cassette................................................................................... 83
Forwarding ............................................................................................... 85
Switching Forwarding On/Off ...................................................................... 85
Backup File Transmission ...................................................................... 91
Energy Save Timer .................................................................................. 93
User Parameters ...................................................................................... 95
Changing User Parameters and Printing a List .......................................... 95
Programming the Personal Codes....................................................... 100
Registering Personal Codes ..................................................................... 100
Editing a Personal Code ........................................................................... 101
Deleting a Personal Code ......................................................................... 102
Printing the Personal Code List................................................................. 103
Restricted Access ..................................................................................... 103
ISDN Local Directory Number Routing ..................................................... 104
ID Code ................................................................................................... 105
Registering ID Codes ................................................................................ 105
Line Type................................................................................................ 107
Select Line.............................................................................................. 108
PSTN Access Number........................................................................... 109
Transfer Report...................................................................................... 110
ISDN G3/G4 ............................................................................................
Storing ISDN Telephone Numbers............................................................
Editing ISDN Telephone Numbers ............................................................
Deleting ISDN Telephone Numbers..........................................................
Network ..................................................................................................
Dialup......................................................................................................
112
113
116
116
118
119
Key Layout ............................................................................................. 120
Memory Option ...................................................................................... 121
Memory File Transfer ............................................................................ 122
Margin Adjust......................................................................................... 123
RDS On/Off............................................................................................. 125
System Parameter Transmission......................................................... 126
xi
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page xii Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
8. Troubleshooting
Printing the Help List ............................................................................
Clearing a Copy, Fax, or Print Jam ......................................................
Clearing a Jam in the Optional Second Cassette .....................................
Clearing a Jam in the Optional Bypass Feeder.........................................
Reading Reports....................................................................................
Error Report (Turned On/Off by a Service Technician).............................
Power Failure Report ................................................................................
127
128
128
129
131
131
131
9. Maintaining Your Machine
Loading Paper in the Second Cassette ............................................... 133
Loading Paper in the Optional Bypass Feeder................................... 135
Changing the Paper Size in the Main Cassette................................... 136
Changing the Paper Size in the Optional Second Cassette .............. 140
Changing the Paper Size in the Optional Bypass Feeder.................. 143
Cleaning the Rollers and Exposure Glass .......................................... 144
Replacing the ADF Maintenance Kit (ADF Document Separation Pad) ... 145
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge ............................................................ 146
Replacing the Toner Cassette and Cleaning Pad............................... 147
Toner Cassette Storage ........................................................................ 149
10.Installation
Before Installation .................................................................................
Machine Environment ...........................................................................
Location.....................................................................................................
Installing the Optional Memory Card.........................................................
Installing The Optional Handset ................................................................
Connecting to a Telephone Line ..........................................................
Connecting the Power and Switching On ...........................................
xii
151
152
152
152
153
154
155
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page xiii Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
11.Appendix
Specifications ........................................................................................
Base Machine ...........................................................................................
Optional Second Paper Cassette..............................................................
Bypass Feeder ..........................................................................................
Document and Paper Specifications .........................................................
Energy Saving...........................................................................................
Storage Capacity.......................................................................................
Function List ..........................................................................................
Advanced Transmission Features.............................................................
Communication Information.................................................................
Fax Features ..........................................................................................
157
157
158
158
159
160
162
163
163
164
165
Key Operator Tools ............................................................................... 167
Certification Label ................................................................................. 168
INDEX...................................................................................................... 169
xiii
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page xiv Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
xiv
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 1 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Manuals for this machine
This machine is provided with a Basic Features manual and an Advanced Features manual. Please consult the manual that suits your needs.
Advanced Features (This Manual)
The Advanced Features manual describes more advanced functions, and also
explains settings for key operators.
Basic Features
The Basic Features manual explains the most frequently used fax functions and
operations.
❖ Chapter 1 Introduction
Describes part names of the machine and operation panel. Also lists symbols
and conventions used in this manual.
❖ Chapter 2 Faxing
Explains basic transmission. You can also find out about other types of transmissions and how to switch the reception mode.
❖ Chapter 3 Setup
Explains how to make initial settings, such as the Own Name and Own Fax
Number settings. Also explains the Quick Dial, Speed Dial and Group keys.
These functions allow you to store numbers and save time when dialing. This
chapter also explains how to enter letters and symbols.
❖ Chapter 4 Troubleshooting
Explains clearing document jams, loading paper and changing the volume of
audible signals generated by the machine. When the display or indicator
lights show unusual information, check the list and take appropriate action.
1
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 2 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
2
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 3 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
1. Transmission Options
Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later)
Using the Send Later feature, you can
delay transmission of your fax message until a specified time. This allows you to take advantage of offpeak telephone line charges without
having to be by the machine at the
time.
Note
❒ If the machine memory is full, your
document will remain in the document feeder. As a result, anybody
removing the document will cancel the transmission.
❒ If the current time shown on the
display is not correct, adjust it. (See
P.66 “Setting the Date and Time”.)
❒ You cannot specify a time more
than 24 hours into the future.
A Set your document and select any
scan settings you require.
to select
"AM" or "PM", and then press the
{OK} key.
Send Later:
hi/OK
Time [AM]
PM
H Enter the time that you want to
send the fax message.
Send Later: Press OK
Time [09:34] AM
Enter the hour setting in 12-hour
format (1–12).
Press the {Clear} key to clear the
previous entry, and then enter the
new number with the number
keys.
I Press the {OK} key.
B Press the {Trans. Option} key.
The specified time is set.
Trans. Option
1.Send Later
hi
C Confirm
that "1. Send Later" is
displayed.
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press 0 or 1 to select "On".
Note
❒ You can turn this feature off by
selecting "Off" and pressing the
{OK} key.
Send Later:
[On]
Off
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press the 0 or 1 key
J Specify the destination.
If you want to specify another destination, press the {OK} key and repeat step J.
K Press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ You can cancel transmission of
a message set up for Send Later.
(See P.17 “Canceling Transmission or Reception”.)
hi/OK
3
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 4 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Transmission Options
Personal Codes
Personal Codes consisting of up to 8
digits (numerals, the # and * symbols,
and spaces) can be assigned to individual users. You can keep track of
fax machine usage by assigning Personal Codes and having users enter
them when using the machine.
• User names assigned to Personal
Codes can be printed in the Journal
and other reports.
• If user names are assigned to Personal Codes, label insertion allows
the receiver's name that is programmed in Quick Dial or Speed
Dial to be printed on documents
when they are received at the destination.
If you input your Personal Code, your
name will appear on the JOURNAL
and Transmission Result Report.
1
Reference
See P.100 “Programming the Personal Codes”.
See P.103 “Printing the Personal
Code List”.
See P.34 “Label Insertion”.
A Set your document and select any
scan settings you require.
B Press the {Trans. Option} key.
C Press 0 or 1 until "2. Personal
Code" is displayed.
Trans. Option
2.Personal Code
D Press the {OK} key.
4
hi
E Press 0 or 1 to select "On".
Pers. Code:
[On]
Off
hi/OK
Note
❒ You can cancel this feature by
selecting "Off".
F Press the {OK} key.
G Enter a personal code (up to 8 digits) with the number keys.
If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
Pers. Code: Press OK
[12345678]
Note
❒ Personal codes may be any
string of 8–digit numbers (0 to
9), symbols (# and *), or spaces.
You can register up to 30 personal codes.
H Press the {OK} key.
The personal code is set.
I Specify the destination.
If you want to specify another destination, press the {OK} key and repeat step I.
J Press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ You can cancel transmission of
a message set up for Personal
Code Transmission. (See P.17
“Canceling Transmission or Reception”.)
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 5 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Fax Header Print
Fax Header Print
N ormally, the Fax Header p ro grammed in your machine is printed
at the top of each of the pages you
transmit when they are received at
the other end. The top of the image
will be overprinted if there is no margin at the top of the transmitted page.
In some cases, you may wish the other party to receive an unmarked copy
of your original. In this case, you can
switch the Fax Header feature off.
E Press 0 or 1 to select "Off".
Note
❒ In the USA, law requires that your
fax number be included in the fax
header. Register the fax number
and switch on Fax Header Print
with the User Parameters. See P.95
“User Parameters” (switch 06, bit 0).
H Press the {Start} key.
Important
❒ In the USA, this must contain the
telephone number of the line your
machine is connected to. It will be
printed on the header of every
page you send. Required in the
USA.
1
FaxHeader Printhi/OK
On
[Off]
F Press the {OK} key.
G Specify the destination.
If you want to specify another destination, press the {OK} key and repeat step G.
-If you register the Fax Header
Print function in a User Function
key beforehand, you can turn on
Fax Header Print simply by pressing the User Function key. (See
P.58 “Assigning User Function
Keys”.)
A Set your document and select any
scan settings you require.
B Press the {Trans. Option} key.
C Press 0 or 1 until "3. Fax Header
Print" is displayed.
Trans. Option
3.FaxHeader Printhi
D Press the {OK} key.
5
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 6 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Transmission Options
Sending Confidential Messages
This feature is called Confidential
Transmission. Use this feature if you
do not want your message to be
picked up casually by anybody at the
other end. The message will be stored
in the memory at the other end. It will
not be printed until an ID known as
the Confidential ID is entered.
There are two types of Confidential
Transmission.
1
❖ Normal Confidential Transmission
The other party can print the message by entering the ID that was
previously stored in the other party's terminal using the Confidential ID feature.
❖ Confidential ID Override
If you wish to send a confidential
message to a particular person at
the other end, you can specify the
Confidential ID that person has to
enter to see that message. Anybody entering the machine's Confidential ID will not be able to see
the message. Before you send the
message, do not forget to tell the
intended receiver what code must
be entered to print the message.
To set up a confidential transmission,
do the following:
Limitation
❒ The machine at the other end must
have memory space available and
it must have the Confidential Reception feature.
❒ This is a proprietary feature, and
as such it only functions with machines produced by the same manufacturer that have this feature.
6
Note
❒ A Confidential ID can be any 4digit number except 0000.
❒ Before sending a confidential message, it is recommended that you
call the receiver and advise them
that you are sending a fax message
in this manner.
Reference
See P.105 “Confidential ID”.
See P.100 “Programming the Personal Codes”.
See P.96 “User Parameter List”.
See P.22 “Printing the Journal”.
See P.20 “Printing a Confidential Fax
Message”.
A Set your document and select any
scan settings you require.
B Press the {Trans. Option} key.
C Press 0 or 1 until "4. Confidential TX" is displayed.
Trans. Option
4.Confidential TXhi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press 0 or 1 to select "On".
Conf. TX:
[On]
Off
F Press the {OK} key.
G Select the type of
Transmission.
hi/OK
Confidential
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 7 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Sending Confidential Messages
Normal Confidential
Transmission:
A Press 0 or 1 to select "Default".
Conf. ID:
hi/OK
[Default] Override
B Press the {OK} key.
Normal Confidential Transmission is set.
C Specify the other party's fax
number.
-When sending messages to
fax machines produced by
other manufacturers
1
Normally you can only send and receive confidential faxes between machines of the sam e make whic h
support confidential sending and receiving. However, if the other party's
fax is not the same as your own, you
can still send and receive confidential
fax messages if the other party's fax
machine supports the SUB/SID function. See P.14 “SUB Code Transmission”.
Confidential ID Override Option:
A Press 0 or 1 to select "Override".
Conf. ID:
hi/OK
Default [Override]
B Press the {OK} key.
Confidential ID Override is set.
C Enter the Confidential ID (4digits) with the number keys.
Conf. TX:
ID [1234]
Press OK
H Specify the other party's fax number.
I Press the {Start} key.
7
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 8 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Transmission Options
Leaving a Document to Be Picked Up by
Others (Polling Transmission)
1
Use Polling Transmission when you
want to leave a document in the machine's memory for others to pick up.
The message will be sent when the
other party calls your machine.
You cannot specify the telephone
number of the polling terminal (the
terminal that you wish to poll your
document), but using the ID Code
there are ways to make sure that the
message does not go to the wrong
place, as explained below.
There are three types of Polling
Transmission.
❖ Free Polling
Anybody can poll the message
from the polled machine's memory.
❖ Secured Polling
The message will only be sent out
if the ID Code of the polling machine is the same as the ID Code
stored in the polled machine.
❖ Stored ID Override
You must enter an Override Polling ID unique to this transmission.
The user must supply this ID when
they poll your machine and if the
IDs match, the message is sent.
Make sure the other end knows the
ID you are using in advance.
Limitation
❒ Secured Polling and Stored ID
Override can only be used between terminals produced by the
same manufacturer. With Free
Polling, a message can also be sent
to other manufacturer's machines
as long as they have the Polling Reception feature.
Note
❒ Only one document can be stored
in the memory for Free Polling and
Secured Polling. However, with
Stored ID Override, you can store
up to 100 files, but you must use a
different ID for each file.
❒ A Polling ID may be any string of
four numbers (0 to 9) and characters (A to F) except 0000 and FFFF.
❒ The communication fee is charged
to the receiver.
❒ To delete the document immediately after transmission, select
"Use once". To repeatedly send the
document, select "Save". By default, Polling Transmission is set to
"Use Once". See P.95 “User Parameters” (switch 11, bit 7).
❒ This function works only when
sufficient memory is available.
Reference
See P.17 “Canceling Transmission or
Reception”.
See P.18 “Printing a File List”.
8
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 9 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Leaving a Document to Be Picked Up by Others (Polling Transmission)
A Set your document and select any
scan settings you require.
B Press the {Trans. Option} key.
C Press 0 or 1 until "5. Polling TX"
is displayed.
Trans. Option
5.Polling TX
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press 0 or 1 to select "On".
Polling TX:
[On]
Off
hi/OK
F Press the {OK} key.
G Select the type of Polling Transmission.
Secured Polling
A Press 0 or 1 to select "Default".
Polling TX:
[Default]
hi/OK
Stored ID Override
A Press 0 or 1 to select "Override".
Polling TX:
[Override]
hi/OK
B Press the {OK} key.
C Enter the Polling ID using the
number and Quick Dial keys.
Free Polling
A Press 0 or 1 to select "Free".
Polling TX:
[Free]
1
hi/OK
H Press the {OK} key.
I Press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ Before using Secured Polling,
you need to program the Polling ID. See P.105 “Registering ID
Codes”.
-When using Polling
Transmission with fax
machines produced by other
manufacturers
Standard Polling Transmission only
works with machines of the same that
manufacturer have the Polling Reception feature. However, if the other
party's fax machine supports SEP
Polling Transmission, you can send
documents to them using SEP Code
Polling Reception. See P.15 “SEP Code
Polling Reception”.
When sending a document using secured polling transmission, ask the
other party to enter the registered 4digit polling ID as the SEP code.
When using stored ID override transmission, ask the other party to enter
the 4-digit polling ID entered when
storing the document as the SEP code.
Polling TX: Press OK
ID [1234]
9
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 10 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Transmission Options
Calling to Request a Message (Polling
Reception)
1
Use this function if you want to poll a
message from another terminal. You
can also poll documents from many
terminals.
There are two types of Polling Reception:
❖ Secured Polling Reception
If the Polling ID is programmed in
your machine, any messages waiting in the transmitting machine
with the same ID are received. If
the other machine does not have
any messages waiting with the
same Polling ID, any messages that
do not require an ID are received
(Free Polling).
❖ Stored ID Override Polling Reception
You must enter an Override Polling ID unique to this transmission.
This ID overrides that stored in the
Polling ID. Your machine will receive any messages waiting in the
transmitting machine with matching ID's. If no ID's match, any messages that do not require an ID are
received (Free Polling).
Limitation
❒ Polling Reception requires that the
other machine can perform Polling
Transmission.
❒ To receive a message sent by any
Secured Polling Transmission or
Stored ID Override Polling Transmission, it is necessary to specify
the same Polling ID as the sender's.
10
❒ To receive a message sent by Secured Polling Transmission or
Stored ID Override Polling Transmission, the sender must use a machine of the same manufacturer
that is equipped with the Polling
Reception feature.
Note
❒ The communication fee is charged
to the receiver.
A Press the {Trans. Option} key.
B Press 0 or 1 until "6. Polling RX"
is displayed.
Trans. Option
6.Polling RX
hi
C Press the {OK} key.
D Press 0 or 1 to select "On".
Polling RX:
[On]
Off
hi/OK
E Press the {OK} key.
F Press 0 or 1 to select "Default".
Polling RX:
hi/OK
[Default] Override
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 11 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Calling to Request a Message (Polling Reception)
G Select the type of Polling Reception.
-Polling Documents from Other
Manufacturer's Fax Machines:
Secured Polling Reception
Standard Polling Reception only
works with machines of the same
manufacturer that have the Polling
Reception feature. However, if the
other party's fax machine supports
SEP Code Polling Reception, you can
receive documents from them using
SUB/SEP Reception. (See P.15 “SEP
Code Polling Reception”.)
A Press the {OK} key.
The settings are made.
B Specify the other party's fax
number.
C Press the {Start} key.
Reference
See P.17 “Canceling Transmission or Reception”.
1
Stored ID Override Option
A Press 0 or 1 to select "Override".
Polling RX:
hi/OK
Default [Override]
B Press the {OK} key.
C Enter the Confidential ID (4
digits) with the number keys
and Quick Dial keys.
Polling RX: Press OK
Override ID [1234]
If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
H Press the {OK} key.
I Specify the other party's fax number.
J Press the {Start} key.
11
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 12 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Transmission Options
Transfer Request
Transfer Request allows fax machines
that have this feature to automatically
distribute incoming messages onto
multiple fax destinations. This feature
helps you save costs when you send
the same message to more than one
place in a distant area, and saves time
since many messages can be sent in a
single operation.
Before you can use this feature you
must program the Polling ID and set
the Transfer Result Report.
1
Limitation
❒ The Transfer Stations you specify
must be machines of the same
make as this machine and have the
Transfer Station function.
❒ End Receivers must be programmed into Quick Dials or
Groups in the Transfer Station.
Note
❒ Polling ID's of the requesting party
(this machine) and Transfer Stations must be identical.
The following terminology is used in
this section:
❖ Requesting Party
The machine where the message
originates from.
❖ Transfer Station
The machine that forwards the incoming message to another destination.
❖ End Receiver
The final destination of the message.
12
Note
❒ You can have up to 30 End Receivers per Transfer Station.
❒ If you specify a Transfer Station
Group, the Group counts as a single receiver.
A Set your document and select any
scan settings you require.
B Press the {Trans. Option} key.
C Press 0 or 1 until "7. Transf.Request" is displayed.
Trans. Option
7.Transf. Requesthi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press 0 or 1 to select "On".
Transf.Request:hi/OK
[On]
Off
F Press the {OK} key.
G Specify the Transfer Station.
If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
Transf.Stn: Press OK
123456789_kkkkkkkkk
H Press the {OK} key.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 13 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Transfer Request
I Specify the End Receiver.
Note
❒ Note You cannot enter the numbers of the End Receivers directly. The numbers must be stored
in Quick Dials, Speed Dials or
Groups in the Transfer Station(s).
ReceiveStn.:Press OK
1 [#10_k]
J Press the {OK} key.
K Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes" or
"No".
Add Recv. Stn? hi/OK
[Yes]
No
L Press the {OK} key.
If you selected "Yes", go back to
step I.
M Press the {Start} key.
-Sending Broadcast Requests
to Other Manufacturers' Fax
Machines:
Standard Broadcast Request Transmissions only work with machines of
the same make that have the Transfer
Station feature. However, if the other
party's fax machine supports SUB
Transmission, you can specify them
as a Transfer Station. (See P.14 “SUB
Code Transmission”.)
Specifying an End Receiver
You cannot enter the numbers of the
End Receivers directly. Instead, enter
a simple code that describes where
the numbers are stored in the Transfer Station (in Quick Dials, Speed Dials or Groups). End Receiver
information is then relayed to the
Transfer Station(s), and sent to the
destinations stored in the Transfer
Station(s) memory.
1
❖ Quick Dial
Enter {#} followed by 2 digits of
the Quick Dial where the End Receiver is stored. For example, to
choose the number stored in Quick
Dial 01 in the Transfer Station, enter: {#}{0}{1}.
❖ Speed Dial
Enter {#}, {*} followed by the
Speed Dial code (2 digits). For example, to choose the num ber
stored in Speed Dial 12 in the
Transfer
Station,
enter:
{#}{*}{1}{2}.
❖ Group Dial
Enter {#}, {*}, {*} followed by the
Group number (2 digits). For example, to choose the num ber
stored in Group 04 in the Transfer
Station, enter: {#}{*}{*}{0}{4}.
13
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 14 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Transmission Options
SUB Code Transmission
Confidential Transmission is only
possible with machines of the same
make that have the Confidential
Transmission feature. However, if
you use the SUB/SID function, you
can send and receive confidential faxes to and from other makers' machines that have the SUB/SID feature.
You can also send transfer requests to
other maker's fax machines that are
equipped with this feature.
1
A Set your document and select any
scan settings you require.
B Press the {Trans. Option} key.
C Press 0 or 1 until "8. TX with
SUB" is displayed.
Trans. Option
8.TX with SUB
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press 0 or 1 to turn SUB code
transmission "On".
TX with SUB:
[On]
Off
H Press the {OK} key.
I Enter the SUB Code
with the
number keys.
SUB:
Press OK
1234_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ You can enter up to 20 characters from the following: digits
from 0 to 9, #, *, and spaces.
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
J Press the {OK} key.
K Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes" or
"No".
hi/OK
F Press the {OK} key.
G Specify the destination.
Dest.1:
Press OK
0123456789_kkkkkkkkk
Limitation
❒ You cannot specify Groups as
destinations.
14
Note
❒ If you used Quick Dial key to
specify a destination that was
registered along with a SUB
code, or if you specified the destination using Speed Dial, go to
step J.
Add Dest.?
[Yes]
No
hi/OK
L Press the {OK} key.
If you selected "Yes", go to step G.
M Press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ You can cancel transmission of
a message set up for SUB Code
Transmission. (See P.17 “Canceling Transmission or Reception”.)
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 15 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
SEP Code Polling Reception
SEP Code Polling Reception
If you want to receive a message
stored in the memory of another party's fax machine, use this feature. The
machine will receive the message
with the SEP and PWD code that
matches the SEP and PWD code you
enter in the following procedure.
Note
❒ You can enter up to 20 characters
from the following: digits from 0 to
9, #, *, and spaces.
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
A Press the {Trans. Option} key.
B Press 0 or 1 until "9. RX with
SEP" is displayed.
Trans. Option
9.RX with SEP
hi
C Press the {OK} key.
D Press 0 or 1 to turn SEP Code
Reception "On".
RX with SEP:
[On]
Off
hi/OK
E Press the {OK} key.
F Specify the other party's fax number.
Dest.1:
Press OK
0123456789_kkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ If you used Quick Dial key to
specify a destination that was
registered along with a SEP code,
or if you specified the destination
using Speed Dial, go to step I.
G Press the {OK} key.
H Enter the SEP Code with the num-
1
ber keys.
SEP:
Press OK
1111_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
I Press the {OK} key.
J Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes" or
"No".
Add Dest.?
[Yes]
No
hi/OK
K Press the {OK} key.
If you selected "Yes", go to step F.
L Press the {Start} key.
Once the document is received, the
machine returns to standby mode.
Note
❒ You can cancel transmission of
a message set up for SEP Code
Polling Reception. (See P.17
“Canceling Transmission or Reception”.)
❒ A Communication Result Report prints out after SEP Code
Polling Reception is set up. You
can use this to confirm the contents of SEP Code Polling Reception.
(See
P.40
“Communication Result Report
(Memory Transmission) (Switch
03, Bit 0)”.)
15
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 16 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Transmission Options
Mail Option
This menu appears when the fax machine is connected to the Internet, and
is used for sending faxes via the Internet.
1
Limitation
❒ The NIC FAX KIT or PDU KIT
must be installed in order to use
this feature.
Reference
For details, please refer to the NIC
FAX KIT manual or the PDU KIT
manual.
16
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 17 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
2. Communication
Information
Canceling Transmission or Reception
Transmission files are documents that
have been stored in memory and are
awaiting transmission. The features
that produce transmission files are
Memory Transmission, Confidential
Transmission, Transfer Request, Polling Reception, and Polling Transmission. These features are described in
detail elsewhere in this document.
If you notice an error in the destination specified or the document content after scanning a document into
memory, you can cancel transmission
of that document. This is done by
searching for the document in the fax
machine's memory and deleting it.
Note
❒ You can cancel Memory Transmission even while files are being sent.
However, any pages that have already been sent cannot be canceled.
❒ To cancel transmission in progress,
press the {Stop} key.
❒ You can out a File List to confirm
the transmission files stored in
memory.
A Press the {Job Information} key.
C Display the file you want to cancel.
To display the file, enter the file
number with the number keys, or
press 0 or 1 until the file number
is displayed.
Cancel File?
hi/OK
No.001 0123456789
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Cancel} key and try again.
❒ If you cannot find the file you
want to cancel, the document
has already been sent.
D Press the {OK} key.
Cancel?
[Yes]
No
hi/OK
E Confirm
that you have selected
the correct file, and press the {OK}
key.
"Trans. Cancelled File Deleted" is
displayed, and the machine returns to standby mode.
Confirm that "1. Cancel TX/RX" is
displayed.
Job Information
1.Cancel TX / RX
hi
B Press the {OK} key.
17
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 18 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Communication Information
Printing a File List
Print this list if you wish to find out
which files are stored in memory and
what their file numbers are. Knowing
the file number can be useful (for example, when erasing files).
2
Note
❒ The contents of a document stored
in memory can also be printed.
(See P.19 “Printing a Stored Message”.)
A Press the {Job Information} key.
B Press 0 or 1 until "2. Print File
List" is displayed.
Job Information
2.Print File List hi
C Press the {OK} key.
D Press the {Start} key.
The File List is printed out and the
machine returns to standby mode.
18
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 19 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Printing a Stored Message
Printing a Stored Message
Use this feature to check the contents
of Polling Transmission or Free Polling files stored in memory.
Limitation
❒ You cannot print out files that are
being sent or Confidential Transmission files.
❒ If the file you print out is larger
than the paper you have set in the
ADF, the file is reduced before it is
printed.
2
A Press the {Job Information} key.
B Press 0 or 1 until "3. Print TX
File" is displayed.
Job Information
3.Print TX File
hi
C Press the {OK} key.
D Display the file you want to print.
Enter the file number with the number keys, or search using 0 or 1.
If you make a mistake, press the
{Cancel} key and try again.
Print?
hi/OK
No.001 0123456789
The registered name or fax number
appears on the lower line.
E Press the {OK} key.
F Press the {Start} key.
The document is printed and the
machine returns to standby mode.
19
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 20 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Communication Information
Printing a Confidential Fax Message
This feature is designed to prevent
messages being picked up casually by
anyone when they are received. If
someone sends you a message using
Confidential Transmission, it is
stored in memory and not automatically printed. To print the message
you have to enter the Confidential ID
code. When your machine has received a confidential message, the
"Receive File" indicator flashes.
2
Note
❒ Before using this function, program your Confidential ID. (See
P.105 “Registering ID Codes”.)
Important
❒ If the Main Power switch is off
more than an hour, all Confidential Messages are deleted. If this
happens, use the Power Failure
Report to identify which messages
have been lost. (See P.131 “Power
Failure Report”.)
Limitation
❒ You must program the Confidential ID for Confidential Reception
to work.
Note
❒ If you receive a fax by Confidential
ID Override Reception, enter the
override Confidential ID.
A Press the {Job Information} key.
B Press 0 or 1 until "4. Print Conf.
RX" is displayed.
Job Information
4.Print Conf.RX
20
hi
C Press the {OK} key.
Conf. RX:
ID[_kkkkkkk]
D Enter the Confidential ID (8 dig-
its or less) with the number keys.
The Confidential ID you entered is
not displayed.
Conf. RX:
Press OK
ID[****_kkk]
E Press the {OK} key.
F Press the {Start} key.
The document is printed and the
machine returns to standby mode.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 21 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Printing a Memory-locked Message
Printing a Memory-locked Message
This is a security feature that prevents
unauthorized individuals from reading printed messages. If Memory
Lock is switched on, all received messages are stored in memory and are
not automatically printed. To print
the messages, you have to enter the
Memory Lock ID code. When your
machine has received a message with
Memory Lock, the "Receive File" indicator flashes. See P.81 “Memory Lock”.
Note
❒ Before you start, program your
Memory Lock ID. (See P.105 “Registering ID Codes”.)
❒ Messages received by Polling Reception are automatically printed
even if this feature is switched on.
❒ If the Main Power switch is turned
off for more than an hour, all messages protected by Memory Lock
are deleted. If this happens, use the
Power Failure Report to identify
which messages have been lost.
(See P.131 “Power Failure Report”.)
D Enter the Memory Lock ID (4 digits) with the number keys.
The Memory Lock ID you entered
is not displayed.
Mem. Lock:
ID[****]
2
Press OK
E Press the {OK} key.
F Press the {Start} key.
The document is printed out and
the machine returns to standby
mode.
A Press the {Job Information} key.
B Press 0 or 1 until "5. Print Mem.
Lock" is displayed.
Job Information
5.Print Mem.Lock
hi
C Press the {OK} key.
Mem. Lock:
ID[_kkk]
21
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 22 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Communication Information
Printing the Journal
The Journal contains information
about the last 50 communications
made by your machine. By default, it
is printed automatically after every 50
communications (receptions + transmissions). You can also print a copy
of the Journal at any time by following the procedure below.
2
Note
❒ The sender's name column of the
Journal is useful when you need to
register a Specified Sender.
❒ If you do not want the Journal to be
printed automatically, you can
turn automatic printing off. See
P.95 “User Parameters” (switch 03,
bit 7).
❒ You can program this feature in
one of the User Function keys. By
d e fa u l t , t hi s fun c t i o n i s p r o grammed in the {F1 Print Journal}
key.
A Press the {Job Information} key.
B Press 0 or 1 until "6. Print Journal" is displayed.
Job Information
6.Print Journal
hi
C Press the {OK} key.
D Press the {Start} key.
The report is printed and the machine returns to standby mode.
22
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 23 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Mail Reception
Mail Reception
This menu appears when the fax machine is connected to the Internet, and
is used for receiving mail via the Internet.
2
Limitation
❒ The NIC FAX KIT or PDU KIT
must be installed in order to use
this feature.
Reference
For details, please refer to the NIC
FAX KIT manual or the PDU KIT
manual.
23
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 24 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Communication Information
2
24
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 25 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
3. Other Transmission Features
Handy Dialing Functions
Chain Dial
This feature allows you to compose a
telephone number from various
parts, some of which may be stored as
Quick Dial keys or Speed Dial codes,
and some of which may be entered
with the number keys.
You can program commonly used
area or country codes into Speed Dial
codes or Quick Dial keys.
Example: 01133-1-5551234 (From the
United States to Paris).
Assume that the following Quick Dial
and Speed Dial numbers have already been programmed.
• Quick Dial 01 = 01133 (Overseas to
France)
• Quick Dial 02 = 1 (Paris)
• Speed Dial 01 = 5551234
❖ Memory Transmission Mode:
When using Memory Transmission and Immediate Transmission,
you must press the {Pause/Redial}
ke y betw ee n each dialing sequence. However, when On Hook
dialing or manual dialing, you do
not need to press this key.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Set Orig./ Enter No.
C Press Quick Dial key {01}.
Dest.1
OK to Add
a01 FRANCE
D Press the {Pause/Redial} key.
Dest.1
OK to Add
01133-_kkkkkkkkkkkkk
E Press Quick Dial key {02}.
Dest.1
01133-1_
OK to Add
F Press the {Pause/Redial} key.
Dest.1
01133-1-
OK to Add
G Press the {Speed Dial/Tel Directory}
key, and then press {0}{1}.
Dest.1
OK to Add
01133-1-5551234_kkkk
If you want to send the same fax to
another party, press the {OK} key
and repeat the above steps from
step C.
H Press the {Start} key.
Limitation
❒ You can enter up to 254 digits.
B Carefully place your fax message
in the auto document feeder.
25
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 26 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Other Transmission Features
Telephone Directory
This can be done for any number that
you have stored as a Speed Dial code
with a label programmed for it.
Limitation
❒ You cannot search for symbols or
digits.
❒ Names in parentheses are not
searched.
3
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Set Orig./ Enter No.
B Carefully place your fax message
in the auto document feeder.
C Press the {Speed Dial/Tel Directory}
key.
Speed Dial:Enter No.
[b_k]
D Enter the first letter of the name
you are searching for using the
{Quick Dial} keys.
The first destination is displayed.
Tel Dir.:[W]
hi/OK
b15 WA_COMPANY
When searching for "W"
26
E Press V until the destination you
are searching for is displayed.
If you have selected the wrong
search letter, press the {Cancel}
key and repeat the above steps
from step C.
Tel Dir.:[W]
hi/OK
b16 WWF COMPANY
F Once the name you are searching
for is displayed, press the {OK}
key to dial the number.
Dest.1
OK to Add
b16 WWF COMPANY
If you want to send the same fax to
another party, press the {OK} key
and repeat the above steps from
step B.
G Press the {Start} key.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 27 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Handy Dialing Functions
Redial
If a message was not transmitted successfully, that does not mean that you
have to enter the telephone number
again. With the {Pause/Redial} key,
you can redial with just a few keystrokes.
Using the Redial Key
The machine can remember the last
10 numbers dialed on the numeric
keypad, and one previously dialed
Quick Dial/Speed Dial. If you have to
redial one of these numbers, just
press the {Pause/Redial} key until the
required telephone number or name
is displayed, and then press the
{Start} key.
This feature has the following uses.
• If the machine is waiting to redial
the other party, you do not have to
wait for the redialing interval to
expire. Press the {Pause/Redial} key
until the required telephone number or name is displayed, and then
press the {Start} key.
• If you wish to send another message to the same address that you
sent one to recently, you do not
have to dial the full number again
if it is still in the Redial memory.
Place the message in the feeder,
and then press the {Start} key.
C Press the {Pause/Redial} key.
The 10 most recent numbers you
have dialed are displayed.
Redial:
hi/OK
a01 ABC COMPANY
D Display the destination you want
to redial.
You can scroll through the destinations by pressing the {Pause/Redial}
key or 0 or 1.
3
E Once the name you are searching
for is displayed, press the {OK}
key to dial the number.
Dest.1
OK to Add
a01 ABC COMPANY
If you want to redial another destination, press the {OK} key and repeat the above steps from step B
F Press the {Start} key.
Limitation
❒ If you specified multiple destinations, they are not all stored
in memory.
❒ If you specified multiple destinations using the Quick Dial or
Speed Dial keys, only the latest
destination is stored in memory.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Set Orig./ Enter No.
B Carefully place your fax message
in the auto document feeder.
27
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 28 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Other Transmission Features
Dial Options
The Dial Options provide access to
various code features which are designed to allow confidential transmission and polling reception between
different fax machines. Use them if
the other party's fax machine is of a
different make and supports the code
features. Further, the Dial Options allow you to send faxes using a sub-address when your fax machine is
connected to ISDN only. Before you
can use the Dial Options, you need to
program the Dial Options features in
the User Functions keys. (See P.58
“User Function Keys”.)
Available Dial Options are as follows:
• SUB, SID, SEP, PWD
• SUB-ADDRESS (Requires the optional ISDN INTERFACE UNIT
TYPE 190.)
3
Note
❒ You can program sub-addresses
in the User Functions key.
Limitation
❒ The maximum number of digits
you can enter for SUB, SEP, SID,
and PWD is 20.
❒ The maximum number of digits
you can enter for sub-address is
19. It may be any string of 20
numbers (0 to 9) or symbols (#
and *).
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Set Orig./ Enter No.
B Carefully place your fax message
in the auto document feeder.
28
C Enter
the destination with the
number keys.
Dest.1
OK to Add
0123456789_kkkkkkkkk
D Press the User Functions key that
is programmed with the Dial Options feature.
E Press 0 or 1 to display the item
you want to set.
Dial Option:
1.SUB
hi
F Press the {OK} key.
G Enter the code with the number
keys.
If you want to erase a digit of the
number, press the {Clear} key and
re-enter the digit.
SUB:
Press OK
1234_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
H Press the {OK} key.
Dest.1
OK to Add
0123456789_kkkkkkkkk
If you want to specify another destination, press the {OK} key and repeat the above steps from step C.
I Press the {Start} key.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 29 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
On Hook Dial
On Hook Dial
You can send a fax message without
lifting the receiver, while still listening to the dial tone.
If the other party has a telephone fax
machine, you can talk by lifting the
receiver after your machine has connected to theirs.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Set Orig./ Enter No.
B Carefully place your fax message
in the auto document feeder.
C Press the {On Hook Dial} key.
You will hear a dial tone coming
from the machine's internal speaker.
Note
❒ If you press the {On Hook Dial}
key once more, the machine will
hang up and the dial tone will
stop.
E When
you hear a high-pitched
tone, press the {Start} key.
Transmission starts.
Once the fax is sent, the machine
returns to standby mode.
ABC COMPANY
A4->A4 Transmitting
3
Reference
To adjust the volume:
See Chapter 4, "Adjusting the
Volume and Sounds the Machine Makes" in the Basic Features manual.
To stop transmission:
If you want to stop a fax message during transmission, press
the {Stop} key, and then remove
the document from the auto
document feeder.
On Hook:
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
D Specify the destination.
The destination you specify is dialed immediately.
If you misdial the number, press
either the {On Hook Dial} key or the
{Stop} key, and repeat the procedure from step C.
On Hook:
0123456789_kkkkkkkkk
29
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 30 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Other Transmission Features
Manual Dial
You can send a fax message using the
handset (optional) or receiver of an
external telephone.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Set Orig./ Enter No.
3
B Carefully place your fax message
in the auto document feeder.
C Pick up the receiver.
You will hear a dial tone coming
from the receiver.
Handset Mode:
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
D Specify the destination.
The destination you specify is dialed immediately.
If you misdial the number, replace
the receiver and repeat the procedure from step C.
Handset Mode:
0123456789_kkkkkkkkk
30
E When
you hear a high-pitched
tone, press the {Start} key and replace the receiver.
Transmission starts.
If the other party answers the
phone, inform them that you are
sending a fax.
Once the fax is sent, the machine
returns to standby mode.
ABC COMPANY
A4->A4 Transmitting
Reference
To stop transmission:
If you want to stop a fax message during transmission, press
the {Stop} key, and then remove
the document from the auto
document feeder.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 31 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Selecting G3 or G4
Selecting G3 or G4
If your fax machine is connected to ISDN, you can select G3 or G4.
To select G4, press the {G4} key. The
G4 indicator lights.
Reference
Y ou r m a ch i n e a u t o m a ti c a l l y
switches to G3 mode if the destination is not connected to an ISDN
line.
3
Limitation
❒ You can only select a line during
transmission if you specified the
destination with the number keys
or chain dial.
31
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 32 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Other Transmission Features
Tone Signals
On this model the {p} key on the
number keys is used as the Tone key.
Some organizations offer you a special service by telephone, which you
can access by transmitting touch
tones. If your phone service provides
only pulse dialing, the ability to generate Tone Signals will allow you to
access these services.
First, dial the other party. When you
are through to the other end, press
the {p} (Tone) key and enter the
code number that is needed to access
the required feature at the other terminal. You do not need to press the
{p} (Tone) key if your machine is set
up for dialing in Tone Dial (DTMF)
mode.
3
Using the {p} (Tone) Key
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode, and that there is
no document in the feeder.
B Pick up the telephone handset, or
press the {On Hook Dial} key.
C Dial
the remote facility. Do not
press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ If your telephone line type is a
tone dial line, go to step E.
D After your line is connected to the
remote facility, if your telephone
line type is Pulse Dial, press the
{p} key on the number keys.
A dot appears in the display.
32
E Enter the digits that you need to
use for remote facility. After you
have finished your business with
the remote facility, hang up.
Note
❒ Procedures very according to
service.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 33 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Transmission Functions
Transmission Functions
Stamp
Closed Network Transmission
When sending a fax message, the machine can stamp a circle mark at the
bottom of the document. This stamp
indicates that the document has been
successfully stored in memory for
Memory Transmission, or that it has
been successfully sent for Immediate
Transmission.
Before you can use the Stamp, you
need to program the Stamp function
in a User Function key ({F1} to {F4}).
The key to which the function is preassigned varies according to model.
(See P.58 “User Function Keys”.) Then
whenever you wish to use the Stamp
feature, just press the User Function
key you programmed it in. Note that
you must switch the stamp on before
you press the {Start} key.
• If a page is not stamped, you may
need to resend it.
This feature ensures that you do not
send confidential documents to the
wrong machine. The ID Codes of the
communicating machines are
checked, and if they are not the same,
the communication is stopped.
3
Note
❒ Program the same ID Code in the
receiver's fax machine beforehand.
See P.105 “ID Code”.
❒ You can specify whether you want
to send a fax by Closed Network
Reception with the User Parameters. See P.95 “User Parameters”
(switch 06, bit 02).
❒ The factory default setting is Disabled.
A Press the {Stamp} key.
The Stamp indicator lights. Pressing the {Stamp} key again turns it
off.
By default, Stamp is turned off. If
you use this feature often, you can
adjust the User Parameters so that
the home setting is on. In this case,
Stamp can easily be turned off for
any single transmission by pressing the {Stamp} key. See P.95 “User
Parameters” (switch 00, bit 0).
Note
❒ When the stamp starts getting
lighter, replace the cartridge.
See P.146 “Replacing the Stamp
Cartridge”.
33
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 34 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Other Transmission Features
3
Label Insertion
No Document, No Dial
With this feature you can have the receiver's name programmed in Quick
Dial or Speed Dial printed on the
message when it is received at the
other end. The name will be printed
at the top of the page and will be preceded by "To".
If you program the Label insertion
feature in a Quick Dial or Speed Dial,
the feature is enabled when you select
{Yes}. This feature cannot be used if
the other party's name is not programmed.
If you select the Label insertion feature then enter the other party's user
code, your user code will also appear
on the page. "From" is automatically
inserted before your user code. However, this feature cannot be used if
your user code is not programmed.
If you dial a destination without setting a document, and then for some
reason leave the machine without
sending anything, the document set
by the next person to use the machine
could be sent to the wrong destination. To avoid such mistakes, when
this feature is turned on you cannot
dial a destination unless your document is set.
When No Document, No Dial is
turned on, the standby display looks
like this:
eps
FEB. 1.2001 9:15AM
TO:DEF COMPANY
1
ABC COMPANY
NO.005
P. 1
FROM:DEF
2
GFATEN1J
1. Name that is registered in the
Quick Dial or Speed Dial key.
2. Name that is assigned to the Personal Code.
Note
❒ You can set this feature for each
destination.
34
Ready
100% 02:39PM
Set Originals
Note
❒ When the machine is shipped, this
feature is turned off by default. If
you wish to turn this feature on,
please contact your service representative.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 35 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Transmission Functions
Blank Sheet Detect
This feature is designed to help you
avoid making mistakes while scanning in documents.
If you try and scan in an almost completely blank document, an alarm
sounds to warn you. Make sure the
document is not blank.
• Transmission is not cancelled even
if the machine detects the document as blank.
• With Immediate Transmission, the
alarm sounds immediately.
• With Memory Transmission, the
alarm sounds as soon as the document has been scanned. If you
press the {Stop} key while the
BLANK DOCUMENT message is
shown, the "Cancel Trans." display
appears.
• As the alarm sounds, the BLANK
DOCUMENT message appears.
• You can turn Blank Sheet Detect on
or off with the User Parameters.
See P.95 “User Parameters” (switch
11, bit 2). When shipped, this feature is turned on by default.
• This feature is not supported in
Copy mode.
3
35
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 36 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Other Transmission Features
More Transmission Functions
The following functions are useful
when transmitting documents.
If Memory Runs Out While
Storing a Document
If you run out of memory while storing a document. (free space reaches
0%), scanning stops and the following
display will appear: "Memory is Full.
Storing Stopped OK". If you press the
{OK} key, the display changes. Remove the document from the auto
document feeder, press 0 or 1 to select "Transmit" or "Delete", and then
press the {OK} key.
3
Stored Pages
hi/OK
[Transmit] Delete
"Transmit" - Send the pages of the
document stored in memory. Once
this lot of pages is sent, send the remaining pages.
"Delete" - The entire document is
erased from memory and the machine returns to the standby mode.
Reset the document in the auto document feeder and send it using Immediate Transmission.
36
Checking the Transmission
Result
Unless otherwise indicated, the automatic printing of these reports can be
turned on or off by changing the bit of
the user parameters. See P.95 “User
Parameters” (switch 03, bits 7–0).
You can confirm successful transmission with the Communication Result
Report or the Communication Failure
Report for Memory Transmission,
and the Immediate Transmission Result Report for Immediate Transmission.
❖ Communication Result Report
Turn on the Communication Result Report if you want a report to
be printed after every transmission.
❖ Communication Failure Report
If you turn the Communication result Report off, the Communication Failure Report will be printed
when a communication fails.
❖ Immediate Transmission Result Report
Turn on the Immediate Transmission Result Report if you want a report to be printed after every
successful Immediate Transmission.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 37 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
More Transmission Functions
Broadcasting Sequence
If you dial several destinations for the
same message (Broadcasting), the
messages are sent in the order in
which they were dialed. If the documet could not be transmitted, the machine redials that destination after the
last destination specified for Broadcasting. For example, if you specify
four destinations, A through D for
Broadcasting, and if the lines to destinations A and C are busy, the machine dials the destinations in the
following order: A, B, C, D, A, and C.
Sending a Fax Straight Away
When you wish to send a fax straight
away, use Immediate Transmission.
If a Memory Transmission is in
progress, the display will switch to
transmission standby and as soon as
the current transmission has finished,
the Immediate Transmission will
start automatically. (See Chapter 2,
"Immediate Transmission" in the Basic Features manual.)
If you are already sending to more
than one destination with Memory
Transmission and your document has
already been scanned in, Broadcasting is interrupted to allow the Immediate Transmission to be sent.
However, if a transmission other than
the current transmission is on standby, that document is sent first causing
your Immediate Transmission to take
a little longer.
Broadcasting: Checking
Progress
To check which destinations the fax
message has been sent to so far, print
the TX file list. (See P.18 “Printing a
File List”.)
Auto Redial
3
If a document cannot be transmitted
because the line is busy or due to a
transmission error, redialing is done
twice at 1-minute intervals for Immediate Transmission, and four times at
5-minute intervals for Memory Transmission. (The redialing interval and
number of retries may vary according
to country.)
If redialing fails, the machine cancels
the transmission and prints the Communication Result Report or Communication Failure Report. See P.40
“Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission) (Switch 03, Bit 0)”,
and P.40 “Communication Failure Report (On if Communication Result Report is Off) (Switch 03, Bit 0)”.
37
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 38 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Other Transmission Features
Batch Transmission
This feature will save communication
costs if you often send more than one
message to the same location.
If various people in your office send
messages to the Tokyo branch office,
sending all these messages on separate calls can be expensive. It is cheaper to send them all together on the
same call. You can further cut costs by
sending out batches during off-peak
hours. To do so, simply create Keystroke Programs that use Send Later
to send to those common destinations.
Instruct people in your office to store
all faxes for the Tokyo branch in the
memory, using Send Later. The selected time of transmission must be
the same for each message that you
wish to include in the batch. Then,
when that time is reached, the messages will all be sent out on the same
call, or ‘batched’.
You can set up more than one batch.
For example, you could set up a batch
for Tokyo at, 1 am, a batch for Hong
Kong at 2 am, a batch for London at 3
am, and so on.
Also, when you send a fax message, if
there is a message in the memory
waiting for transmission to the same
telephone number, it will be sent out
with your message. This will only
happen if the message already in the
memory is waiting for retransmission
(for example, because the line was
busy on the first attempt).
You can have up to 50 fax messages in
the same batch.
3
38
Note
❒ By default, Batch Transmission is
switched on. You can switch it on
or off with the User Parameters.
See P.95 “User Parameters” (switch
06, bit 4).
❒ If you store the Batch Transmission
function in a User Function key,
you can turn it on or off by just
pressing that key. The User Function key indicator lights when
Batch Transmission is turned on.
Dual Access
Dual Access means that even if the
machine is already carrying out a
task, you may be able to operate the
machine.
For instance, if your machine is currently receiving a long fax message,
but you want to send a message and
go back to your desk without having
to wait by the machine, you can place
your message in the feeder, select the
required transmission features, dial
the number, and press Start. Your
message will be scanned and stored
to memory while the machine is still
receiving. This means that you can
take your fax back to your desk before
it is actually sent. However, to be sure
whether your transmission was successful or not, keep an eye open for
Error Reports (or check the Journal).
Note that during Immediate Transmission, when copying, or when the
User Tools menu is open, the machine
cannot scan in documents.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 39 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
More Transmission Functions
ECM (Error Correction Mode)
This feature automatically resends
data that wasn't transmitted successfully using a system that complies
with international standards.
ECM requires that the destination
machine has the same feature.
Parallel Memory Transmission
With this feature the machine can call
destinations while scanning documents. Compared with normal Memory Transmission where the machine
calls once all the documents have
been stored, it is quick to verify
whether a connection has been made
or not.
Additionally, as scanning finishes
more quickly than Immediate Transmission, it is useful if you want to
take the document back to your desk
immediately. However, if the connection cannot be made (for example if
the line is busy), normal Memory
Transmission takes place.
After a Parallel Memory Transmission fails, a communication result report or a communication failure
report is printed.
Note
❒ Normal Memory Transmission
still takes place when using the following:
• Send Later
• Transfer Request
❒ By default, Parallel Memory
Transmission is switched on. You
can switch it on or off with the
User Parameters. See P.95 “User
Parameters” (switch 07, bit 2).
❒ When the amount of remaining
memory drops below a certain level, the machine switches to ordinary memory transmission and the
parallel memory transmission feature is disabled until more memory becomes available.
3
Important
❒ The file is erased if any of the following happen during transmission:
• The Stop key is pressed.
• There is not enough memory
available.
• A document becomes jammed.
39
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 40 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Other Transmission Features
Printed Reports
You can obtain reports from your machine either by having your machine print
them out automatically, or by printing them out yourself.
Note
❒ You can switch the various reports on or off with the User Parameters. See
P.95 “User Parameters” (switch 03, bits 7–0).
File Reserve Report (Switch 03, Bit 2)
3
If you switch this report on, it is printed immediately after you store a document
in memory for Memory Transmission. It gives the file number, the time that it
was stored, and the destinations (including any Group numbers that were selected).
If you have switched this report off, a File Reserve Report will be printed only
when a communication fails.
Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission) (Switch
03, Bit 0)
This report is printed out after memory transmission showing whether it was
successful or not. If you have switched this report off, a Communication Failure
Report will be printed only when a communication fails.
Communication Failure Report (On if Communication Result
Report is Off) (Switch 03, Bit 0)
This report is printed if a memory transmission failure occurs after a job is completed. It is only printed if the Communication Result Report is switched off, and
a communication failure occurs.
Transmission Result Report (Switch 03, Bit 5)
This report is printed out after immediate transmission showing whether it was
successful or not.
❖ Printing Part of the Image on the Report
For reference purposes, the machine prints all or part of the first page of the
document on the following reports.
• Communication Result
• File Reserve
• Communication Failure Report
40
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 41 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Printed Reports
Report Formats
GFRTUK0N.eps
* * * COMMUNICATION RESULT REPORT (FEB. 1.2001 9:19PM) * * *
FAX HEADER:ABC COMPANY
TRANSMITTED/STORE: FEB. 1.2001 9:18PM
FILE MODE
OPTION
ADDRESS
RESULT
PAGE
3
* * * JOURNAL(FEB. 1.2001 11:07PM) * * *
FAX HEADER:ABC COMPANY
<TRANSMISSION>
DATE TIME ADDRESS
MODE
TIME
PAGE
RESULT
PERSONAL NAME
FILE
<RECEPTION>
DATE TIME ADDRESS
MODE
TIME
PAGE
RESULT
PERSONAL NAME
FILE
GFRTUK0N
❖ The Mode Column
See the bottom of the Journal for a full listing of symbols on the Journal. On
other reports a code is given, informing the type of communication. These
codes are explained below.
❖ The Result Column
OK: Successful communication
E: An error occurred
❖ The Footnote on the Journal
Transmission counter: Total number of transmitted pages
Reception counter: Total number of received pages
41
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 42 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Other Transmission Features
3
42
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 43 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
4. Reception Features
General
Immediate Reception
Memory Reception
Each page of a received fax message is
printed as soon as it is received. This
method is used for standard fax messages.
The machine normally receives fax
messages in Immediate Reception.
However, if Two In One or MultiCopy Reception are switched on,
messages are received in Memory Reception. Further, if one of the Substitute Reception items occurs,
messages are received in Memory Reception.
The machine waits until all pages of
the message have been received into
memory before printing the message.
This method is used with the following features:
• Two In One (See P.47 “Two In
One”.)
• Multi-Copy Reception (See P.79
“Multi-Copy Reception”.)
❖ Display during reception
The sender's name or fax number
appears on the first line.
ABC COMPANY
Set Orig./ Enter No.
❖ Reception resolution
This machine supports Standard
and Detail resolutions. Even if the
sender specifies the resolution as
Fine or Super Fine, this machine
receives images as Detail. This
may cause faxes to appear slightly
different at your end than the
sender intended.
Important
❒ If the functions listed above are
turned on, you may not be able to
receive very large or detailed faxes. If this happens, we recommend
that you turn these functions off.
❒ If power is turned off for more
than 1 hour, documents saved in
memory are deleted.
Limitation
❒ The machine may not be able to receive fax messages when the free
memory space is less than about
9%.
Note
❒ If the memory free space reaches
0% during Memory Reception, the
machine can no longer receive the
current fax message and stops
communicating.
43
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 44 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Reception Features
Printing Documents That Have
Been Received into Memory
(Substitute Reception)
If the Receive File indicator is lit
steadily, a message was stored in
memory using substitute reception.
This could be because the machine
ran out of paper or toner, or because
the Power Saver has turned off the
print engine.
Check the following items to solve the
problem and restore the machine to
normal working condition.
• The Power Saver (See P.93 “Energy
Save Timer”) has turned off the
heater. Press the {Energy Saver/
3Clear Modes} key to restore the
machine to working condition.
• When "ADD PAPER" appears in the
display, your fax machine is out of
paper. Add paper (See Chapter 4,
"Loading Paper in the Main Paper
Cassette" in the Basic Features
manual).
• When "ADD TONER" appears in the
display, your fax machine is out of
toner. Change the toner cassette.
(See P.147 “Replacing the Toner Cassette and Cleaning Pad”)
• A paper jam has occurred. (See
P.128 “Clearing a Copy, Fax, or Print
Jam”), or a cover is open.
As soon as the machine is restored to
working condition, messages stored
in memory are printed. The Receive
File indicator goes out and the messages are erased from memory.
4
44
Note
❒ If a message comes in while you
are copying, the fax machine will
store the message in memory and
the Receive File indicator will
light. The message will be printed
as soon as copying is done.
❒ By default, Substitute Reception is
switched on. You can switch it on
or off with the User Parameters.
See P.95 “User Parameters” (switch
05, bit 0).
Screening Messages from Anonymous
Senders
To help you screen out unwanted
messages that may fill up your memory, the machine can be programmed
to only use Substitute Reception for
messages that arrive with name or fax
number identification.
Two settings are available:
• When a name or fax number is received
• Free
Note
❒ The default setting is "When a
name or fax number is received."
In other words, the machine only
stores messages when the name or
fax number is present. You can
change this with User Parameters.
See P.95 “User Parameters” (switch
05, bit 1).
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 45 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
General
❖ When a name or fax number is received
The machine switches to Substitute Reception only when the
sender programs their name or fax
number. If the power is switched
off for more than an hour, all the
messages received into memory
are deleted. If this occurs, the Power Failure Report or Journal can be
used to identify which messages
were lost so you can ask the senders to transmit them again.
Important
❒ If a sender does not program their
name or fax number, the machine
may reject an important fax message. We recommend that you ask
important senders to register their
name or fax number in advance.
❖ Free
The machine switches to Substitute Reception regardless of
whether or not the sender has programmed their name or fax number.
Receiving Messages in
Telephone Mode
This mode is active when the Manual
Receive indicator is lit. You have to
answer the call yourself and decide
whether it is a fax or a telephone call.
The procedure for answering a call is
as follows:
When Answering with the Optional
Handset
4
A Pick up the optional handset and
listen to the other end.
B If you hear a voice, continue your
conversation as you would normally.
C If you hear a fax tone, remove any
documents from the feeder, press
the {Start} key, and then replace
the handset.
45
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 46 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Reception Features
Printing Options
Center Mark
By default, marks are printed halfway
down the left side and at the top center
of each page received. This makes it easy
for you to position the hole puncher correctly when you file received messages.
You can turn this feature on or off. See
P.95 “User Parameters” (switch 02, bit
1).
4
Note
❒ The center mark is not printed when
you use the machine for making copies.
❒ The center mark may deviate a little
from the exact center of the edge.
Checkered Mark
By default, a checkered mark is printed on the first page of fax messaged to
help you separate them.
Note
❒ You can turn this feature off. See
P.95 “User Parameters” (switch 02,
bit 4).
TSI Print
Usually the sender's fax header is
printed on received messages. If the
sender has not programmed their
header, you will not be able to identify
them. However, if you turn this feature
on, the sender's name or fax number is
printed instead so you can find out
where the message came from.
• TSI = Transmitting Subscriber Identification
46
Note
❒ When the machine is shipped,
this feature is turned off by default. Turn it on or off with the
User Parameters. See P.95 “User
Parameters” (switch 02, bit 3).
CIL/TID Print
Limitation
❒ This feature is available only when
receiving in G4 mode. (The optional ISDN board must be installed
and the fax machine connected for
ISDN communications.)
Two features are provided for identification of messages received by G4
(ISDN). If turned on, this information
is printed on every page. Turn CIL
and TID on and off with the User Parameters. See P.95 “User Parameters”
(switch 02, bit 5 and 6).
The CIL (Call Identification Line) refers to the combination of the receiver's own fax number, name, the
sender's own fax number and name,
time, and page number. The default
setting is on. The TID (Transmitter
ID) refers to the name registered by
the sender in their fax header. The default setting is on.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 47 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Printing Options
Reception Time
You can have the date and time when
a message was received printed at the
bottom of the received image. This
feature is turned off by default. You
can turn it on with the User Parameters. See P.95 “User Parameters”
(switch 02, bit 2).
Limitation
❒ When a received message is printed on two or more sheets, the date
and time is printed in the last page.
Note
❒ The date and time printed on messages
received using Memory Reception is
the date and time when printed.
Two In One
When two messages of the same size
and direction are received consecutively, they are printed on a single
sheet when you turn this feature on.
This can help you economize on paper.
• Two half-letter L messages are printed side by side on a sheet of letter K.
Note
❒ By default, this feature is turned
off. Switch it on with the User Parameters. See P.95 “User Parameters” (switch 10, bit 1).
❒ This feature uses Memory Reception.
Reverse Order Printing
Normally, received pages are printed
and stacked on the tray in the order
they are received. If you turn this feature on, the machine starts printing
the message from the last page received, meaning that the first page received is printed last. By default, this
feature is turned off, but you can turn
it on with the User Parameters. See
P.95 “User Parameters” (switch 10, bit
0).
4
Note
❒ This feature uses Memory Reception.
Limitation
❒ This feature does not work with
messages larger than half-letter K,
or LT L. When LT K size paper is
loaded in the machine, each page
of the received message is output
on a single sheet.
❒ If paper matching the size and direction of a received document is
not available, Two In One is not
possible.
❒ If the sent pages are of different
width, or were sent with different
scan settings, this feature is not
available.
47
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 48 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Reception Features
If Incoming Messages Do Not Fit on Paper
Breaking Down Large Format
Messages
If the incoming document is longer
than the paper in your fax machine,
the machine will split it into multiple
sheets. The tail end of the message
will be reproduced at the head of the
next page. The images overlap each
other by 0.4 inches. (You can ask a service technician to turn off the overlap.)
4
48
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 49 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
5. Copying
Copying
If you need to make a copy of something,
and there is no copier available, use your
fax machine. Just place your original in
the feeder, and press the {Copy} key.
Important
❒ When making multiple copy sets,
copying starts once all originals
have been scanned into memory. If
memory runs out (free memory
reaches 0%) while scanning in, the
copy job is canceled and originals
that have been scanned in so far
are deleted from memory.
Note
❒ If you frequently use the fax machine to make copies and do not
want to wait 30 seconds for the machine to warm up after it has entered the Energy Saving mode, you
can change the setting of the Energy Saving feature so that the heater
cools only halfway. See P.95 “User
Parameters” (switch 05, bit 6).
❒ Set your original and select any
scan settings in the same way as
for fax transmission.
❒ Multiple copy sets are sorted and
delivered in page order.
❒ If you wish to prevent passersby
from freely making copies, you can
disable the copy feature with the
User Parameters. See P.95 “User Parameters” (switch 12, bit 7). By default, the copy feature is enabled.
❒ The margins of error when copying
at 100% magnification are as follows:
• Horizontal: +1.5%, -1.5%
• Vertical: +1.0%, -1.0%
❒ You can specify between 1 and 99 copies.
A
Press the {Copy} key.
Copy:
[LT]
A4
Q'ty[ 1]
Note
❒ Pressing the {Copy} key again
returns the machine to standby
mode.
B Place your original in the feeder.
If you have the optional lower cassette or optional bypass feeder you
can select the paper size by pressing 0 or 1.
Copy:
LT
[A4]
Q'ty[ 1]
C Adjust any scan settings as necessary.
Limitation
❒ If your original is longer than
the copy paper you choose, only
the length of the copy paper will
be copied.
D Enter the number of copies you
need with the number keys.
If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
Copy:
LT
[A4]
Q'ty[ 3]
49
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 50 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Copying
E Press the {Start} key.
Copying starts.
When copying has finished, the
machine returns to standby mode.
Note
❒ To stop copying while it is in
progress, press the {Stop} key.
Then open the operation panel
and remove any paper that is
left.
5
50
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 51 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
6. Facsimile User Tools
Programs
If you regularly transmit to a particular destination or set of destinations
using the same features, you can save
a lot of repetitive keypad operation
by storing these settings in a Keystroke Program.
Keystroke Programs are stored as
Quick Dial keys.
Important
❒ You cannot register a program in a
Quick Dial already used for another function.
Example: Assume that you normally
send a daily report to locations A, B,
and C at 11 pm (using Sending at a
Specific Time). Store these instructions as a Keystroke Program. Then
every day, you will only have to place
the report in the document feeder,
and then press that key to set up the
transmission.
Reference
See P.3 “Sending at a Specific Time
(Send Later)”.
See P.63 “Printing a Keystroke Program List”.
Storing a Program
You can register the following items
in Keystroke Programs:
• Memory Transmission, Immediate
Transmission, Confidential Transmission, Free Polling, Polling
Transmission, Polling Reception,
Transfer Request, Printing reports
or lists, destinations, transfer stations, reception stations, Personal
Codes, Confidential ID codes, Polling ID codes, SUB Code Transmission, SEP Code Polling Reception,
and dialup options.
Simply perform the usual procedure, and then instead of pressing
the {Start} key or the {OK} key,
press the Quick Dial you want to
register the program in.
A Set your document and select any
scan settings you require.
B Specify the destination and press
the Quick Dial you want to register the program in.
C Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes", and
then press the {OK} key.
Store Program? hi/OK
[Yes]
No
If you selected "No", press the
{OK} key, and the screen will return to step B.
51
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 52 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Facsimile User Tools
D Register the program name.
If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
a10[ABC]
OK
ABC COMPANY_kkkkkkkk
E Press the {OK} key.
"Programmed" is displayed on the
screen and the document is
scanned in.
If you only want to register the
program and do not want to send a
fax, press the {Stop} key during
scanning.
Using a Program
6
To use a program, perform the following procedure.
Example: When using a program
stored in Quick Dial 27.
A Set your document and select any
scan settings you require.
B Specify Quick Dial 27.
The machine starts scanning the
document and the program stored
in the Quick Dial begins. Once
scanning has finished, the document is sent.
Editing the Program Name
To edit the program name, perform
the following procedure.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to scroll and display
"7. Change Prog. Name".
Program / Delete:
7.Change Prog.Namehi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press the Quick Dial that contains
the program whose name you
want to edit.
Scroll using 0 or 1.
Change?
hi/OK
a10 ABC COMPANY
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press the {Clear} key, and then enter the program's name.
Editing a Program
You can edit the contents of a program registered as a Quick Dial by
erasing the program. (See P.53 “Deleting a Program”), and then re-registering it as a new program (See P.51
“Storing a Program”.)
52
a10[ABC]
OK
DEF COMPANY_kkkkkkkk
H Press the {OK} key.
I Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 53 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Programs
Deleting a Program
F Press the {OK} key.
To delete a program, perform the following procedure.
G Press the {User Tools} key.
Limitation
❒ You cannot delete a program if a
file using that program (destination) is stored in memory.
The program is deleted.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
❒ You cannot delete a program if a
group using that program (destination) is stored in memory.
Note
❒ If you delete a program, the registered program name is also deleted.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
6
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to scroll and display
"8. Delete Program".
User Tools Main Menu
8.Delete Program hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press the Quick Dial that contains
the program you want to delete.
Press the Quick Dial, or scroll using 0 or 1.
Delete?
hi/OK
a10 DEF COMPANY
53
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 54 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Facsimile User Tools
Storing an Often Used Document (Auto
Document)
If you find that you often have to send
a particular page to people (for example, a map, a standard attachment, or
a set of instructions), store that page
in the memory as an Auto Document,
using a Quick Dial Key. This saves rescanning the document every time
you want to send it.
When you need to send that page to
somebody, press the Quick Dial Key
that you stored it in, place any other
pages that you wish to send into the
feeder, dial, and press the {Start} key.
At the destination, the Auto Document will be printed first. You can
also program a destination for each
Auto Document into the same Quick
Dial Key.
6
Note
❒ The Auto Document is transmitted
as is; you cannot write anything on
it like you can with a cover sheet. If
you wish the machine to place
your name on your transmitted
documents, try using the Label Insertion feature. (See P.34 “Label Insertion”.)
Storing an Auto Document
Important
❒ If the Main Power switch is turned
off for more than an hour, the contents of all Auto Documents are
deleted. If this happens, use the
Power Failure Report to identify
which messages have been lost.
(See P.131 “Power Failure Report”.)
Limitation
❒ The maximum number of Auto
Documents you can register is 30.
❒ You can only send one Auto Document per transmission.
❒ You cannot register Auto Documents in Quick Dials that are already programmed.
❒ If you register Auto Documents, the
amount of memory reserved for
Memory Transmission decreases.
To register a document in a Quick Dial, perform the following procedure.
A Set your document and select any
scan settings you require.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
C Press the {OK} key.
54
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 55 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Storing an Often Used Document (Auto Document)
D Press 0 or 1 until "9. Prog. Auto
Doc." is displayed.
Program / Delete:
9.Prog. Auto Doc. hi
E Press the {OK} key.
F Display the number of the Quick
Dial where the want to register
the document.
Press the Quick Dial, or scroll 0 or 1.
• If you select a Quick Dial that is
programmed with a destination, "This key is in Use as a
Quick Dial" is displayed, and
you can proceed to step G. If you
select the wrong Quick Dial,
press the {Cancel} key, then go
back to step E.
• If you specify a Quick Dial that
is used as a Group or Program,
"This key is in Use as a Group
Dial" or "This key is in Use as a
Program" is displayed, and you
cannot program that Quick Dial. Select a Quick Dial that is not
programmed.
a20[ABC]
Name
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
G Enter the name of the Auto Docu-
H Press the {OK} key.
I Press the {Start} key.
The document is stored in memory
and registered as an Auto Document.
J Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
Sending an Auto Document as
an Attachment
To send an Auto Document as an attachment, perform the following procedure. (To send an Auto Document
only, perform the following procedure from step B.)
Note
❒ If you send another document
with an Auto Document, the Auto
Document is sent first.
6
A Set your document and select any
scan settings you require.
B Press
the Quick Dial where the
Auto Document is registered.
C Specify the destination and press
the {OK} key.
D Press the {Start} key.
ment.
• If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
• If you do not enter a name and
press the {OK} key, the name is
not programmed.
a20[ABC]
OK
DEF COMPANY_kkkkkkkk
55
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 56 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Facsimile User Tools
Editing an Auto Document
You can edit the contents of an Auto
Document registered as a Quick Dial
by deleting the Auto Document. (See
P.57 “Deleting an Auto Document”),
and then re-registering it as a new
Auto Document (See P.54 “Storing an
Auto Document”.)
Limitation
❒ Although you can specify scan settings when sending an Auto Document, these settings will only
apply to the document you send
along with the Auto Document.
The settings used when you
scanned in and stored the Auto
Document will apply to the Auto
Document itself.
6
Editing an Auto Document
Name
To edit an Auto Document's name,
perform the following procedure.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to scroll and display
"9. Prog. Auto Doc.".
Program / Delete:
9.Prog. Auto Doc. hi
D Press the {OK} key.
56
E Display the number of the Quick
Dial whose name you want to edit.
Press the Quick Dial, or scroll using 0 or 1, and then press the
{OK} key.
a20[ABC]
/OK
DEF COMPANYkkkkkkkkk
F Press the {Clear} key, and then enter the Auto Document's name.
If you do not want to change the
name, go to step G.
a20[ABC]
OK
ABC COMPANY_kkkkkkkk
G Press the {OK} key.
The name is changed.
If you want to change another
Auto Document's name, repeat the
above steps from step C.
H Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 57 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Storing an Often Used Document (Auto Document)
Deleting an Auto Document
To delete an Auto Document, perform the following procedure.
Limitation
❒ You cannot delete an Auto Document if a file containing that document is stored in memory.
Note
❒ If you want to confirm the list of
Auto Documents already stored in
memory, print a Keystroke Program List. See P.63 “Printing a Keystroke Program List”.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
G Press 0 or 1 to select {Yes (Delete)}.
If you select {No}, and then press
the {OK} key, go back to step C.
Are You Sure?
[Yes]
No
hi/OK
H Press the {OK} key.
If you want to delete another Auto
Document, repeat the above steps
from step C.
I Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
6
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to scroll and display
"10. Del. Auto Doc.".
Program / Delete:
10.Del. Auto Doc. hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Display the number of the Quick
Dial where the document you
want to delete is registered.
Press the Quick Dial, or scroll using 0 or 1.
Delete?
hi/OK
a20 DEF COMPANY
F Press the {OK} key.
57
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 58 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Facsimile User Tools
User Function Keys
You can program each of the User Function keys ({F1} to {F4}) with a function
that you use frequently. When you wish to use that function, instead of having
to search through several menus to find it, just press the appropriate User Function key.
Important
❒ When registering and editing User Function keys, we recommend that you
print out a Quick Dial destination/User Function List for reference. (See P.62
“Printing Dial Lists” and P.63 “Printing a Keystroke Program List”.)
Assigning User Function Keys
You can program each of the User Function keys with one of the following functions.
6
58
Function Name
Function Contents
Print Journal
Use when you want to
print out a Journal.
Fax Header Print
You can turn this
function on or off.
Group
Use when you want to
specify a group of
destinations.
Stamp
You can turn this
function on or off.
Tone
Use when you want to
enter a tone signal.
Dial Option
Condition
Reference
-
P.22 “Printing the Journal”
b
P.5 “Fax Header Print”
-
See Chapter 2, "Using
Groups" in the Basic
Features manual.
b
P.33 “Stamp”
-
P.32 “Tone Signals”
Use this function to
attach various information to a fax message.
b
P.28 “Dial Options”
Sub-address *1
Use when entering a
sub-address.
b
P.112 “ISDN G3/G4”
Batch Trans.
You can turn this
function on or off.
b
P.38 “Batch Transmission”
Forwarding
You can turn this
function on or off.
b
P.85 “Forwarding”
Mail Address *2
Use when you want to
specify the destination with an e-mail
address.
-
See "Registering Email Addresses" in
the NIC FAX KIT
manual or PDU manual.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 59 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
User Function Keys
Function Name
Function Contents
Mail Reception
Use when you want to
access the server and
send an e-mail.
-
See "Internet Faxing"
in the NIC FAX KIT
manual or PDU manual.
Auto Mail Reception
See "Internet Faxing"
in the NIC FAX KIT
manual or PDU manual.
b
See "Internet Faxing"
in the NIC FAX KIT
manual or PDU manual.
Prog. Quick Dial
Use when you want to
register the other party's number as a
Quick Dial destination.
-
See Chapter 3, "Storing Quick Dial Numbers" in the Basic
Features manual.
Monitor volume
You can adjust the
volume for the monitor and buzzer.
-
See Chapter 4, "Adjusting the Volume and
Sounds the Machine
Makes" in the Basic
Features manual.
*2
*1
*2
Condition
Reference
Your machine must be hooked up to ISDN.
Your machine must be connected to the Internet.
6
• The "b" notation indicates that the User Function key lights when that function is selected.
• If your fax machine is not equipped with the NIC FAX KIT, two empty function keys are available and two function keys are pre-programmed:
F1: Print Journal
F2: Stamp
• If your fax machine is equipped with a NIC FAX KIT, four function keys are
pre-programmed:
F1: Print Journal
F2: Mail Address
F3: Mail Reception
F4: Stamp
To store a User Function Code, perform the following procedure.
59
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 60 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Facsimile User Tools
Making Function Key Assignments
A Press the {User Tools} key.
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to scroll and display
"11. User Functions".
Program / Delete:
11.User Functions hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press the User Function key ({F1}
6
to {F4}) you want to register.
If you make a mistake and press a
k ey t hat i s no t p r o gr am m ed ,
"None" is displayed in the display.
User Functions hi/OK
[** None **]
F Press 0 or 1 to display the function name you want to register.
User Functions hi/OK
Group
G Press the {OK} key.
If you want to register another
User Function key, repeat the
above steps from step C.
H Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
60
Using a User Function Key
To use a User Function key ({F1} to
{F4}), press the User Function key
that contains the desired registered
function.
Journal:
Press Start to Print
When printing a Journal.
The display changes for each registered function.
Editing a User Function Key
To edit a User Function key, perform
the following procedure.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to scroll and display
"11. User Functions".
Program / Delete:
11.User Functions hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press the User Function key you
want to edit.
If you make a mistake, press the
correct User Function key.
User Functions hi/OK
[Print Journal]
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 61 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
User Function Keys
F Press 0 or 1 to display the new
function name you want to register.
User Functions hi/OK
Stamp
G Press the {OK} key.
If you want to edit another User
Function key, repeat the above
steps from step C.
H Press the {User Tools} key.
F Press 0 or 1 to display "None".
User Functions hi/OK
** None **
G Press the {OK} key.
If you want to delete another User
Function key, repeat the above
steps from step C.
H Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
Deleting a User Function Key
To delete a User Function key, perform the following procedure.
6
A Press the {User Tools} key.
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to scroll and display
"11. User Functions".
Program / Delete:
11.User Functions hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press the User Function key you
want to delete.
If you make a mistake, press the
correct User Function key.
User Functions hi/OK
[Print Journal]
61
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 62 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Facsimile User Tools
Lists You Can Print Out Yourself
F Press 0 or 1 to select the list you
Printing Dial Lists
This function allows you to print the
following lists manually. Select a list
as needed.
Note
❒ You can also print the User Function Key list from "Printing a User
Function Key List". (See P.65
“Printing a User Function Key List”.)
A Press the {User Tools} key.
B Press 0 or 1 to display "2. Reports / Lists".
User Tools Main Menu
2.Reports / Lists hi
6
C Press the {OK} key.
D Press 0 or 1 to display "3.Dial
want to print.
If you selected "4. All Lists", all
three lists will print.
Dial List:
1.Quick Dial List hi
Dial List:
2.Speed Dial List hi
Dial List:
3.Group Dial List hi
Dial List:
4.All Lists
hi
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press the {Start} key.
The list(s) are printed.
List".
Reports / Lists
3.Dial List
E Press the {OK} key.
62
Printing a Quick Dial Label
hi
You can print labels for the Quick
Dial keys. For details, see Chapter 3,
"Printing a Quick Dial Key Label" in
the Basic Features manual.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 63 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Printing a Keystroke Program List
Printing a Keystroke Program List
The Keystroke Program list allows
you to print and check functions registered in keystroke programs, and
the names of registered Auto Documents.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
B Press 0 or 1 to display "2. Reports / Lists".
User Tools Main Menu
2.Reports / Lists hi
C Press the {OK} key.
D Press 0 or 1 to display "5. Program List".
Reports / Lists
5.Program List
6
hi
E Press the {OK} key.
F Press the {Start} key.
The list is printed.
63
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 64 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Facsimile User Tools
Printing an Auto Document
You can print and check the contents
of Auto Documents.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
B Press 0 or 1 to display "2. Reports / Lists".
User Tools Main Menu
2.Reports / Lists hi
C Press the {OK} key.
D Press 0 or 1 to display "6. Auto
Doc. Orig.".
Reports / Lists
6.Auto Doc. Orig. hi
6
E Press the {OK} key.
F Press the Quick Dial for the registered Auto Document.
If you make a mistake, press the
{Cancel} key and try again. Use 0
or 1 to scroll.
Print?
a20 LIST
hi/OK
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press the {Start} key.
The document is printed.
64
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 65 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Printing a User Function Key List
Printing a User Function Key List
You can print and check the functions
of User Function keys.
Note
❒ You can also print the User Function list from "Printing Dial Lists".
(See P.62 “Printing Dial Lists”.)
A Press the {User Tools} key.
B Press 0 or 1 to display "2. Reports / Lists".
User Tools Main Menu
2.Reports / Lists hi
C Press the {OK} key.
D Press 0 or 1 to display
6
"7. U.
Function List".
Reports / Lists
7.U. Function Listhi
E Press the {OK} key.
F Press the {Start} key.
The list is printed.
65
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 66 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Facsimile User Tools
Setting the Date and Time
Use this function to set your machine's internal clock to the current
time and date.
If the current date and time are wrong,
use this procedure to correct them.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "3. Setup".
User Tools Main Menu
3.Setup
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press 0 or 1 to display "2. Date/
6
Time".
Setup:
2.Date/Time
hi
F Press the {OK} key.
Year:
[2000]
Press OK
G Press a number key to enter the
year for the digit, or it the year is
correct press the {OK} key.
Year:
[2001]
Press OK
H Press 0 or 1 key to select the correct month, and then press the
{OK} key.
Month:
[February]
66
hi/OK
I Press the {Clear} key and use the
number keys to enter the correct
number for the date (01 to 31).
Day:
[04]
Press OK
J Press 0 or 1 to select AM or PM
for the time that you are going to
enter.
AM/PM:
[AM]
PM
hi/OK
K Use the number keys to enter the
correct time.
Time:
[ 2:50]
Press OK
Enter the current hour setting (1 to
12), and then press the 0 or 1 key.
Time:
[ 4:50]
Press OK
Press the {Clear} key and use the
number keys to enter a 2–digit
number for the correct minute setting (00 to 59).
After "Function Accepted" flashes
briefly in the display, the next setting is displayed.
L Press the {OK} key.
When the display is correct, press
the {OK} key.
M Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 67 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Summer Time / Daylight Saving Time
Summer Time / Daylight Saving Time
Whenever local custom requires advancing the clock or setting the clock
back, use this feature. You can easily
move the clock forwards when daylight saving time begins, and back
when it ends.
G Press the {OK} key.
Note
❒ Before you set this function, make
sure that your machine's internal
clock is correct.
H Press the {User Tools} key.
If you selected "On", "The Clock
Advanced By One Hour" is displayed in the display, and if you
selected "Off", "The Clock Put Back
By One Hour" is displayed.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
B Press 0 or 1 to display "3. Setup".
User Tools Main Menu
3.Setup
hi
6
C Press the {OK} key.
D Press 0 or 1 to display "3. Summer Time / DST".
Setup:
3.Summer Time /DSThi
E Press the {OK} key.
F Use 0 or 1 to select "On" or "Off".
Select "On" to advance your machine's internal clock one hour,
and select "Off" to go back one
hour.
Summer Time/DSThi/OK
[On]
Off
67
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 68 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Facsimile User Tools
Changing the Paper Size Setting
This section explains how to change
the size of paper set in the main paper
tray, the optional second cassette, or
the optional bypass feeder.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
B Press 0 or 1 to display "3. Setup"
User Tools Main Menu
3.Setup
hi
C Press the {OK} key.
D Press 0 or 1 to display "5. Paper
Size".
Setup:
5.Paper Size
6
hi
E Press the {OK} key.
F Press 0 or 1 to display the cassette whose paper size you want
to change.
Paper Size:
1.Cassette 1
hi
If the optional second cassette or
optional bypass feeder are not installed, they are not displayed.
Proceed to step H.
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press 0 or 1 to display the paper
size you want to set.
Cassette 1:
hi/OK
[LT (8 1/2X 11)]
68
I Press the {OK} key.
If you want to change the paper
size for another cassette, repeat the
above steps from step F.
J Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 69 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Selecting the Display Language
Selecting the Display Language
If your native language is Spanish or
French, you can have the messages
that appear on displays, lists and reports shown in either of these languages instead of in English. Follow
the procedure below to change between the three languages.
Note
❒ Make sure that your machine is in
standby mode before following
this procedure. If the standby display is not shown when you start,
the display may become temporarily jumbled up.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
B Press 0 or 1 to display "5. Lan-
6
guage".
User Tools Main Menu
5.Language
hi
C Press the {OK} key.
D Press 0 or 1 to display the language you want to select.
Language:
[ENGLISH]
hi/OK
E Press the {OK} key.
"Now Changing Display Language" is displayed, and the language is changed.
F Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
69
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 70 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Facsimile User Tools
6
70
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 71 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
7. Key Operator Settings
Function List
Here is a list of the functions that are available for setting. Please refer to the referenced page numbers for more information.
Note
❒ Please remember that some functions, namely, Specified Cassette, ISDN G3/
G4, Network, Dial up, will not appear in the menu until the required optional
devices have been installed. If all of these items are installed on your machine,
then the feature numbering in the list below will match the numbers you see
on the display. If one or more options are not installed on your machine, then
some of the numbers will be different.
❒ If your fax machine is not equipped with a network card, you can have either
a NIC FAX KIT or a PDU KIT (but not both) installed at any time. If your machine is equipped with a NIC FAX KIT, you cannot install a PDU KIT.
Display (Specs.)
Description
Ref.
1. Counter
Displays the total number of pages transmitted or
received.
P.74 “Counters”
2. PAD Count.
Clear
Allows you to clear the counter after replacing the
ADF Maintenance Kit.
P.75 “Resetting the
PAD Counters”
3. Authorized RX
Allows you to limit receiving of fax messages to
P.76 “Authorized ReSpecified Senders that your register on your fax ma- ception”
chine. All fax messages from other than Specified
Senders are not received, thus preventing you from
receiving junk fax messages.
4. Multi-Copy
Recp.
Prints multiple copies of fax messages from Specified Senders.
5. Memory Lock
Allows you to have messages from Specified Send- P.81 “Memory Lock”
ers stored in memory and not printed as soon as
they are received. To print the fax messages, you
must enter an ID.
6. Specified Cass.
Allows you to have messages from Specified Send- P.83 “Specified Casers printed from a different tray. This item is avail- sette”
able only after the optional Second Paper Cassette
has been installed.
7. Forwarding
Allows you to automatically forward fax messages
to the fax machines of Specified Senders.
P.85 “Forwarding”
8. Backup File TX
Allows you to register a destination and have the
fax machine create a backup copy for administrative use for every fax message sent to the registered
destination.
P.91 “Backup File
Transmission”
P.79 “Multi-Copy
Reception”
71
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 72 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
7
Display (Specs.)
Description
Ref.
9. Energy Save
Timer
Allows you to have the fax switch off and on at
specified times to save energy.
P.93 “Energy Save
Timer”
10. User Parameters
Allows you to customize various default settings as
required.
P.95 “User Parameters”
11. Personal Code
P.100 “ProgramAllows you to set up personal codes for everyone
who uses the fax machine. Before using the fax ma- ming the Personal
chine, they must enter their Personal Code. This al- Codes”
lows you to monitor who is using the fax machine
and how often.
12. ID Code
Allows you to register IDs required for various
types of transmissions.
P.105 “Registering
ID Codes”
13. Line Type
Allows you select tone or pulse dialing to match the
telephone line connected to your fax machine.
P.107 “Line Type”
14. Select Line
Allows you to select an internal G3 communication P.108 “Select Line”
line or external telephone line for your fax machine.
15. PSTN Access
No.
Allows you to specify the code used to access an
outside line when you dialing.
P.109 “PSTN Access
Number”
16. Transfer Report Allows you to store the number of the line your fax
machine is connected to and have this number used
as the return address when making transfer requests.
P.110 “Transfer Report”
17. ISDN G3/G4
Allows you to perform all the settings required for
an ISDN connection. This item is available only after ISDN has been installed and connected.
P.112 “ISDN G3/
G4”
18. Network
Allows you to perform settings required for a network connection. This item is displayed for a fax
machine with the network card pre-installed or for
a fax machine in which the optional NIC FAX KIT
has been installed after purchase.
P.118 “Network”
18. Dial up
Allows you to perform the settings required for the
Internet fax feature. This item is available only if the
optional PDU Kit Type 210 has been installed.
P.119 “Dialup”
19. Key Layout
Allows you to arrange Keystroke Programs on the
keyboard in an alphabetic order or in the traditional
QWERTY layout.
P.120 “Key Layout”
20. Memory Option Allows you to perform settings for memory expan- P.121 “Memory Opsion. This item is displayed for a fax machine with tion”
the network card pre-installed or for a fax machine
in which the optional NIC FAX KIT has been installed after purchase.
21. Mem. File
Trans.
72
Allows you to send all messages stored in memory P.122 “Memory File
to another fax machine and print them out there, for Transfer”
example, when your fax machine runs out of toner.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 73 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Function List
Display (Specs.)
Description
Ref.
22. Margin Adjust
Allows you to adjust paper settings when you receive fax messages that are blank or partially missing.
P.123 “Margin Adjust”
23. RDS On/Off
Allows you to switch on RDS (Remote Diagnostic
P.125 “RDS On/
System) so a service technician can test your fax ma- Off”
chine remotely from a service station, diagnose the
problem, and can change your machine settings to
correct the problem.
24. System Param.
TX
Allows you to send information about the condition
of your fax machine to your nearest service center.
P.126 “System Parameter Transmission”
Copy this table and use it as a quick reference.
7
73
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 74 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
Using Key Operator Settings
F Confirm that "1. Counter" is dis-
Counters
played.
This function allows you to check the
total number of transmitted, received,
scanned, and printed pages on the
display.
❖ TX Pages
Total number of transmitted pages.
❖ RX Pages
Total number of received pages.
❖ Scan Pages
The combined total number of
pages that have been scanned in
when copying and sending faxes.
❖ Print Pages
The combined total number of
pages that have been printed
through fax reception, copying,
and PC printing.
7
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
press the {OK} key.
74
and then
Key Op. Tools:
1.Counter
hi
G Press the {OK} key.
The number of pages transmitted
is displayed. You can display the
number of pages received,
scanned, or printed by pressing 0
or 1.
H Once
you have confirmed the
number of pages, press the {OK}
key.
I Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 75 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Resetting the PAD Counters
Resetting the PAD Counters
After replacing the ADF Document
Separation Pad, follow this procedure
to reset the counter. You need to replace the Separation Pad when you
are prompted to do so by a message
in the display:
Change ADF PAD
/OK
If you replace the Separation Pad as
soon as this message appears, then
you do not need to reset the counter.
However, if you do not replace the
Separation Pad the first time that you
are prompted to do so, or if you replace the Separation Pad before the
above message appears, then you
must follow the procedure below to
reset the counter.
Reference
See P.145 “Replacing the ADF Maintenance Kit (ADF Document Separation Pad)”.
F Press 0 or 1 to display "2. PAD
Count. Clear".
Key Op. Tools:
2.PAD Count. Clearhi
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes".
Counter Clear? hi/OK
[Yes]
No
If you selected "No" and pressed
the {OK} key, return to step F.
I Press the {OK} key.
The counters are cleared.
J Press the {User Tools} key.
7
The machine returns to standby
mode.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
press the {OK} key.
and then
75
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 76 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
Authorized Reception
You can block junk fax messages and
save paper by limiting the fax messages that your fax machine receives
to a list of Specified Senders. If you receive a fax message from someone
that is not a Specified Sender, the line
is disconnected immediately as soon
as your receive the call.
• To use this feature you must
switch Authorized Reception on
after you register the Specified
Senders). By default, Authorized
Reception is switched off.
• You can select to receive fax messages only from Specified Users, or
you can select to receive all messages from senders other than
from Specified Users. See P.95 “User Parameters” .
• In order for this feature to operate
correctly, at least one Specified
User must be registered.
7
A Make sure that the machine is in
the standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press the 0 or 1 key to select "4.
Key Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
and then
press the {OK} key.
F Press 0 or 1
to display "3. Au-
thorized RX".
Key Op. Tools:
3.Authorized RX
76
hi
G Press the {OK} key.
Authorized RX:
1.On/Off
hi
H Follow
the procedures below to
switch Authorized Reception On/
Off, register a Specified Sender,
or print a list of Specified Senders.
Switching Authorized Reception
On/Off
A Press the {OK} key.
Authorized RX: hi/OK
On
[Off]
B Press 0 or 1 to select "On" or
"Off".
C Press the {OK} key.
Note
❒ If no Specified Users are registered when you press the
{OK} key, you will be
prompted to register a Specified Sender. Press the {OK}
key and follow the procedure
(steps C to F) for "Registering a Specified Sender for
Authorized Reception" below.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 77 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Authorized Reception
Registering a Specified Sender
for Authorized Reception
Follow this procedure to register
Specified Users for Authorized Reception. Registration uses the other party's Own Name (for display)
or fax number. If the other party is
using a fax machine of the same
manufacturer, then registration
uses the Own Name of the other
party registered on their fax machine. If the other fax machine is of
a different manufacturer, then registration uses the other party's fax
number.
Limitation
❒ Destinations that you select as
Specified Users must have their
names and fax numbers registered on your fax machine.
Note
❒ You can register up to a total of
50 Specified Users for Authorized Reception, Multi-Copy
Reception, Memory Lock, Specified Cassette, and Memory File
Transfer.
❒ A Specified User name can be
up to 24 characters long.
❒ You can confirm the names and
fax numbers of Specified Senders by name in the printed Journal.
❒ You can also confirm Specified
Senders by printing a Specified
Sender list.
❒ In order to change a Specified
Sender entry, you must first delete the entry, and then re-enter
it.
A Press 0 or 1 to display "2.
Program Sender".
Authorized RX:
2.Program Sender
hi
B Press the {OK} key.
C Enter the name for the Specified User.
Enter the other party's name or
fax number.
Name/No.[ABC]
OK
ABC COMPANY_kkkkkkkk
Reference
For details about how to enter names, see Chapter 3,
"Entering Caracters" in the
Basic Features manual.
D Press the {OK} key.
E If you want to specify a wildcard, press the 0 or 1" key to
select "Yes", or select "No".
7
Store as Wildcard?
[Yes]
No
Reference
See Chapter 3, "Wild Card" in
the Basic Features manual.
F Press the {OK} key.
The Specified User is registered.
If you want to register another
Specified User, repeat from step
B.
77
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 78 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
Deleting a Specified Sender for
Authorized Reception
Follow this procedure to delete a
Specified Sender.
A Press 0 or 1 to select "3. Delete Sender".
Authorized RX:
3.Delete Sender
hi
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press the 0 or 1 key to select
the name of the Sp ec ified
Sender that you want to delete.
Delete?
ABC COMPANY
hi/OK
D Press the {OK} key.
The Specified Sender is deleted.
If you want to delete more Specified Senders, repeat the above
steps from step B.
7
Printing a List of Specified
Senders for Authorized
Reception
Follow this procedure to print a list
so you can confirm the currently
registered Specified Users.
A Press 0 or 1 to display "4.
Print SenderList".
Authorized RX:
4.Print SenderListhi
78
B Press the {Start} key. The list
prints.
Note
❒ All the Specified Senders registered for Authorized Reception, Multi-Copy Reception,
Memory Lock, Specified Cassette, and Memory File Transfer are printed in the same list.
C Press the {OK} key.
I Press the {User Tools} key.
The fax machine returns to standby.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 79 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Multi-Copy Reception
Multi-Copy Reception
If you switch this feature on, multiple
copies of each incoming fax message
will be printed. You can also choose
to have multiple copies of messages
from Specified Senders.
Note
❒ You cannot have multiple copies
printed for Polling Reception, Free
Polling Reception, Confidential
Reception, and Memory Lock Reception.
Limitation
❒ You can set the number of copies
from 2 to 9.
❒ To use this feature you must
switch Multi-Copy Reception on
after you register the Specified
Senders. By default, this feature is
switched off.
❒ You can use the User Parameters
function to select whether you
want to print multiple copies of
messages received from Specified
Senders only, or from all senders
other than Specified Senders. See
P.95 “User Parameters” (switch 08,
bits 1 and 0). The default setting is
"Specified Senders Only". The default for this setting is off.
A Make sure that the machine is in
the standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press
{2}{2}{2}{2}, and then
press the {OK} key.
F Press
0 or 1 to display "4.
Multi-Copy Recp.".
Key Op. Tools:
4.Multi-Copy Recp.hi
G Press the {OK} key.
Multi-Copy Recp.:
1.On/Off,Quantity hi
H Follow
the procedures below to
switch Multi-Copy Reception
On/Off, register a Specified Sender, or print a list of Specified
Senders.
7
Switching Multi-Copy Reception
On/Off
A Press the {OK} key.
B Press 0 or 1 to "On" to switch
this feature on, or select "Off"
to switch this feature off.
MultiCopy Recp.hi/OK
[On]
Off
C Press the {OK} key.
Note
❒ If you switch this feature off,
go to step I.
D Press a number key to enter the
number of copies.
Quantity:
[3]
Press OK
(2-9)
E Press the {OK} key.
79
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 80 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
Registering a Specified Sender
for Multi-Copy Reception
You can register Specified Senders
for this function.
Reference
The procedure to register Specified Senders for Multi-Copy Reception is the same as that for
Authorized Reception. See P.77
“Registering a Specified Sender for
Authorized Reception”.
Deleting a Specified Sender for
Multi-Copy Reception
You can delete Specified Senders
for this function.
Reference
The procedure to delete Specified Senders for Multi-Copy Reception is the same as that for
Authorized Reception. See P.78
“Deleting a Specified Sender for
Authorized Reception”.
7
Printing a List of Specified
Senders for Multi-Copy
Reception
You can print a list of Specified
Senders for Multi-Copy Reception
Reference
The procedure to print a list of
Specified Senders for MultiCopy Reception is the same as
that for Authorized Reception.
See P.78 “Printing a List of Specified Senders for Authorized Reception”.
I Press the {User Tools} key.
The fax machine returns to standby.
80
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 81 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Memory Lock
Memory Lock
This is a security feature to prevent
unauthorized individuals from reading printed fax messages. When
Memory Lock is switched on, all received messages are stored in memory and are not automatically printed.
To print the messages, you have to
enter the Memory Lock ID code.
Note
❒ Before you can use this feature,
you must register the Memory
Lock ID. (See P.105 “Memory Lock
ID”.)
Limitation
❒ Memory Lock cannot be selected
until you have registered the
Memory Lock ID.
❒ To use this feature you must
switch Memory Lock on after you
register the Memory Lock ID. By
default, Memory Lock is switched
off.
❒ You can select to lock in memory
only messages from Specified Users, or you can select to lock in
memory messages from senders
other than from Specified Users.
See P.95 “User Parameters” (switch
09, bits 1 and 0).
A Make sure that the machine is in
the standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press the 0 or 1 key to select "4
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
and then
press the {OK} key.
F Press 0 or 1
to display "5. Mem-
ory Lock".
Key Op. Tools:
5.Memory Lock
hi
G Press the {OK} key.
Memory Lock:
1.On/Off
hi
H Follow
the procedures below to
switch Memory Lock On/Off, register a Specified Sender, delete a
Specified Sender, or print a list of
Specified Senders.
7
Switching Memory Lock On/Off
A Press the {OK} key.
B Press 0 or 1 to "On" to switch
this feature on, or select "Off"
to switch this feature off.
Memory Lock:
[On]
Off
hi/OK
C Press the {OK} key.
Key Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
81
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 82 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
Registering a Specified Sender
for Memory Lock
You can register Specified Senders
for this function.
Reference
The procedure to register Specified Senders for Memory Lock
is the same as that for Authorized Reception. See P.77 “Registering a Specified Sender for
Authorized Reception”.
Deleting a Specified Sender for
Memory Lock
You can delete Specified Senders
for this function.
Reference
The procedure to delete Specified Senders for Memory Lock
is the same as that for Authorized Reception. See P.78 “Deleting a Specified Sender for
Authorized Reception”.
7
Printing a List of Specified
Senders for Memory Lock
You can print a list of Specified
Senders for Multi-Copy Reception.
Reference
The procedure to print a list of
Specified Senders for Memory
Lock is the same as that for Authorized Reception. See P.78
“Printing a List of Specified Senders for Authorized Reception”.
I Press the {User Tools} key.
The fax machine returns to standby.
82
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 83 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Specified Cassette
Specified Cassette
Use this function to have messages
from Specified Senders printed on
different paper. For example, imagine
green paper placed in the main paper
tray, and white paper placed in the
optional Second Tray. By choosing to
have fax messages from Specified
Senders printed on green paper and
all others printed on white paper, you
can distinguish between them at a
glance.
Limitation
❒ This item is available only after the
optional Second Paper Cassette
has been installed.
Note
❒ To use this feature you must
switch Specified Cassette on after
you register the Specified Senders). By default, Specified Cassette
is switched off.
❒ You can select to print fax messages from the paper supply of the
designated source only for Specified Users, or you can select to
print fax messages from the designated paper supply for all senders
other than for Specified Users. See
P.95 “User Parameters” (switch 08,
bits 5 and 4).
❒ Make sure that you placed the
same size paper in the main paper
tray and the optional Second Tray.
If you do not placed the same size
paper for both paper supplies,
then the received messages will be
stored in the memory.
A Make sure that the machine is in
the standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press
the 0 or 1 key to select "4.
Key Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2}, and then press
the {OK} key.
F Press 0 or 1
to display "6. Spec-
ified Cass.".
Key Op. Tools:
6.Specified Cass. hi
G Press the {OK} key.
Specified Cassette:
1.On/Off
hi
7
H Follow
the procedures below to
switch Specified Cassette On/Off,
register a Specified Sender, delete
a Specified Sender, or print a list
of Specified Senders.
Switching Specified Cassette On/
Off
A Press the {OK} key.
B Press 0 or 1 to "On" to switch
this feature on, or select "Off"
to switch this feature off.
Specified Cass.hi/OK
[On]
Off
C Press the {OK} key.
83
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 84 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
Registering a Specified Sender
for Specified Cassette
You can register Specified Senders
for this function.
Reference
The procedure to register Specified Senders for Specified Cassette is the same as that for
Authorized Reception. See P.77
“Registering a Specified Sender for
Authorized Reception”.
Deleting a Specified Sender for
Specified Cassette
You can delete Specified Senders
for this function.
Reference
The procedure to delete Specified Senders for Specified Cassette is the same as that for
Authorized Reception. See P.78
“Deleting a Specified Sender for
Authorized Reception”.
7
Printing a List of Specified
Senders for Specified Cassette
You can print a list of Specified
Senders for Specified Cassette.
Reference
The procedure to print a list of
Specified Senders for Specified
Cassette is the same as that for
Authorized Reception. See P.78
“Printing a List of Specified Senders for Authorized Reception”.
I Press the {User Tools} key.
The fax machine returns to standby.
84
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 85 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Forwarding
Forwarding
Use this function to print fax specified
from Specified Senders on your own
machine and then forward the messages to other fax machines. This is useful,
for example, if you are visiting another
office and would like copies of your
messages from the head office forwarded to you so you can read them.
Limitation
❒ Messages cannot be forwarded from
senders who are registered for both
Forwarding and Memory Lock.
Note
❒ You can stamp printed fax messages which have been forwarded to
remind you that they have been
forwarded to other destinations.
❒ You can select to forward messages only to Specified Users, or you
can select to forward messages to
all registered destinations other
than the Specified Users. See P.95
“User Parameters” (switch 08, bits 7
and 6). Unless you change this setting, the machine default is set to
forward messages only to the
Specified Users.
❒ To use this feature you must switch
Forwarding on after you register
the Specified Senders). By default,
Forwarding is switched off.
❒ You can also choose to have messages forwarded to Specified Users
without printing them on your fax
machine. See P.95 “User Parameters” (switch 11, bits 6). Unless you
change this setting, the machine
default is set to print all messages
forwarded from your fax machine.
❒ You can register destinations of up
to 254 characters.
❒ You can register up to 30 destinations for messages to be forwarded. The Specified User name can be
up to 24 characters long.
❒ You can register a combined total of
Specified Senders for Authorized Reception, Memory Lock, Multi-Copy
Reception, and Specified Cassette.
❒ To edit a registered Specified User,
just repeat the procedure you followed to register the user.
Switching Forwarding On/Off
A Make sure that the machine is in
the standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press the 0 or 1 key to select "4.
7
Key Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2} {2} {2} {2}, and then
press the {OK} key.
F Press 0 or 1
to display "7. For-
warding".
Key Op. Tools:
7.Forwarding
hi
G Press the {OK} key.
Forwarding:
1.On/Off
hi
H Press the {OK} key.
85
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 86 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
I Press 0 or 1
to "On" to switch
this feature on, or select "Off" to
switch this feature off.
Forwarding:
[On]
Off
hi/OK
J Press the {OK} key.
Note
❒ If you select "On" and no forwarding station is registered,
"Press OK to Program Forwarding Station" is displayed. Press
the {OK} key and register a forwarding station by following
steps J to Q on P.86 “Registering
a Forwarding Station Number”.
K Press the {User Tools} key.
D Press
the {OK} key, and then
press {2}{2}{2}{2}.
E Press the {OK} key.
F Press 0 or 1 to display "7. Forwarding".
Key Op. Tools:
7.Forwarding
hi
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press 0 or 1 to display "2. Prog.
Station"
I Press the {OK} key.
J Press 0 or 1 to display the number of the forwarding station you
want to record or change.
The fax machine returns to standby.
Registering a Forwarding Station
Number
7
You can register a Forwarding Station
Number as follows:
Note
❒ If your machine is connected to ISDN, and you want to use G4 fax
communication to send messages
to another party who can use G4,
press the {G4} key until "G4" is displayed, and then register the Forwarding Station.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
86
Program?
1:
hi/OK
If a forwarding station is already
registered, the fax number for that
station is displayed.
K Press the {OK} key.
L Enter the other party's fax number
with the number keys.
Station 1: Press OK
0123456789
M Press the {OK} key.
The fax number is registered.
When your machine is connected
to ISDN, you must select the line
you are using. Press 0 or 1 to select {G3} or {G4}, and then press
the {OK} key.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 87 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Forwarding
N Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes".
If you select "No" and press the
{OK} key, the screen will return to
that for step I.
If you want to register another fax
number, repeat the above steps
from step I.
If you want to finish, press the {User Tools} key.
Sender Setting:
1.Program Sender
hi
O Press the {OK} key.
P Enter the other party's name.
Enter the other party's name or fax
number.
Name/No.[ABC]
OK
DEF COMPANY_kkkkkkkk
Q Press the {OK} key.
The name is registered.
R If you want to register the Speci-
fied Sender as a Wildcard, press
0 or 1 to select "Yes" or "No".
Store as Wildcard?
[Yes]
No
S Press the {OK} key.
To register another Specified Sender, repeat the above steps from
step L.
To register a different Forwarding
Station, press the {Cancel} key and
repeat the above steps from step I.
Limitation
❒ Names for Specified Senders
can be up to 24 characters long.
Note
❒ You can confirm the names and
fax numbers of Specified Senders on the Journal.
❒ You can confirm registered
Specified Senders on the Specified Sender list.
T Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby mode.
Editing a Forwarding Station
To edit a Forwarding Station that is
already registered, perform the following procedure.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
Op. Tools".
7
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press
the {OK} key, and then
press {2}{2}{2}{2}.
E Press the {OK} key.
F Press 0 or 1 to display "7. Forwarding".
Key Op. Tools:
7.Forwarding
hi
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press 0 or 1 to display "2. Prog.
Station".
Forwarding:
2.Prog. Station
hi
87
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 88 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
I Press the {OK} key.
J Press 0 or 1 to display the fax
number of the Forwarding Station you want to edit.
Program?
1:0123456789
hi/OK
K Press the {OK} key.
L Press the {Clear} key and enter the
Forwarding Station's correct fax
number.
Station 1: Press OK
9876543210_kkkkkkkkk
M Press the {OK} key.
The fax number is registered.
If you want to edit another Forwarding Station, press the {Cancel}
key and repeat the above steps
from step G.
7
N Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
Deleting a Forwarding Station
To delete a Forwarding Station, perform the following procedure.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press
the {OK} key, and then
press {2}{2}{2}{2}.
E Press the {OK} key.
F Press 0 or 1 to display "7. Forwarding".
Key Op. Tools:
7.Forwarding
hi
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press 0 or 1 to display "3. Delete
Station".
Editing a Specified Sender
To edit a Specified Sender, delete the
Specified Sender you want to edit.
(See P.89 “Deleting a Specified Sender”),
and then register it as a new Specified
Sender. (See P.77 “Registering a Specified Sender for Authorized Reception”.)
Forwarding:
3.Delete Station
I Press the {OK} key.
J Press 0 or 1 to display the fax
number of the Forwarding Station you want to delete.
Delete?
1:0123456789
88
hi
hi/OK
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 89 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Forwarding
K Press the {OK} key.
J Press 0 or 1 to display the fax
The Forwarding Station is deleted.
If you want to delete another Forwarding Station, repeat the procedure from step I.
L Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
Deleting a Specified Sender
To delete a Specified Sender, perform
the following procedure.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press
the {OK} key, and then
press {2}{2}{2}{2}.
E Press the {OK} key.
F Press 0 or 1 to display "7. Forwarding".
Key Op. Tools:
7.Forwarding
hi
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press 0 or 1 to display "2. Prog.
Station".
Forwarding:
2.Prog. Station
number of the Forwarding Station that contains the Specified
Sender you want to delete.
Program?
1:0123456789
hi/OK
K Press the {OK} key.
L Press the {OK} key.
When your machine is connected
to ISDN, you must select the line
you are using. Press 0 or 1 to select {G3} or {G4}, and then press
the {OK} key.
M Press 0 or 1 to display "2. Delete
Sender".
Sender Setting:
2.Delete Sender
hi
N Press the {OK} key.
O Use 0 or 1 to display the Speci-
7
fied Sender you want to delete.
Delete?
DEF COMPANY
hi/OK
P Press the {OK} key.
The Specified Sender is deleted.
If you want to delete another Specified Sender, repeat the above
steps from step M.
Q Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
hi
I Press the {OK} key.
89
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 90 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
Printing the Forwarding Mark
You can have a mark stamped on documents to indicate that they have
been forwarded.
At the forwarding destination this
can help distinguish between standard faxes and faxes that have been
forwarded.
Note
❒ You can turn the Forwarding Mark
on or off with the User Parameters.
See P.95 “User Parameters” (switch
02, bit 0). When shipped, this feature is turned on.
Printing the Specified Sender List
You can check which Specified Senders are registered for a Forwarding
Address.
Follow the steps below to print this
list.
7
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press
the {OK} key, and then
press {2}{2}{2}{2}.
E Press the {OK} key.
F Press 0 or 1 to display "7. Forwarding".
Key Op. Tools:
7.Forwarding
90
hi
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Print
SenderList".
Forwarding:
4.Print SenderListhi
I Press the {OK} key.
J Press the {Start} key.
The list is printed.
K Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 91 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Backup File Transmission
Backup File Transmission
Use this function to automatically create a back copy of every fax message
that you send to specified destinations. You can create only one backup
file for each sent message for the
name and fax number that you register. You can use Backup File Transmission to create backup files for fax
messages sent with Memory Sending,
Relay Sending, Confidential Sending,
and User Code Sending.
F Press 0 or 1
Limitation
❒ You cannot register Backup File
Transmission with Quick Dials or
Speed Dials.
❒ With Backup File Transmission
switched on, you cannot use Immediate Sending.
❒ During sending if there is not
enough space in memory to save
an incoming message or create the
backup file, then the message cannot be sent.
H Follow
Note
❒ Messages sent with Backup File
Transmission switched on are recorded in the Journal.
A Make sure that the machine is in
the standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press the 0 or 1 key to select "4.
Key Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
press the {OK} key.
to display "8. Back-
up File TX".
Key Op. Tools:
8.Backup File TX
hi
G Press the {OK} key.
Backup File TX:
1.On/Off
hi
the procedures below to
switch Specified Cassette On/Off,
register a Specified Sender, delete
a Specified Sender, or print a list
of Specified Senders.
Switching Backup File
Transmission On/Off
7
A Press the {OK} key.
B To switch this feature on, select "On", and to switch it off,
select "Off" using 0 or 1.
Backup File TX:hi/OK
[On]
Off
C Press the {OK} key.
Note
❒ If you select "On" and no destination is registered, "Press
OK to Program Receiver" is
displayed. To register a destination, press the {OK} key,
and then follow steps C to F
on P.92 “Registering or Editing
Destinations for Backup File
Transmission”.
and then
91
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 92 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
Registering or Editing
Destinations for Backup File
Transmission
A Press 0 or 1 to select "2. Prog.
Receiver".
B Press the {OK} key.
C Enter the fax number of the
destination that you want create backup files for.
Backup TX: Press OK
0123456789_kkkkkkkkk
D Press the {OK} key.
When your machine is connected to ISDN, you must select the
line you are using. Press 0 or 1
to select {G3} or {G4}, and then
press the {OK} key.
E Enter the name of the destination.
7
Name:[ABC] Press OK
ABC COMPANY_kkkkkkkk
F Press the {OK} key.
The destination for Backup File
Transmission is registered.
I Press the {User Tools} key.
The fax machine returns to standby.
92
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 93 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Energy Save Timer
Energy Save Timer
Use this feature to have the fax machine turn its heater on and off automatically at specified times. For
example, by having the heater turned
off during the evening, at weekends,
and during long holidays, you can reduce power costs.
Note
❒ You can set the timer switch on
and off twice daily over a 1-week
period.
❒ When the heater is off, incoming
faxes are received in memory with
Substitute Reception and printed
when the heater is switched on.
❒ To use this feature you must
switch Energy Save Timer on after
you specify times for the fax machine to automatically switch on
and off. By default, Energy Save
Timer is switched off.
G Press
the {OK} key. Make sure
that the next display appears.
Energy Save Timer:
1.On/Off
hi
H Perform
the settings below to
switch the timer On/Off, and program the timers.
Switching the Energy Save Timer
On/Off
A Press the {OK} key.
B Press 0 or 1 to "On" to switch
this feature on, or select "Off"
to switch this feature off.
EnergySaveTimerhi/OK
[On]
Off
A Make sure that the machine is in
C Press the {OK} key.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press the 0 or 1 key to select "4
Programming the Energy Save
Timer
7
the standby mode.
Key Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
A Press the 0 or 1 key to select
"2. Date/Time Set".
Energy Save Timer:
2.Date/Time Set
hi
to display "8. Energy Save Timer".
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to select the day
of the week.
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press 0 or 1 to select "AM" or
"PM".
Key Op. Tools:
9.EnergySave Timerhi
Sun. Set 1: Press OK
Time [AM] PM
and then
press the {OK} key.
F Press 0 or 1
93
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 94 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
F Press the {OK} key.
G Use the number keys to enter
the first time for the first On/
Off switching.
Enter the time in the 12-hour
format (00~12).
Sun. Set 1: Press OK
Time [09:34] AM
Note
❒ Be sure to prefix single digit
numbers with a zero (Example: For 5 a.m. or 05:00, and
for 5 p.m. enter 17:00.)
❒ If you make a mistake, press
the {Clear} key and enter the
number again.
H Press the {OK} key.
I Use the 0 or 1" key to select
"On" or "Off".
7
Sun. Set 1:
[On]
Off
hi/OK
J Press the {OK} key.
K Now, repeat steps E to J to
program the time for the second switching.
If you register only one setting,
repeat the procedure with the
same settings.
Note
❒ The display repeats so you
can perform the second setting for the switch.
L If you want to set switches for
another day of the week, repeat
from step C.
94
I Press the {User Tools} key.
The fax machine returns to standby.
Note
❒ When the heater is powered off,
the display is blank. When the
fax machine heater is switched
off with the Energy Save Timer,
you can restore the fax machine
to normal operation temporarily by pressing the {Energy Saver/
3Clear Modes} key so fax messages in the memory can print.
If the fax machine remains idle
for more than 5 minutes, the fax
machine will once again switch
off the heater automatically.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 95 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
User Parameters
User Parameters
The User Parameters allow you to customize
various settings to match your needs.
Note
❒ Make sure you install options and perform all other operations before switching the parameter settings on and off.
❒ Items selected as factory default
settings are marked with an asterisk ( * ) in the tables.
❒ User Parameters are divided into
switches, and each switch is divided into eight bits. The right most bit
is bit 0 and the left most bit is bit 7.
Changing User Parameters
and Printing a List
A Make sure that the machine is in
the standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press the 0 or 1 key to select "4
Key Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
press the {OK} key.
F Press 0 or 1
H Press the {OK} key.
Refer Op.Manual:
Switch 00 :0000 0000
For a list of the switches and settings, see P.96 “User Parameter
List”.
Use the User Parameters table to
look up the number of the switch
that you want to change, and then
press the 0 or 1 key to display the
number of the switch (Switch nn).
The switch bits are numbered 7~0.
To change a setting, press the corresponding number key to toggle
the setting between "0" and "1"
Key to
Press
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SW 00: 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
For example, if you want to change
the setting at bit 7, press the 7 number key to toggle the setting between "1" and "0".
I When
you are finished making
adjustments, press the {OK} key.
User Parameters:
1.Change
and then
to display "10. User
Parameters".
Key Op. Tools:
10.User Parametershi
G Press the {OK} key.
User Parameters:
1.Change
hi
7
hi
J Press
the 0 or 1 key to select
"2.Print List".
User Parameters:
2.Print List
hi
K Press the {OK} key.
L Press the {Start} key to print the list.
95
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 96 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
User Parameter List
The following list contains all relevant User Parameters.
SW
Bits & Definitions
Settings
00
0: Default setting for Stamp.
0:Off*
STAMP
1: On
5, 4: Default resolution when you send a message.
Bit: 5, 4
RESOLUTION
10: FINE
00: STANDARD*
01:DETAIL
11:HALFTONE
01
6: Default setting for transmission.
0: Memory*
TRANSMISSION MODE
1: Immediate
7: Default setting for the return home position
after the transmission.
0: Off
1: On*
RETURN TO DEFAULT AFTER TRANSMISSION
02
0: Default setting for printing the Forwarding
Mark.
0: Off
1: On*
FORWARDING MARK
7
1: Default setting for the Center Mark.
0: Off
CENTER MARK
1: On*
2: Default setting for printing the Reception
Time.
0: Off*
1: On
RECEPTION TIME
3: TSI Print
0: Off*
1: On
4: Default setting for the Checkered Mark.
0: Off
CHECKERED MARK
1: On*
5: CIL Print
0: Off
1: On*
6: TID Print
0: Off
1: On*
96
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 97 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
User Parameters
SW
Bits & Definitions
03
0: Automatically print memory transmission re- 0: Off*
ports.
1: On
Settings
COMMUNICATION RESULT REPORT
(MEMORY TX)
2: Automatically print storage reports for mem- 0: Off*
ory transmission.
1: On
FILE RESERVE REPORT (MEMORY TX)
3: Print the File Receive Report for Polling Reception
0: Off*
1: On
FILE RESERVE REPORT (POLLING RX)
4: Automatically print polling reception reports. 0: Off
COMMUNICATION RESULT REPORT
(POLLING RX)
1: On*
5: Automatically print immediate transmission
reports.
0: Off*
1: On
TRANSMISSION RESULT REPORT (IMMEDIATE TX)
6: Automatically print the Polling Clear Reports.
0: Off
1: On*
POLLING TX CLEAR REPORT
04
05
7: Automatically print communication reports.
0: Off
JOURNAL
1: On*
0: Print the Confidential File Report
0: Off
CONFIDENTIAL FILE REPORT
1: On*
7: Include the first page with reports?
0: Off
INCLUSION OF PART OF IMAGE
1: On*
0: Store incoming faxes when machine is out of
supplies.
0: Off
7
1: On*
SUBSTITUTE RECEPTION
1: Default setting for Substitute Reception.
0: Accept (Free)
CONDITIONS OF MEMORY RECEPTION
1: Reject*(If no name or fax
number received)
4: Restricts fax machine usage to specific users.
0: Off*
RESTRICTED ACCESS
1: On
6 : Default setting for the Energy Saving feature 0: On* (heater off)
ENERGY SAVER
1: Off (heater half-cool)
97
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 98 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
SW
Bits & Definitions
Settings
06
0: Default setting for sending a header with each
page.
0: Off
1: On*
FAX HEADER PRINT
2: Default setting for Closed Network Transmis- 0: Disabled*
sion.
1: Enabled
CLOSED NETWORK TRANSMISSION
4: Default setting for Batch Transmission.
0: Off
BATCH TRANSMISSION
1: On*
6: ISDN Directory Number Select (SPID)
0: Off
1: On*
7: Backup Transmission.
0: Off*
1: On
07
2: Dial while a message is being stored in.
0: Off
PARALLEL MEMORY TX
1: On*
4: Assign the Tone key as the "*" key on the operation panel.
0: Off
1: On*
TONE SWITCH BY ASTERISK KEY
08
1, 0: MULTI-COPY RECEPTION
01: Messages from Specified
Senders are multi-copied.*
11: Messages from non-Specified Senders are multi-copied.
7
3, 2: AUTHORIZED RECEPTION
01: Receive messages from
Specified Senders only.*
11: Receive messages from
non-Specified Senders only.
5, 4: SPECIFIED TRAY
(Optional Second Cassette required)
01: Print Special Terminal's
messages only using the main
cassette.*
11: Do not print Special Terminal's messages using the main
cassette.
7, 6:FORWARDING
01: Forward messages from
Specified Senders only.*
11: Forward messages from
non-Specified Senders only.
98
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 99 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
User Parameters
SW
Bits & Definitions
Settings
09
1, 0: MEMORY LOCK
01: Messages from Specified
Senders are not printed unless
you enter the Memory Lock
ID.*
11: Messages from non-Specified Senders are not printed
unless you enter the Memory
Lock ID.
10
0: Reverse order Printing
0: Off*
REVERSE ORDER PRINT
1: On
1:Two in 1
0: Off*
INTO 1
1: On
7: Use dithering halftone (SPD) or standard half- 0: STD*
tone (STD)
1: SPD
HALFTONE METHOD
11
1: Selection of tone (PB) or UUI after tone (*) *1
2: UUI
ISDN TX (PB/UUI)
1: PB*
2: Blank sheet detect
0: Off
DETECTION OF BLANK SHEET TRANSMISSION
1: On*
6: Print the received message when acting as a
Forwarding Station
0: Off
7
1: On*
PRINT MEMORY TRANSFER FILES
12
13
*1
7: Polling standby duration
0: Once*
POLLING TRANSMISSION STAND-BY
PERIOD
1: Keep
7: Copying
0: Possible*
COPY MODE
1: Not Possible
1, 0: Access to the public telephone line
00: Outside line
PABX/PSTN G3
01: Extension (PREFIX)
THE ISDN INTERFACE UNIT TYPE 190 option is required.
99
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 100 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
Programming the Personal Codes
Personal Codes allow you to keep
track of machine usage. If everybody
uses a Personal Code when they use
the fax machine, the codes or names
programmed for the codes will be
printed in the Journal. (See P.15 “SEP
Code Polling Reception”) and other reports. This will help you to check up
on who has been using the machine
and how often.
If you receive a message using SUB
Code Transmission, and the Personal
Code for your machine is the same as
the sender's SUB Code, the message is
stored in memory. If this occurs and a
sub-address is registered in the Personal Code, the message is routed to the
sub-address without printing on your
machine. If no sub-address is registered
in the Personal Code, you can print the
document as a Confidential Reception
by entering the Personal Code.
7
Limitation
❒ Personal Codes can be up to 8-digits long, and you can enter numbers and symbols from the
following: 0 to 9, #, *, and spaces.
❒ You can register up to 30 Personal
Codes. Each Personal Code name
can be up to 20 characters long.
❒ Personal Codes cannot be 4-digit
numbers that are already registered as Confidential ID Codes.
❒ You cannot specify Groups stored
in Quick Dials.
Note
❒ To register Personal Codes, you
must create a Personal Box for each
user beforehand and assign it to a
Quick Dial key or a Speed Dial key.
100
❒ When registering and editing Personal Codes, we recommend that
you print out a Personal Code list
and keep it for reference.
❒ If the document cannot be routed,
a Transmission Failure Report is
printed and the message is stored
in Confidential Reception.
Registering Personal Codes
To register Personal Codes, perform
the following procedure.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
press the {OK} key.
and then
F Press 0 or 1 to display "11. Personal Code".
Key Op. Tools:
11.Personal Code
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press the {OK} key.
hi
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 101 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Programming the Personal Codes
I Enter the Personal Code (8-digits
or less) with the number keys.
Enter Code to Prog.
[12345678] Press OK
J Press the {OK} key.
K Enter the user name.
The Personal Code is registered.
To register another Personal Code,
repeat the above steps from step G.
Q Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
Name:[ABC] Press OK
ABC COMPANYkkkkkkkkk
L Press the {OK} key.
M If you want to register
a SUB
Routing, press 0 or 1 and select
"Yes". If you do not want to register a sub-address, select "No".
SUB Routing
[Yes]
No
P Press the {OK} key.
hi/OK
If you selected "No", go to step P.
N Press the {OK} key.
O Specify the registered
routing
sub-address using a Quick Dial or
Speed Dial.
Specify a Quick Dial
or Speed Dial
When specifying a Quick Dial:
A Press the Quick Dial where the
routing sub-address is registered.
When specifying a Speed Dial:
A Press the {Speed Dial/Tel Directory} key.
B Enter the number (00 to 99) registered as the sub-address with
the number keys.
Editing a Personal Code
To edit Personal Codes, delete the
code, and then re-register it as a new
Personal Code. To edit user names
and routing sub-addresses, perform
the following procedure.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
7
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
and then
press the {OK} key.
F Press 0 or 1 to display "11. Personal Code".
Key Op. Tools:
11.Personal Code
hi
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press the {OK} key.
101
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 102 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
I Press 0 or 1 to display the Personal Code for the user name or
routing sub-address you want to
change.
Program?
hi/OK
12345678:ABC COMPANY
If you want to edit another Personal Code, repeat the above steps
from step G.
Name:[ABC] Press OK
DEF COMPANY_kkkkkkkk
L Press the {OK} key.
M If you want to change or register a
SUB Routing, press 0 or 1 and
select "Yes". If you do not want to
change or register a SUB Routing,
select "No".
SUB Routing
Yes
[No]
A Press the {Speed Dial/Tel Directory} key.
B Enter the number (00 to 99) registered as the routing sub-address with the number keys.
P Press the {OK} key.
J Press the {OK} key.
K Enter the user name.
7
When specifying a Speed Dial:
hi/OK
If you selected "No", go to step P.
N Press the {OK} key.
O Specify the registered
sub-address using a Quick Dial key or
Speed Dial key.
Specify a Quick Dial
or Speed Dial
Q Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
Deleting a Personal Code
To delete a Personal Code, perform
the following procedure.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
and then
press the {OK} key.
When specifying a Quick Dial:
A Press the Quick Dial where the
routing sub-address is registered.
F Press 0 or 1 to display "11. Personal Code".
Key Op. Tools:
11.Personal Code
G Press the {OK} key.
102
hi
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 103 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Programming the Personal Codes
H Press 0 or 1 to display "2. Delete".
Personal Code:
2.Delete
hi
I Press the {OK} key.
J Press 0 or 1 to display the Personal Code you want to delete.
F Press 0 or 1 to display "11. Personal Code".
Key Op. Tools:
11.Personal Code
hi
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press 0 or 1 to display "3. Print
List".
Delete?
hi/OK
12345678:DEF COMPANY
K Press the {OK} key.
The Personal Code is deleted.
If you want to delete another Personal Code, repeat the above steps
from step I.
L Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
Printing the Personal Code
List
Print the Personal Code list to confirm the names and codes of registered users.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
Personal Code:
3.Print List
hi
I Press the {OK} key.
J Press the {Start} key.
The list is printed.
K Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
7
Restricted Access
Use this feature to limit transmission
and copying to specific users. When
turned on, users must enter a previously assigned Personal Code in order to transmit or copy documents.
The Restricted Access feature makes
it possible to monitor machine usage
by user or department.
Note
❒ The Restricted Access feature
makes it possible to monitor machine usage by user or department.
❒ Restricted Access is turned on or
off with the User Parameters. The
factory default setting is "Off". See
P.95 “User Parameters” (switch 05,
bit 4).
and then
press the {OK} key.
103
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 104 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
❒ When restricted Access is turned
on, the machine returns to the state
where access restrictions become
effective in the following situations.
• When a certain amount of time
elapses without any operation
after entering a Personal Code
• When a previously set document is removed
• When the current operation is
completed
❒ Restricted Access does not affect
reception of documents, and incoming faxes are printed as they
are received. Fax settings can also
be changed regardless of whether
Restricted Access is enabled.
A Check that the Restricted Access
display is shown.
Pers. Code:
[_kkkkkkk]
7
B Enter
a Personal Code (up to 8
digits).
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
C Press the {OK} key.
Note
❒ If the Personal Code entered has
not been registered, a warning
message appears and the screen
will return to step A.
❒ When Restricted Access is
turned on, entering a Personal
Code automatically changes the
transmission mode to Personal
Code transmission. See P.4
“Personal Codes”.
104
ISDN Local Directory Number
Routing
This function uses Personal Codes to
transmit fax images received via an
ISDN line.
Limitation
❒ This function can only be used
when the fax machine is connected
to the Internet via an ISDN line.
❒ ISDN Local Directory Number
routing allows multiple telephone
numbers to be used on a single
line. By registering a particular
ISDN local directory number (receiver ID) as a Personal Code and
specifying it as the destination
routing mail address, fax images
sent to that receiver ID are transmitted as E-mail to that address.
Note
❒ The following settings must be
made when using the ISDN Local
Directory Number routing function.
• The destination routing mail
address must be programmed
as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial.
See the NIC FAX KIT manual or
PDU KIT manual.
• The Local Directory Number
(LDN) of the ISDN line must be
registered as G4 Own Number.
See P.112 “ISDN G3/G4”.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 105 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
ID Code
ID Code
Use this procedure to register the following kinds of ID Code:
Important
❒ You can confirm ID Codes in the
Parameter Settings list. We recommend you print a new list each time
you register or change ID Codes.
❒ You can edit registered ID Codes by
performing the steps for registering
ID Codes in the following procedure. Display the ID Code you want
to change, and then press the {Clear}
key and re-enter the ID Code.
❖ Polling ID
This ID is required for using the
Transfer Request, Transfer Station,
Default ID Polling Transmission,
Default ID Polling Reception, and
Closed Network Transmission.
❖ Confidential ID
This ID is usually required for printing a message received with the Confidential Reception feature. See P.20
“Printing a Confidential Fax Message”.
Limitation
❒ If you do not register a Confidential ID, you cannot receive
messages sent using Confidential Transmission.
• A Polling ID may be any string of
four numbers (0 to 9) and characters (A to F) except 0000 and FFFF.
• You cannot enter a 4-digit number string already registered as
a Personal Code.
Registering ID Codes
To register ID Codes, perform the following procedure.
The following example uses Confidential ID.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
press the {OK} key.
7
and then
F Press 0 or 1 to display "12. ID
Code".
Key Op. Tools:
12.ID Code
hi
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press 0 or 1 to display "2. Confidential ID".
ID Code:
2.Confidential ID hi
❖ Memory Lock ID
This ID is required for printing a
message received using the Memory Lock feature. See P.21 “Printing
a Memory-locked Message”.
105
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 106 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
I Press the {OK} key.
J Enter the Confidential ID (4-digits) with the number keys.
If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
Confidential ID: /OK
ID[4666]
K Press the {OK} key.
If you want to enter another item,
repeat the above steps from step H.
L Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
7
106
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 107 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Line Type
Line Type
You must register the Line Type before you connect the machine to the
line.
Note
❒ By default, Line Type is set to
"Tone".
❒ This setting has no effect if you fax
machine is connected to only an
ISDN line.
Limitation
❒ This function will not work if your
machine is connected to ISDN
only.
• If you do not correctly set the
Line Type, you will be able to
receive messages, but you may
not be able to send them.
• If you do not know the type of
line you are connected to, select
"Tone" and dial a trial number.
If the connection was successful, your Line Type is "Tone", if
it did not, set the Line Type to
"Pulse" and dial a trial number.
If the connection was successful, your Line Type is "Pulse".
To register the Line Type, perform the
following procedure.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
press the {OK} key.
and then
F Press 0 or 1 to display "13. Line
Type".
Key Op. Tools:
13.Line Type
hi
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press 0 or 1 and select "Tone" or
7
"Pulse".
Line Type:
hi/OK
Pulse [Tone]
I Press the {OK} key.
J Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
Note
❒ You can edit the registered Line
Type by performing the steps for
registering the Line Type in the following procedure.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
107
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 108 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
Select Line
When your machine is connected
through a PABX, change the Select
Line setting to Extension. If it is connected directly to the telephone network, leave it set to Outside.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
press the {OK} key.
and then
F Press 0 or 1 to display "14. Se-
7
lect Line".
Key Op. Tools:
14.Select Line
hi
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press 0 or 1 and select "Extention" or "Outside".
Select Line
hi/OK
Extension [Outside]
I Press the {OK} key.
"Function Accepted" is displayed
on the screen.
J Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
108
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 109 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
PSTN Access Number
PSTN Access Number
Use this setting to save having to enter a pause after the outside line access number when dialing. When you
program an access number, a pause is
automatically added as soon as that
number is pressed. For example, if
you register "0" as the PSTN Access
Number, a pause will be inserted automatically after dialing "0".
Limitation
❒ Outside line access numbers can be
up to 2 digits long.
❒ This feature does not work when
using On Hook mode, when using
the optional handset, or when dialing from an external telephone.
After you have registered an outside
line access number, set the line to "Extension" in "Select Line". By default,
this feature is set to "Outside".
To register an outside line access
number perform the following procedure.
A Make sure that the machine is in
F Press
0 or 1 to display "15.
PSTN Access No.".
Key Op. Tools:
15.PSTN Access No.hi
G Press the {OK} key.
H Enter the outside line access number (2-digits) with the number
keys.
If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
PSTN Access No.: /OK
[00]
I Press the {OK} key.
"Programmed" is displayed on the
screen.
7
J Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
and then
press the {OK} key.
109
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 110 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
Transfer Report
Follow these steps to store the fax
number of the line your machine is
connected to as the return address
when making transfer requests.
When you make a Transfer Request
from this machine, this number is
passed to the transfer station. The
transfer station then sends back the
Transfer Result Report to this fax
number.
You can store the following settings:
• G3 Fax Number
• G3 Extension Number
• G4 Fax Number
Limitation
❒ If the line is being used, you cannot
register or edit these settings.
Please wait until the communication has finished.
7
Note
❒ Transfer request transmission will
not function unless the return address is stored.
• When sending to Transfer Stations, you need to register the
telephone number to which
your machine is connected so
that the transfer station can return the Transfer Result report
to you. Be sure to enter a pause
after the area code.
• With G3 fax communication
you can enter up to 16 digits,
and with G4 fax communication
you can enter up to 29 digits.
• When registering a G3 extension as a fax number, set the line
to "Extension" in "Select Line".
By default, this feature is set to
"Outside".
110
To register Transfer Request return
addresses, perform the following procedure.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
and then
press the {OK} key.
F Press
0 or 1 to display "16.
Transfer Report".
Key Op. Tools:
16.Transfer Reporthi
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press 0 or 1 to display the line
you want to register a fax number
for.
Transfer Report:
1.G3
I Press the {OK} key.
hi
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 111 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Transfer Report
J Enter
the fax number with the
number keys.
If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
For G3 fax communication
G3:
Press OK
[1-234-567-8900_k]
For G4 fax communication
G4:
Press OK
[1-234-567-8900_k]
For internal fax numbers
Extention: Press OK
[1-234-567-8900_k]
Note
❒ When registering a sub-address, press the User Function
key to which the dial option or
sub-address is registered, then
enter the 4-digit sub-address.
❒ You can delete the cursor at the
position of the flashing cursor
by pressing the {Clear} key. If
there is no character at the cursor position, the character to the
left of the cursor is deleted.
7
K Press the {OK} key.
The fax number is registered.
To register another fax number, repeat the above steps from step H.
L Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
111
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 112 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
ISDN G3/G4
You must set the following items
when your machine is connected to
ISDN.
• G4 Sub-Address Information
• G4 Own Number
• G4 SPID (G4 Own Number 2)
• G4 Sub-Address
• I-G3 Fax Number
• I-G3 Own Number
• I-G3 SPID (I-G3 Own Number 2)
• I-G3 Sub-Address
G4 Sub-Address Information, G4
Own Number, G4 SPID (G4 Own
Number 2), and the G4 Sub-Address
must be set when using G4 communications.
I-G3 Fax Number, I-G3 Own Number, I-G3 SPID (I-G3 Own Number 2),
and the I-G3 Sub-Address must be set
when using G3 communications.
7
❖ Programming the G4 Sub-address Information
If your machine uses Group 4
mode through the ISDN, G4 subaddress information appears on
the other terminal's display and is
printed in reports.
• You can store digits and pauses
as the G4 Own Number.
❖ Programming G4 Own Number
Program the G4 Own Number for
ISDN.
Separate the telephone number itself from the area or exchange code
by inserting a pause.
Note
❒ This must be programmed
when your machine is connected to ISDN.
112
❖ Programming G4 SPID (G4 Own Number 2)
When you have two units connected to the same line, enter the I-G4
SPID number.
If "ISDN Directory Number Select
(SPID)" in the User Parameters is
turned off, the display shows "G4
Own Number 2" instead of "G4
SPID". These settings are identical.
❖ Programming the G4 Sub-address
When multiple terminals (faxes,
digital phones, and so on) are connected to the same line, program a
sub-address for each terminal.
Note
❒ You can enter up to 4 digits.
❒ You can enter numbers from 0
to 9999.
❖ Programming the I-G3 Fax Number
If your machine uses Group 3
mode through the ISDN, the G3
sub-address appears on the other
terminal's display and is printed in
reports.
• You can store digits and pauses
as the G3 Own Number.
Note
❒ You can enter numbers, the +
symbol, and spaces.
❒ You can enter up to 20 digits.
❖ Programming I-G3 Own Number
You must program I-G3 Own
Number.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 113 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
ISDN G3/G4
❖ Programming I-G3 SPID (I-G3 Own
Number 2)
When you have two units connected to the same line, enter the I-G3
SPID number.
If "ISDN Directory Number Select
(SPID)" in the User Parameters is
turned off, the display shows "I-G3
Own Number 2" instead of "I-G3
SPID". These settings are identical.
❖ Programming the I-G3 Sub-address
When multiple terminals (faxes,
digital phones, and so on) are connected to the same line, program a
sub-address for each terminal.
Note
❒ You can enter up to 4 digits.
❒ You can enter numbers from 0
to 9999.
Storing ISDN Telephone
Numbers
You must be careful to select the correct
signaling type (Group 3 or Group 4) when
dialing, or when storing a telephone
number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial.
To register G4 sub-address information, perform the following procedure.
F Press
0 or 1 to display "17.
ISDN G3 / G4".
Key Op. Tools:
17.ISDN G3/G4
hi
G Press the {OK} key.
To register G4 Terminal ID
A Confirm that "1. G4 Terminal
ID" is displayed.
ISDN G3/G4:
1.G4 Terminal ID
hi
B Press the {OK} key.
C Enter your country code.
If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
CountryCode:Press OK
[0000]
D Press the {OK} key.
E Enter the fax number.
If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Fax Number: Press OK
[012345678901]
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
F Press the {OK} key.
G Enter the name.
If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
standby mode.
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
and then
7
Name:[ABC]
OK
[ABC COMPANY_kkkkkk]
H Press the {OK} key.
G4 sub-address information is
registered.
press the {OK} key.
113
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 114 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
To register G4 Own Number
To register the G4 Sub-address
A Press 0 or 1 to display "2. G4
Own Number".
A Press 0 or 1 to display "4. G4
Sub-address".
ISDN G3/G4:
2.G4 Own Number
hi
B Press the {OK} key.
C Enter the telephone number.
If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
G4 Own No.: Press OK
1-234-567-8900_kkkkk
D Press the {OK} key.
G4 Own Number is registered.
To register G4 SPID (G4 Own
Number 2)
A Press 0 or 1 to display "3. G4
SPID".
7
ISDN G3/G4:
3.G4 SPID
hi
B Press the {OK} key.
C Enter the telephone number.
If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
G4 SPID:
Press OK
1-234-567-8901_kkkkk
D Press the {OK} key.
G4 SPID is registered.
ISDN G3/G4:
4.G4 Sub-address
hi
B Press the {OK} key.
C Enter the sub-address (up to 4
digits).
If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
G4 Sub-add.:Press OK
[1234]
D Press the {OK} key.
The G4 sub-address is registered.
To register I-G3 Own Fax
Number
A Press 0 or 1 to display "5. IG3 Own Fax No.".
ISDN G3/G4:
5.I-G3 Own Fax No.hi
B Press the {OK} key.
C Enter your country code, area
code (minus the leading zero),
and your fax number in that order.
If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
I-G3 No.:
/OK
012345678901_kkkkkkk
D Press the {OK} key.
The I-G3 fax number is registered.
114
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 115 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
ISDN G3/G4
To register I-G3 Own Number
To register the I-G3 Sub-address
A Press 0 or 1 to display "6. IG3 Own Number".
A Press 0 or 1 to display "8. IG3 Sub-address".
ISDN G3/G4:
6.I-G3 Own Number hi
ISDN G3/G4:
8.I-G3 Sub-addresshi
B Press the {OK} key.
When G4 Own Number is already registered, the telephone
number registered for G4 Own
Number is displayed.
C Enter the telephone number.
If you entered the same telephone number registered for G4
Own Number, go to step F.
If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
B Press the {OK} key.
C Enter the sub-address (up to 4
digits).
If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
I-G3 Own No. :
/OK
1-234-567-8900_kkkkk
D Press the {OK} key.
I-G3 Own Number is registered.
I-G3 Sub-add.:
[1234]
/OK
D Press the {OK} key.
The I-G3 sub-address is registered.
H Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
7
To register I-G3 SPID (I-G3 Own
Number 2)
A Press 0 or 1 to display "7. IG3 SPID".
ISDN G3/G4:
7.I-G3 SPID
hi
B Press the {OK} key.
C Enter the telephone number.
If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
I-G3 SPID: Press OK
1-234-567-8901_kkkkk
D Press the {OK} key.
I-G3 SPID is registered.
115
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 116 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
J Press the {Clear} key and enter the
Editing ISDN Telephone
Numbers
To edit telephone numbers that are already registered, perform the following procedure.
The following example uses G4 Own
Number.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
correct telephone number.
If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
G4 Own No.: Press OK
1-234-567-8901_kkkkk
K Press the {OK} key.
The number is changed.
L Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
7
and then
press the {OK} key.
F Press
0 or 1 to display "17.
ISDN G3 / G4".
Key Op. Tools:
17.ISDN G3/G4
hi
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press 0 or 1 to display "2. G4
Own Number".
ISDN G3/G4:
2.G4 Own Number
I Press the {OK} key.
hi
Deleting ISDN Telephone
Numbers
To delete telephone numbers that are
already registered, perform the following procedure.
The following example uses I-G3
Own Number.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
and then
press the {OK} key.
F Press
0 or 1 to display "17.
ISDN G3 / G4".
Key Op. Tools:
17.ISDN G3/G4
116
hi
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 117 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
ISDN G3/G4
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press 0 or 1 to display "6. I-G3
Own Number".
ISDN G3/G4:
6.I-G3 Own Number hi
I Press the {OK} key.
J Press the {Clear} key.
K Press the {OK} key.
The number is deleted.
L Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
7
117
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 118 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
Network
Use of this function requires a network card installed in the fax machine. For details about settings,
please refer to the NIC FAX KIT manual.
Note
❒ If you purchased your fax machine
without a network card, the optional NIC FAX KIT can be installed in your machine at any
time.
7
118
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 119 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Dialup
Dialup
Use of these settings requires the optional PDU KIT Type 210.
Adjust these settings to set up the Internet Fax feature.
For details, please refer to the PDU
KIT manual.
Limitation
❒ The optional PDU KIT cannot be
installed in a machine that is
equipped with a NIC FAX KIT.
7
119
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 120 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
Key Layout
You can change the layout of characters assignments to Quick Dial keys
used for entering characters. Two different layouts are provided, the QWERTY layout and the ABC layout.
With the QWERTY layout, the letters
are assigned in the same order as on
the keyboard of a typewriter. With
the ABC layout, they are arranged in
alphabetical order.
Note
❒ If you change the layout of the keyboard, print out a new Quick Dial
Label and place it on the keyboard.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
7
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
press the {OK} key.
and then
F Press 0 or 1 to display "19. Key
Layout".
Key Op. Tools:
19.Key Layout
hi
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press 0 or 1 and select "ABCDEF" or "QWERTY".
Key Layout:
[QWERTY]
120
hi/OK
I Press the {OK} key.
The layout is programmed.
J Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 121 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Memory Option
Memory Option
This function can only be used when
a network interface card is installed in
the fax machine. For details about settings, please refer to the NIC FAX KIT
manual.
Note
❒ If your fax machine is not equipped
with a network card, you can have
a NIC FAX KIT installed at any
time. If your machine is equipped
with the PDU KIT, you cannot install a network card.
7
121
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 122 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
Memory File Transfer
Follow this procedure if you want to
send all messages currently stored in
memory to another fax and have
them printed out there (for example,
if your machine cannot print for some
reason).
Use of this feature requires the optional Memory Card. For details on
settings, see Chapter 3, "Memory Option" in the NIC FAX KIT manual.
Limitation
❒ You cannot choose an e-mail address as the forwarding destination.
❒ Even if a transmission error occurs,
messages are not resent.
Note
❒ All messages are sent in a single
transmission.
❒ All documents are not erased from
memory regardless of whether forwarding was successful or not.
❒ Details of the forwarding operation are not printed in the Journal.
To transfer all of the messages currently stored in memory, perform the
following procedure.
7
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
122
E Press
{2}{2}{2}{2}, and then
press the {OK} key.
F Press
0 or 1 to display "21.
Mem. File Trans.".
Key Op. Tools:
21.Mem.File Trans.hi
G Press the {OK} key.
If no files are available, "No Files
Exist" is displayed.
H Enter
the transfer destination's
fax number with the number
keys.
Enter No.Press Start
0123456789_kkkkkkkkk
I Press the {Start} key.
File transfer starts.
Once file transfer has finished, the
machine returns to standby mode.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 123 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Margin Adjust
Margin Adjust
If image positioning needs to be adjusted slightly, adjust the margins for
the appropriate tray (the main paper
tray, the optional second cassette, or
the optional bypass feeder).
• You can adjust the paper 13 steps
up or down, left or right.
• You can adjust the position of the
printed image in 0.5 mm steps.
To adjust margins, perform the following procedure.
H Press 0 or 1 to display the tray
A Make sure that the machine is in
I Press the {OK} key.
J Press 0 or 1 and select "1. Top
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
and then
press the {OK} key.
F Press 0 or 1 to display "22. Margin Adjust".
Key Op. Tools:
22.Margin Adjust
G Press the {OK} key.
hi
you want to adjust the margins for.
Margin Adjust:
1.Cassette 1
hi
Note
❒ The optional lower cassette is
displayed as "Cassette 2", and
the optional bypass feeder as
"Bypass".
Margin" or "2. Left Margin".
Cassette 1:
1.Top Margin
hi
7
Note
❒ You can view the margins by
using 0 or 1 to select "3. Test
Print", and then pressing the
{OK} key.
K Press the {OK} key.
L Press 0 or 1 and adjust the margins.
Press the 0 key to move the arrow
(T) to the left and reduce the image.
Press the 1 key to move the arrow
(T) to the right and enlarge the image.
Cassette 1:Top hi/OK
l
+
123
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 124 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
M Press the {OK} key.
The margins are set.
If you want to adjust a margin for
the same tray, repeat the process
from step J. If you want to adjust a
margin for another tray, press the
{Cancel} key, and then repeat the
procedure from step H.
N Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
7
124
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 125 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
RDS On/Off
RDS On/Off
If your machine has a problem, a service technician can perform various
diagnostic tasks over the telephone
line from the service station to try to
find out what is wrong with your machine. The service technician can also
use RDS (Remote Diagnostic System)
to change some of your machine's settings if you request it.
For RDS to work, you must switch it
on before the service technician starts
the RDS operation on your machine.
For some RDS operations, it may be
necessary for you to stay near the machine.
Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
G Press
the 0 or 1 key to select
"On".
H Press the {OK} key.
The message "Function Accepted"
flashes briefly in the display.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
B Press the 0 or 1 key to display
7
"4. Key Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
C Press the {OK} key.
D Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
press the {OK} key.
and then
E Press the 0 or 1 key to display
"23. RDS On/Off".
Key Op. Tools:
23.RDS On/Off
hi
F Press the {OK} key.
RDS On/Off:
[On]
Off
hi/OK
125
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 126 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Settings
System Parameter Transmission
This feature sends information about
the condition of your machine to your
nearest service representative. Follow
these steps when your service representative requests you to.
Important
❒ This information is sent to the destination that has been registered in
your machine by a customer engineer.
• The list is sent from memory
straight to your nearest service
representative.
To send a System Parameter Transmission, perform the following procedure.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
7
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
and then
press the {OK} key.
F Press 0 or 1 to display "24. System Param. TX".
Key Op. Tools:
24.System Param.TXhi
126
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press the {Start} key.
The destination fax number set by
the custom er engineer is displayed.
Once transmission has finished,
the machine returns to standby
mode.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 127 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
8. Troubleshooting
Printing the Help List
Press the {Help} key to print a copy of
the Help List which contains brief descriptions about the following features:
• Immediate/Memory Transmission
• Canceling Memory Transmission
• Programming/Clearing Quick Dials
• Printing lists of Quick Dials and
User Function keys
• Programming/Clearing Speed Dials
• Printing the Speed Dial List
• Printing the Journal
• Printing the Quick Dial Key Label
127
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 128 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Troubleshooting
Clearing a Copy, Fax, or Print Jam
When "Clear Misfed Paper" is displayed, follow this procedure to solve
the problem.
C Hold
up the print delivery tray
and remove any jammed paper.
ZCKY310N.eps
Note
❒ To clear jams in the main paper
tray, see Chapter 4, "Clearing a
Document Jam" in the Basic Features manual.
Clearing a Jam in the Optional
Second Cassette
To clear jams in the optional second
cassette, perform the following procedure.
Note
❒ Remove any paper that may
have dropped inside the machine in the area vacated by the
paper cassette.
A Remove the optional second cassette and place it on a flat surface.
ZCKY290N.eps
D Open the lower rear cover.
ZCKY340N.eps
8
B Lift the document delivery tray in
the direction of the arrow.
ZCJY190J.eps
E Remove any jammed paper.
ZCKY350N.eps
128
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 129 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Clearing a Copy, Fax, or Print Jam
F Push the lower rear cover closed
until you hear it click into place.
ZCKY360N.eps
Clearing a Jam in the Optional
Bypass Feeder
To clear jams in the optional bypass
feeder, perform the following procedure.
A Pull
the document table toward
the front of the machine.
ZCJY370J.eps
G Replace
the document delivery
tray.
ZCKY210N.eps
B Remove any remaining paper.
ZCKY380N.eps
H Replace the optional second cas-
8
sette.
ZCKY330N.eps
C Remove the bypass feeder.
ZCKY390N.eps
129
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 130 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Troubleshooting
D Remove any jammed paper.
G Replace the document table to its
original position.
ZCKY400N.eps
ZCJY430J.eps
E Lift
up the feeder and insert it
into the fax machine.
ZCKY410N.eps
F Square the edges of the paper and
8
load it face down into the feeder.
ZCKY420N.eps
130
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 131 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Reading Reports
Reading Reports
You can obtain reports from your machine either by having your machine
print them out automatically, or by
printing them out yourself.
Error Report (Turned On/Off
by a Service Technician)
This report is printed after each unsuccessful communication. The communication failure report is printed
after a job has been completed. And at
the end, it prints a communication
failure or transmission result report.
Check it, and retransmit any pages
that were not sent. If a particular
problem continues or gets worse,
keep the error reports for the service
technician.
Power Failure Report
This report is printed if the machine's
power was off for long enough to
erase files from the memory. The report gives details of the files that were
lost. With this information, you may
store messages for transmission
again, and contact the senders of any
received messages that were lost.
8
Important
❒ Make sure that 100% is shown on
the display before you unplug the
machine. If a lower value is shown,
some data is currently stored in
memory.
Note
❒ Phone numbers stored in Quick/
Speed/Groups are not lost.
131
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 132 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Troubleshooting
8
132
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 133 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
9. Maintaining Your Machine
Loading Paper in the Second Cassette
The following procedure describes
how to load paper in the optional second cassette.
C Remove any remaining paper.
ZCKY620N.eps
A Pull
out the paper cassette and
place it on a flat surface.
Note
❒ Remove any paper that may
have dropped inside the machine in the area vacated by the
paper cassette.
ZCKY290N.eps
D Prepare
a stack of blank paper.
For smoother operation, square
the edges.
TSTS010N.eps
B Lift up the cassette cover and remove it.
ZCKY610N.eps
E Load the paper into the cassette.
ZCKY630N.eps
133
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 134 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Maintaining Your Machine
F Replace the cassette cover.
Note
❒ The frosted side of the cover
must face up when closed.
ZCKY640N.eps
G Replace
the cassette. Push it in
firmly until you hear it click into
place.
ZCKY330N.eps
9
134
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 135 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Loading Paper in the Optional Bypass Feeder
Loading Paper in the Optional Bypass
Feeder
A Remove any paper remaining in
the feeder.
B Prepare
D Place the paper stack in the feeder.
ZCKY420N.eps
a stack of blank paper.
For smoother operation, square
the edges.
TSTS010N.eps
C Lift back the document table.
Note
❒ You cannot set paper smaller
than ISO A5 L (8.27 × 5.85 in).
ZCKY440N.eps
9
135
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 136 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Maintaining Your Machine
Changing the Paper Size in the Main
Cassette
This example explains how to switch
to A4 size paper. To switch to other
paper sizes, follow the same steps but
move the end plate and side rails to
the appropriate size mark on the cassette.
C Remove any remaining paper.
ZCKY490N.eps
Note
❒ Remove any paper that may have
dropped inside the machine in the
area vacated by the paper cassette.
A Pull
out the paper cassette and
place it on a flat surface.
ZCKY180N.eps
D If this is the main cassette and the
metal base plate is raised, push it
firmly down until you hear it
click into place.
ZCKY040N.eps
B Lift up the cassette cover and re-
9
move it.
ZCKY470N.eps
136
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 137 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Changing the Paper Size in the Main Cassette
C Remove the side rail. (Squeeze
in one of the plastic tabs on the
underside of the cassette to
loosen it.)
How to Change to Legal Size
A Press the tray extension release
tab A, then extend the tray by
pulling on the front handle B.
ZCKY520N.eps
ZCKY550N.eps
D Replace the side rail in the A4
slots.
How to Change To A4 Size
Note
❒ There are two sets of slots
and they are marked on the
base. Make sure that the upper and lower tabs on the rail
both fit into the inner set of
slots.
A Squeeze the green end plate
slightly and remove it.
ZCKY500N.eps
ZCKY530N.eps
9
B Insert the end plate into the A4
slot as shown.
ZCKY650N.eps
E Repeat steps B and C for the
other rail.
137
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 138 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Maintaining Your Machine
E Remove the paper size plate located at the front of the cassette.
H Load the paper into the cassette.
ZCKY050N.eps
ZCKY560N.eps
F Replace the plate, orienting it so
I Replace the cassette cover.
Note
❒ The frosted side of the cover
must face up when closed.
that the appropriate paper size
symbol is visible in the window
at the front of the cassette.
ZCKY060N.eps
ZCKY660N.eps
G Prepare
a stack of blank paper.
For smoother operation, square
the edges.
9
J Replace
the cassette. Push it in
firmly until you hear it click into
place.
TSTS010N.eps
Note
❒ It is a good idea at this time to
check that the side rails have not
dislodged while you were loading paper.
ZCKY230N.eps
138
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 139 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Changing the Paper Size in the Main Cassette
K Before you can use it, you must
change the paper size setting for
this cassette using "Paper Size"
function. See P.68 “Changing the
Paper Size Setting” .
9
139
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 140 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Maintaining Your Machine
Changing the Paper Size in the Optional
Second Cassette
This example explains how to switch
to A4 size paper. To switch to other
paper sizes, follow the same steps but
move the end plate and side rails to
the appropriate size mark on the cassette.
C Remove any remaining paper.
ZCKY620N.eps
Note
❒ Remove any paper that may have
dropped inside the machine in the
area vacated by the paper cassette.
A Pull
out the paper cassette and
place it on a flat surface.
ZCKY290N.eps
D Squeeze
the green end plate
slightly and remove it.
ZCKY670N.eps
B Lift it up the cassette cover and re-
9
move it.
How to Change to Legal Size
ZCKY610N.eps
A Press the tray extension release
tab A, then extend the tray by
pulling on the front handle B.
ZCJC040N.eps
140
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 141 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Changing the Paper Size in the Optional Second Cassette
C Replace the side rail in the A4
slots.
How to Change to A4 Size
A Insert the end plate into the A4
slot as shown.
Note
❒ There are two sets of slots
and they are marked on the
base. Make sure that the upper and lower tabs on the rail
both fit into the inner set of
slots.
ZCKY680N.eps
ZCKY700N.eps
B Remove the side rail. (Squeeze
in one of the plastic tabs on the
underside of the cassette to
loosen it.)
ZCKY690N.eps
D Repeat steps C and D for the
other rail.
E Remove the paper size plate located at the front of the cassette.
ZCKY710N.eps
9
141
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 142 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Maintaining Your Machine
F Replace the plate, orienting it so
that the appropriate paper size
symbol is visible in the window
at the front of the cassette.
I Replace the cassette cover.
Note
❒ The frosted side of the cover
must face up when closed.
ZCKY720N.eps
ZCKY640N.eps
G Prepare
a stack of blank paper.
For smoother operation, square
the edges.
J Replace
the cassette. Push it in
firmly until you hear it click
place.
TSTS010N.eps
Note
❒ It is a good idea at this time to
check that the side rails have not
dislodged while you were loading paper.
ZCKY330N.eps
H Load the paper into the cassette.
9
ZCKY630N.eps
K Before you can use it, you must
change the paper size setting for
this cassette using "Paper Size"
function. See P.68 “Changing the
Paper Size Setting”.
142
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 143 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Changing the Paper Size in the Optional Bypass Feeder
Changing the Paper Size in the Optional
Bypass Feeder
A Remove any paper remaining in
D Place the paper stack in the feed-
ZCKY380N.eps
ZCKY420N.eps
the feeder.
B Adjust the paper guide to match
the new paper size.
ZCKY570N.eps
er.
Note
❒ You cannot use paper smaller
than ISO A5L (8.27 × 5.85 in).
E Before you can use it, you must
change the paper size setting for
the Bypass Feeder using "Paper
Size" function. See P.68 “Changing the Paper Size Setting”.
9
C Prepare
a stack of blank paper.
For smoother operation, square
the edges.
TSTS010N.eps
143
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 144 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Maintaining Your Machine
Cleaning the Rollers and Exposure Glass
To maintain the machine's condition,
clean the rollers and scanner from
time to time.
C Clean the pads and rollers.
Wipe the pad and rollers (6 locations) with a well-wrung damp
cloth.
A Open the operation panel.
ZCKM010N.eps
ZCJM070N.eps
B Clean the white roller (1) and ex-
posure glass (2).
Wipe the exposure glass (2) with a
soft, dry cloth. If dirt is hard to remove, wipe with a well-wrung
damp cloth, then wipe dry with a
soft, dry cloth.
ZCJM020N.eps
9
144
D Close the operation panel.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 145 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Replacing the ADF Maintenance Kit (ADF Document Separation Pad)
Replacing the ADF Maintenance Kit (ADF
Document Separation Pad)
In order to ensure maximum performance of your fax machine, the ADF
Maintenance Kit is provided so you
can replace the ADF Document Separation Pad after approximately 30,000
documents have been scanned with
the ADF. You need to replace the Separation Pad when you are prompted
to do so by a message in the display:
Change ADF PAD
/OK
Follow the procedure below to replace the Separation Pad.
Note
❒ This message does not appear in areas
where ADF Maintenance Kit replacement is performed by arrangement
with service representatives.
❒ If you replace the Separation Pad
without being prompted to do so,
after replacement be sure to reset
the counter. See P.75 “Resetting the
PAD Counters”.
❒ If you do not have an ADF Maintenance Kit when you are prompted
to replace the Separation Pad, or if
you do not have time to perform
the maintenance at that time, at
step C below, select "No", and then
press the {OK} key to return to the
standby mode so you can continue
using the fax machine. However,
after you scan an additional 100
documents with the ADF, you will
be prompted once again to replace
the Separation Pad.
❒ After Change ADF Pad message
appears in the display, you can
continue to use send fax messages
and perform other operations.
A A message in the display prompts
you to replace the Separation Pad
when it is time for replacement:
Change ADF PAD
/OK
B Press the {OK} key.
Change Now?:
[Yes]
No
hi/OK
C Make sure that "Yes" is selected,
and then press the {OK} key.
Note
❒ If you want to replace the Separation Pad later, press 0 or 1
to select "No", and then press
the {OK} key.
Please Replace Then
Press OK
D To
9
replace the ADF Document
Separation Pad, follow the instructions in "Installing the ADF
Maintenance Kit" supplied with
the ADF Maintenance Kit.
E Press the {OK} key.
When you see " ADF Pad Replaced" appear in the display, the
fax machine automatically returns
to the standby mode.
145
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 146 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Maintaining Your Machine
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge
When the mark made by the verification stamp becomes pale, replace the
stamp cartridge as described below.
D Insert the new cartridge.
ZCJM060J.eps
A Open the operation panel.
ZCKM010N.eps
E Push the operation panel shut until you hear it click into place.
ZCKY100N.eps
B Insert
the tip of a sharp object,
such as a mechanical pencil, into
the hole shown in the illustration.
ZCJM040J.eps
9
C The stamp cartridge pops up. Lift
it out of the machine.
ZCJM050J.eps
146
Note
❒ Please use the following stamp
cartridge. INK PAD MARKER
TYPE30 for Facsimile.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 147 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Replacing the Toner Cassette and Cleaning Pad
Replacing the Toner Cassette and
Cleaning Pad
Note
❒ When the Add Toner indicator
(D) starts to blink, the toner cartridge is almost empty. You will
make 100 more copies before you
have to change the toner cassette.
❒ When the Add Toner indicator
(D) remains lit, it is time to install
a new toner cassette.
B Grasp
the old toner cassette as
shown, and lift it out carefully.
Do not incinerate waste toner.
Toner dust may ignite suddenly
when exposed to an open flame.
ZCKT010N.eps
A Pull the front cover release lever
towards you and open the front
cover.
Note
❒ If you do not pull the lever, only
the operation panel will open.
ZCKY120N.eps
C Remove the old cleaning pad.
ZCKT020N.eps
9
ZCKY600N.eps
D Install the cleaning pad a shown
in the illustration.
ZCKT030N.eps
147
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 148 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Maintaining Your Machine
E Prepare the new toner cassette.
G Press down on the cassette until
you hear it click into place.
Important
❒ Do not touch the green drum.
A
B
Remove the new toner cartridge from its bag. Do not remove any paper or tape yet.
Hold the cassette horizontally and shake it gently from
side to side a few times
Note
❒ If you do not push the cassette
right in, the front cover will not
close.
ZCKY160N.eps
ZCKT040N.eps
H Close the front cover.
ZCKY170N.eps
F Hold the toner cassette as shown
in the illustration and set it into
the fax machine. Make sure that
the pins (marked with "p" in the
illustration in step E) on either
side of the toner cassette slide
along the guides inside the machine.
9
Note
❒ The slots are marked with small
arrows.
ZCKT070N.eps
148
Note
❒ Background gray cast is sometimes evident on printed messages just after installing a new
toner cassette.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 149 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Toner Cassette Storage
Toner Cassette Storage
• Store in a cool, dark place.
• Never store where they may be exposed to heat.
• Keep out of the reach of children.
• Do not eat toner.
• Do not lay heavy objects on toner
cassette.
• Do not incinerate toner or toner
containers. Toner dust may cause
flashback when exposed to an
open flame.
9
149
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 150 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Maintaining Your Machine
9
150
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 151 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
10. Installation
Before Installation
Before installing your machine, read
the safety instructions at the beginning of this manual. To install the machine, follow these procedures:
A Find a suitable location for the machine.
B Remove all the pieces of tape attached to the machine.
C Install the toner cassette.
D Attach the accessories and load the
paper in the paper cassette.
E Connect the phone line. (See P.154
“Connecting to a Telephone Line”.)
F Connect the power. (See P.155
“Connecting the Power and Switching On”.)
G Enter all necessary information
and settings in your machine's
memory. (See Chapter 3, "Setup" in
the Basic Features manual.)
For details, please refer to the setup
guide, "Before You Use This Machine".
151
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 152 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Installation
Machine Environment
When choosing a location for your
machine, please follow the safety instructions given in the first section.
Installing the Optional Memory
Card
Location
A Turn off the power switch.
TSTP040N.eps
For the best possible performance, install your machine in a place which
satisfies the following conditions:
• Not exposed to direct sunlight
• Level
• Not subject to vibrations
• Away from other electronic equipment, to avoid interference
• Away from areas containing corrosive gas
• Dust-free
• Condensation-free
• Temperature 59 to 77°F
• Humidity 30 to 70 % RH (do not install near a humidifier)
• Away from heaters and air conditioners, to avoid sudden changes
in temperature
• Within 5 yards of a 3-pin grounded
power outlet (120 volts, 60 Hz)
• With the clearance as shown
10
TSTP040N
B If
the memory card cover is attached to the machine, remove it.
C Hold the card as shown in the illustration, and insert it carefully
into the slot.
ZCKP090N.eps
ZCKX010N.eps
Note
❒ Insert the Memory Card firmly
or the machine may not work
properly.
152
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 153 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Machine Environment
D Attach the memory card cover to
Note
❒ The bracket and screws are included with the fax machine.
The holder is included with the
optional handset.
the back left of the machine.
ZCKP080N.eps
C Replace the information card.
ZCKP030N.eps
E Turn the power switch on.
Installing The Optional
Handset
A Remove the information card from
the holder.
D Fix the bracket to the protruding
plastic hook on the rear left of the
machine.
ZCKP040N.eps
ZCKP010N.eps
B Attach the holder to the bracket
with the two screws provided.
Screw in firmly but not too tightly
(using an item such as a small coin).
E Plug
the handset jack into the
“TEL1” socket at the rear of the
machine.
10
ZCKP050N.eps
ZCKP020N.eps
153
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 154 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Installation
Connecting to a Telephone Line
RCAUTION: To reduce the risk of fire,
use only No.26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord.
RATTENTION: Pour réduire le risque
d'incendie, utiliser uniquement des
conducteurs de télécommunications
26 AWG ou de section supérieure.
To connect the machine to a telephone line, use a snap-in modular
type connector.
There are similar sockets located at
the rear of the machine.
• TEL1: For the optional handset or
external telephone
• LINE: Telephone line connection
Note
❒ Do not switch the machine on
until everything is connected
properly.
❒ Program the Telephone Line
Type setting. (See P.107 “Line
Type”.) If your telephone normally sends out tones (touch
tone) when dialing, use the TT
setting; if it normally sends out
pulses (rotary dial), use the DP
setting. Also, make sure that the
switch on the handset is set up
correctly.
10
154
A Insert the line cable into the socket labeled "LINE".
ZCKH080N.eps
B Connect the other end of the line
cable to your telephone line.
TSTL020N.eps
TSTL020N
Important
❒ In the United States, you are required by law to program your
phone number identification
(Own Fax Number) into the fax
machine before you connect a
fax machine to the public telephone system. See Chapter 3,
"Initial Settings and Adjustments" in the Basic Features
manual.
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 155 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Connecting the Power and Switching On
Connecting the Power and Switching On
Important
❒ Make sure that the wall outlet is
near the machine and readily accessible.
❒ The wall outlet must be easily accessible.
Do not switch on until everything is
connected properly.
A Insert
the power cable into the
socket located at the rear of the
machine.
B Plug in the cable to the mains.
C Turn the power switch on.
TSTP090N.eps
TSTP090N
Important
❒ The supply from the wall outlet
must not fluctuate more than
15V either side of 120V AC.
❒ The power cord should not be
laid in a place where it might
trip somebody.
❒ Do not lay anything on the power cord.
❒ If you have to use an extension
cord, make sure that it is capable of carrying 125V/15A, and
that your facsimile terminal is
the only piece of equipment
connected to that cord.
10
155
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 156 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Installation
10
156
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 157 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
11. Appendix
Specifications
Base Machine
❖ Power supply:
120V AC, 60 Hz
❖ Power consumption:
Energy saver mode:
Average 1.7 W (without NIC FAX KIT installed)
Average 4.3 W (with NIC FAX KIT installed)
Standby mode:
Average 30 W
Transmission:
Average 45 W
Reception:
Average 350 W
Copying:
Average 300 W
Maximum power consumption:
650 W
❖ Protocol:
G3, G4 (optional G4 unit required)
❖ Memory Capacity:
• Standard: 160 pages/ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at standard
resolution
• With 2Mbyte memory: 320 pages
• With 4Mbyte memory: 480 pages
❖ Transmission time:
G3: 3 seconds at 28,800 bps, without TTI, ECM, MMR- using memory for a
ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at standard resolution
G4: 3 seconds at 64 kbps, without TTI, MMR- using memory for a ITU-T #1
test document (Slerexe letter) at detail resolution
❖ Data compression:
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
❖ Modem Speed:
33,600/31,200/28,800/26,400/24,000/21,600/19,200/16,800/14,400/12,000/
9,600/7,200/4,800/2,400 bps.
157
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 158 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Appendix
❖ Scanning resolution:
G3
• Standard: 8 × 3.85 lines/mm
• Detail: 8 × 7.7 lines/mm
• Fine: 8 × 15.4 lines/mm (Transmission only)
G4
• Standard: 200 × 100 dpi
• Detail: 200 × 200 dpi
❖ Paper cassette capacity:
250 sheets (20 lb)
❖ Paper Size:
Letter, Legal (Adjustable to A4, A5L, and F4 )
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
16.5 × 28.8 × 13.5 inch (with print delivery tray and document delivery tray
fully extended.)
❖ Weight:
28.7 lb *1
*1
exclusive of cassettes and options
Optional Second Paper Cassette
❖ Capacity:
500 sheets (20 lb)
❖ Paper Size:
Letter, Legal (Adjustable to A4, A5 L and F4 )
Bypass Feeder
❖ Capacity:
Letter, A4, A5 L, F4: 100 sheets (20 lb)
Legal: 50 sheets (20 lb)
11
❖ Paper Size:
Letter, Legal, A5, F4, A4
158
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 159 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Specifications
Document and Paper Specifications
Recommended types of document
Before you send your document, make sure that it meets the following requirements.
Important
❒ Documents that do not meet these requirements can cause your machine to jam
or may cause some components of the machine to become damaged or dirty.
❖ Scanning area
GFSIZE0N.eps
Maximum size
8.5"
0.15"
Minimum size
5.8"
4.1"
0.15"
0.15"
23.6"
Scanning direction
0.19"
Scanning direction
GFSIZE0N
The part shaded will not be scanned, because it is outside the maximum scanning width range.
Correct size for the document delivery tray
• Thickness 0.05 to 0.2 mm (50 to 90 g/m2, 20lb paper)
• Length and Width: See the above diagram.
If the page is too short, put it inside a document carrier or enlarge it with a copier.
If the page is too long, divide it into two or more sheets.
11
Documents (Using the auto document feeder)
❖ Length:
4.1'' to 23.6''
❖ Width:
5.8'' to 8.5''
❖ Thickness:
16 to 24lb
159
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 160 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Appendix
Document feeder requirements
• Do not insert torn, heavily curled, wavy, creased, dog-eared, damp, or otherwise damaged documents. Make copies of these originals and scan the copies.
• Do not insert folded, stapled, clipped, glued, or taped documents, or documents
with a metallic coating. Make copies of these originals and scan the copies.
• Do not insert documents on which there is undried ink or correction fluid.
Wait for the document to dry.
• If the document has an uneven or slanted edge, do not insert that edge in first.
Paper requirements
• Do not print to torn, heavily curled, wavy, creased, dog-eared, damp, or otherwise damaged paper.
• Do not print to folded, stapled, clipped, glued, or taped paper.
• Do not print to paper with any kind of coating or printing. Do not print to metallic paper. Do not print on the reverse side of a print.
Energy Saving
Introduction
When your fax machine prints fax messages, it uses heat to fix the image to the
paper. This heat is generated using a heating roller which must be hot enough to
fuse toner to the paper properly. Because keeping the roller hot all the time consumes electricity, this machine is provided with an Energy Saving mode in
which the heating roller is heated to full temperature only when a message
needs to be printed.
The two available types of Energy Saving mode shown in the table below.
11
160
Energy Saving mode
Machine status in Energy
Saving mode
How long before
Power consumption
you can print after in Energy Saving
exiting Energy Sav- Mode
ing mode
Fax Standby (Heater
on)
Display turns off . The ma- Less than 30 s
chine maintains the heating roller temperature at
half the full temperature;
warm up takes less time.
30 W
Energy Saving Standby (Heater off)
Display turns off . The
machine lets the heating
roller cool to room temperature; warm-up takes
longer.
Without NIC FAX
KIT: 1.7 W
Less than 40 s
With NIC FAX KIT:
4.3 W
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 161 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Specifications
Values vary according to options installed and settings of the User Parameters.
In Fax Standby mode, letting the heating roller cool to room temperature will reduce the amount of electricity the fax machine consumes. However, the fax machine will not print incoming messages right away, it will store them in memory
and print them out after the roller warms up.
In Energy Saving Standby mode, letting the heating roller cool halfway reduces
the amount of electricity the fax machine consumes, but not as much as letting it
cool to room temperature. On the other hand, since warming up takes only a
short time, incoming fax messages can be printed right away.
When the machine is shipped, Energy Saving Standby is selected on by default.
❒
❒
❒
❒
Note
When the machine is in Energy Saving mode, the display goes blank.
You can still send fax messages while the machine is in Energy Saving mode.
For related power saving information, see P.93 “Energy Save Timer”.
The Manual Receive indicator goes out in Energy Saving mode even if Manual Receive is turned on.
❒ Even though the operation panel display goes out in Energy Saving mode, indicators that flash or light during communication or reception still work.
When the Receive File indicator lights, exit Energy Saving mode and take appropriate action.
Entering Energy Saving mode
The machine enters Energy Saving mode when:
• Nobody uses the machine for about 5 minutes (it automatically enters Energy
Saving mode).
• The user holds down the {Energy Saver/3Clear Modes} key for about 2 seconds.
Note
❒ If you want to change the five minute period to one or three minutes, or if you
do not want your machine to enter the Energy Saving mode automatically,
please contact your service representative.
❒ Energy Saving mode cannot be entered when a document is set.
11
Exiting Energy Saving mode
Your machine exits Energy Saving mode when a fax is received.
To exit Energy Saving mode manually:
• In Energy Saving Standby mode, press the {Energy Saver} key.
• In Fax Standby mode, press any key.
• Set a document.
• Pick up the optional handset or the external telephone handset.
161
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 162 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Appendix
Selecting the Energy Saving mode type
To select the Energy Saving mode type, adjust the bit switch below with the User
Parameters. See P.95 “User Parameters” (switch 05, bit 6).
❖ Switch 05 Bit 6
• Energy Saving Standby: To let the heating roller cool to room temperature,
set bit 6 to 0.
• Fax Standby: To let the heating roller cool halfway set bit 6 to 1.
Note
❒ When the machine is shipped, Energy Saving Standby is selected on by default.
Reception in Energy Saving mode
Once in Energy Saving mode, you can still receive messages. When a message is
received, the machine prints it and returns to Energy Saving mode.
Storage Capacity
Quick Dials, Speed Dial and Codes
• 30 Quick Dial keys, each of which can hold an individual number. Any seven
of the Quick Dial keys can hold a group of numbers.
• 100 individual numbers stored as 2-digit Speed Dial codes.
• Seven groups, each of which can hold up to 140 destinations.
• 50 Own Fax Number or Own Name codes (possibly used as wild cards) for
Authorized Reception, Multi-Copy Reception, Memory Lock, Specified Cassette, or Forwarding.
Destinations
Up to 140 destinations can be set at any one time. (Ex: message A to 35 destinations, message B to 40, message C to 30 message D to 34 and finally one immediate transmission job you are programming in now. Total: 140)
11
Memory files
You can have as many as 100 memory transmission files stored in the machine:
This is a theoretical maximum. The actual number of files you can have in your
machine depends on the types of the documents, and how much memory they
consume.
162
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 163 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Function List
Function List
Advanced Transmission Features
Functions selectable with the {Trans. Option} key are as follows.
Feature name
Reference
Send Later
P.3 “Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later)”
Personal Code Transmission
P.4 “Personal Codes”
Fax Header Print
P.5 “Fax Header Print”
Confidential Transmission
P.7 “Normal Confidential Transmission:”
Polling Transmission
P.8 “Leaving a Document to Be Picked Up by Others (Polling Transmission)”
Polling Reception
P.10 “Calling to Request a Message (Polling Reception)”
Transfer Request
P.12 “Transfer Request”
SUB Code Transmission
P.14 “SUB Code Transmission”
SEP Code Polling Reception
P.15 “SEP Code Polling Reception”
Mail Option
For details see the NIC FAX KIT manual or
PDU KIT manual
11
163
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 164 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Appendix
Communication Information
Functions selectable with the {Job Information} key are as follows.
Feature name
11
164
Reference
Canceling Transmission Files
P.17 “Canceling Transmission or Reception”
Printing the TX File List
P.18 “Printing a File List”
Printing a TX Document
P.19 “Printing a Stored Message”
Printing a Confidential Reception Document
P.20 “Printing a Confidential Fax Message”
Printing a Memory Lock Document
P.21 “Printing a Memory-locked Message”
Printing the Journal
P.22 “Printing the Journal”
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 165 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Fax Features
Fax Features
Feature Name
Content
Reference
Program/Delete
Registering and Deleting
Quick Dials
Chapter 3, "Storing Quick Dial
Numbers" and "Deleting
Quick Dial Numbers" in the
Basic Features manual.
Registering and Deleting
Speed Dials
Chapter 3, "Storing Speed Dial
Numbers" and "Deleting
Speed Dial Numbers" in the
Basic Features manual.
Registering and Deleting
Group Dials
Chapter 3, "Storing a Group of
Fax Numbers" and "Deleting a
Group" in the Basic Features
manual.
Changing Keystroke Program
Names and Deleting Keystroke Programs
P.51 “Storing a Program”
Registering and Deleting
Auto Documents
P.54 “Storing an Auto Document”
P.53 “Deleting a Program”
P.57 “Deleting an Auto Document”
Reports/Lists
User Function keys
P.58 “Assigning User Function
Keys”
Journal
P.22 “Printing the Journal”
P.40 “Communication Result
Report (Memory Transmission)
(Switch 03, Bit 0)”
P.18 “Printing a File List”
P.62 “Lists You Can Print Out
Yourself”
Transmit File List
P.18 “Printing a File List”
Dial List
P.62 “Printing Dial Lists”
Quick Dial Labels
Chapter 3, "Printing a Quick
Dial Key Label" in the Basic
Features manual.
Keystroke Program List
P.63 “Printing a Keystroke Program List”
Auto Documents
P.64 “Printing an Auto Document”
User Function Key List
P.65 “Printing a User Function
Key List”
11
165
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 166 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Appendix
Feature Name
Content
Reference
Setup
Monitor Volume
Chapter 4, "Adjusting the Volume and Sounds the Machine
Makes" in the Basic Featuresmanual.
Date/Time
P.66 “Setting the Date and
Time”
Summer Time/DST
P.67 “Summer Time / Daylight
Saving Time”
Fax Information
Chapter 3, "Initial Settings and
Adjustments" in the Basic Features manual.
P.5 “Fax Header Print”
Paper Cassette Size
P.136 “Changing the Paper Size
in the Main Cassette”
P.140 “Changing the Paper Size
in the Optional Second Cassette”
P.143 “Changing the Paper Size
in the Optional Bypass Feeder”
Language
11
166
Display Language
P.69 “Selecting the Display Language”
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 167 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Key Operator Tools
Key Operator Tools
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
This feature requires the optional Paper Supply Unit.
This feature requires the optional G4 Unit.
This feature requires the optional NIC FAX KIT TYPE 210.
This feature requires the optional PDU KIT TYPE 210.
This feature requires the optional Memory Card.
Feature name
Reference
Counters
P.74 “Counters”
PAD Counter Clear
P.75 “Resetting the PAD Counters”
Authorized Reception
P.76 “Authorized Reception”
Multi-Copy Reception
P.79 “Multi-Copy Reception”
Memory Lock
P.81 “Memory Lock”
Specified Cassette *1
P.83 “Specified Cassette”
Forwarding
P.85 “Forwarding”
Backup File Transmission Settings
P.91 “Backup File Transmission”
Energy Save Timer
P.93 “Energy Save Timer”
Changing User Parameters
P.95 “User Parameters”
Personal Code
P.100 “Programming the Personal Codes”
ID Code
P.105 “Registering ID Codes”
Line Type
P.107 “Line Type”
Select Line
P.108 “Select Line”
PSTN Access Number
P.109 “PSTN Access Number”
Transfer Report
ISDN G3/G4
P.110 “Transfer Report”
P.112 “ISDN G3/G4”
*2
Network Settings *3
For details, please refer to the NIC FAX KIT
manual.
Dialup Settings *4
P.119 “Dialup”
Key Layout
P.120 “Key Layout”
Memory Option
*3 *5
11
P.122 “Memory File Transfer”
Memory File Transfer
P.122 “Memory File Transfer”
Margin Adjust
P.123 “Margin Adjust”
RDS On/Off
P.125 “RDS On/Off”
System Parameter Transmission
P.126 “System Parameter Transmission”
167
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 168 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Appendix
Certification Label
The certification is located behind the machine.
TSTL050N.eps
11
168
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 169 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
INDEX
A
D
Add Toner Indicator, 147
ADF Maintenance Kit, 145
Assigning
User Function Keys, 58
Authorized Reception, 76
Auto Document, 54, 64
Auto Redial, 37
Date and Time, 66
Summer Time / Daylight Saving Time, 67
Dial Lists, 62
Dial Options, 28
Dialup, 119
Display Language, 69
Document Feeder
Acceptable originals, 159
Dual Access, 38
B
Backup File Transmission, 91
Base Machine, 157
Batch Transmission, 38
Blank Sheet Detect, 35
Breaking Down Large Format Messages, 48
Broadcasting
Checking Progress, 37
Broadcasting Sequence, 37
Bypass Feeder, 158
E
ECM (Error Correction Mode), 39
Energy Save Timer, 93
Energy Saving, 160
F
Fax Features, 165
Fax Header, 5
File list, 18
File Reserve Report, 40
Forwarding, 85
Function List, 71, 163
C
Canceling Transmission or Reception, 17
Center Mark, 46
Certification Label, 168
Chain Dial, 25
Changing
Paper Size, 136, 140, 143
Checkered Mark, 46
Checking the Transmission Result, 36
Cleaning, 144
Clock, 66
Closed Network Transmission, 33
Communication Failure Report, 36, 40
Communication Information, 17, 164
Communication Result Report, 40
Confidential Transmission, 6
SUB Code Transmission, 14
Connecting the Power, 155
Connecting to a Telephone Line, 154
Copying, 49
Counters, 74
G
General, 43
H
Handset
Installation, 153
Handy Dialing Functions, 25
Help List, 127
I
ID Codes, 105
Registering, 105
Immediate Transmission Result Report, 36
Indicators
Add Paper, 44
Add Toner, 44
Installation, 151
ISDN G3/G4, 112
ISDN Local Directory Number Routing, 104
ISDN Telephone Numbers
Deleting, 116
Editing, 116
Storing, 113
169
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 170 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
J
Jams, Clearing, 128
Journal, 22
K
Key Layout, 120
Key Operator Settings, 71
Using, 74
Key Operator Tools, 167
Keystroke Program List, 63
L
Label Insertion, 34
Language Selection, 69
Line Type, 107
Selecting, 108
Lists You Can Print, 62
Loading Paper, 133, 135
Location, 152
Low-power Mode, vi
M
Machine Environment, 152
Mail Option, 16
Mail Reception, 23
Maintaining, 133
Manual Dial, 30
Margin Adjust, 123
Memory Card, 152
Memory File Transfer, 122
Memory Full, 36
Memory Lock, 81
Memory-locked Messages, 21
Memory Option, 121
More Transmission Functions, 36
Multi-Copy Reception, 79
N
Network, 118
No Document, No Dial, 34
O
On Hook Dial, 29
Other Transmission Features, 25
Outside Line Access Number, 109
170
P
PAD Counters
Resetting, 75
Paper, 133, 135
Paper Size
Changing, 68
Paper Specifications, 159
Parallel Memory Transmission, 39
Personal Codes, 4
Deleting, 102
Editing, 101
Printing a list, 103
Registering, 100
Polling, 10
Polling Transmission, 8
SEP Code Polling Reception, 15
Polling Transmission, 8
Power, 155
Printed Reports, 40
Printing, 40
Auto Document, 64
Center Mark, 46
Checkered Mark, 46
Confidential Fax Message, 20
Dial Lists, 62
File list, 18
Help List, 127
Journal, 22
Keystroke Program List, 63
Memory-locked Message, 21
Quick Dial Label, 62
Received Messages, 44
Stored Messages, 19
User Function Key List, 65
User Parameter List, 95
Printing Options, 46
Center Mark, 46
Checkered Mark, 46
CIL/TID Print, 46
Reception Time, 47
Reverse Order Printing, 47
TSI Print, 46
Two In One, 47
Programming
Auto Document, 54
Date and Time, 66
Programs, 51
Deleting, 53
Editing, 52
Storing, 51
Using, 52
PSTN Access Number, 109
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FM.book Page 171 Monday, September 18, 2000 11:17 AM
Q
Quick Dial Label, 62
R
RDS On/Off, 125
Reception
Immediate Reception, 43
Memory Reception, 43
Receiving Messages in Telephone Mode, 45
Screening Messages from Anonymous
Senders, 44
Substitute Reception, 44
Reception Features, 43
Reception Time, 47
Redial, 27
Redial key, 27
Report Formats, 41
Reports, 36
Communication Failure Report, 40
Communication Result Report, 40
Error Report, 131
File List, 18
File Reserve Report, 40
Journal, 41
Power Failure Report, 131
Reading Reports, 131
Transmission Result Report, 40
Restricted Access, 103
T
Telephone Directory, 26
Telephone Mode, 45
Toner Cassette
Replacement, 147
Storage, 149
Tone Signals, 32
Transfer Report, 110
Transfer Request
Specifying an End Receiver, 13
Transmission
Tone Signals, 32
Using Redial, 27
Transmission Functions, 33
Transmission Options, 3
Transmission Result Report, 40
Troubleshooting, 127
TTI → Fax Header, 5
Two In One, 47
U
User Function Keys, 58
List, 65
User Parameters, 95
Using
Key Operator Settings, 74
Redial key, 27
{p} (Tone) key, 32
S
Scanning area, 159
Second Paper Cassette, 158
Selecting G3 or G4, 31
Sending a Fax Immediately, 37
Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later), 3
Sending Confidential Messages, 6
Send Later, 3
Specifications, 157
Specified Cassette, 83
Stamp, 33, 146
Replacing, 146
Storage Capacity, 162
Storing ISDN Telephone Numbers, 113
System Parameter Transmission, 126
171
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FMIX Page 172 Monday, September 18, 2000 10:11 PM
MEMO
172
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FMIX Page 173 Monday, September 18, 2000 10:11 PM
MEMO
173
Smt4EN-Ad-F_FMIX Page 174 Monday, September 18, 2000 10:11 PM
MEMO
174
UE
USA
H535
NIC FAX KIT TYPE 210
Operating Instructions
ZCKH030N.eps
Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future
reference.
For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing NIC FAX. This manual contains important information that you need to know
in order to get the most out of the powerful features and functions of this product. Be sure to read it
carefully, and keep it on hand for future reference when required. Note that you are authorized to use
this manual and the NIC FAX Applications only after you agree to the terms and conditions of the User
License Agreement.
•
This manual covers NIC FAX operation on a Local Area Network (LAN).
•
Please refer to the ICViewer Operating Instructions for details on using ICViewer.
•
NIC FAX KIT TYPE 210 is required in order to use the Internet Fax Features.
•
Installation of NIC FAX KIT TYPE 210 should be performed by an authorized service provider. Do
not attempt installation on your own.
For brevity, fax machines equipped with NIC FAX KIT TYPE 210 are referred to throughout this manual
as NIC FAX.
The contents of this manual assume that you are already familiar with Windows functions and procedures. If you are not, see the documentation that comes with Windows for details on how to use it.
Important
•
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the
prior written permission.
•
Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
•
In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine (hardware and / or software).
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows NT® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in those marks.
Note
❒ The proper names of the Windows operation systems are as follows:
•
Microsoft® Windows® 95 operating system
•
Microsoft® Windows® 98 operating system
•
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server network operating system version 4.0
•
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation operating system version 4.0
•
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
•
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
•
Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me)
Warning:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Notes:
Some illustrations might be slightly different from your machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
What is an Internet Fax?
NIC FAX converts scanned document images to E-mail format and transmits the
data over the Internet.
The E-mail sent by NIC FAX can be received by another NIC FAX or a PC. Instead of inputting the telephone number of the destination you want to send to,
you input the applicable E-mail address.
Documents are sent as E-mail messages with an attached TIFF-F image. Because
of this, a MIME-compatible E-mail reader is required in order to view documents received on a PC. To view an attached image, software that is capable of
displaying TIFF-F formatted images is required. NIC FAX application includes
ICViewer, which can be used to view, edit, and store image data. (See the ICViewer Operating Instructions for full details on how to use it.)
You can also receive E-mail messages from PCs or other Internet fax machines
and print or forward them.
Note
❒ NIC FAX must be connected to a LAN, installed, and set up correctly in order
to use its Internet fax functions. See Chapter 1, "Getting Ready" in this manual
for details on connecting to a LAN and making initial settings.
GFINFG0N.eps
Los Angeles Branch of Company A
New York Branch of Company A
[email protected]
PC
Server
PC
Server
Internet
PC
PC
NIC FAX 1
E-Mail: [email protected]
FAX No:310-876-4321
NIC FAX 2
E-Mail: [email protected]
FAX No:212-123-5678
Los Angeles Branch of Customer B
Telephone Network
G3FAX
FAX No:310-567-1234
i
Internet Fax Precautions
• Internet Fax performs communication with a server over a LAN. It cannot
communicate directly with another party.
• Error E-mail notifications may not be transmitted for various reasons. We recommend that you confirm the receipt of important E-mail by calling the other
party.
• The level of security for Internet communications is low. We recommend that
you use the telephone network for confidential communications.
• Voice communications are not supported over a LAN.
• Internet fax delivery might be delayed due to network congestion. Use a standard fax whenever communication is time sensitive.
Functions Not Supported by E-mail Transmission
The following functions are supported with standard fax transmission, but not
with Internet faxing.
• Immediate Transmission
• ID Transmission
• Confidential Transmission
• Polling Transmission
• Batch Transmission
• Forwarding of Substitute Reception or Confidential Reception messages (Forwarding to an E-mail address not supported.)
• Dialing with the Dial Option Key
• Chain Dial
Functions Not Supported by E-mail Reception
The following functions are supported with standard fax reception, but not with
Internet faxing.
• ID Reception
• Confidential Reception
• Polling Reception
• Multi-copy Reception
• Authorized Reception
• Memory Lock Reception
• Specified Cassette (optional cassette required)
ii
LAN FAX Features
• With a NIC FAX connected to a LAN, you can use a telephone line to send a
fax created using a PC application to another fax machine.
• To send a fax, simply select [Print] from the Windows application, then select
LAN FAX as the printer and specify a destination.
• In addition to sending faxes, LAN FAX allows NIC FAX to be used for printing out documents prepared on a PC for proof checking.
• To use LAN FAX, connect NIC FAX to a LAN and make necessary settings,
then install the LAN FAX driver and related utilities on your PC.
Reference
For how to connect to a LAN and make initial settings, see P.1 “Getting Ready”
GFPCFG0N.eps
New York Branch of Company A
Telephone
Network
NIC FAX
FAX No:212-123-5678
Server
Los Angeles Branch
of Customer B
Print with the
[Print] button.
PC
Specify
FAX No:310-567-1234
PC
G3FAX
FAX No:310-567-1234
LAN FAX Precautions
If LAN FAX errors occur, they are not displayed on the PC. Check using NIC
FAX monitor.
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Getting Ready
OVERVIEW ................................................................................................. 1
Operation Panel ......................................................................................... 2
Connecting to a LAN ................................................................................. 4
Connecting the LAN Cable............................................................................ 4
SMTP Reception ........................................................................................ 5
E-mail Server Settings (by Network Administrator) ............................... 6
E-mail Servers That Have Been Confirmed to Work..................................... 6
NIC FAX Initial Settings............................................................................. 7
Network Settings ....................................................................................... 9
TCP/IP Settings............................................................................................. 9
E-mail Server Settings ................................................................................ 12
Auto Mail Reception .................................................................................... 16
Returning to the Initial Display .................................................................... 16
Installing the Applications...................................................................... 17
System Requirements ................................................................................. 17
Before Starting Installation .......................................................................... 17
Installing the Applications............................................................................ 18
NIC FAX Monitor Settings....................................................................... 23
Entering Administrator Mode....................................................................... 23
Internet E-mail Settings ............................................................................... 24
TCP/IP Settings........................................................................................... 25
Other Settings ............................................................................................. 26
Monitor Settings .......................................................................................... 27
Setting the Administrator Mode Password ........................................... 28
2. Internet Faxing
Transmission ...........................................................................................
Confirming Reception..................................................................................
Transfer Request .....................................................................................
Transfer Request by E-mail ........................................................................
Specifying Transfer Stations .......................................................................
Reception .................................................................................................
Automatic E-mail Reception........................................................................
Manual E-mail Reception ............................................................................
Routing of Received Faxes .........................................................................
Transfer of Received Faxes ........................................................................
Transferring Mail Received via SMTP....................................................
Getting Ready .............................................................................................
iv
29
32
33
34
36
37
37
37
38
39
40
40
Canceling Transmission of an Internet Fax ..........................................
While the Document is Being Scanned In...................................................
After the Document Has Been Scanned In .................................................
Reports and Lists ....................................................................................
Error Mail Notification..................................................................................
Error Report (Mail) ......................................................................................
Server-Generated Error E-mail ...................................................................
Journal ........................................................................................................
Personal Code List ......................................................................................
Transmission Result Notification Mail (Transfer Result Report) .................
Scanning Operation ................................................................................
42
42
42
43
43
43
44
44
46
46
47
3. Using LAN FAX
Basic Transmission.................................................................................
Address Book ..........................................................................................
Printing .....................................................................................................
Setting LAN FAX Properties ...................................................................
Memory Option ........................................................................................
49
52
53
54
56
4. Registering E-mail Addresses
Quick Dials ............................................................................................... 57
To Register or Edit an E-mail Address in a Quick Dial................................ 57
User Parameters ...................................................................................... 60
5. NIC FAX Monitor
Starting Up and Quitting NIC FAX Monitor ...........................................
Starting Up NIC FAX Monitor ......................................................................
Quitting NIC FAX Monitor............................................................................
NIC FAX Monitor Initial Screen...............................................................
Specifying the Target Fax.......................................................................
Changing the Connection Mode ............................................................
Changing from User Mode to Administrator Mode ......................................
Changing from Administrator Mode to User Mode ......................................
Memory Status.........................................................................................
Viewing Files Awaiting Transmission ..........................................................
Viewing Files That Have Been Received into Fax Memory ........................
Viewing Auto Documents ............................................................................
Journals (Transmission and Reception) ...............................................
Viewing the Transmission and Reception Journals ....................................
63
63
63
64
65
66
66
66
67
67
68
68
69
69
v
Address Book (Quick Dial, Speed Dial, Group Dial) ............................
Adding a New Quick Dial ............................................................................
Adding a New Speed Dial ...........................................................................
Adding a New Group Dial............................................................................
Adding Forwarding Station Addresses .................................................
Editing Forwarding Settings ........................................................................
Adding Personal Codes ..........................................................................
Viewing Fax Information .........................................................................
Backing Up and Restoring Memory Data ..............................................
Backing Up Memory Data ...........................................................................
Restoring Memory Data ..............................................................................
Backup Files Saved in CSV Format ............................................................
Using Online Help....................................................................................
Using Index Search.....................................................................................
Using Keyword Search................................................................................
Displaying Version Information ...................................................................
70
70
72
73
75
76
78
80
81
81
82
84
85
85
85
85
6. Troubleshooting
Error Messages........................................................................................
NIC FAX Display Messages ........................................................................
NIC FAX Monitor Initial Screen Messages ..................................................
NIC FAX Monitor Operation Messages .......................................................
LAN FAX Operation Messages ...................................................................
87
87
89
90
95
7. Appendix
Uninstalling NIC FAX Applications ........................................................ 97
Uninstalling the NIC FAX application, Address Book or Multidirect Print .... 97
Uninstalling the LAN FAX Driver ................................................................. 98
Specifications .......................................................................................... 99
Received Images ................................................................................... 100
INDEX...................................................................................................... 101
vi
1. Getting Ready
OVERVIEW
The following steps must be performed before you can use the Internet Fax function and the LAN FAX function.
A User Function key settings.
B Connection of NIC FAX to a LAN with a LAN cable.
C E-mail server settings (by network administrator).
D NIC FAX initial settings (IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway Address).
E Installation of software on your PC (NIC FAX application, Address Book,
Multidirect Print, and LAN FAX Driver).
F NIC FAX Monitor settings
Note
❒ The LAN FAX function can also be used by itself. In that case, steps required
are B, D, and E.
❒ Sample operation panel displays and NIC FAX application screens shown in
this manual may differ from those that actually appear on the screen.
1
Getting Ready
Operation Panel
This section describes the operation
panel buttons and indicators that are
unique to Internet faxing. See Chapter 1, "Operation Panel" in the Basic
Features manual for details on other
operation panel buttons and indicators.
1
ZCJS300N.eps
❖ Auto Mail Reception
Press the User Function key that
has been assigned the Auto
Mail Reception function to turn
this feature on or off. When the
Auto Mail Reception indicator
is lit, the server is checked periodically for E-mail and downloading takes place as
necessary. When not lit, E-mail
is not received automatically.
See P.14 “E-mail RX Interval”.
Limitation
❒ If you do not store the Mail Address function in a User Function key, you cannot send Email.
A
Once you have made the appropriate User Function key assignm e n t s , y ou c a n u s e th e U s e r
Function keys to select the following functions:
❖ Mail Address
Press the User Function key that
has been assigned the Mail Address function when you wish
to specify an E-mail address.
You can enter E-mail addresses
that contain letters, "@" character, and periods with the Quick
Dial keys.
❖ Mail Reception
Press the User Function key that
has been assigned the Mail Reception function to check the Email server and receive any new
E-mail. Use this key if you do
not wish to wait for the machine
to check the server automatically. See P.37 “Manual E-mail Reception”.
2
Note
❒ If you purchased your machine
with the NIC FAX KIT already
installed, the Mail Address
function is pre-assigned to User
Function key {F2} and the Mail
Reception function is pre-assigned to User Function key
{F3}.
❒ If your NIC FAX KIT was installed as a separately purchased option, assign the
functions to the appropriate
keys and affix the appropriate
provided labels to those keys.
Reference
See Chapter 6, "Assigning User
F u n c t i o n K ey s " i n t h e A d vanced Features manual.
Operation Panel
B
You can enter the following characters with the Quick Dial keys
when Mail Address input is selected.
Quick Dial key
20/28
1
29/27
(QWERTY Type/
ABC Type)
Character
@
.
Note
❒ The keys to which Quick Dial
assignments can be made differ
depending on the keyboard layout (ABC type or QWERTY
type). You can make settings in
"Key Layout". See Chapter 7,
"Key Layout" in the Advanced
Features manual.
❒ If your NIC FAX KIT was installed as a separately purchased option, affix the "@" and
"." labels provided with the kit
to the machine's original Quick
Dial sheet. Affix the "@" label
over "()" on the original sheet,
and affix "." over "Space".
❒ You can enter symbols (such as
hyphens, underscores and spaces) by pressing the {Symbol}
key.
3
Getting Ready
Connecting to a LAN
Connecting the LAN Cable
1
C Plug
the other end of the cable
into a hub.
ZCJP310N.eps
NIC FAX uses TCP/IP protocol to
communicate over a LAN, and must
be connected to the LAN with a
10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX LAN cable.
Note
❒ A LAN cable is not supplied with
NIC FAX.
❒ 100BASE-TX refers to twisted
Ethernet cable that supports LAN
communication at 100Mbps, and
10BASE-T refers to twisted pair
Ethernet cable that supports LAN
communication at 10 Mbps.
A Attach the ferrite core.
Loop the cable and attach the ferrite core as shown in the illustration.
ZCJP300N.eps
L
Note
❒ The LAN cable loop should be
about 2 inches (L) from the end
of the cable.
B Connect
the cable connector to
the rear of NIC FAX.
4
Hub
10 BASE-T cable or
100 BASE-TX cable
SMTP Reception
SMTP Reception
NIC FAX ordinarily uses POP mail reception, but can be set to use SMTP reception. With POP reception, mail can be received either using auto mail reception
or manual reception.
With SMTP reception, E-mail is received immediately as soon as it is sent to the
E-mail address set by NIC FAX. You can also route mail received to other Internet fax machines.
1
Server
Server
Internet
Receives message
immediately after the SMTP
server receives E-mail.
LAN
Router
LAN
Router
PC
PC
Sending to
[email protected]
NIC FAX
E-mail :
[email protected]
Note
❒ DNS server settings must be made before using SMTP reception. See P.6 “Email Server Settings (by Network Administrator)”.
❒ To use SMTP reception, SMTP reception must be set to "Yes" as explained on
P.60 “User Parameters” (Switch 17, bit 0).
❒ Even if SMTP reception is enabled on the DNS server, mail sent from the
SMTP server will not be received and NIC FAX will report an error if SMTP
reception is set to "No" in the user parameters.
❒ If an error is encountered during E-mail reception, reception is aborted, the Email is discarded, and NIC FAX responds to the SMTP server with an error.
An error notification is sent to the E-mail's originator.
❒ SMTP reception cannot be interrupted by pressing the {STOP} key.
Reference
See P.37 “Manual E-mail Reception”
See P.37 “Automatic E-mail Reception”
See P.40 “Transferring Mail Received via SMTP”
5
Getting Ready
E-mail Server Settings (by Network
Administrator)
1
The information in this section is for your network administrator.
NIC FAX uses an Internet E-mail system to send Internet faxes. Since it automatically connects to the E-mail server to get E-mail, a NIC FAX account and password must be set up on the E-mail server. In order to use SMTP reception, an
entry indicating that NIC FAX is capable of SMTP possible must be made in the
DNS server's MX record. See the documentation for the E-mail server for details
on the procedure required for setting up accounts and passwords.
Be sure to provide the NIC FAX IP address and host name to NIC FAX users
who need to input this information when establishing a connection with NIC
FAX Monitor and Multidirect Print.
E-mail Servers That Have Been Confirmed to Work
❖ Sendmail/QUALCOM Pop server
Program
SMTP sendmail Ver.8 or higher POP QUALCOM Pop server
OS
Solaris 1 Ver.2.1.4-R3
❖ Post Office
Agency
Software.com
Ver.3.1 Release PO203a
❖ Seattle Lab Mail Server
Agency
Seattle Lab Inc
Ver.4.1
❖ NetScape Messaging Server
Agency
NetScape Communications
Ver.3.0
❖ IMail Server for Windows NT
Agency
Ipswitch, Inc.
Ver.4.0
Note
❒ Supported operations and services differ according to the E-mail server used.
6
NIC FAX Initial Settings
NIC FAX Initial Settings
NIC FAX initial settings include the following items.
Menu name
Item
Using the Internet Fax function
With POP
reception
TCP/IP Settings
E-mail Settings
With SMTP
reception
IP Address
Required
Required
Required
Subnet Mask
Required
Required
Required
Gateway
Address
Required
Required
Required
Primary DNS
Server Address *
Optional
Optional
Optional
Secondary DNS
Server Address *
Optional
Optional
Optional
Access Control *
Optional
Optional
Optional
Access Mask *
Optional
Optional
Optional
SMTP Server *
Required
Required

POP Server *
Required


Host Name *
Optional
Optional

Mail Address *
Required
Required

Domain Name *
Optional
Optional

Login Name*
Required


Login Password*
Required


E-mail RX
Interval*
Optional


Time Difference*
Required
Required

Administrator
Address*
Optional
Optional

Backup TX
Address*
Optional
Optional

Mail Size
Optional
Optional


Optional

Optional


SMTP Routing
Auto Mail Reception
1
Using LAN FAX
by itself
Required: Input required.
Optional: Setting required in order to use function or as necessary.
: Setting not required.
*: Items you can set from NIC FAX Monitor.
7
Getting Ready
Note
❒ After making the settings, print out the list of parameter settings and save it
for future reference.
1
Reference
See P.5 “SMTP Reception”
See P.23 “NIC FAX Monitor Settings”
8
Network Settings
Network Settings
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
If any other display is shown, press
the {Energy Saver/ 3 Clear Modes} key.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2}, then press the
{OK} key.
F Press 0 or 1 to display "18. Network".
Key Op. Tools:
18.Network
1
you want to make settings for,
then press the {OK} key.
TCP/IP:
1.IP Address
hi
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Cancel} key.
IP Address
Enter the IP address. The IP (Internet
Protocol) address is used by the TCP/
IP protocol to identify a particular PC.
A Enter
the code for "IP Address"
with the number keys.
hi
Note
❒ The numbers that appear in
front of function names vary according to options that are installed in the fax machine.
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press 0 or 1 to display the item
you want to make settings for.
Network:
1.TCP/IP
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display the item
hi
IP Address: Press OK
[127. 0. 0. 1]
• If a number has only one or two
digits, input it and then press 1
to move the cursor to the next
number.
• Press 0 or 1 to move the display cursor, and the {Clear} key
to delete characters.
• Consult your systems administrator if you are unsure about
this setting.
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the TCP/
IP settings menu.
TCP/IP Settings
A Press 0 or 1 to display "1. TCP/IP".
Network:
1.TCP/IP
hi
9
Getting Ready
Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask. The subnet
mask is a mask value that makes it
possible to use part of the IP address
as an network address.
1
A Enter the code for "Subnet Mask"
with the number keys.
Subnet Mask:Press OK
[ 0. 0. 0. 0]
• If a number has only one or two
digits, input it and then press 1
to move the cursor to the next
number.
• Press 0 or 1 to move the display cursor, and the {Clear} key
to delete characters.
• Consult your systems administrator if you are unsure about
this setting.
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the TCP/
IP settings menu.
Default Gateway Address
Enter the default gateway address.
This is the IP address of the router
through which connection is made to
other networks.
A Enter the code for "Gateway Address" with the number keys.
GatewayAdd.:Press OK
[ 0. 0. 0. 0]
• If a number has only one or two
digits, input it and then press 1
to move the cursor to the next
number.
10
• Press 0 or 1 to move the display cursor, and the {Clear} key
to delete characters.
• Consult your systems administrator if you are unsure about
this setting.
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the TCP/
IP settings menu.
Primary DNS Server Address (DNS 1)
Enter the primary DNS server IP address of the network to which NIC
FAX is connected.
A Enter the code for "DNS Address.
1" with the number keys.
DNS Add.1: Press OK
[ 0. 0. 0. 0]
• If a number has only one or two
digits, input it and then press 1
to move the cursor to the next
number.
• Press 0 or 1 to move the display cursor, and the {Clear} key
to delete characters.
• Consult your systems administrator if you are unsure about
this setting.
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the TCP/
IP settings menu.
Network Settings
Secondary DNS Server Address (DNS 2)
Enter the secondary DNS server IP
address of the network to which NIC
FAX is connected.
A Enter the code for "DNS Address.
2" with the number keys.
DNS Add.2: Press OK
[ 0. 0. 0. 0]
• You may set the DNS 2 Address
when two domain name systems are connected to your machine. A connection is made to
DNS 2 only if DNS 1 does not
respond.
• If a number has only one or two
digits, input it and then press 1
to move the cursor to the next
number.
• Press 0 or 1 to move the display cursor, and the {Clear} key
to delete characters.
• Consult your systems administrator if you are unsure about
this setting.
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the TCP/
IP settings menu.
Access Control
Enter the access control setting.
A Enter the code for "Access Control" with the number keys.
Access Control: /OK
[ 0. 0. 0. 0]
• If a number has only one or two
digits, input it and then press 1
to move the cursor to the next
number.
• Press 0 or 1 to move the display cursor, and the {Clear} key
to delete characters.
• When using the NIC FAX Monitor or LAN FAX function, access control determines the IP
address(es) that can connect to
NIC FAX. If you do not wish to
use this feature, leave this setting as "0.0.0.0".
1
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the TCP/
IP settings menu.
Access Mask
Enter the access mask.
A Enter the code for "Access Mask"
with the number keys.
Access Mask:Press OK
[ 0. 0. 0. 0]
• If a number has only one or two
digits, input it and then press 1
to move the cursor to the next
number.
• Press 0 or 1 to move the display cursor, and the {Clear} key
to delete characters.
• Enter a mask that specifies the
range of IP addresses that can
be connected based upon the access control setting. If you do
not wish to use this feature,
leave this setting as "0.0.0.0".
E.g.
Access control:
192.168.15.16
Access mask:
255.255.0.0
In this case addresses in the range
192.168.XXX.XXX can connect.
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the TCP/
IP settings menu.
11
Getting Ready
B Press the {OK} key.
E-mail Server Settings
A Enter the code for "2. Mail Server"
1
with the number keys.
Network:
2.Mail Server
POP Server
hi
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display the item
you want to make settings for,
then press the {OK} key.
Mail Server:
1.SMTP Server
The machine returns to the E-mail
server settings menu.
hi
• To enter the "@" character and
periods, use the Quick Dial
keys. To enter all other symbols,
press the {Symbol} key. To
switch between uppercase and
lowercase characters, press the
{ABC/abc} key.
• If you make a mistake, press the
{Cancel} key.
A Enter the POP server address.
POP Server:[abc]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
• Press 0 or 1 to move the display cursor, and the {Clear} key
to delete characters.
• A connection is made to a POP
server in order to receive Email.
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the E-mail
server settings menu.
• You can also specify the POP
server address as an IP address.
• The pop server can also be specified as a domain. In this case,
you must specify the DNS server address.
SMTP Server
Enter the IP address of the SMTP
server.
A Enter the SMTP server address.
SMTP Server:[abc]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
12
• Press 0 or 1 to move the display cursor, and the {Clear} key
to delete characters.
• The SMTP server is the server
that sends E-mail over the Internet.
• The SMTP server can also be
specified as a domain. In this
case, you must specify the DNS
server address.
Host Name
Enter the host name of the NIC FAX
that is to be used for sending mail.
A Enter the name of the host.
Press 0 or 1 to move the display
cursor, and the {Clear} key to delete characters.
Host Name:[abc]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the E-mail
server settings menu.
Network Settings
Mail Address
Login Name
Enter the mail address of NIC FAX.
Enter the login name to be used for
connection to the POP server.
A Enter the E-mail address of this
machine.
Press 0 or 1 to move the display
cursor, and the {Clear} key to delete characters.
Mail Add.:[abc]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the E-mail
server settings menu.
Press 0 or 1 to move the display
cursor, and the {Clear} key to delete characters.
Login Name:[abc]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the E-mail
server settings menu.
Domain Name
Login Password
Enter the domain name of the NIC
FAX that is to be used for sending
mail.
Enter the login password to be used
for connection to the POP server.
A Enter the domain name.
Press 0 or 1 to move the display
cursor, and the {Clear} key to delete characters.
Domain Name:[abc]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the E-mail
server settings menu.
1
A Enter the login name.
A Enter the login password.
Press 0 or 1 to move the display
cursor, and the {Clear} key to delete characters.
Password:[abc]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the E-mail
server settings menu.
13
Getting Ready
1
E-mail RX Interval
Administrator Address
When using auto mail reception, enter the interval in minutes at which
NIC FAX is to automatically check for
mail.
Make this setting when you want error notifications to be sent to another
address in addition to the originator.
A Enter
the interval for automatic
reception with the number keys.
• You can enter a value between 1
and 60 minutes in one-minute
steps.
• The machine's factory default
setting is 3 minutes.
RX Interval:Press OK
[ 3] min.
(1-60)
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the E-mail
server settings menu.
Time Difference
Enter the time difference between
your time zone and Greenwich Mean
Time.
A Press 0 or 1 to adjust the time
difference.
• Enter how many hours your local time is ahead or behind of
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
• The factory default setting for
the time difference is "-5" which
is the time difference for New
York.
Difference:
hi/OK
[- 5]h
(-12 +12)
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the E-mail
server settings menu.
14
A Enter the address to which notifications will be sent when an error
occurs.
Admin. Add:[abc]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
• Press 0 or 1 to move the display cursor, and the {Clear} key
to delete characters.
• If the machine receives an error
notification when downloading
E-mail from the POP server or
during a transfer request, it sends
an error notification to the sender
and a copy (CC) to the address
specified with this setting.
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the E-mail
server settings menu.
Backup TX Address
Make this setting when you want all
outgoing mail to be routed to another
address in addition to the destination.
A Enter the E-mail backup address.
Backup TX:[abc]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
• Press 0 or 1 to move the display cursor, and the {Clear} key
to delete characters.
• A blind carbon copy (BCC) of all
sent E-mail messages is sent to
this address.
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the E-mail
server settings menu.
Network Settings
G Enter the file size limit with the
Limit Mail Size
number keys.
Make this setting when you want to
limit the size of E-mail that is transmitted. When this function is set
"On", transmission of E-mail that exceeds the set size is aborted.
A Press 0 or 1 to display "1. On/
Off "
Limit Mail Size:
1.On/Off
Size Limit: Press OK
[1000]KB
(1-9999)
1
Limitation
❒ You can set a file size from 1 to
9999 KB.
H Press the {OK} key.
hi
Note
❒ When E-mail exceeds the maximum file size, an Error Report is
output and the E-mail is deleted.
❒ Even when E-mail does not exceed the size limit, it may be rejected if it does not meet the
requirements of the server settings.
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to select "On".
Limit Mail Size: /OK
On
[Off]
Note
❒ If you do not want to set a maximum E-mail size, select "Off"
and press the {OK} key.
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press 0 or 1 to display "2. Avail-
The machine returns to the E-mail
server settings menu.
Limit Address (SMTP Routing)
This function is available in systems
that allow routing of mail received
via SMTP.
When a limit address is set, mail received from addresses that do not
match the limit address is discarded
and an error message is returned to
the SMTP server.
The limit address is compared with
the addresses of mail originators as illustrated by the following examples.
When the limit address is set to
@nic.fax.com:
[email protected] ⇒ Accepted
[email protected] ⇒ Not accepted
[email protected] ⇒ Not accepted
Note
❒ No error report is output even
when E-mail is discarded.
able Size".
Limit Mail Size:
2.Available Size
hi
F Press the {OK} key.
15
Getting Ready
A Enter the E-mail address for limiting routing.
Limit Add.:[abc]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
1
Limitation
❒ You can enter up to 127 characters for an E-mail address.
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the E-mail
server settings menu.
Auto Mail Reception
When Auto Mail Reception is set
"On", NIC FAX automatically checks
for and receives mail at the interval
set for automatic reception (see P.14
“E-mail RX Interval”).
Note
❒ If you have assigned the Auto Mail
Reception function to a User Function key, you can turn Auto Mail
Reception on or off by pressing
that key. See P.2 “Operation Panel”.
A Press 0 or 1 to display "3. Auto
Mail Recep.".
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to select "On" or
"Off".
AutoMailRecep.:hi/OK
On
[Off]
D Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the network settings menu.
16
Returning to the Initial Display
A Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to the standby mode.
Installing the Applications
Installing the Applications
System Requirements
1
The following is the required system for a PC running the NIC FAX Applications.
PC :
IBM PC/AT or compatible running Windows 95, Windows 98,
Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0
CPU :
i486DX-100MHz or higher
Minimum Memory :
16MB minimum
Free Disk Space :
30MB minimum
Operating System :
Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT4.0, Windows 2000
Display :
VGA 640 \ 480, 256 colors minimum
Network :
LAN connection, TCP/IP protocols
Note
❒ Operation cannot be guaranteed for all system configurations.
Before Starting Installation
Running the installation program on the CD-ROM that contains the NIC FAX
Applications causes the four programs listed below to be installed by default.
Note, however, that you can also specify installation of specific programs if you
want.
❖ NIC FAX application
• NIC FAX Monitor
You can confirm NIC FAX settings and conditions from a PC, as well as
make program settings and save journal listings.
• ICViewer
You can display, edit, and save documents received using Internet faxing
on a PC.
❖ Address Book
You can edit the address list. Allows you to select destinations registered on
the address list when Internet faxing with NIC FAX.
❖ Multidirect Print
A utility that is necessary to use LAN FAX features.
17
Getting Ready
❖ LAN-Fax F1 (LAN FAX Driver)
Enables you to send and print documents created on a PC.
Note
❒ To use the NIC FAX Applications on a Windows 2000 system, you must be a
member of the Administrators or Power Users group.
1
❒ If you install ICViewer, the TIF, TIFF and DCX file icons and default file assignments will change.
❒ Applications that can be used with LAN FAX are Address Book, Multidirect
Print, and LAN-FAX F1.
B Type the full path and file
name of the setup program into
the Text Box and then click
[OK].
Installing the Applications
• To install the NIC FAX Applications on a Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 2000 system, you must be a
member of the Administrators
group.
• Screen images in the procedure below may differ according to your
version of Windows and environment settings.
• Before beginning installation, exit
all other applications.
A Turn on the PC and start up Windows.
B Insert the CD-ROM that contains
the NIC FAX Applications into
the PC's CD drive.
The Install program starts.
If the Install program does not start
automatically, perform the following procedure:
A On the [Start] menu, select
[Run].
This causes the [Run] dialog box
to appear.
18
GFDIRC0N.eps
E.g. type
D:\InstTool.exe
If your CD-ROM is assigned to
drive D.
ST4NE040.tif
C Click [Next] in response to the dia-
log box that appears to start installation.
ST4NE050.tif
Installing the Applications
D After checking the contents of the
B Put checks in the checkboxes
next to the program names in
the component list box to select
the programs you want to install, then click [Install].
dialog box, click [Next].
ST4NE060.tif
1
ST4NE090.tif
E
Select [Network] and then click [Install].
F Click [Next].
ST4NE070.tif
ST4NE110.tif
Once Multidirect Print has finished installing, the Address Book
installer starts.
Using the Customize Option
A Select [Custom] and then click
[Next].
G Click [Next].
ST4NE120.tif
ST4NE080.tif
Once Address Book has finished
installing, the NIC FAX application installer starts.
19
Getting Ready
H Confirm
that no other applications are open, and click "Yes".
Using the Customize Option
A Select
[Next].
ST4NE130.tif
1
[Custom],
then
click
ST4NE160.tif
Note
❒ To check whether other applications are running, hold down
[Alt] and press [Tab]. Exit all other applications that are running
before you click [Yes].
I Click [Next].
ST4NE140.tif
Select the components you want
to install, then click [Next].
ST4NE170.tif
J Select [Typical], then click [Next].
ST4NE150.tif
K Make sure the destination folder
is to your satisfaction, then click
[Next].
ST4NE180.tif
Note
❒ If you want to change the location where the NIC FAX applications will be installed, click
[Browse] and choose a directory.
After you specify the directory,
click [Next].
20
Note
❒ We recommend that you only
use the folders shown in the list.
Installing the Applications
L Click [Finish].
If the Readme check box was
checked, the Readme file will
open. Please check the contents,
then close it.
ST4NE190.tif
Note
❒ If you want to change the printer name, enter the new name in
the Printer text box.
1
O Click [Add].
ST4NE220.tif
M The Software License Agreement
is displayed. Make sure you read
it carefully, then click "Yes".
ST4NE200.tif
P Select [Multidirect Print], then click
[OK].
ST4NE230.tif
Q Click [Specify Address].
ST4NE240.tif
N Select
[LAN-Fax F1], then click
[Next].
ST4NE210.tif
Note
❒ Make sure that "TCP/IP" is selected for "Select Protocol".
21
Getting Ready
R Enter the IP address or host name
assigned to NIC FAX, and then
click [OK].
U Confirm the installation settings,
then click [Finish].
ST4NE270.tif
ST4NE250.tif
1
Note
❒ When entering a host name,
first click "Host Name" and then
enter the host name in the box to
the right.
V Click [Exit].
ST4NE280.tif
S Click [OK].
T Select the port
(IP address) you
specified in step R, then click
[Next].
ST4NE260.tif
W When
the next dialog box appears, remove the CD-ROM and
click [Yes].
ST4NE290.tif
Windows restarts.
22
NIC FAX Monitor Settings
NIC FAX Monitor Settings
After completing E-mail server settings, initial settings, and installation, you are
ready to use NIC FAX Monitor to make E-mail, TCP/IP and other system settings.
Entering Administrator Mode
Before making system settings you
have to first perform the procedure
below to enter Administrator Mode.
Note
❒ To use the NIC FAX Monitor on a
Windows 2000 system, you must
be a member of the Administrators
or Power Users group.
1
C On the [Connect] Menu, click [Administrator Mode].
D The factory default password is a
blank (null), so simply click [OK]
to enter Administrator mode the
first time.
ST4NE310.tif
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Programs] and then [NIC FAX application]. Next, click [NIC FAX Monitor].
B Type the IP Address or host name
in the [Host name] text box, and
then click [OK].
ST4NE470.tif
The above screen shows input of the
example IP address 192.168.15.16.
Note
❒ When NIC FAX Monitor is connected to NIC FAX in Administrator mode, "Connecting with
PC" is shown on the NIC FAX
display and it is not possible to
access the Fax Features or Key
Operator Tools settings from
NIC FAX. If the User Tools are
being accessed from NIC FAX or
another running NIC FAX Monitor application, NIC FAX Monitor will display a "Sorry, busy for
doing some other tasks." message and you will not be able to
connect in Administrator mode.
Important
❒ In Administrator mode, when
no functions are performed for
10 minutes, the error message
"No input for 10 minutes, therefore returning to User Mode." is
displayed and the machine returns to User mode.
Note
❒ See P.28 “Setting the Administrator Mode Password” for details
on changing the Administrator
mode password.
23
Getting Ready
Internet E-mail Settings
From the [Settings] menu, choose [FAX
Setup (Administrator)] to display the
[FAX Setup (Administrator)] dialog box.
1
A Click the [Mail] tab in the [FAX Setup (Administrator)] dialog box.
ST4NE320.tif
B Make the [Mail] settings described
below (A through H), and then
click [OK].
A [SMTP Server]
Type in the IP address of the
SMTP server to be connected to
for sending Internet E-mail.
B [POP Server]
Type in the IP address of the
POP server to be connected to
for receiving Internet E-mail.
Note
❒ You can enter a host name for
the above items if the TCP/
IP DNS setting is set up correctly (see P.25 “TCP/IP Settings”).
24
C [Host Name]
Type in the NIC FAX host name.
This input can be skipped.
D [Mail Address]
Type in the NIC FAX E-mail address. The address you type
here is automatically added to
the "From" field of outgoing Email.
E [Domain Name]
Type in the domain name of the
network where NIC FAX is located. This input can be skipped.
F [Login Name]
Type in the name for logging
into the POP server.
G [Login Password]
Type in the password for logging into the POP server.
H [Mail RX Interval]
Specify the minimum interval
for logging into the POP server
to pick up any E-mail that is
waiting. An interval in the
range of 1 to 60 minutes can be
specified, in one-minute
units.The factory default setting
for the interval is 3 (minutes).
NIC FAX Monitor Settings
TCP/IP Settings
From the [Settings] menu, choose [FAX
Setup (Administrator)] to display the
[FAX Setup (Administrator)] dialog box.
Note
❒ If you have registered the settings
below from NIC FAX, there is no
need to register them again.
A Click the [TCP/IP] tab in the [FAX
Setup (Administrator)] dialog box.
ST4NE330.tif
C [DNS Server 2]
Type in the secondary DNS
server IP address of the network
to which NIC FAX is connected.
D [Access Control]
Type in the IP address to which
NIC FAX can connect when using the NIC FAX Monitor or the
LAN FAX function. If you do
not wish to use this feature,
leave this setting as 0.0.0.0.
E [Access Mask]
Type in an access mask to limit
the range of IP addresses that
can connect to NIC FAX.
If you do not wish to use this
feature, leave this setting as
"0.0.0.0".
Example:
Access Control:
192.168.15.16
Access Mask:
255.255.0.0
1
In this case, the IP address that
can connect to NIC FAX is:
192.168.XXX.XXX
B Make
the [TCP/IP] settings described below (B through E),
and then click [OK].
A [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], [Default Gateway]
Make sure that these items are
identical to those you input on
the NIC FAX control panel (P.9
“TCP/IP Settings”).
B [DNS Server 1]
Type in the primary DNS server
IP address of the network to
which NIC FAX is connected.
25
Getting Ready
Other Settings
From the [Settings] menu, choose [FAX
Setup (Administrator)] to display the
[FAX Setup (Administrator)] dialog box.
1
Note
❒ If you have registered the settings
below from NIC FAX, there is no
need to register them again.
A Click the [Other] tab in the
[FAX
Setup (Administrator)] dialog box.
ST4NE340.tif
B Make the settings described be-
low (A through D), and then
click [OK].
A [Admin. Mail Address]
If the machine receives a notification E-mail message (error
notification or relay result notification) generated by NIC FAX,
it sends an error notification to
the sender and a copy (CC) to
the address specified with this
setting. This input can be
skipped.
26
B [Backup Mail Address]
A blind carbon copy (BCC) of all
E-mail sent from NIC FAX is
sent to this address. This input
can be skipped.
• Specifying a backup address
causes all E-mail to be sent to
the address. This means the
mail server requires large
memory capacity.
Note
❒ Do not specify the NIC FAX
E-mail address as the Administrator E-mail Address
or Backup E-mail Address.
Doing so can cause operational problems when transfer request E-mail is bcc'd to
NIC FAX.
C [Print Header Information]
Put a check in this checkbox if
you want header information to
be printed in received E-mail.
D [Greenwich Mean Time Difference]
Specify the difference between
Greenwich Mean Time and the
time zone you are currently located in. You can use the dropdown list or click the button to
get the value from the Control
Panel.
Example
Los Angeles
GMT - 08:00
New York
GMT - 05:00
NIC FAX Monitor Settings
Monitor Settings
A Select [Settings] , and then [Monitor
1
Settings].
ST4NE350.tif
B Make
any changes, then click
[OK].
A Journal Data
Enter the number of Journal
items to display (0–100).The factory default setting is 30.
B Time Display Format
Select 12 or 24 hour format for
the time displayed in the monitor dialog.
27
Getting Ready
Setting the Administrator Mode Password
On the [Settings] menu, click [Password] to display the password settings
dialog box. Use this dialog box to
specify a password that controls access to Administrator mode.
1
A In
the dialog box, make the required password settings.
ST4NE360.tif
A [Current Password]
Type in the password you want
to change from. If this is the first
time you are setting a password
since installing NIC FAX Monitor, leave this text box blank.
B [New Password]
Type in up to eight characters
for the password to which you
want to change. Note that NIC
FAX Monitor distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase
characters.
C [Confirm New Password]
Re-type the password you specified into the [New Password] text
box.
28
B Click [OK] to put your password
settings into effect.
Note
❒ Make sure you keep a separate
record of your password so you
do not forget it. If you do, you
will not be able to access Administrator Mode.
❒ Should you forget the password, contact your service representative.
❒ You can operate NIC FAX Monitor in User mode or Administrator mode. In User mode you
can confirm settings, but you
cannot change them. A password is required to enter Administrator mode. This mode
allows you to change the settings and use all of the NIC FAX
Monitor functions.
2. Internet Faxing
Transmission
This section describes how to scan a
document into NIC FAX memory and
send it as E-mail. You can enter the Email address directly, or use a Quick
Dial, Speed Dial or Group with an address already stored in it. You can
also use the {Redial} key to recall the
previous address sent to.
When sending documents, you can
set E-mail options using the {Trans.
Option} key. You can set the following
options:
❖ Subject
You can enter a subject for the document you want to send. You can
enter a maximum of 20 characters.
❖ Heading
You can add "Urgent" in front of
the document subject.
❖ Confirmation of Reception
You can confirm whether documents you sent were properly received on the Journal.
❖ Viewer URL Information
You can record URL sites for
downloading viewer applications
on E-mail you are about to send.
Important
❒ You may not be able to send large
files as E-mail, depending on Email environment conditions.
Note
❒ Because NIC FAX sends documents as E-mail messages with an
attached TIFF-F image, viewer applications are required in order to
view documents when they are received on a PC. You can inform the
receiver of sites for downloading
viewer applications with the Viewer URL Information Mail Option.
❒ When you send viewer URL information, depending on the receiver's fax machine, the journal may
show a page count that is one or
two pages greater than the number
of pages actually sent.
❒ See P.100 “Received Images” for
how mail is actually received by
the PC when mail is sent with mail
options selected.
A Make sure that the Memory Transmission indicator is lit.
If it is not, press the {Memory} key.
Limitation
❒ When using NIC FAX to send Email over the Internet, documents are stored in memory,
then sent using Memory Transmission. Internet faxing does
not allows immediate transmission.
❒ The level of security for Internet
communications is low. Use of the
telephone network is recommended for confidential communications.
29
Internet Faxing
L Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes" or
"No".
Specifying E-mail Options
To specify E-mail options, perform
the following procedure.
A Press the {Trans. Option} key.
B Press 0 or 1 to display "10.
Mail Options".
2
Trans. Option
10.Mail Options
hi
C Press the {OK} key.
D Press 0 or 1 to select "On".
Mail Options:
[On]
Off
hi/OK
E Press the {OK} key.
F Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes" or
"No".
Insert Subject:hi/OK
[Yes]
No
G Press the {OK} key.
If you selected "No" in step F,
go to step J.
H Enter the subject.
Subject:
[ABC]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Reference
See Chapter 3, "Entering
Characters" in the Basic Features manual.
I Press the {OK} key.
J Press 0 or 1 to select "No" or
"Urgent".
Heading:
[No] Urgent
K Press the {OK} key.
30
hi/OK
Confirm Recep.:hi/OK
[Yes]
No
M Press the {OK} key.
N Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes" or
"No".
Add ViewerInfo.hi/OK
[Yes]
No
O Press the {OK} key.
Note
❒ If any one of the E-mail options is set, the Transmission
Option indicator lights.
B Place
your document facedown
into the feeder, and make any
scan settings you require.
• Documents are sent at Detail
resolution (200 X 200 dpi), even
if Fine (200 X 400 dpi) is selected.
C Press the User Function key (F1F4) that is assigned the Mail Address function.
Mail:[abc]
Address
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Transmission
D Use
the Quick Dial keys and
number keys to enter the E-mail
address.
Mail:[abc]
OK
[email protected]_k
• You can enter the "@" character
and periods with the Quick Dial
keys. Press the {Symbols} key
when you wish to enter other
symbols. Use the {ABC/abc} key
to shift between uppercase and
lowercase characters.
• You can enter up to 127 characters for an E-mail address.
• You can specify E-mail addresses programmed in Quick Dials,
Speed Dials, and Group Dials.
• You can also use the {Redial}
key to specify E-mail addresses.
E Press the {OK} key.
Dest.1
OK to Add
[email protected]
Note
❒ If you want to specify another
E-mail address, repeat steps C
and D.
F Press the {Start} key.
• This starts reading of the document into memory. The E-mail
send operation starts after the
read operation is complete. The
Communicating indicator is lit
while a send operation is in
progress.
• With a long message, it may
take some time before the transmission starts. This is due to the
time the machine requires to
convert the data in memory.
Note
❒ For how to cancel transmission
of an Internet fax, see P.42 “Canceling Transmission of an Internet
Fax”.
2
-About the E-mail Subject
If "No" is selected for "Insert Subject"
in Mail Options, a subject with the following contents is automatically inserted.
❖ When a Personal Code is set
• If the mail address of the Routing Address is registered:
From "mail address of the
Routing Address" Fax Message NO.xxxx.
• If the mail address of the Routing Address is not registered:
From "Personal Code name"
Fax Message NO.xxxx.
❖ When a Personal Code is not set
• If Own Fax Number and Own
Name are registered:
From "Own Fax Number"
("Own Name") (Fax Message
NO.xxxx)
• If only Own Fax Number is registered:
From "Own Fax Number" (Fax
Message NO.xxxx)
• If only Own Name is registered:
From "Own Name" (Fax Message NO.xxxx)
• If neither Own Fax Number nor
Own Name are registered:
Fax Message NO.xxxx
Note
❒ "xxxx" is the document number
that appears in the Journal.
31
Internet Faxing
Reference
See Chapter 3, "Initial Settings and
Adjustments" in the Basic Features
manual.
See Chapter 1, "Personal Codes" in
the Advanced Features manual.
2
-When using NIC FAX with
Broadcasting and Sequential
Broadcasting
Broadcasting is used to send E-mail
when multiple addresses are specified for transmission. With broadcasting, the same E-mail can be sent to
multiple addresses at once, just as
when ordinary E-mail is sent to multiple addresses.
However, if "Yes" is selected for "Confirm Recep." or "Label Insert", sequential broadcasting is used for
transmission. With sequential broadcasting, the E-mail is sent to one address at a time.
Reference
See Chapter 3, "Label Insertion" in
the Advanced Features manual.
Confirming Reception
When Confirm Reception is selected,
a Reception Notice Request message
is sent at the time of transmission. The
receiver replies to this Reception Notice Request by sending a Reception
Notice. Once the Reception Notice
has been received, "OK" appears in
the Result column of the journal, allowing the originator to verify that
the transmission has been received.
32
Limitation
❒ The Confirm Reception feature is
only available if the receiver's PC
supports MDN (Message Disposition Notification).
Note
❒ Information regarding up to the
last 100 communications is recorded, but only the last 50 transmissions appear in the Journal. If you
do not receive a reception confirmation message for one of the last
50 transmissions from the receiver's machine, you may not be able
to confirm that the E-mail has been
received in the Journal's Result column.
❒ If you specify Mailing list addresses, do not select "Yes" for "Confirm
Recep." Otherwise, you will receive
multiple reception confirmation
messages from E-mail recipients,
and the Result column will not
show the correct information. The
Result column is refreshed each
time a newconfirmation message is
received.
❒ Reception confirmation results are
only shown in the Journal. The Result column in all other files, lists,
and transmission reports appears
blank.
❒ Reception confirmation messages
are not recorded in the Journal.
Transfer Request
Transfer Request
Transfer requests allow you to make use of the Internet to reduce costs, particularly with long distance and international communications.
There are two types of transfer request transmissions: transfer request by E-mail
and transfer request by fax (standard transfer request transmission).
The following are some terms you must be familiar with in order to perform the
following procedure.
2
❖ Transfer requester
This is the fax machine performing the transfer request transmission (this machine).
❖ Transfer station
This is the fax machine that performs the transfer. This machine needs to be
capable of performing transfers.
❖ End receiver
This is the fax machine or PC that receives the E-mail or fax from the transfer
station.
Limitation
❒ Fax machines that are equipped with NIC FAX KIT TYPE 140 or TYPE 500 can
be specified as the transfer station for a transfer request by E-mail.
Note
❒ Up to 30 end receivers can be specified for each transfer station. Each transfer
station Group is counted as a single end receiver.
❒ Each group is considered one item when specifying transfer stations programmed in Group Dials.
33
Internet Faxing
❒ In order to use this function, you must make the polling ID and Transfer Report settings. The same polling ID must be set for both the transfer requester
and the transfer stations. See Chapter 7, "ID Code" in the Advanced Features
manual. See Chapter 1, "Transfer Request" in the Advanced Features manual
for how to send faxes using transfer requests.
GFMCYU0N.eps
End Receiver
PC
PC
PC
Europe
2
LAN
Transfer
Station
G3FAX
Printer
Router
Transfer Requester
E-mail Server
[email protected]
NIC FAX 2
[email protected]
+Quick Dial (#01) input
Router
Printer
NIC FAX 1
[email protected]
E-mail Server
Internet
LAN
North America
PC
PC
Transfer Request by E-mail
A Make
sure that the Memory
Transmission indicator is lit.
If it is not, press the {Memory} key.
B Place
your document facedown
into the feeder, and make any
scan setting you require.
• Documents are sent at Detail
resolution (200 X 200 dpi), even
if Fine (200 X 400 dpi) is selected.
C Press the {Trans. Option} key.
34
PC
D Press
0 or 1 to display "7.
Transf. Request"
Trans. Option
7.Transf. Requesthi
E Press the {OK} key.
F Press 0 or 1 to select "On".
Transf.Request:hi/OK
On
[Off]
G Press the {OK} key.
Transfer Request
H Press
the Quick Dial or Speed
Dial that contains the Transfer
Station.
Transf. Stn.:
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
• Quick Dial
Press the Quick Dial to which
the desired address is assigned.
• Speed Dial
Press Speed Dial key then enter
the Speed Dial code with the
number keys.
Limitation
❒ When an originator requests
transfer by E-mail from a station
that is not capable of performing transfers, the station addressed receives the request as
ordinary E-mail and does not
transfer it or return an Error Report to the originator of the request.
❒ Before sending E-mail, confirm
that the end receiver's machine
is equipped with the Transfer
function.
Entering an E-mail Address
Manually
A Press the User Function key
(F1-F4) that is assigned the
Mail Address function.
B Enter the transfer station's Email address, and then press
the {OK} key.
If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
• To enter the "@" character
and periods, use the Quick
Dial keys. For all other symbols, press the {Symbol} key.
Use {ABC/abc} to shift between uppercase and lowercase characters.
I Press the {OK} key.
J Specify the end receiver.
2
You can specify a Quick Dial,
Speed Dial, or Group Dial programmed with the end receiver or
Transfer Station you want to specify.
Receive Stn.:
01 [#_kkk]
K Press the {OK} key.
L Use 0 or 1 to select
"Yes" or
"No".
Add Recv. Stn.?hi/OK
[Yes]
No
M Press the {OK} key.
Note
❒ If you selected "Yes" in step K,
repeat the procedure from step
I.
N Press the {Start} key.
• This starts reading of the document into memory. The E-mail
send operation starts after the
read operation is complete. The
Communicating indicator is lit
while a send operation is in
progress.
• With a long message, it may
take some time before the send
operation starts. This is due to
the time the machine requires to
convert the data in memory.
35
Internet Faxing
Specifying Transfer Stations
You can only specify end receivers already programmed in a Quick Dial,
Speed Dial, or Group Dial.
❖ Quick Dial
Following #, enter the two-digit
Quick Dial code.
For example, to specify the end receiver assigned to Quick Dial code
01, enter: # 0 1
2
❖ Speed Dial
Following #, enter an asterisk followed by the two-digit Speed Dial
code.
For example, to specify the end receiver assigned to Speed Dial code
12, enter: # * 1 2
❖ Group Dial
Following #, enter two asterisks
followed by the two-digit Group
code.
For example, to specify the end receiver assigned to Group code 04,
enter: # * * 0 4
36
Reception
Reception
Automatic E-mail Reception
When this function is turned on, the
machine periodically checks the Email server for incoming E-mail and
downloads it as necessary.
The interval between checks is referred to as the Mail RX Interval , and
the factory default setting for this parameter is 3 minutes (see P.12 “E-mail
Server Settings”). You change this to
any value between 1 and 60 minutes,
and can also force the machine to
check for incoming E-mail by pressing the User Function key that has
been assigned the Mail Reception
Function (See P.37 “Manual E-mail Reception”).
You can also configure this feature to
work in conjunction with the Night
Timer feature so that Automatic Email reception does not occur at times
when the machine is saving energy.
See P.60 “User Parameters”(switch 16,
bit 4).
Note
❒ If the indicator of the User Function key assigned with the Auto
Mail Reception function is not lit,
automatic E-mail reception will
not take place (see P.2 “Operation
Panel”).
❒ If memory runs out, E-mail will
not be received at the specified intervals. Reception will resume
when sufficient memory becomes
available.
Reference
See P.14 “E-mail RX Interval” and
P.24 “Internet E-mail Settings”.
See Chapter 6, "Assigning a User
Function Keys" in the Advanced
Features manual.
See Chapter 7, "Energy Save Timer"
in the Advanced Features manual.
2
Manual E-mail Reception
Follow these steps at any time to check
for incoming E-mail immediately.
Note
❒ This procedure assumes that the
Manual Reception function is
stored in a User Function key beforehand (see P.2 “Operation Panel”). See Chapter 6, "Assigning a
User Function Keys" in the Advanced Features manual.
A Press the User Function key (F1-
F4) registered with the Manual Email Reception function.
B Press the {Start} key to check for
E-mail.
If there is E-mail, the Communicating indicator will light and the Email will be printed.
Mail Reception:
Press Start
If there is no E-mail, the following
display appears. Press the {OK} key.
No Mail Received
Press OK
C The machine returns to the standby mode.
37
Internet Faxing
Receiving E-mail with the Information
Function
If the Manual E-mail Reception function is not registered in a User Function key, use the following procedure
to receive E-mail.
2
A Press the {Job Information} key.
B Press 0 or 1 to display "7. Mail
Reception"
Job Information
7.Mail Reception
hi
D Press the {Start} key.
If there is E-mail, the Communicating indicator will light and the Email will be printed.
Mail Reception:
Press Start
If there is no E-mail, the following
display will appears. Press the
{OK} key.
No Mail Received
Press OK
E The machine returns to the stand-
C Press the {OK} key.
by mode.
Routing of Received Faxes
When a document is received, its SUB code is compared with Personal Codes
registered in the fax machine and, if a match is found, the document is routed to
the destination whose Personal Code is specified. If the destination specified is
an E-mail address, the received document is routed to that destination as E-mail.
GFJHAI0N.eps
New York Branch of Company A
212-123-5678+1111
[email protected]
SUB Code:1111
Los Angeles Branch of Customer B
G3FAX
Server
PC
Telephone
Network
[email protected]
PC
FAX No:310-567-1234
NIC FAX
E-Mail: [email protected]
FAX No:212-123-5678
Note
❒ You can route faxes received from any fax machine, regardless of manufacturer.
❒ Before routing received faxes, you must set up the Personal Codes and routing address. See P.78 “Adding Personal Codes”. Also refer to Chapter 7, "Programming the Personal Codes" in the Advanced Features manual.
38
Reception
Transfer of Received Faxes
NIC FAX can automatically forward received faxes to other destinations registered in memory based on the Own Name, Own Fax Number or E-mail address
of the fax originator. If an E-mail address is registered for the destination station,
documents received can be forwarded as E-mail.
GFJTEN0N.eps
2
New York Branch of Company A
Los Angeles Branch of Customer B
[email protected]
Fax Header:COMPANY B
Server
PC
Telephone
Network
G3FAX
FAX No:310-567-1234
Fax Header:COMPANY B
COMPANY [email protected]
[email protected][email protected]
New York Branch of Customer B
PC
PC
Internet
E-Mail: [email protected]
NIC FAX
E-Mail: [email protected]
FAX No:212-123-5678
Note
❒ You can transfer data received from any fax machine, regardless of manufacture.
❒ You need to set up the forwarding station beforehand. See P.75 “Adding Forwarding Station Addresses”. "Adding Forwarding Station Addresses" Also refer to Chapter 7, "Forwarding" in the Advanced Features manual.
39
Internet Faxing
Transferring Mail Received via SMTP
Mail received via SMTP can be transferred to other fax machines. They can also
be transferred to destinations that are registered as Quick Dial entries, Speed
Dial entries, or Groups.
GFSMTH0N.eps
2
Los Angeles Branch of Company
New York Branch of Company A
PC
PC
Server
Internet
[email protected]
New York Branch of Company B
PC
G3FAX
FAX No : 212-567-1234
Telephone
Network
NIC FAX
E-Mail : [email protected]
FAX No : 212-123-5678
Getting Ready
Before transferring mail received via SMTP, you first must set the "Route documents received with SMTP" user parameter to "Yes". The factory default setting
of this parameter is "No". See P.60 “User Parameters” (swich 17, bit 1).
Note
❒ If a mail transfer request is received when the "Route documents received
with SMTP" user parameter is set to "No," NIC FAX responds with an error
to the SMTP server.
❒ You can make settings that limit transfer to specified originators. See P.15
“Limit Address (SMTP Routing)”.
40
Transferring Mail Received via SMTP
-Specifying mail transfer
The originator can request transfer of mail sent to another NIC FAX by specifying the E-mail address as follows.
❖ Fax number
fax=destination fax [email protected] name of NIC FAX.domain name
Example: to transfer to fax number 212-123-4567, specify:
fax=21212[email protected]
2
❖ Quick Dial destination
fax=#Quick Dial key [email protected] name of NIC FAX.domain name
Example: to transfer to the destination registered under Quick Dial key 01:
fax=#[email protected]
❖ Speed Dial destination
fax=#*Speed Dial [email protected] name of NIC FAX.domain name
Example: to transfer to the destination registered under Speed Dial number
12:
fax=#*[email protected]
❖ Group destination
fax=#**Group [email protected] name of NIC FAX.domain name
Example: to transfer to the destination registered under Group number 04:
fax=#**[email protected]
41
Internet Faxing
Canceling Transmission of an Internet Fax
While the Document is Being
Scanned In
A Press the {Stop} key.
B Remove the document
2
from the
feeder.
For how to clear document jams,
see Chapter 4, "Clearing a Document Jam" in the Basic Features
manual.
Clear Misfed
Original(S)
After the Document Has Been
Scanned In
Note
❒ You cannot cancel transmission of
a message after it has been sent.
Messages not shown in the file list
have been already sent.
A Press the {Job Information} key.
Confirm that "1. Cancel TX/RX" is
displayed.
Job Information
1.Cancel TX / RX
hi
B Press the {OK} key.
C Use 0 or 1 to move through the
list until the message you wish to
delete appears.
D Press the {OK} key.
42
E Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes".
Note
❒ If you do not want to cancel
transmission, select "No".
F Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the standby mode.
Reports and Lists
Reports and Lists
The formats of most reports and lists are identical to those printed for the standard fax functions. This section describes only reports and lists that have different formats.
Note
❒ When you send a fax to an E-mail address, the field where the fax number
normally appears in a standard fax report or list is replaced by the applicable
E-mail address.
2
Error Mail Notification
NIC FAX sends this notification to a sender when it is unable to successfully receive a particular E-mail message. A "cc" of this notification is also sent to the administrator E-mail address when one is specified.
• See P.12 “E-mail Server Settings” for details on specifying the administrator Email address.
Note
❒ NIC FAX also prints an Error Report when it sends an Error Mail Notification.
❒ If an error occurs when mail is received via SMTP, an Error Mail is sent to the
originator of the message.
Error Report (Mail)
This report is printed on NIC FAX when it is unable to send an Error Mail Notification.
ZCJR310N.eps
* * * ERROR REPORT (Mail) (JAN.19.2001 11:26AM) * * *
FILE TIME
ADDRESS
FAX HEADER: design
********************************************************************************************************
0009 11:26AM
[email protected] abc.company.com
PLEASE SEND THIS REPORT TO THE ABOVE ADDRESS.
CAUSE OF ERROR:
INVALID FILE (DECODE ERROR)
43
Internet Faxing
Server-Generated Error E-mail
The transmitting server sends this error E-mail to the originator of E-mail that
cannot be transmitted correctly due to an incorrect E-mail address or some other
reason.
Note
❒ After the server-generated error E-mail has been printed, the first page of the
document is printed.
2
Journal
Note
❒ The Journal is automatically printed out after each 50 transmissions and/or
receptions. You can also print it out manually. See Chapter 2, "Printing the
Journal" in the Advanced Features manual.
ZCJR330N.eps
* * * JOURNAL (JAN.19. 2001 3:12PM) * * *
FAX HEADER: ABC.COMPANY
Documents sent as E-Mail
<TRANSMISSION>
DATE
TIME
ADDRESS
MODE
TIME PAGE
RESULT PERSONAL NAME FILE
——————————————————————————————————————————
JAN.19. 10:19AM New York Branch
G3EDM
0’41”
P.1
OK
design
0528
11:45AM PC--<LAN>-->
*DM
0’01”
P.2
OK
0529
11:45AM New York Branch
G3EDM
0’45”
P.2
OK
0529
2:47PM
[email protected] MailDM
1’15”
P.1
——
001
0531
3:06PM
[email protected] MailSMQ 1’05”
P.1
OK
111
0533
3:08PM
[email protected]pany.com MailSMA 1’01”
P.1
——
0534
<RECEPTION>
DATE
TIME
ADDRESS
MODE
TIME PAGE
RESULT PERSONAL NAME FILE
——————————————————————————————————————————
JAN.19. 9:37AM
New York Branch
G3ES
0’06”
P.1
OK
design
0527
1:45PM
[email protected] MailSM
1’08”
P.1
OK
0530
3:01PM
[email protected] MailSM
1’01”
P.1
E
001
0532
3:09PM
[email protected] MailSM
1’02”
P.1
OK
111
0535
TX
# :
M:
S :
* :
006535
BATCH
MEMORY
STANDARD
PC
C
L
D
+
:
:
:
:
CONFIDENTIAL
SEND LATER
DETAIL
ROUTING
❖ [DATE]
Date of communication.
❖ [TIME]
Time communication started.
44
RX
$ :
@:
F :
Q :
000838
TRANSFER
FORWARDING
FINE
RECEPT NOTCE REQ.
P
E
>
A
:
:
:
:
POLLING
ECM
REDUCTION
RECEPT. NOTICE
Reports and Lists
❖ [ADDRESS]
In the case of E-mail transmission, this column shows the address that was enter manually, or the name assigned to the Quick Dial or Speed Dial that was
used. In the case of E-mail reception, this column shows the address that was
in the From field of the received E-mail. In the case of communication with
another fax, the contents of this column are identical to those of the standard
fax journal.
2
❖ [MODE]
Letter or symbol indicating the communication mode.
The letter "Q" appears next to E-mail for which Confirm Reception was specified in Mail Options. The letter "A" appears next to mail for which Receipt
Notifications have been sent.
❖ [TIME]
Elapsed time. **' **" is shown if the elapsed time exceeds 99 minutes 59 seconds.
❖ [PAGE]
Number of pages. ** is shown if the number of pages exceeds 999.
❖ [RESULT]
OK
:
All pages sent (fax transmission). When E-mail is specified for Reception Confirmation in Mail Options, and a reception confirmation message has been received from the receiver, "OK" is displayed.
E
:
Error
--
:
Internet fax sent to an E-mail server registered for this machine. This
does not indicate that the E-mail reached the final destination.
D
:
Power outage
Transmission interrupted due to service failure such as power outage.
❖ [PERSONAL NAME]
Personal name for communication with Personal Code specified. The personal name is shown here when one is programmed.
❖ [FILE]
File number (document control number)
45
Internet Faxing
Personal Code List
❖ [Pers. Code]
Indicates the Personal Codes registered in the machine.
❖ [Personal Name]
The user name corresponding to the Personal Code.
2
❖ [Programmed Receiver]
The programmed routing destination.
Transmission Result Notification Mail (Transfer Result Report)
When a fax is sent using LAN FAX, a Transmission Result Notification Mail is
sent to the destination if the routing destination's E-mail address is specified using a programmed Personal Code. This makes it possible to verify the result of
transmission.
Note
❒ Whether or not the transmitted document is attached to the transmission result report is determined by User Parameter settings (switch 04, bit 7; see P.60
“User Parameters”). The factory default setting is to attach the transmitted document (the image).
Reference
See P.49 “Basic Transmission”.
❖ [RESULT]
The transmission result report indicates the result as follows.
OK: Indicates that all pages were transmitted by LAN FAX.
ERROR: Indicates that some pages were not properly transmitted.
46
Scanning Operation
Scanning Operation
You can use NIC FAX as a simplified
network scanner by sending a document to your own E-mail address.
• For this operation you can select
between standard resolution (200
X 100 dpi) and detail resolution
(200 X 200 dpi).
A Make
sure that the Memory
Transmission indicator is lit.
If it is not lit, press the {Memory}
key.
B Place the document you want to
scan facedown into the feeder,
and make any scan settings you
require.
Documents are sent at Detail resolution (200 X 200 dpi), even if Fine
(200 X 400 dpi) is selected.
C Enter your E-mail address in one
of the following ways:
This step is not necessary when
specifying the E-mail address with
a Quick Dial or Speed Dial.
• Press the User Function key (F1F4) assigned the Mail Address
function, then use the Quick
Dial keys and number keys to
input your address.
• If your address is stored in a
Quick Dial, press that Quick
Dial key, then go to step D.
• If your address is stored in a
Speed Dial, press the Speed Dial
key then enter the code with the
number keys, then go to step D.
Note
❒ You can enter the "@" character and periods with the
Quick Dial keys. Press the
{Symbols} key when you
wish to enter other symbols.
Use the {ABC/abc} key to
shift between uppercase and
lowercase characters.
2
D Press the {Start} key.
• This starts reading of the document into memory. The E-mail
send operation starts after the
read operation is complete. The
Communicating indicator is lit
while a send operation is in
progress.
• With a long message, it may
take some time before the send
operation starts. This is due to
the time the machine requires to
convert the data in memory.
47
Internet Faxing
2
48
3. Using LAN FAX
Basic Transmission
This section describes how to send fax
documents created using PC applications.
Open the application document you
want to send, or create a new document, then perform the following
procedure.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
B Click [LAN-Fax F1] in [Printer Name],
then click [OK].
Note
❒ The setting method may differ
depending on the application
you are using. In all cases, select
[LAN-Fax F1] for the printer.
C Specify
the destination (see be-
low).
ST4NE370.tif
Directly Entering the Fax Number
A Enter the destination's fax number in the [Fax Number] text box.
Note
❒ To enter a pause (-), click
[Pause] (the first digit cannot
be a pause).
B If you want to specify another
destination, click [Next Number]
and repeat step C.
Specifying the destination by
entering a Quick Dial, Speed
Dial, or Group code
A Enter an destination already
stored on your machine in the
[Fax Number] text box.
❖ Quick Dial
Following #, enter the twodigit Quick Dial code.
For example, to specify the
end receiver assigned to
Quick Dial code 01, enter:
#01
❖ Speed Dial
Following #, enter an asterisk
followed by the two-digit
Speed Dial code.
For example, to specify the
end receiver assigned to
Speed Dial code 12, enter:
#*12
❖ Group Dial
Following #, enter two asterisks followed by the two-digit Group code.
For example, to specify the
end receiver assigned to
Group code 04, enter:
#**04
B If you want to specify another
destination, click [Next Number]
and repeat step C.
49
Using LAN FAX
Specifying a Destination from the
Destination List
B Specify options.
ST4NE380.tif
A Click the T button to the right
of the [Select from Address Book]
selector, and select a destination from the list that appears,
then click [Set as Destination].
Note
❒ Destinations must be already
stored in the list of destinations using Address Book.
3
❒ Click [Address Book] to start
up Address Book.
B If you want to specify another
destination, repeat step C.
D Specify options.
If you do not want to specify options, go to step E.
Attaching a Cover Sheet
A Place a check mark in the [Attach a Cover Sheet] checkbox.
Note
❒ To edit this setting, click
[Cover Sheet]. For details, see
the online help.
Specifying Options
You can specify the following options:
• Sending at Specific Time
• Personal Code Transmission
• Print Fax Header
A Click [Options].
50
To select Sending at Specific
Time, click the Sending at Specific Time check box to put a
check mark in the box, then
specify the transmission time.
To select Personal Code transmission, put a check mark in the
Enable Personal Code check box
by clicking it, then enter a Personal Code into the Personal
Code box.
To select Print Fax Header, click
the Print Fax Header check box
to put a check mark in the box.
Note
❒ By programming your own
E-mail address as a destination in the Personal Codes,
you can have a Transmission
Result Notification Mail sent
to that address by specifying
it when you transmit using
LAN FAX. This makes it possible to verify the results of
transmission.
Reference
For details on specifying options, see Chapter 1, "Sending
at a Specific Time" and Chapter 1, "Personal Codes" in the
Advanced Features manual.
For details on the Transmission Result Notification Mail,
see P.46 “Transmission Result
Notification Mail (Transfer Result Report)”.
C Click [OK].
Basic Transmission
E Click [Send].
Note
❒ Click [Send & Print] to print a
copy of the document you send
to the destination on your machine.
❒ Even if Super Fine (400 x 400
dpi) is selected in the LAN FAX
properties, this machine prints
at 200 dpi when "Send & Print"
is selected. See P.54 “Setting
LAN FAX Properties”.
❒ Click [Print] to print a copy of
the document you specified
without sending it to the destination.
3
51
Using LAN FAX
Address Book
❖ Deleting Programmed Destinations
A Select the destination you
want to edit from the list.
The name of the company
should appear grayed.
B Click [Delete].
C Click [Yes].
You can store and edit destinations in
the Address List using Address Book.
Note
❒ For details, see the online Help.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Programs] and then [Address Book].
B Edit
3
an existing destination, or
store a new one.
ST4NE390.tif
C Click [Close].
D If you made changes to an destination, a confirmation dialog box
appears. To save the changes you
made, click [Yes].
ST4NE400.tif
Note
❒ You can divide programmed
destinations into groups by
clicking [Group]. For details, see
the online Help.
❒ For [Line], select the appropriate
linetype: G3, G4, or I-G3.
❖ Storing New Destinations
A Enter the destination.
B Click [Add].
❖ Editing Programmed Destinations
A Select the destination you
want to edit from the list. The
name of the company should
appear grayed.
B Edit the data.
C Click [Update].
52
If you do not want to save the
changes and quit editing, click
[No].
To return to the editing screen,
click [Cancel].
Printing
Printing
You can print documents created using PC applications.
Open the application document you
want to print, or create a new document and perform the following procedure.
Note
❒ You can select either Standard resolution (200 x 100 dpi) or Detail
resolution (200 x 200 dpi) for printing. If the optional Fax Expansion
Card is installed, you can also print
using Fine resolution (400 x 400
dpi). See P.54 “Setting LAN FAX
Properties”.
3
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
B Click [LAN-Fax F1] in [Printer Name],
then click [OK].
Note
❒ The setting method may differ
depending on the application
you are using. In all cases, select
[LAN-Fax F1] for the printer.
C Click [Print].
ST4NE370.tif
53
Using LAN FAX
Setting LAN FAX Properties
This section describes how to make
settings, such as the document size,
resolution, and options.
D Make paper settings.
ST4NE430.tif
Note
❒ The dialog box appearance varies
according to Windows version.
The examples shown here appear
with Windows 98.
3
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] and then [Printers].
B Select
[LAN-Fax F1] so that it is
grayed, then select [Properties]
from the [File] menu.
Note
❒ With Windows NT, select [Document Default] from the [File]
menu.
C Click the [Paper] tab.
ST4NE420.tif
Note
❒ Even if you select Super Fine
(400 x 400 dpi) (requires the optional Fax Expansion Card), this
machine prints at 200 dpi when
"Send & Print" is selected.
❒ The Gray Scale box does not appear with Windows Me, Windows NT or Windows 2000.
Note
❒ With Windows 2000, click the
[Advanced] tab, then click [Printing Defaults...].
54
Setting LAN FAX Properties
❖ Accessories
A Click [Accessories].
B Place a check mark in the appropriate boxes.
ST4NE440.tif
3
Note
❒ When the optional Fax Expansion Card is installed,
place a check mark next to
the [Memory Extension]
check box.
C
❒ The optional ISDN Unit is
required in order to use
G4.
Click [OK].
E Click [OK].
55
Using LAN FAX
Memory Option
This function requires the optional
Fax Expansion Card.
You can specify how expansion memory is used when printing with the
LAN FAX function.
If you specify "Fax & Print", 2.6 MB of
memory is reserved for printing.
3
Limitation
❒ If you attempt to make changes
while any document is present in
memory, the message "Data remains in mem. Cannot switch"
is displayed and the change cannot
be made. Make the change while
remaining memory is 100%.
Note
❒ When a 2 MB Fax Expansion Card
is installed and "Fax & Print" is
specified, 1.4 MB of memory is reserved for storing files. This reduces available memory below the
amount available when expansion
memory is not installed.
❒ By specifying "Fax & Print", you
can print at Super Fine resolution
(400 x 400 dpi).
A Make
sure the machine is in
standby mode.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2}, then press the
{OK} key.
56
F Press
0 or 1 to display "20.
Memory Option".
Key Op. Tools:
20.Memory Option
hi
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press 0 or 1 to select "Fax" or
"Fax & Print".
Memory Option hi/OK
[Fax] Fax&Print
I Press the {OK} key.
"Programmed" is displayed on the
screen.
J Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to standby
mode.
4. Registering E-mail
Addresses
Quick Dials
Once an E-mail address is assigned to a Quick Dial key, you can specify the address by simply pressing this key.
In addition, if Label Insertion is turned on, the name registered for this Quick
Dial is printed automatically on the first page of the document.
Assigning an Auto Document to a Quick Dial key to which a destination is assigned appends the Auto Document to the fax being sent with the touch of a key.
Note
❒ You can also make settings with NIC FAX Monitor (See P.23 “NIC FAX Monitor Settings” for details.).
Reference
See Chapter 3, "Label Insertion" and Chapter 6, "Sending an Auto Document
as an Attachment" in the Advanced Features manual.
To Register or Edit an E-mail
Address in a Quick Dial
For each Quick Dial you can specify
the following:
• Destination E-mail address and
name
• Label insertion (On/Off)
Note
❒ Before you carry out the procedure
below, the Mail Address function
must be registered in a User Function key (see P.2 “Operation Panel”).
See Chapter 3, "Setup" in the Basic
Features manual for how to program
ordinary fax numbers.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
If any other screen is shown, press the
{Energy Saver/ 3 Clear Modes} key.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
C Press the {OK} key.
Confirm that "1. Prog. Quick Dial"
is displayed.
Program / Delete:
1.Prog. Quick Dialhi
D Press the {OK} key.
Press Key to Program
(Browsehi)
E Display the number of the Quick
Dial for which you want to register/change an E-mail address.
Press a Quick Dial, or search by
pressing 0 or 1.
57
Registering E-mail Addresses
F Press the {OK} key.
a01
Fax No.
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ If a destination is already registered it will be displayed. To
edit an existing address, delete
it by pressing the {Clear} key,
then enter the new address.
❒ If this Quick Dial is being used
for another purpose (such as a
Group), you cannot register a
destination.
4
G Press the User Function key (F1-
F4) assigned with the Mail Address function.
Mail:[abc]
Address
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ You can enter up to 127 alphabetic characters for an E-mail
address.
• You can enter the "@" character
and periods with the Quick Dial
keys. Press the {Symbols} key
when you wish to enter other
symbols. Use the {ABC/abc} key
to shift between uppercase and
lowercase characters.
• If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
• The Mail Address indicator
goes out.
H Enter
the E-mail address, and
then press the {OK} key.
a01
Press OK
[email protected]
58
I Press the {OK} key.
J Enter a name for this address, and
then press the {OK} key.
a01[ABC]
Name
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
• See Chapter 3, "Entering Characters" in the Basic Features
manual for how to enter characters.
• To edit an existing name, delete
it by pressing the {Clear} key,
then enter the new address.
K Press 0 or 1 and select "Yes" or
"No".
Label Insert:
[Yes]
No
hi/OK
L Press the {OK} key.
Program / Delete:
1.Prog. Quick Dialhi
Note
❒ If you want to register another
Quick Dial, repeat the procedure from step D.
M Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to the standby mode.
Quick Dials
-Using Quick Dials to send Email:
You can specify the destination Email address using Quick Dial keys as
follows
A Confirm that the Memory Transmission indicator is lit.
B Place your document facedown
into the feeder, and make any scan
settings you require.
C Press the Quick Dial key for the
registered address you want to enter.
The destination's name or address
is displayed.
D Press the {Start} key.
4
59
Registering E-mail Addresses
User Parameters
User Parameters appear on the display as a series of on/off switches that can be
used to configure a number of features.
• When installation of options or functions requires other settings besides User
Parameter settings, make the other settings first before making the User Parameter settings. See Chapter 7, "Key Operator Settings" in the Advanced Features manual.
• The machine's factory default settings are indicated by asterisks.
❖ Switches and Bits
Each User Parameter switch represents a bit (digit) of an eight-bit binary
number. Each bit is referred to by its relative position, with bit 0 on the far
right and bit 7 on the far left. Each bit can be either 0 or 1, and the status of
each function is determined by the value of the corresponding bit.
4
Switch:00 0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 Bit numbers
Note
❒ See Chapter 7, "User Parameters" in the Advanced Features manual for details on making User Parameter settings and printing a list of the current settings.
60
User Parameters
Switch
16
Bit
1,0
Item
Settings
Leave messages on POP *00: No
server after receiving
01: Save all
them (some types of E10: Save only errors
mail server may not support this feature).
Important
Page
P.37 “Reception”
❒ If you choose "Save all" or
"Save errors", check your Email from a PC to remove
messages from the server. If
you do not delete all messages, previously printed
messages may be printed
again at the machine.
17
3
If an error occurs during *0: Yes
E-mail reception, mail
1: No
notification to the sender.
P.43 “Error Mail
Notification”
4
Receive E-mail when the
Night Timer is in effect.
P.37 “Reception”
0
SMTP Reception
*0: Yes
1: No
*0: No
1: Yes
1
2
Route documents received with SMTP
*0: No
Respond to requests to
confirm the receipt of
documents.
*0: No
1: Yes
1: Yes
4
P.12 “SMTP
Server”
P.12 “SMTP
Server”
P.32 “Confirming Reception”
61
Registering E-mail Addresses
The following table shows User Parameter switches that are also used with NIC
FAX mail.
Switch
02
4
Item
0
Forwarding mark printing
1
Center mark printing
2
Reception time printing
3
TSI printing
4
Checkered Mark printing
04
7
Attach image to File Reserve Reports, Transmission Result Reports, Communication Failure
Reports, and Polling Transmission Clear Reports
06
0
Normal Fax Header printing
4
Batch transmission
0
Reverse order printing
1
Two in one
10
62
Bit
Description
This setting specifies whether or not a
forwarding mark should be appended
to images of received E-mail that is forwarded or routed.
Printing of the E-mail address in the
From field of received E-mail.
This setting specifies whether or not
LAN FAX appends the transmitted
document (image) to File Reserve Reports, Transmission Result Reports,
Communication Failure Reports, and
Polling Transmission Clear Reports at
the time of transmission. See P.49 “Basic
Transmission” and P.46 “Transmission
Result Notification Mail (Transfer Result
Report)”
Mail transmission does not support
batch transmission, but when this
switch is turned on, the same mail is
sent to multiple destinations at the
same time. When this switch is off, mail
is sent to individual destinations one at
a time.
5. NIC FAX Monitor
Starting Up and Quitting NIC FAX Monitor
For a brief explanation of NIC FAX Monitor's features, see P.23 “NIC FAX Monitor Settings”.
❒ Contact your network administrator if you are unsure of the IP
address or host name to input
here.
Starting Up NIC FAX Monitor
Note
❒ To use the NIC FAX application on
a Windows 2000 system, you must
be a member of the Administrators
or Power Users group.
D After a few moments, the initial
NIC FAX Monitor screen shown
here appears.
ST4NE460.tif
❒ The following procedure describes
operation in User Mode.
A Start
up the PC on which NIC
FAX Monitor is already installed.
B On the [Start] menu, point to [Programs] and then [NIC FAX application]. Next, click [NIC FAX Monitor].
C Type the IP address or host name
of NIC FAX into the [Host name]
text box, and then click [OK].
Clicking the T button displays a
list of up to five previously connected IP addresses or host names.
Note
❒ Activation of the PC's power
save function can cause the connection with the NIC FAX to be
broken.
ST4NE450.tif
Quitting NIC FAX Monitor
Note
❒ Note that this dialog box does
not appear if you have already
specified an IP address or host
name. Instead, NIC FAX Monitor automatically connects to
the last NIC FAX to which it
was connected.
From the initial NIC FAX Monitor
screen, click the [Connect] menu's [Exit] command.
Note
❒ Perform the following procedure
to restart NIC FAX Monitor. On
the [Start] menu, point to [Programs] and then [NIC FAX application]. Next, click [NIC FAX Monitor].
63
NIC FAX Monitor
NIC FAX Monitor Initial Screen
The initial screen shown below appears whenever you start up NIC FAX Monitor. It shows the NIC FAX that is currently selected, along with the status of a
variety of different settings.
Activation of the PC's power save function can cause the connection with NIC
FAX to be broken.
inidispE.eps
1
2
3
4
5
5
6
1. Network connection status
This area shows the communication status while NIC FAX communication is in
progress.
2. Received document
Messages appear here when a file has
been received into memory (Confidential
Reception, Substitute Reception, Memory Lock Reception).
3. Error status message
See P.87 “Troubleshooting” of this manual
for details on error status messages.
4. IP address or host name of connected NIC FAX
5. Current connection mode
6. NIC FAX memory status
Remaining memory is shown as a percent and bar graphic.
64
Specifying the Target Fax
Specifying the Target Fax
Use the following procedure to switch between fax machines when there are
more than one NIC FAX machines on the network.
A From the initial NIC FAX Monitor screen, click the [Connect] menu's [Connect to FAX] command.
B Type in the IP address or host name of the NIC FAX to which you want to
connect, and then click [OK].
• Clicking the T button displays a list of up to five previously connected IP
addresses or host names.
ST4NE470.tif
5
• Check with your network administrator if you do not know the IP address
or host name.
• NIC FAX Monitor can be used with NIC FAX or other fax machines with
NIC FAX KIT 500/140 installed in the same network. However, the following functional limitations apply when the machine is connected.
Model
Machine with NIC
Machine with NIC
FAX KIT 210 installed FAX KIT 500 installed
Machine with NIC
FAX KIT 140 installed
Code input
Personal Code of up to
8 digits
SUB/SEP code of up to
20 digits
Personal Code of up to
4 digits
DCX/TIFF
selectable
Not displayed
Not displayed
Displayed and supported
DNS settings
Supported
Supported *1
Not displayed
Multi-step
transfer
group setting
Not supported
Supported
Supported
*1
DNS server 2 is not displayed.
65
NIC FAX Monitor
Changing the Connection Mode
Use the following procedure to switch NIC FAX Monitor between its User Mode
and Administrator Mode. When launched, NIC FAX Monitor starts in User
Mode.
Changing from User Mode to
Administrator Mode
Changing from Administrator
Mode to User Mode
A From the initial NIC FAX Monitor
From the initial NIC FAX Monitor
screen, click the [Connect] menu's [User Mode] command.
• In User Mode you can view current settings but not change them.
screen, click the [Connect] menu's
[Administrator Mode] command.
B Type in the password.
ST4NE480.tif
5
C Click [OK].
• When NIC FAX Monitor is connected to NIC FAX in Administrator mode, it is not possible to
access the Key Operator Tools
menu from the machine.
• If the Key Operator Tools menu
is already open from on NIC
FAX, or another NIC FAX Monitor is accessing NIC FAX in Administrator mode, you cannot
switch to Administrator mode.
• Failure to perform any input for
10 minutes in Administrator
mode causes a message to be
displayed and NIC FAX Monitor to automatically return to
User mode.
• See P.28 “Setting the Administrator Mode Password” for details
on setting the Administrator
mode password.
66
Memory Status
Memory Status
Use the following procedures to view
NIC FAX memory status, as well as
lists of sent documents, received documents, and Auto Documents.
Viewing Files Awaiting
Transmission
A From the initial NIC FAX Monitor
A Click the [Transmission] tab.
screen, click [Memory Status].
ST4NE500.tif
ST4NE490.tif
5
• NIC FAX Monitor retrieves data
from NIC FAX and displays it in
the dialog box.
• Clicking [Refresh] at the bottom
of the dialog box retrieves the
latest data from NIC FAX and
updates the data in the dialog
box.
• Clicking any of the column
names at the top of the data sorts
the files in the list accordingly.
• Up to 100 files can be shown at
one time.
B To view the details of a particular
file, click on its name and then
click [Details].
ST4NE510.tif
67
NIC FAX Monitor
Viewing Files That Have Been
Received into Fax Memory
A Click the [Reception] tab.
ST4NE520.tif
5
• This tab shows all the received
files in memory.
• Clicking any of the column
names at the top of the data
sorts the files in the list accordingly.
Viewing Auto Documents
A Click the [Auto Document] tab.
ST4NE530.tif
• This tab shows all the Auto Document files in memory.
Reference
See Chapter 6, "Storing an Often
Used Document (Auto Document)" in the Advanced Features manual.
68
Journals (Transmission and Reception)
Journals (Transmission and Reception)
Viewing the Transmission and
Reception Journals
A From the initial NIC FAX Monitor
screen, click [Journal].
ST4NE540.tif
❒ Clicking any of the column
names at the top of the data
sorts the files in the journal according to the data whose column name you clicked.
❒ Clicking [Save] displays a save
dialog box, allowing you to save
the journal contents to a file.
❒ To print the journal, click [Print],
make the appropriate settings
in the "Print" dialog box, then
click [OK].
5
NIC FAX Monitor retrieves the
most recent data from NIC FAX
and displays it in the dialog box.
B Click the [Transmission] or [Reception] tabs to view the applicable
data.
ST4NE550.tif
Note
❒ You can change the number of
entries that is shown in the Journal with the Refresh Last setting
in Monitor Settings dialog box.
69
NIC FAX Monitor
Address Book (Quick Dial, Speed Dial,
Group Dial)
You can use the Address Book to add Quick Dials, Speed Dials, and Group Dials
to NIC FAX memory. Note that this operation must be performed in the NIC
FAX Monitor Administrator Mode.
• You cannot edit or delete Quick Dials from NIC FAX Monitor. Please do this
from the NIC FAX operation panel.
• E-mail addresses and fax numbers you store in Quick Dials can be accessed
with a single keypress from the NIC FAX operation panel when specifying
destinations.
Adding a New Quick Dial
C Click [Add].
ST4NE580.tif
• The Quick Dial number corresponds to the number of the Quick
Dial key on the NIC FAX operation
panel.
5
A From the initial screen in Administrator Mode, click [Addresses].
ST4NE560.tif
D Click the T button to the right of
the [Quick Dial Key] text box, and select a number from the list that
appears.
Currently unused Quick Dial
numbers only are shown in the list.
The list can show up to 30 numbers.
B Click the [Quick Dials] tab.
ST4NE570.tif
70
E Click the T button to the right of
the [Address Type] text box, and select the address type from the list
that appears.
• Available standard address
types: Mail, G3
• When the appropriate options
are installed, you can also select
G4 and I-G3.
Address Book (Quick Dial, Speed Dial, Group Dial)
F Type
the destination E-mail address or fax number into the [Address] text box.
• When entering the telephone
number for G4 and I-G3, click
[SubAddress] to enter a "/" symbol and [UUI] to enter a "T".
E.g. 0312341234/1234T#123456
However, if you click UUI first,
you cannot enter the sub-address.
Note
❒ Including dial options, a maximum of 254 digits can be entered for a fax number.
Permissible characters are numerals and the symbols "#", "*",
and "-" (the hyphen).
❒ You can enter to 127 alphabetic
characters for an E-mail address.
G Type the name of the destination
into the [Name] text box.
H Click
on the appropriate radio
button to turn [Label Insertion] on
or off.
Turning label insertion on automatically inserts and sends the
destination name you specify in
step G.
I Click [OK] after you are finished
making the settings you want.
In the case of a confidential transmission or polling transmission,
type in the dialing options described below before you click
[OK].
Dialing with the Dial Option Key
The four dial option settings on the
right side of the dialog box become
enabled when G3, G4, or I-G3 is selected for [Address Type]. These options can be used for confidential
transmission and polling reception
from a fax machine that is equipped
with these functions.
❖ SUB
Type in the SUB (confidential ID
number) when the destination you
are adding requires one for confidential transmission. When the
destination is a NIC FAX, this can
be used as a routing address specification, but note that confidential
transmission is not available for a
routed document.
5
❖ SEP
Type in the SEP (polling ID number) used by the destination for receiving faxes by polling.
❖ PWD
Type in the PWD (polling password) for receiving faxes by polling in co mbination with SE P
above. This setting is not required
when the other machine is an NIC
FAX.
❖ SID
Type in the SID (confidential password) for confidential transmission in combination with the SUB
code above. This setting is not required when your machine is an
NIC FAX.
Note
❒ The above items may be up to 20
characters long and contain digits
0-9, pound signs (#), asterisks (*)
and spaces.
71
NIC FAX Monitor
Adding a New Speed Dial
D Type
• E-mail addresses and fax numbers
you store in Speed Dials can be accessed by pressing the [Speed Dial]
key and entering a code on the NIC
FAX operation panel.
E Click the T button to the right of
A From the initial screen in Administrator mode, click [Addresses].
ST4NE590.tif
5
the number of the Speed
Dial you want to add into the
[Speed Dial Code] text box.
Specify a number from 00 to 99
with the normal configuration.
the [Type] text box, and select the
number type from the list that appears.
• Available standard address
types: Mail, G3
• When the appropriate options
are installed, you can also select
G4 and I-G3.
• If you specify a fax number, you
can also specify dial options.
F Type
B Click the [Speed Dials] tab.
ST4NE600.tif
the destination E-mail address or fax number into the [Address] text box.
• When entering the telephone
number for G4 and I-G3, click
[SubAddress] to enter a "/" symbol and [UUI] to enter a "T".
E.g. 0312341234/1234T#123456
However, if you click UUI first,
you cannot enter the sub-address.
G Type the name of the destination
into the [Name] text box.
H Click on a radio button to turn [LaC Click [Add].
ST4NE610.tif
bel Insertion] on or off.
Turning Label Insertion on automatically inserts and overlays the
destination name you specified in
step G onto messages you send.
I Click [OK] after you are finished
making the settings you want.
[Add] is dimmed if all the Speed Dials are already used.
72
Address Book (Quick Dial, Speed Dial, Group Dial)
Adding a New Group Dial
C Click [Add].
ST4NE640.tif
A From the initial screen in Administrator mode, click [Addresses].
ST4NE620.tif
B Click the [Groups] tab.
ST4NE630.tif
[Add] is dimmed if all the Group
Dials are already used.
5
D Click the T button to the right of
the [Group Number] text box, and
select a number from the list that
appears.
Note
❒ Currently unused Group Dial
numbers only are shown in the
list.
• NIC FAX Monitor will start acquiring the most recent data
from NIC FAX.
• You can confirm the contents of
Speed D ial nu mb ers in the
Speed Dial list. (See Chapter 6,
"Printing Dial Lists" in the Advanced Features manual.)
❒ You can program up to 7 Groups
with the normal configuration.
❒ You can program up to 140 destinations, including Quick Dials,
Speed Dials, and destinations
input individually with the
number keys. With NIC FAX
Monitor, however, you cannot
use the number keys to input a
destination.
❒ The total number of destinations that can be programmed
for all Groups is 197: 30 Quick
Dials, 100 Speed dials, and 67
destinations entered with the
number keys.
73
NIC FAX Monitor
E Click the T button to the right of
the [Assigned Quick Dial] text box,
and select the setting you want
from the list of options that appears.
If you don't want to assign the
group to a Quick Dial key, select
[none]. To assign the group to a
Quick Dial key, select the key's
number from the list.
F Type up to 20 characters for the
name you want to give the group
in the [Group Name] text box.
G Add destination addresses to this
Group.
• You can add or delete destinations, or add destinations assi gne d to Q u ic k Dia ls and
Speed Dials.
• To add a destination assigned to
a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, select either [Quick Dials] or [Speed
Dials] from the drop-down list
on the right, click on the item
you want to add in the list below, and then click [Add].
• To delete a destination, click on
it in the list on the left, and then
click [Delete].
5
H Click [OK] after you are finished
making the settings you want.
74
Adding Forwarding Station Addresses
Adding Forwarding Station Addresses
You can use NIC FAX Monitor to add
forwarding station addresses. Note
that this operation must be performed in the NIC FAX Monitor Administrator mode.
A Make sure NIC FAX Monitor is in
Administrator mode (see P.23
“Entering Administrator Mode”).
B On the [Details] menu, click [Forwarding].
ST4NE650.tif
D Click the T button to the right of
the [Forwarding No.] selector, and
select a number from the list that
appears.
Currently unused forwarding station address numbers only are
shown in the list.
Limitation
❒ [Add] is dimmed if no more forwarding station addresses can
be added.
E Click the T button to the right of
5
the [Type] selector, and select the
number type from the list that appears.
You can specify either a fax number or an E-mail address. For fax
numbers, you can also set the dial
options in the lower left of the dialog box.
C Click [Add].
ST4NE660.tif
F Type in the fax number or E-mail
address in the [Address] text box.
• You can input up to 254 characters, including dial options, for
a fax number. Each character
can be a number (0 to 9), pound
sign (#), asterisk (*), or hyphen
(-).
• You can input up to 127 alphabetic characters for an E-mail
address.
• When entering the telephone
number for G4 and I-G3, click
[SubAddress] to enter a "/" symbol and [UUI] to enter a "T".
E.g. 0312341234/1234T#123456
However, if you click UUI first,
you cannot enter the sub-address.
75
NIC FAX Monitor
G If necessary, specify the dial options (see P.71 “Dialing with the
Dial Option Key”).
If you do not want to specify dial
options, go to step H.
J Click [OK] after you are finished
making the settings you want.
The [Specified Sender Details] list
shows specified sender names, and
whether wild cards are turned on
or off.
H Add any destinations you want to
Note
❒ When using Confidential Transmission or Polling Reception,
enter the dial options, then
press [OK].
use as specified senders.
Enter the Own Name, Own Fax
Number, or destination E-mail address of the specified sender.
Note
❒ To delete a specified sender,
click on its name to select it and
then click [Delete]. After deletion
is complete, click [OK] and go to
step J.
5
❒ A specified sender is a station
that you specify when you only
want documents received from
specific stations to be transferred. Program specified senders using their Own Name,
Own Fax Number, or E-mail address.
❒ You can program 10 specified
senders for every forwarding
station address up to combined
maximum of 50 specified for all
forwarding stations.
❒ [Add] is dimmed if no more
specified senders can be added.
Editing Forwarding Settings
Use the procedure below to edit forwarding settings.
A Enter
Administrator mode (see
P.23 “Entering Administrator
Mode”).
B On the [Details] menu, click [Forwarding].
ST4NE650.tif
I Turn Wildcards on or off. Then
click [Add].
Turning on wild cards causes all
faxes that contain the specified
user name in the name, fax number
or E-mail address to be forwarded.
See Chapter 3, "Wild Card" in the
Basic Features manual for details.
76
C Click [Edit Options].
ST4NE680.tif
Adding Forwarding Station Addresses
D Click
on a radio button to turn
forwarding on or off.
Forwarding should be turned on
after the forwarding station and
specified senders are programmed.
E Click on a radio button to select
the forwarding Message.
This setting specifies whether only
documents received from specified senders or documents received from senders other than
specified senders should be forwarded.
F Click on the checkbox to turn for-
5
warding mark printing on
(checked) or off (unchecked).
This setting determines whether or
not forwarding marks are printed
on faxes when they are forwarded.
The forwarding mark helps to distinguish forwarded faxes from
standard faxes. See Chapter 7,
"Forwarding" in the Advanced
Features manuals for details.
G Click [OK] after you are finished
making the settings you want.
77
NIC FAX Monitor
Adding Personal Codes
You can use NIC FAX Monitor to add
Personal Codes.
C Click [Add].
ST4NE700.tif
Note
❒ By setting Personal Codes, you can
check on who has been using the
machine and how often.
❒ To register routing addresses (receivers), you must first assign each
destination to a Quick Dial or a
Speed Dial.
❒ If you have registered routing addresses, when an incoming message with a SUB code is received
from a machine that supports the
SUB feature, it is transferred to the
specified address.
5
Reference
For how to enter Personal Codes,
see Chapter 1, "Personal Codes"
and Chapter 7, "Programming the
Personal Code" in the Advanced
Features manual.
A Enter
Administrator mode (see
P.23 “Entering Administrator
Mode”).
B On the [Details] menu, click [Personal Codes].
ST4NE690.tif
D Type
a Personal Code into the
[Personal Code] text box.
A Personal Code can be up to 8
characters long, and can be composed of numbers (0 to 9), pound
signs (#), asterisks (*) and spaces
(but the first character cannot be a
space).
E Type up to 20 characters for the
name you want to give the Personal Code into the [Name] text
box.
78
Adding Personal Codes
F Select the delivery address. Choose
Quick Dials or Speed Dials from
the list.
The selected destinations appear in
the box below the list. Choose a fax
number or an E-mail address.
• You can store a single routing
address in a Personal Code.
• Specify the destination (E-mail
address) to which incoming
messages with a SUB code attached are automatically forwarded. You can choose from
Quick Dials or Speed Dials with
E-mail addresses or fax number
stored in them when specifying
routing addresses.
5
G Click [OK].
79
NIC FAX Monitor
Viewing Fax Information
You can use NIC FAX Monitor to
view these settings only. To edit
them, please use the NIC FAX operation panel.
A Enter User mode or Administra-
tor mode (see P.23 “Entering Administrator Mode”).
B From the initial NIC FAX Monitor
screen, click [FAX Setup (Administrator)] from the [Settings] Menu.
This displays the [FAX Setup (Administrator)] dialog box.
C Click the [FAX] tab.
5
ST4NE710.tif
The following items are displayed
on the screen:
❖ FAX Header
The Fax Header is a pre-programmed name that is printed
on the pages of the sender's document. The Fax Header is best
used for the company name,
branch name, and so on.
80
❖ Own Name
Own Name is data that is sent
between machines during send
and receive operations. This
data appears on the display of
the machine being communicated with and is printed in reports.
Note
❒ The registered name will not
be used unless the other party has a machine of the same
manufacturer that supports
the Own Name feature.
❖ Fax Number
Own Fax Number is data that is
sent between machines during
send and receive operations.
This data appears on the display of the machine being communicated with and is printed
in reports.
The normal format for the Own
Fax Number is: country code,
local area code, number.
❖ Own Number (G3)
This is the number that is programmed in the Transfer Report
and is called to connect with the
fax machine. (The number that
is programmed as explained in
Chapter 7, "Transfer Report" of
the Advanced Features manual.)
D After you are finished, click [OK].
Backing Up and Restoring Memory Data
Backing Up and Restoring Memory Data
Changing the Backup Destination
Backing Up Memory Data
Making a backup file of memory data
provides an easy way to restore normal operation should data be accidentally corrupted or deleted. The
following is a list of data that is
backed up by the procedure described below.
• Quick Dials
• Speed Dials
• Group Dials
• Personal Codes
• Forwarding Stations
A In
Administrator mode, execute
the [Settings] menu's [Backup] command to open the backup dialog
box.
B After confirming the name of the
backup file, click [OK] to save the
data.
ST4NE720.tif
A Click [Browse] and change the
backup destination in the [Save
As] dialog box, then click
[Save].
ST4NE725.tif
5
Note
❒ By selecting "*.csv" as the file
type, you can save the backup file in CSV format. However, note that only Quick
Dial and Speed Dial addresses are saved when the backup is saved in CSV format.
B If the desired destination file is
displayed, click [OK] in the
[Backup] dialog box.
81
NIC FAX Monitor
Restoring Memory Data
Use the procedure below to import
data from a backup file and restore
NIC FAX to the settings based on the
backup file data.
Before you perform the restore operation, you must first ensure that all
Quick Dials, Speed Dials, Group Dials, Personal Codes, and Forwarding
Station data has been cleared from
NIC FAX memory. You can check if
any of this data is in memory by
printing reports.
Note
❒ Restore is intended for use to recover from a hardware malfunction. Restoring data for any other
reason can cause communication
problems.
5
❒ Restore can be used only when
there is no dialing data stored in
memory. Check that there is no
data in memory before trying to restore data.
❒ Contact your service representative before performing the restore
operation.
❒ Backup files have a "tel" extension.
❒ You can only restore files generated by NIC FAX. Files generated by
NIC FAX KIT 500 or NIC FAX KIT
140 cannot be restored.
82
A In
Administrator mode, execute
the [Settings] menu's [Restore]
command to open the restore dialog box.
ST4NE730.tif
Backing Up and Restoring Memory Data
B After confirming the name of the
backup file your want to restore,
click [OK].
Note
❒ Clicking [Check Programmed Data] displays a dialog box that lets
you view data currently stored
in memory. You can verify the
contents of data to be restored
by clicking the Quick Dials,
Speed Dials, Group, Personal
Code, and Forwarding tabs in
this dialog box.
ST4NE735.tif
Changing the Backup File
A Click [Browse] and select the
type of file to be restored in the
[Open] dialog box, then click
[Open].
B If the desired [Backup File] is
displayed, click [OK] in the [Restore] dialog box.
Note
❒ By selecting "*.csv" as the file
type, you can restore data
from a backup file save in
CSV format. However, note
that only Quick Dial and
Speed Dial addresses are restored when restoring from a
file saved in CSV format.
5
83
NIC FAX Monitor
Backup Files Saved in CSV Format
Backup files that have been saved in CSV format can be opened up for review
using any spreadsheet program. The contents of the file are displayed as follows.
GFCSVB0N.eps
5
1. Indicates the line type as follows.
3. Quick Dial numbers and Speed
[0]: G3
[1]: G4
[3]: E-mail
[5]: I-G3
Dial numbers.
2. Indicates whether or not label insertion is used.
[0]: Label insertion not used
[1]: Label insertion used.
4. Programmed E-mail addresses
and fax numbers.
5. Names of distination.
6. Numbers of groups to which station belongs.
Note
❒ Lines that are prefixed with "#" are comments. This character appears at the
beginning of lines containing data that cannot be restored, such as programmed Quick Dial settings.
84
Using Online Help
Using Online Help
Online Help gives you instant access to useful information about NIC FAX Monitor on your PC screen.
From the initial NIC FAX Monitor screen, click the [Help] menu's [Help Topics]
command to display the help dialog box.
Using Index Search
Use the following procedure to search
for a help topic from the index.
A In the [Help Topics: NIC FAX Monitor
Displaying Version
Information
A On the [Help] menu, click [About]
to display a dialog box that shows
version information about NIC
FAX Monitor.
Help] dialog box, click the [Contents] tab.
B Click on a one of the book icons to
ST4NE790.tif
5
select it, and then click [Open].
C Click
on the topic about which
you want more information, and
the click [Display].
If your PC is connected to a printer,
you can print the currently displayed help screen by clicking
[Print].
Using Keyword Search
B Click [OK] to close the dialog box.
Use the following procedure to search
for a help topic by keyword.
A In the [Help Topics: NIC FAX Monitor
Help] dialog box, click the [Index]
tab.
B Input a number of characters for
the topic for which you want to
search and then click [Display].
You can also scroll through the
list to find the topic you want,
click on it, and then click [Display].
85
NIC FAX Monitor
5
86
6. Troubleshooting
Error Messages
NIC FAX Display Messages
The following error messages appear on the display of the NIC FAX when a
problem occurs. If the advice provided below does not solve the problem, contact your service representative.
Message
Network
Error
[10-40]
Causes and Recommended Actions
• No fax IP address is set. Use the NIC FAX control panel to set an
IP address.⇒ P.9
• Call your network administrator.
Network
Error
[10-41]
• Multiple IP addresses. Use the NIC FAX control panel to check
that the IP address is correct. ⇒ P.25
• Call your network administrator.
Network
Error
[10-45]
• DNS server's IP address is not registered. Use NIC FAX Monitor
to check that the DNS server's IP address is correct. ⇒ P.25
• Call your network administrator.
Network
Error
[10-46]
• Cannot find the DNS server. Use NIC FAX Monitor to check that
the DNS server is correctly registered. ⇒ P.25
• Call your network administrator.
Network
Error
[10-60]
• No POP server address is set. Use NIC FAX Monitor to check
that the POP server host name/IP address is correct. ⇒ P.24
• Call your network administrator.
Network
Error
[10-61]
• POP server cannot be found. Use NIC FAX Monitor to check
whether the POP server's IP address is correct. ⇒ P.24
• Call your network administrator.
Network
Error
[10-62]
• Cannot login to the POP server. Use NIC FAX Monitor to check
whether login name and password are correct. ⇒ P.24
• Call your network administrator.
Network
Error
[10-70]
• No SMTP server's IP address is set. Use NIC FAX Monitor to
register an SMTP server. ⇒ P.12
• Call your network administrator.
Network
Error
[10-73]
• SMTP server cannot be found. Use NIC FAX Monitor to check
whether the SMTP server's IP address is correct. ⇒ P.24
• Call your network administrator.
Network
Error
[10-74]
• No E-mail address is set for the fax machine. Use NIC FAX Monitor to set an E-mail address. ⇒ P.24
• Call your network administrator.
87
Troubleshooting
Message
Network
Error
[10-63]
[10-82]
[12-10]
Causes and Recommended Actions
• A line error occurred while sending or receiving data. Make sure
the LAN cable is correctly connected to the fax machine. ⇒ P.4
• Call your network administrator.
[12-15]
Network
Error
[10-04]
[10-30]
• Mechanical malfunction has occurred. Contact your service representative.
[10-31]
[10-32]
[10-33]
[10-34]
[10-35]
Connecting with PC
6
88
This message appears on the display of the fax machine while it is
connected to the NIC FAX Monitor Administrator mode.
Error Messages
NIC FAX Monitor Initial Screen Messages
The following is a list of messages that appear in the initial screen of NIC FAX
Monitor and actions you should take when they appear.
Icon
Message
Causes and Recommended Actions
Please call a service
engineer
• Contact your service representative.
Network error
• LAN network error.
Communication
error
• G3 communication error. See Chapter 3, "Printed
Reports" in the Advanced Features manual.
Close the cover
• NIC FAX cover is open. Close the cover.
6
Clear copy
• Copy jam. Clear the jam. See Chapter 8, "Clearing a
Copy, Fax, or Print Jam" in the Advanced Features
manual.
Clear original
• Document jam. Clear the jam. See Chapter 4, "Clearing a Document Jam" in the Basic Features manual.
Load paper
• Out of paper. Load paper. See Chapter 4, "Loading
Paper in the Main Paper Cassette" in the Basic Features manual. Also see Chapter 9, "Maintaining
Your Machine" in the Advanced Features manual.
Set the toner cartridge properly
• Install the toner cartridge correctly. See Chapter 9,
"Replacing the Toner Cassette and Cleaning Pad" in
the Advanced Features manual.
Replace the toner
cartridge
• Out of toner. Replace the toner cartridge with a new
one. See Chapter 9, "Replacing the Toner Cassette
and Cleaning Pad" in the Advanced Features manual.
Toner near empty
• Low toner. Replace the toner cartridge with a new
one soon. See Chapter 9, "Replacing the Toner Cassette and Cleaning Pad" in the Advanced Features
manual.
89
Troubleshooting
NIC FAX Monitor Operation Messages
Message
Causes and Recommended Actions
The IP address is incorrect in the TCP/IP
settings.
• The specified IP address is not entered correctly. Make sure the NIC
FAX IP address you got from your network administrator is correct.
It should be made up of four numbers from 0 to 255, separated by
periods. ⇒ P.25
The access control IP
address is incorrect
in the TCP/IP settings.
• The specified access control is not entered correctly. Make sure access control is correct. It should be made up of four numbers from 0
to 255, separated by periods. ⇒ P.25
The access control
mask is incorrect in
the TCP/IP settings.
• The specified access mask is not entered correctly. Make sure the
NIC FAX access mask is correct. It should be made up of four numbers from 0 to 255, separated by periods. ⇒ P.25
The default gateway
IP address is incorrect in the TCP/IP
settings.
• The specified default gateway is not entered correctly. Make sure
the default gateway (router) address is correct. The default gateway
should be made up of four numbers from 0 to 255, separated by periods. ⇒ P.25
The subnet mask is
• The specified subnet mask is not entered correctly. Make sure the
incorrect in the TCP/
NIC FAX subnet mask you got from your network administrator is
IP settings.
correct. It should be made up of four numbers from 0 to 255, separated by periods. ⇒ P.25
6
The DNS server IP
address is incorrect
in the TCP/IP settings.
• The DNS server specification is incorrect. Enter the correct DNS
server IP address. ⇒ P.10
The POP server IP
address is incorrect
in the Mail settings.
• The specified POP server's IP address is not entered correctly. Make
sure the IP address of the POP server being used by NIC FAX is entered correctly. ⇒ P.24
The SMTP server IP
address is incorrect
in the Mail settings.
• The specified SMTP server's IP address is not entered correctly.
Make sure the IP address of the SMTP server being used by NIC
FAX is entered correctly. ⇒ P.24
[Administrator Mode
Monitor Error] No input for 10 minutes so
returning to User
mode.
• NIC FAX Monitor is automatically returning to User Mode after being left in Administrator Mode for 10 minutes without any input.
Re-enter Administrator Mode if you need to make more settings. ⇒
P.23
Address is too long.
• The specified address is too long and cannot be stored. Up to 254
characters, including dial options, can be input for a fax number.
[Application Error]
• A network error occurred while getting data from the NIC FAX adStopped due to an erdress table. Check the following points, re-connect, and try again.
ror when retrieving
• Confirm that NIC FAX is turned on.
Address Book data.
• Confirm that the LAN cable is correctly connected to NIC FAX. ⇒
P.4
• Check whether NIC FAX network settings have been changed. ⇒
P.23
90
Error Messages
Message
[FAX command error]
Sorry, not executable
at the moment.
Causes and Recommended Actions
• Maintenance procedure is being performed by service personnel.
Wait until maintenance is finished.
[Application Error] Sys- • Problem with the Windows system. Restart your PC.
tem error.
[Application Error] Sys- • Problem with the Windows system. Restart your PC.
tem timer reset failure.
[Network Error] Failed
to initialize the status.
• A network error occurred while getting NIC FAX status data. Check
the following points, re-connect, and try again.
• Confirm that NIC FAX is turned on.
• Confirm that the LAN cable is correctly connected to NIC FAX. ⇒
P.4
• Check whether NIC FAX network settings have been changed. ⇒
P.23
[FAX command error]
Timeout occurred.
• NIC FAX is busy. Wait a while and try again.
[Application Error] The
password you entered is incorrect.
Please try again
• The password you input does not match the password registered on
NIC FAX. Input the correct password.
[Application Error] An
I/O error occurred
during the backup.
• The backup file you specified does not exist or is corrupted. Specify
a valid backup file. ⇒ P.81
6
[Application Error]
• A network error occurred while getting NIC FAX memory status daStopped due to an erta. Check the following points, re-connect, and try again.
ror while retrieving
• Confirm that NIC FAX is turned on.
file list.
• Confirm that the LAN cable is correctly connected to NIC FAX. ⇒
P.4
• Check whether NIC FAX network settings have been changed. ⇒
P.23
Please enter a filename.
• No file name specified for backing up or restoring memory data.
Specify a file name. ⇒ P.81
[Network error] Error
when connecting to
FAX.
• A network error occurred during communication with NIC FAX.
Check the following points, re-connect, and try again.
• Confirm that NIC FAX is turned on.
• Confirm that the LAN cable is correctly connected to NIC FAX. ⇒
P.4
• Check whether NIC FAX network settings have been changed. ⇒
P.23
[Application Error]
Failed while making
fonts for pre-print
processing.
• The Windows print font is not installed. Install Arial.
91
Troubleshooting
Message
[FAX command error]
Bad command.
Causes and Recommended Actions
• The command you are trying to use cannot be processed by NIC
FAX. Check that you are inputting the command correctly.
• The connected fax machine is not supported by this version of NIC
FAX Monitor. Install the correct version of software.
[FAX command error]
Bad parameter.
• The command you are trying to use cannot be processed by NIC
FAX. Check that you are inputting the command correctly.
• The connected fax machine is not supported by this version of NIC
FAX Monitor. Install the correct version of software.
[Application Error]
Cannot restore using
the specified backup
file.
• The backup file you specified is not a NIC FAX restoring memory
data. Specify a proper backup file. ⇒ P.81
[Application Error] You
specified an invalid
backup file.
• The backup file you specified is not a backup file. Specify a proper
backup file. ⇒ P.81
[Network error] Could
not connect to specified host.
• Confirm that the NIC FAX host name or IP address is set correctly.
⇒ P.24
• Confirm that NIC FAX is turned on.
• Confirm that the LAN cable is correctly connected to NIC FAX. ⇒
P.4
6
• Confirm that the IP address and subnet mask are set correctly on
NIC FAX. ⇒ P.25
• Confirm that TCP/IP protocols are installed on the PC where NIC
FAX Monitor is installed.
• Confirm that the DNS (Domain Name System) server settings on the
PC where NIC FAX Monitor is installed are correct.
• Confirm that NIC FAX is registered on the DNS server.
• When NIC FAX is not on the same network, confirm that the settings
of the PC where NIC FAX Monitor is installed and those on the NIC
FAX gateway are correct. ⇒ P.25
• Contact your network administrator.
• The Energy Saving mode on the PC is activated. Turn off the Energy
Saving mode.
• Check the access control and access mask settings.
[Network error] Connection error.
• Confirm that the NIC FAX host name or IP address is set correctly.
⇒ P.24
• Confirm that NIC FAX is turned on.
• Confirm that the LAN cable is correctly connected to NIC FAX. ⇒
P.4
• Confirm that the IP address and subnet mask are set correctly on
NIC FAX. ⇒ P.25
• Confirm that the DNS (Domain Name System) server settings on the
PC where NIC FAX Monitor is installed are correct.
• Contact your network administrator.
92
Error Messages
Message
Causes and Recommended Actions
[Application Error]
• Input the NIC FAX host name or IP address on the other device. ⇒
Please enter the name
P.9,⇒ P.12
of the host to connect
to.
[FAX command error]
Sorry, busy for doing
some other tasks.
• Function settings are being performed on the operation panel of the
connected NIC FAX or Administrator Mode of another NIC FAX
Monitor is currently in use. Wait until the conflicting procedure is
finished and try again.
• The command you are trying to use is already being used by a NIC
FAX process and cannot be executed.
[FAX command error]
You do not have access permission to
change that value.
• Restart NIC FAX Monitor, enter Administrator Mode, and change
the value. ⇒ P.23
[Application Error]
• A network error occurred while retrieving NIC FAX journal data.
Stopped due to an erCheck the following points, re-connect, and try again.
ror when retrieving
• Confirm that NIC FAX is turned on.
the journal.
• Confirm that the LAN cable is correctly connected to NIC FAX. ⇒
P.4
• Check whether NIC FAX network settings have been changed. ⇒
P.23
[Network error] Exited
due to reception error.
6
• A network error occurred. Check the following points, re-connect,
and try again.
• Confirm that NIC FAX is turned on.
• Confirm that the LAN cable is correctly connected to NIC FAX. ⇒
P.4
• Check whether NIC FAX network settings have been changed. ⇒
P.23
[Network error] Exited
due to transmission
error.
• A network error occurred. Check the following points, re-connect,
and try again.
• Confirm that NIC FAX is turned on.
• Confirm that the LAN cable is correctly connected to NIC FAX. ⇒
P.4
• Check whether NIC FAX network settings have been changed. ⇒
P.23
Cannot add item because this dialing information already
exists.
• The dial you specified is already used. Specify a different dial.
Cannot store item be- • The specified user is already used.
cause this dialing information already
exists.
93
Troubleshooting
Message
Causes and Recommended Actions
Cannot add item be- • The specified user is already used.
cause this Specified
Sender address information already exists.
You have not entered
any Specified Senders.
• Input specified user data.
Error in entered
Specified Sender data.
• Input alphabetic characters, symbols, or spaces for specified users.
Data entry error
(number setting is
duplicated).
• The number you are trying to add is already used. Specify a number
that is not used.
Data input error. In- • For fax numbers, you can input numbers (0 to 9), pound signs (#), asvalid character in adterisks (*), and hyphens (-). For E-mail addresses, you can input aldress.
phabetic characters.
6
Data input error. Invalid character in dialing options.
• For dial options, you can input numbers (0 to 9), pound signs (#),
and asterisks (*).
Data input error.
Please enter digits
only.
• Input numbers (0 to 9) only.
Data input error.
Speed Dial code out
of range.
• The Speed Dial code you specified is outside the display range.
Change the code so it is within the display range.
Address is too long.
• No more dialer data can be programmed.
Please enter all items
required!
• Input the required items.
[FAX command error]
An unexpected error
occurred.
• An unexpected error has occurred on the connected NIC FAX. Try
executing the command again.
Windows sockets ini- • Check whether the networking is enabled.
tialization failed.
• Check whether your configuration supports Windows sockets.
94
Please enter an integer between 1 and 60.
• The value entered for the Mail RX Interval setting is not an integer
between 1 and 60. Enter this value again.
Please enter an integer between 1 and
100.
• The value entered for the Refresh Last settings is not an integer between 1 and 100. Enter this value again.
Error Messages
LAN FAX Operation Messages
Message
• For Windows 95/98:
There was an error writing to
XXX. XXX. XXX. XXX for the
printer [LAN-Fax F1]:There was a
problem sending your document
to the printer. Make sure the
printer cable is connected and
that the printer is online.To continue printing, click retry.Windows will automatically retry
after 5 seconds.
• For Windows 2000
Error writing to XXX. XXX. XXX.
XXX for Document untitled: The
request could not be performed
because of an I/O device error.
Do you wish to retry or cancel the
job?
Causes and Recommended Actions
• An unprogrammed Quick Dial, Speed Dial, or
Group Dial was specified when using LAN FAX
transmission.
Press the {Cancel} key, and specify a programmed
destination, or program the destination in an unused Quick Dial, Speed Dial, or Group Dial.
• The memory limit was reached during LAN FAX
transmission.
Press the {Cancel} key to clear the transmission, then
divide the document you want to send into multiple
documents, or send any documents waiting to be
sent, and print any documents in Substitute Reception, then try to send the document again.
6
• For Windows NT:
Error writing to XXX. XXX. XXX.
XXX for Document XXX. txt: The
request could not be performed
because of an I/O device error.Do
you wish to retry or cancel the
job?
The number of entries in Destinations exceed the limits.
Up to 30 entries can be entered.
Up to 1500 characters can be enterd.
Please check.
The number of destinations specified exceeds the maximum possible. The maximum number of destinations
that can be specified at one time is 30.
The total number of destination numbers selected exceeds the maximum possible. The maximum number of
characters that can be entered is 1500.
"PC FAX" has already been launched. The LAN FAX dialog box is already open. Close it and
Cannot launch it again.
then start it up again.
Failed to allocate memory.
The amount of memory available is insufficient.
95
Troubleshooting
6
96
7. Appendix
Uninstalling NIC FAX Applications
Uninstalling the NIC FAX
application, Address Book or
Multidirect Print
E In
the dialog box that appears,
click on the item you want to remove, then click [Add/Remove].
ST4NE800.tif
Before uninstalling NIC FAX applications, confirm that all NIC FAX applications are closed.
Before uninstalling Address Book,
confirm that it is not open.
Before uninstalling Multidirect Print,
confirm that the print port for Multidirect Print is not being used.
To uninstall the NIC FAX applications on a Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 2000 system, you must be a
member of the Administrators group.
A Turn
on your PC and start up
Windows.
B Quit all NIC FAX applications.
C On the [Start] menu, point to [Set-
tings] and then click [Control Panel].
D Double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon.
Note
❒ To delete NIC FAX application
(NIC FAX Monitor, ICViewer),
select "NIC FAX application".
To delete Address Book or Multidirect Print, select "Address
Book" or "Multidirect Print".
97
Appendix
F Click [Yes].
ST4NE810.tif
B Quit all NIC FAX applications.
C On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] and then click [Printers].
A dialog box shows the progress of
the uninstall procedure.
D Select [LAN-Fax F1] and make sure
it is grayed, then select [Delete]
from the [File] menu.
ST4NE820.tif
ST4NE840.tif
G Click [OK].
ST4NE830.tif
7
E Click [Yes].
ST4NE850.tif
H Click
[OK] in the "Add/Remove
Programs Properties" dialog box.
F Click [Yes] again.
ST4NE860.tif
Uninstalling the LAN FAX
Driver
Under Windows NT 4.0 or Windows
2000, you need to log on with Administrator privileges to carry out this
procedure.
A Turn
on your PC and start up
Windows.
98
This does not appear with Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 2000.
Specifications
Specifications
Network
LAN : Local Area Network (Ethernet/10base-T, 100base-TX)
Transmit Function
E-mail
Scan Line Density
200 X 100 dpi, 200 X 200 dpi
Document Size
Letter / Legal
Transmit Protocols
E-mail send:
SMTP, TCP/IP
E-mail receive:
POP3, TCP/IP, SMTP
E-mail Format
Single/Multi-part MIME conversion Attached file forms: TIFF-F (MH
compression)
Compatible models
Machines that are equipped with NIC FAX KIT TYPE500/210/140 or
PDU KIT TYPE 210.
Internet Communication
Send and receive E-mail with a PC that has an E-mail address
E-mail Send Functions
Automatic conversion of send document to E-mail format and transmission of E-mail. Memory transmission only.
E-mail Receive
Functions
Automatic detection and printing of appended TIFF-F (MH) files and
ASCII text. Memory reception only.
7
99
Appendix
Received Images
Here is an example of a fax message sent from NIC FAX and received on a PC
using Outlook E-mail software.
RECIMG-N.eps
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7
1. Mail transmitted without specifying a subject and heading in the
Mail Options.
2. Mail transmitted with a subject
and heading specified in the Mail
Options.
3. From
The name (E-mail address) of the sender.
4. Sent
The date and time of E-mail transmission.
5. To
The E-mail address of the recipient.
6. Subject
Shows the priority and subject specified
in the Mail Options at the time of transmission. If no subject is specified, one is
automatically assigned in the format
shown in 1 above.
From "Own Fax Number" ("Own Name")
(Fax Message NO.document number)
Note
❒ The format will vary according to
whether the E-mail was sent using
Personal Codes and other settings. See
P.31 “About the E-mail Subject”.
7. Viewer URL Information
If you select "Yes" for the "Add ViewerURL" mail option, sites from which viewer
applications can be downloaded are included in the E-mail.
8. Attachment File
100
Any message included by the sender is
displayed as an attached document. You
can view the contents with ICViewer.
INDEX
100BASE-TX Cable, 4
10BASE-T Cable, 4
A
Access Control, 11, 25
Access Mask, 11, 25
Accessories, 55
Adding a New Group Dial, 73
Adding a New Quick Dial, 70
Adding a New Speed Dial, 72
Adding Forwarding Station Addresses, 75
Adding Personal Codes, 78
Address, 45
Address Book, 17, 52, 70
Administrator Address, 14
Administrator Mode, 23
Appendix, 97
Attaching a Cover Sheet, 50
Auto Mail Reception, 2, 16
Automatic E-mail Reception, 37
B
Backing Up and Restoring Memory Data, 81
Backup Files, 84
Backup Files Saved in CSV Format, 84
Backup Mail Address, 26
Backup TX Address, 14
Basic Transmission, 49
Before Starting Installation, 17
Broadcasting and Sequential
Broadcasting, 32
C
Canceling Transmission of an Internet Fax, 42
Changing from Administrator Mode to
User Mode, 66
Changing from User Mode to
Administrator Mode, 66
Changing the Backup Destination, 81
Changing the Backup File, 83
Changing the Connection Mode, 66
Compatible Models, 99
Confidential Transmission, ii
Confirmation of Reception, 29
Confirming Reception, 32
Confirm New Password, 28
Connecting the LAN Cable, 4
Connecting to a LAN, 4
CPU, 17
CSV Format, 84
Current Connection Mode, 64
Current Password, 28
Customize Option, 19, 20
D
Date, 44
Default Gateway, 25
Deleting Programmed Destinations, 52
Dialing with the Dial Option Key, ii, 71
Directly Entering the Fax Number, 49
Display, 16, 17
DNS, 10
DNS Server1, 25
DNS Server2, 25
Document Size, 99
Domain Name, 13, 24
E
Editing Forwarding Settings, 76
Editing Programmed Destinations, 52
E-mail Addresses, Entering, 35
E-mail Addresses, Registering, 57
E-mail Format, 99
E-mail Receive Functions, 99
E-mail RX Interval, 14
E-mail Send Functions, 99
E-mail Server Settings, 6, 12
E-mail Servers That Have Been
Confirmed to Work, 6
End receiver, 33
Entering Administrator Mode, 23
Entering an E-mail Address Manually, 35
Error Mail Notification, 43
Error Messages, 87
Error Report (Mail), 43
Error Status Message, 64
F
FAX Applications, 17, 97
FAX Header, 80
Fax Number, 80
Fax Number, Entering Directly, 49
101
Fax & Print, 56
File, 45
Forwarding, ii
Free Disk Space, 17
Functions Not Supported by E-mail
Reception, ii
Functions Not Supported by E-mail
Transmission, ii
G
Gateway Address, 10
Getting Ready, 1
H
Heading, in E-mail, 29
Help, 85
Host Name, 12, 24
Hub, 4
I
IBM PC/AT, 17
IMail Server for Windows NT, 6
Initial Settings, 7
Installing the Applications, 18
Installing the NIC FAX Applications, 17
Internet Communication, 99
Internet E-mail Settings, 24
Internet Fax, i
Internet Faxing, 29
Internet Fax Precautions, ii
IP Address, 9, 25
IP Address or Host Name of Connected
NIC FAX, 64
J
Journal, 44
Journals (Transmission and Reception), 69
K
Keyword Search, Using, 85
L
LAN, 4
LAN Cable, 4
LAN FAX Driver, 18
LAN-Fax F1, 18, 98
LAN FAX Features, iii
LAN FAX Operation Messages, 95
LAN FAX Properties, Setting, 54
102
Limit Address, 15
Limit Mail Size, 15
Login Name, 13, 24
Login Password, 13, 24
M
Mail Address, 2, 13, 24
Mail Reception, 2
Mail RX Interval, 24
Manual E-mail Reception, 37
Memory Option, 56
Memory Status, 67
MIME, i, 99
Minimum Memory, 17
Mode, 45
Monitor Settings, 27
Multidirect Print, 17
N
NetScape Messaging Server, 6
Network, 17, 99
Network Administerator, 6
Network Connection Status, 64
Network Settings, 9
New Password, 28
NIC FAX Application, 17
NIC FAX Display Messages, 87
NIC FAX Monitor, 63
NIC FAX Monitor Initial Screen, 64
NIC FAX Monitor Initial Screen Messages, 89
NIC FAX Monitor Operation Messages, 90
NIC FAX Monitor Settings, 23
NIC FAX Monitor Status, 64
O
Operating System, 17
Operation Panel, 2
Other Settings, 26
Own Name, 80
Own Number (G3), 80
P
Page, 45
Password, 28
PC, 17
Pers. Code, 46
Personal Code, 31, 45
Personal Code List, 46
Personal Name, 45, 46
Polling Reception, ii
Polling Transmission, ii
POP Server, 12, 24
Post Office, 6
Primary DNS Server Address (DNS 1), 10
Print Header Information, 26
Printing, 53
Programmed Receiver, 46
PWD, 71
Q
Quick Dials, 57
Quitting NIC FAX Monitor, 63
R
Received Document, 64
Received Images, 100
Receiving E-mail, 38
Reception, 37
Reception Confirmation, 29, 32
Reports and Lists, 43
Restoring Memory Data, 82
Result, 45
Routing of Received Faxes, 38
S
Scan Line Density, 99
Scanning Operation, 47
Seattle Lab Mail Server, 6
Secondary DNS Server Address (DNS 2), 11
Sendmail/QUALCOM Pop Server, 6
SEP, 71
Server-Generated Error E-mail, 44
Setting the Administrator Mode
Password, 28
SID, 71
SMTP Reception, 5
SMTP Server, 12, 24
SMTP, Transferring Mail Received via, 40
Specifications, 99
Specifying a Destination, 49, 50
Specifying E-mail Options, 30
Specifying mail Transfer, 41
Specifying Options, 50
Specifying the Target Fax, 65
Specifying Transfer Stations, 36
Starting Up and Quitting NIC FAX
Monitor, 63
Starting Up NIC FAX Monitor, 63
Storing New Destinations, 52
SUB, 71
Subject, in E-mail, 29, 31
Subnet Mask, 10, 25
Switches and Bits, 60
System Requirements, 17
T
TCP/IP Settings, 9, 25
TIFF-F, i
Time, 44, 45
Time Difference, 14, 26
Transfer of Received Faxes, 39
Transfer Request, 33
Transfer Request by E-mail, 34
Transfer Requester, 33
Transfer Result Report, 46
Transfer Station, 33
Transmission, 29
Transmission Result Notification Mail, 46
Transmit Function, 99
Transmit Protocols, 99
Troubleshooting, 87
U
Uninstalling NIC FAX Applications, 97
Uninstalling the LAN FAX Driver, 98
User Functions, 2
User Parameters, 60
Using Index Search, 85
Using Keyword Search, 85
Using LAN FAX, 49
Using Online Help, 85
Using Quick Dials to send E-mail, 59
V
Version Information, 85
VGA, 17
Viewer URL Information, 29
Viewing Auto Documents, 68
Viewing Fax Information, 80
Viewing Files Awaiting Transmission, 67
Viewing Files That Have Been Received
into Fax Memory, 68
Viewing the Transmission and Reception
Journals, 69
W
What is an Internet Fax, i
103
104
UE
USA H132
Copyright © 2000
NIC FAX KIT TYPE 210 Operating Instructions
UE USA H132-8698
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 1 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
PDU KIT TYPE 210
Operating Instructions
ZCKH030N.eps
Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future
reference.
For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 1 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
PDU KIT TYPE 210 Operating Instructions
Printed in Japan
UE USA H132-8607
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 1 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing PDU KIT TYPE 210. This manual contains important information that you
need to know in order to get the most out of the powerful features and functions of this product. Be sure
to read it carefully, and keep it on hand for future reference when required.
•
This manual covers PDU KIT TYPE 210 for a dial-up network.
•
PDU KIT TYPE 210 is required in order to use the Internet fax features.
•
Installation of PDU KIT TYPE 210 should be performed by an authorized service provider. Do not
attempt installation on your own.
For brevity, fax machines equipped with PDU KIT TYPE 210 are referred to throughout this manual as
the Internet fax machine, or simply "this machine." The contents of this manual assume that you are
already familiar with Windows functions and procedures.
Important
•
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the
prior written permission.
•
Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
•
In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine (hardware and / or software).
Trademarks
Microsoft® is a registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All brand names and product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Other product names used herein are for identification purpose
only and may be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in those
marks.
Warning:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Notes:
Some illustrations might be slightly different from your machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 1 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Copyright © 2000
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page i Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
What is an Internet Fax?
This Internet Fax machine converts scanned document images to E-mail format
and transmits the data over the Internet. The E-mail sent by this machine can be
received by another Internet fax machine or a PC. Instead of inputting the telephone number of the destination you want to send to, you input the applicable
E-mail address.
Documents are sent as E-mail messages with an attached TIFF-F image. Because
of this, a MIME-compatible E-mail reader is required in order to view documents received on a PC.
You can also receive E-mail messages from PCs or other Internet fax machines
and print or forward them.
In this manual, the term "providers" also include remote access servers (RAS).
Note
❒ This machine must be connected to a telephone line, installed, and set up correctly in order to use its Internet fax functions. See Chapter 1 "Getting Ready"
in this manual for details on connecting to a telephone line and making initial
settings.
GFINPG0N.eps
London Branch of Company A
New York Branch of Company A
E-Mail : [email protected]
FAX No : 0212-876-4321
E-Mail : [email protected]
FAX No : 212-123-5678
Internet
Telephone
Network
Telephone
Network
PC
E-mail :
[email protected]
PC
Provider
Provider
E-mail :
[email protected]
Internet Fax Precautions
• Error E-mail notifications are not always sent. We recommend that you confirm the receipt of important E-mail by calling the other party.
• The level of security for Internet communications is low. We recommend that
you use the telephone network for confidential communications.
• Internet fax delivery might be delayed due to network congestion. Use a standard fax whenever communication is time sensitive.
The following functions are supported with standard fax transmission, but not
with Internet faxing.
i
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page ii Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Functions Not Supported by E-mail Transmission
•
•
•
•
•
•
Immediate Transmission
ID Transmission
Confidential Transmission
Polling Transmission
Batch Transmission
Forwarding of Substitute Reception or Confidential Reception messages (Forwarding to an E-mail address not supported.)
• Dialing with the Dial Option Key
• Chain Dial
Functions Not Supported by E-mail Reception
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ii
ID Reception
Confidential Reception
Polling Reception
Multi-copy Reception
Authorized Reception
Memory Lock Reception
Specified Cassette (optional cassette required)
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page iii Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Getting Ready
OVERVIEW ................................................................................................. 1
Operation Panel ......................................................................................... 2
Internet Fax Initial Settings....................................................................... 4
Dial-Up Settings ............................................................................................ 5
2. Internet Faxing
Transmission ...........................................................................................
Confirming Reception..................................................................................
Transfer Request .....................................................................................
Transfer Request by E-mail ........................................................................
Specifying Transfer Stations .......................................................................
Reception .................................................................................................
Automatic E-mail Reception........................................................................
Manual E-mail Reception ............................................................................
Routing of Received Faxes .........................................................................
Transfer of Received Faxes ........................................................................
Canceling Transmission of an Internet Fax ..........................................
While the Document is Being Scanned In...................................................
After the Document Has Been Scanned In .................................................
Reports and Lists ....................................................................................
Error Mail Notification..................................................................................
Error Report (Mail) ......................................................................................
Server-Generated Error E-mail ...................................................................
Journal ........................................................................................................
Personal Code List......................................................................................
13
17
18
19
21
22
22
22
24
25
26
26
26
27
27
27
27
28
29
3. Registering E-mail Addresses
Quick Dials ............................................................................................... 31
To Register or Edit an E-mail Address in a Quick Dial................................ 31
User Parameters ...................................................................................... 34
4. Troubleshooting
Error Messages........................................................................................ 37
Internet Fax Display Messages................................................................... 37
iii
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page iv Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
5. Appendix
Specifications .......................................................................................... 39
Received Images ..................................................................................... 41
INDEX........................................................................................................ 42
iv
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 1 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
1. Getting Ready
OVERVIEW
The following steps must be performed before you can use the Internet Fax function.
A Sign up with an Internet service provider (ISP).
B Connect the machine to a telephone line.
See Chapter 10, "Connecting to a Telephone Line" in the Advanced Features
manual.
C User Function key settings.
D Make Internet Fax initial settings (connection settings provided by your Internet service provider).
Important
❒ In order to send or receive mail via the Internet, you must first sign up for Internet service with an Internet service provider (ISP) and obtain a mail address, login password, and so forth. This must be completed before
connecting or setting the machine.
❒ Note that, depending on the contract with your Internet service provider,
charges may be assessed for services such as mail access.
Note
❒ Sample operation panel displays shown in this manual may differ from those
that actually appear on the screen.
❒ Telephone lines that can be used with Internet fax are the same as those used
with ordinary facsimile communication.
1
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 2 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Getting Ready
Operation Panel
This section describes the operation
panel buttons and indicators that are
unique to Internet faxing. See Chapter
1, “Operation Panel” in the Basic Features manual for details on other operation panel buttons and indicators.
1
ZCJS300N.eps
A
Once the appropriate User Function key assignments have been
made, you can use the User Function keys to select the following
functions:
❖ Mail Address
Press the User Function key that
has been assigned the Mail Address function when you want
to enter an E-mail address. This
allows you to use the Quick Dial
keys to enter E-mail addresses
that contain letters, the "@" character, and periods.
❖ Mail Reception
Press the User Function key that
has been assigned the Mail Reception function to check the Email server and receive any new
E-mail. You can use this function to receive mail at any time,
regardless of the Auto Mail Reception setting. See P.22 “Manual E-mail Reception”.
2
❖ Auto Mail Reception
Press the User Function key that
has been assigned the Auto
Mail Reception function to turn
this feature on or off. When the
Auto Mail Reception indicator
is lit, the server is checked for Email at the E-mail Receive interval and downloading takes
place as necessary. Turn this
feature off when you do not
want to receive mail automatically. When not lit, E-mail is not
received automatically. See P.9
“E-mail Receive Interval”.
Limitation
❒ You cannot use send E-mail until the Mail Address function
has been assigned to one of the
User Function keys.
Note
❒ If you purchased your machine
with the PDU KIT already installed, the Mail Address function is pre-assigned to User
Function key {F2} and the Mail
Reception function is pre-assigned to User Function key
{F3}.
❒ If you purchased the PDU KIT
as a separate option, you also
received a set of labels for identifying functions assigned to the
User Function keys. Once the
User Function key assignments
have been made, affix the appropriate labels to those keys.
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 3 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Operation Panel
B
You can enter the following characters with the Quick Dial keys when
Mail Address input is selected.
Quick Dial key (QW- 20/28
ERTY type/
29/27
1
ABC type)
Function
@
.
Note
❒ The keys that can be assigned
Quick Dials differ depending
on the keyboard layout (ABC
type or QWERTY type). You
can make settings in "Key Layout". See Chapter 7, "Key Layout" in the Advanced Features
manual.
❒ If your PDU KIT was installed
as a separately purchased option, affix the "@" and "." labels
provided with the kit to the machine's original Quick Dial
sheet. Affix the "@" label over
"()" on the original sheet, and affix "." over "Space".
❒ You can enter symbols (such as
hyphens, underscores and spaces) by pressing the {Symbol}
key.
3
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 4 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Getting Ready
Internet Fax Initial Settings
Before using this machine, you must make the following settings.
1
❖ Dial-Up Settings
The Internet Fax settings include the following items.
Menu name
Item
Requirement
Provider Settings
Access Point Telephone No.
Required
User ID
Required
User Password
Required
Primary DNS Server Address
Optional
Secondary DNS Server Address
Optional
E-mail Settings
Auto Mail Reception
SMTP Server
Required
POP Server
Required
Host Name
Optional
Mail Address
Required
Domain Name
Optional
Login Name
Required
Login Password
Required
E-mail RX Interval
Optional
Mail RX Time 1
Optional
Mail RX Time 2
Optional
Time Difference
Optional
Administrator Address
Optional
Backup TX Address
Optional
Limit Mail Size
Optional
Optional
Note
❒ We recommend that you print a User Parameter list and keep it for future reference after making the above settings.
4
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 5 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Internet Fax Initial Settings
Dial-Up Settings
Provider Settings
A Make sure that the machine is in
A Press 0 or 1 to display "1. IS Pro-
standby mode.
If any other display is shown, press
the {Energy Saver/3Clear Modes}
key.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display "4. Key
Op. Tools".
User Tools Main Menu
4.Key Op. Tools
hi
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press {2}{2}{2}{2},
the {OK} key.
then press
F Press 0 or 1 to display "18. Dialup".
Key Op. Tools:
18.Dial-Up
hi
Note
❒ The numbers that appear in
front of function names vary according to options that are installed in the fax machine.
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press 0 or 1 to display the item
you want to make settings for.
Dial-Up:
1.IS Provider
hi
vider".
Dial-Up:
1.IS Provider
1
hi
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to display the item
you want to make settings for,
then press the {OK} key.
IS Provider:
1.Access Point No.hi
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Cancel} key.
Access Point Telephone Number
Enter the telephone number of
your Internet service provider's access point. See Chapter 7, "PSTN
Access Number" in the Advanced
Features manual.
A Enter the telephone number of
the access point with the number keys.
Access Point No.:
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ Always enter the telephone
number's area code, even if
the access point is located in
the same telephone service area. Press 0 or 1 to move the
display cursor, and the {Clear}
key to delete characters.
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the provider settings menu.
5
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 6 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Getting Ready
1
User ID
Primary DNS Server Address
Enter the User ID provided to you
by your Internet service provider.
A Enter the user ID.
Enter your Internet service provider's designated Primary DNS server address.
A Enter the code for "DNS Address 1" with the number keys.
Enter the primary DNS server
address of the provider.
• If a number has only one or
two digits, input it and then
press 1 to move the cursor
to the next number.
• Press 0 or 1 to move the
display cursor, and the
{Clear} key to delete characters.
If the provider has not given
you a DNS address, leave this
setting as "0.0.0.0".
User ID:[abc]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ Press 0 or 1 to move the
display cursor, and the
{Clear} key to delete characters.
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the provider settings menu.
User Password
Enter the User Password provided
to you by your Internet service
provider.
A Enter the user password.
Password:[abc]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ Press 0 or 1 to move the
display cursor, and the
{Clear} key to delete characters.
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the provider settings menu.
6
DNS Add.1: Press OK
[ 0. 0. 0. 0]
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the provider settings menu.
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 7 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Internet Fax Initial Settings
Secondary DNS Server Address
(DNS 2)
Enter your Internet service provider's designated Secondary DNS
server address.
A Enter the code for "DNS Address 2" with the number keys.
Enter the secondary DNS server
address of the provider.
• If a number has only one or
two digits, input it and then
press 1 to move the cursor
to the next number.
• Press 0 or 1 to move the
display cursor, and the
{Clear} key to delete characters.
If the provider has not given
you a DNS address, leave this
setting as "0.0.0.0".
DNS Add.2: Press OK
[ 0. 0. 0. 0]
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the provider settings menu.
E-mail Server Settings
A Enter the code for "Mail Server"
with the number keys.
Dial-Up:
2.Mail Server
B Press the {OK} key.
hi
C Press 0 or 1 to display the item
you want to make settings for,
and then press the {OK} key.
• To enter the "@" character and
periods, use the Quick Dial
keys. To enter all other symbols,
press the {Symbol} key. To
switch between uppercase and
lowercase characters, press the
{ABC/abc} key.
• If you make a mistake, press the
{Cancel} key.
Mail Server:
1.SMTP Server
1
hi
SMTP Server Address
Enter the address of the SMTP
server.
A Enter the SMTP server address.
• Press 0 or 1 to move the
display cursor, and the
{Clear} key to delete characters.
• The SMTP server is the server that sends E-mail over the
Internet.
• The SMTP server can also be
specified as an IP address.
SMTP Server:[abc]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the Email settings menu.
7
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 8 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Getting Ready
1
POP Server Address
Mail Address
Enter the address of the POP server.
A Enter the POP server address.
• Press 0 or 1 to move the
display cursor, and the
{Clear} key to delete characters.
• A connection is made to a
POP server in order to receive E-mail.
• You can also specify the POP
server address as an IP address.
Enter the mail address of this machine.
A Enter the E-mail address of this
machine.
Press 0 or 1 to move the display cursor, and the {Clear} key
to delete characters.
POP Server:[abc]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the Email settings menu.
Host Name
Enter the host name that has been
assigned to your machine.
A Enter the name of the host.
Press 0 or 1 to move the display cursor, and the {Clear} key
to delete characters.
Host Name:[abc]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Ordinarily, the name entered
here is your login name.
B Press the {OK} key.
8
Mail Add.:[abc]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the Email settings menu.
Domain Name
Enter the domain name that has
been assigned to you by your Internet service provider.
A Enter the domain name.
Press 0 or 1 to move the display cursor, and the {Clear} key
to delete characters.
Domain Name:[abc]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the Email settings menu.
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 9 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Internet Fax Initial Settings
Login Name
E-mail Receive Interval
Enter the login name to be used for
connection to the POP server.
A Enter the login name.
Press 0 or 1 to move the display cursor, and the {Clear} key
to delete characters.
When using auto mail reception,
enter the interval at which this machine is to automatically check the
POP server for mail.
A Enter the interval for automatic
reception with the number
keys.
• You can enter a value between 1 and 6 hours in 1hour steps.
• The factory default setting of
this parameter is 1 hour.
• The machine automatically
dials the provider at the set
interval and receives E-mail.
However, this setting is invalidated if automatic mail
reception is performed using
times set in the Mail Receive
Time 1 and Mail Receive
Time 2 parameters.
Login Name:[abc]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the Email settings menu.
Login Password
Enter the login password to be
used for connection to the POP
server.
A Enter the login password.
Press 0 or 1 to move the display cursor, and the {Clear} key
to delete characters.
Password:[abc]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the Email settings menu.
1
RX Interval:Press OK
[1]h
(1-6)
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the Email settings menu.
Mail Receive Time 1
Enter Auto Mail Reception time 1
using the 12-hour clock.
A Set mail receive time 1. First,
press 0 or 1 to select AM or
PM.
Mail RX Time 1:
Time [AM]
PM
/OK
9
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 10 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Getting Ready
B Enter the time with the number
keys.
Mail RX Time 1:
[ _: ] AM
1
/OK
Note
❒ Enter the auto mail reception
time using the 12-hour clock.
Press 0 or 1 to move the
display cursor. If you make a
mistake, press the {Clear}
key and re-enter.
❒ The machine automatically
dials the provider at the set
time and receives E-mail.
❒ By setting Mail Receive Time
2, you can have the machine
dial the provider and receive
E-mail at two preset times.
C Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the Email settings menu.
Mail Receive Time 2
Enter Auto Mail Reception time 2
using the 12-hour clock.
A Set mail receive time 2. First,
press 0 or 1 to select AM or
PM.
Mail RX Time 2:
Time [AM]
PM
/OK
B Enter the time with the number
keys.
Mail RX Time 2:
[ _: ] AM
10
/OK
Note
❒ Enter the auto mail reception
time using the 12-hour clock.
Press 0 or 1 to move the
display cursor. If you make a
mistake, press the {Clear}
key and re-enter.
❒ The machine automatically
dials the provider at the set
time and receives E-mail.
❒ By setting Mail Receive Time
2, you can have the machine
dial the provider and receive
E-mail at two preset times.
C Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the Email settings menu.
Time Difference
Enter the time difference between
your time zone and Greenwich
Mean Time.
A Press 0 or 1 to adjust the time
difference.
• Enter how many hours your
local time is ahead of or behind Greenwich Mean Time
(GMT).
• The factory default setting
for the time difference is "-5",
which is the time difference
for New York.
Difference:
hi/OK
[- 5]h
(-12 +12)
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the Email settings menu.
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 11 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Internet Fax Initial Settings
Administrator Address
Make this setting when you want
error notifications to be sent to another address in addition to the
originator.
A Enter the address to which notifications will be sent when an
error occurs.
• Press 0 or 1 to move the
display cursor, and the
{Clear} key to delete characters.
• If the machine receives an error notification when downloading E-mail from the POP
server or during a transfer request, it sends an error notification to the sender and a
copy (CC) to the address
specified with this setting.
Admin. Add:[abc]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the Email settings menu.
Backup TX Address
Make this setting when you want
all outgoing mail to be routed to
another address in addition to the
destination.
A Enter the E-mail backup address.
• Press 0 or 1 to move the display cursor, and the {Clear}
key to delete characters.
• A blind carbon copy (BCC) of
all sent E-mail messages is
sent to this address.
Backup TX:[abc]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
B Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the Email settings menu.
1
Limit Mail Size
Some E-mail service providers set
a limit on the size of E-mail that
their clients can receive.
Make this setting when you want
to limit the size of E-mail that is
transmitted. When this function is
set "On", transmission of E-mail
that exceeds the set size is aborted.
A Press 0 or 1 to display "1. On/
Off "
Limit Mail Size:
1.On/Off
hi
Note
❒ Use this feature to set the file
size limit for E-mail. When
"On" is selected, E-mail exceeding the maximum file
size cannot be sent.
❒ When E-mail exceeds the
maximum file size, an Error
Report is printed and the Email is deleted.
❒ Even when E-mail does not
exceed the size limit, it may
be rejected if it does not meet
the requirements of the server settings.
B Press the {OK} key.
C Press 0 or 1 to select "On".
Limit Mail Size: /OK
[On]
Off
Note
❒ If you do not want to set a
maximum E-mail size, select
"Off" and press the {OK} key.
11
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 12 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Getting Ready
D Press the {OK} key.
E Press 0 or 1 to display "2.
Available Size".
1
Limit Mail Size:
2.Available Size
hi
F Press the {OK} key.
G Enter the file size limit with
the number keys.
Size Limit: Press OK
[1000]KB
(1-9999)
Limitation
❒ You can set a file size from 1
to 9999 KB.
H Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the Email settings menu.
Auto Mail Reception
When Auto Mail Reception is set
"On", the Internet fax automatically
checks for and receives mail at the interval set for automatic reception (see
P.9 “E-mail Receive Interval”, P.9 “Mail
Receive Time 1” and P.10 “Mail Receive
Time 2”).
Note
❒ The factory default setting of this
parameter is "Off".
❒ If you have assigned the Auto Mail
Reception function to a User Function key, you can turn Auto Mail
Reception on or off by pressing
that key. See P.2 “Operation Panel”.
A Press 0 or 1 to display "3. Auto
Mail Recep."
B Press the {OK} key.
12
C Press 0
or 1 to select "On" or
"Off".
AutoMailRecep.:hi/OK
[On]
Off
D Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the E-mail
settings menu.
Returning to the Initial Display
A Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to the standby mode.
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 13 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
2. Internet Faxing
Transmission
This section describes how to scan a
document into this machine's memory and send it as E-mail. You can enter the E-mail address directly, or use
a Quick Dial, Speed Dial or Group
with an address already stored in it.
You can also use the {Redial} key to
recall the previous address sent to.
When sending documents, you can
set E-mail options using the {Trans.
Option} key. You can set the following
options:
❖ Subject
You can enter a subject for the document you want to send. You can
enter a maximum of 20 characters.
❖ Heading
You can add "Urgent" in front of
the document subject.
❖ Confirmation of Reception
You can confirm whether documents you sent were properly received on the Journal.
❖ Viewer URL Information
You can record URL sites for
downloading viewer applications
on E-mail you are about to send.
Important
❒ You may not be able to send large
files as E-mail, depending on Email environment conditions.
❒ The level of security for Internet
communications is low. Send an
ordinary fax if confidentiality is
important.
Note
❒ Because this machine sends documents as E-mail messages with an
attached TIFF-F image, viewer applications are required in order to
view documents when they are received on a PC. You can inform the
receiver of sites for downloading
viewer applications with the Viewer URL Information Mail Option.
❒ When you send viewer URL information, depending on the receiver's fax machine, the journal may
show a page count that is one or
two pages greater than the number
of pages actually sent.
❒ See P.41 “Received Images” for how
mail is actually received by the PC
when mail is sent with mail options selected.
A Make
sure that the Memory
Transmission indicator is lit.
If it is not, press the {Memory} key.
Limitation
❒ When using this machine to
send E-mail over the Internet,
documents are stored in memory, then sent using Memory
Transmission. Immediate
Transmission is not available
when Internet faxing.
13
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 14 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Internet Faxing
L Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes" or
"No".
Specifying E-mail Options
To specify E-mail options, perform
the following procedure.
A Press the {Trans. Option} key.
B Press 0 or 1 to display "10.
Mail Options".
2
Trans. Option
10.Mail Options
hi
C Press the {OK} key.
D Press 0 or 1 to select "On".
Mail Options:
[On]
Off
hi/OK
E Press the {OK} key.
F Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes" or
"No".
Insert Subject:hi/OK
[Yes]
No
G Press the {OK} key.
Reference
See Chapter 3, "Entering
Characters" in the Basic Features manual.
H Enter the subject.
Subject:
[ABC]
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
I Press the {OK} key.
J Press 0 or 1 to select "No" or
"Urgent".
Heading:
[No] Urgent
K Press the {OK} key.
14
hi/OK
Confirm Recep.:hi/OK
[Yes]
No
M Press the {OK} key.
N Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes" or
"No".
Add ViewerInfo.hi/OK
[Yes]
No
O Press the {OK} key.
Note
❒ If any one of the E-mail options is set, the Option indicator lights.
B Place your document face down
into the feeder, and make any
scan settings you require.
• Documents are sent at Detail
resolution (200 X 200 dpi), even
if Fine (200 X 400 dpi) is selected.
C Press the User Function key (F1F4) that is assigned the Mail Address function.
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 15 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Transmission
D Use
the Quick Dial keys and
number keys to enter the E-mail
address.
Mail:[abc]
Address
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
• You can enter the "@" character
and periods with the Quick Dial
keys. Press the {Symbols} key
when you wish to enter other
symbols. Use the {ABC/abc} key
to shift between uppercase and
lowercase characters.
• You can enter up to 127 characters for an E-mail address.
• You can specify E-mail addresses programmed in Quick Dials,
Speed Dials, and Group Dials.
• You can also use the {Redial}
key to specify E-mail addresses.
F Press the {Start} key.
• This starts reading the document into memory. The E-mail
send operation starts after the
read operation is complete. The
Communicating indicator is lit
while a send operation is in
progress.
• With a long message, it may
take some time before the transmission starts. This is due to the
time the machine requires to
convert the data in memory.
2
Note
❒ For how to cancel transmission
of an Internet fax, see P.26 “Canceling Transmission of an Internet
Fax”.
E Press the {OK} key.
This confirms the E-mail address
as shown on the display and causes the Mail Address indicator to go
out.
Note
❒ If you want to specify another
E-mail address, repeat steps C
and D.
Dest.1
Press Start
[email protected]_k
15
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 16 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Internet Faxing
-About the E-mail subject
If "No" is selected for "Insert Subject"
in Mail Options, a subject with the following contents is automatically inserted.
2
❖ When a Personal Code is set
• If the mail address of the Routing Address is registered:
From "mail address of the
Routing Address" Fax Message NO.xxxx.
• If the mail address of the Routing Address is not registered:
From "Personal Code name"
Fax Message NO.xxxx.
❖ When a Personal Code is not set
• If Own Fax Number and Own
Name are registered:
From "Own Fax Number"
("Own Name") (Fax Message
NO.xxxx)
• If only Own Fax Number is registered:
From "Own Fax Number" (Fax
Message NO.xxxx)
• If only Own Name is registered:
From "Own Name" (Fax Message NO.xxxx)
• If neither Own Fax Number nor
Own Name are registered:
Fax Message NO.xxxx
Note
❒ "xxxx" is the document number
that appears in the communication
journal.
Reference
See Chapter 3, "Initial Settings and
Adjustments" in the Basic Features
manual.
See Chapter 1, "Personal Codes" in
the Advanced Features manual.
16
-When using broadcasting and
sequential broadcasting
Broadcasting is used to send E-mail
when multiple addresses are specified for transmission. With broadcasting, the same E-mail can be sent to
multiple addresses at once, just as
when ordinary E-mail is sent to multiple addresses. However, if "Yes" is
selected for "Confirm Recep." or "Label Insert", sequential broadcasting is
used for transmission. With sequential broadcasting, the E-mail is sent
repeatedly, changing the address
each time until it has been sent to all
addresses specified.
Reference
See Chapter 3, "Label Insertion" in
the Advanced Features manual.
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 17 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Transmission
Confirming Reception
When Confirm Reception is selected,
a Reception Notice Request message
is sent at the time of transmission. The
receiver replies to this Reception Notice Request by sending a Reception
Notice. Once the Reception Notice
has been received, "OK" appears in
the Result column of the journal, allowing the originator to verify that
the transmission has been received.
2
Limitation
❒ The Confirm Reception feature is
only available if the receiver's PC
supports MDN (Message Disposition Notification).
Note
❒ The Journal records a total of up to
50 transmissions and receptions. If
the Reception Notice is not received while the corresponding
transmission is still listed in the
Journal, you will not be able to
confirm that the E-mail has been
received in the Journal's Result column.
❒ If you specify Mailing list addresses, do not select "Yes" for "Confirm
Recep." Otherwise, you will receive multiple reception confirmation messages from E-mail
recipients, and the Result column
will not show the correct information. The Result column is refreshed each time a new
confirmation message is received.
❒ Reception confirmation results are
only shown in the Journal. The Result column in all other files, lists,
and transmission reports appears
blank.
❒ Reception confirmation messages
are not recorded in the Journal.
17
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 18 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Internet Faxing
Transfer Request
Transfer requests allow you to make use of the Internet to reduce costs, particularly with long distance and international communications.
There are two types of transfer request transmission: transfer request by E-mail
and transfer request by fax (standard transfer request transmission).
Familiarize yourself with these terms in order to perform the following procedure.
2
❖ Transfer requester
This is the fax machine performing the request transmission (this machine).
❖ Transfer station
This is the fax machine that performs the transfer. This machine needs to have
the Delivery Destination settings registered.
❖ End receiver
This is the fax machine or PC that receives the E-mail or fax from the transfer
station.
Limitation
❒ Internet Fax and PDU KIT TYPE210 can be specified as the transfer requester
for a transfer request by E-mail.
❒ Only machines that are equipped with NIC FAX Kit 500 or NIC FAX Kit 140
can be specified as transfer stations.
Note
❒ Up to 30 end receivers can be specified for each transfer station. Each transfer
station Group is counted as a single end receiver.
❒ Each group is considered one item when specifying transfer stations programmed in Group Dials.
❒ In order to use this function, you must make the polling ID and Transfer Report settings. The same polling ID must be set for both the transfer requester
and the transfer stations. See Chapter 7, "ID Code" in the Advanced Features
manual. See Chapter 1, "Transfer Request" in the Advanced Features manual
for how to send faxes using transfer requests.
18
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 19 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Transfer Request
GFMCYP0N.eps
End Receiver
Transfer Station
NIC FAX
[email protected]
G3FAX
Telephone
Network
2
Internet
G3FAX
Transfer Requester
This machine
[email protected]
Transfer Station
[email protected]
+ Quick Dial (#01) input
G3FAX
Transfer Request by E-mail
A Make
sure that the Memory
Transmission indicator is lit.
If it is not, press the {Memory} key.
B Place your document face down
into the feeder, and make any
scan setting you require.
• Documents are sent at Detail
resolution (200 X 200 dpi), even
if Fine (200 X 400 dpi) is selected.
C Press the {Trans. Option} key.
D Press 0 or 1 to display
"7.
Transf. Request"
Trans. Option
7.Transf. Requesthi
Note
❒ Transfer request transmissions
sent to a fax machine that does
not have a transfer function, or
to a PC by E-mail, are sent as
normal transmissions and are
received by the transfer station
without being transferred to
any other destination. Note that
no error report is returned to the
transfer requester (the originator of the transmission). Because of this you should always
confirm that the transfer station
is a fax that is equipped with a
transfer function.
E Press the {OK} key.
F Press 0 or 1 to select "On".
Transf.Request:hi/OK
[On]
Off
G Press the {OK} key.
19
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 20 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Internet Faxing
H Press
the Quick Dial or Speed
Dial that contains the Transfer
Station.
Transf. Stn.:
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
2
• Quick Dial
Press the Quick Dial to which
the desired address is assigned.
• Speed Dial
Press Speed Dial key then enter
the Speed Dial code with the
number keys.
Limitation
❒ If the specified end receiver's
machine is not equipped with
the Transfer function, the transfer is halted and no Error Report
is printed.
❒ Before sending E-mail, confirm
that the end receiver's machine
is equipped with the Transfer
function.
Entering an E-mail Address
Manually
A Press the User Function key
(F1-F4) that is assigned the
Mail Address function.
B Enter the transfer station's Email address, and then press
the {OK} key.
If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
• To enter the "@" character
and periods, use the Quick
Dial keys. For all other symbols, press the {Symbol} key.
Use {ABC/abc} to shift between uppercase and lowercase characters.
20
I Press the {OK} key.
J Specify the end receiver.
You can specify a Quick Dial,
Speed Dial, or Group Dial programmed with the end receiver or
Transfer Station you want to specify.
Receive Stn:
01 [#_kkk]
K Press the {OK} key.
L Use 0 or 1 to select
"Yes" or
"No".
Add Recv. Stn? hi/OK
[Yes]
No
M Press the {OK} key.
Note
❒ If you selected "Yes" in step K,
repeat the procedure from step
I.
N Press the {Start} key.
• This starts reading of the document into memory. The E-mail
send operation starts after the
read operation is complete. The
Communicating indicator is lit
while a send operation is in
progress.
• With a long message, it may
take some time before the send
operation starts. This is due to
the time the machine requires to
convert the data in memory.
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 21 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Transfer Request
Specifying Transfer Stations
You can only specify end receivers already programmed in a Quick Dial,
Speed Dial, or Group Dial.
❖ Quick Dial
Following #, enter the two-digit
Quick Dial code.
For example, to specify the end receiver assigned to Quick Dial code
01, enter: # 0 1
2
❖ Speed Dial
Following #, enter an asterisk followed by the two-digit Speed Dial
code.
For example, to specify the end receiver assigned to Speed Dial code
12, enter: # * 1 2
❖ Group Dial
Following #, enter two asterisks
followed by the two-digit Group
code.
For example, to specify the end receiver assigned to Group code 04,
enter: # * * 0 4
21
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 22 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Internet Faxing
Reception
Note
❒ For E-mail from a PC, alphabeticcharacter text and TIFF-F images
are printed as they are. If you receive non-alphabetic text, it may
not be printed normally.
2
Automatic E-mail Reception
When this function is turned on, the
machine periodically checks the Email server for incoming E-mail and
downloads it as necessary.
The interval between checks is referred to as the Mail Receive Interval,
and the factory default setting for this
parameter is 1 hour (see P.7 “E-mail
Server Settings”). You can change this
to any value between 1 and 6 hours,
and can also force the machine to
check for incoming E-mail by pressing the User Function key that has
been assigned the Mail Reception
Function (see the next section).
By setting Mail Receive Time 1 and
Mail Receive Time 2, you can make
the machine receive mail at specified
times, as well as at preset intervals.
You can also configure this feature to
work in conjunction with the Night
Timer feature so that Automatic Email reception does not occur at times
when the machine is saving energy.
See P.34 “User Parameters” (switch 16.
bit4).
Note
❒ If the indicator of the User Function key assigned with the Auto
Mail Reception function is not lit,
automatic E-mail reception will
not take place (see P.2 “Operation
Panel”)
❒ If memory runs out, E-mail will
not be received at the specified intervals. Reception will resume
when sufficient memory becomes
available.
Reference
See P.9 “E-mail Receive Interval”.
See Chapter 6, "Assigning a User
Function Keys" in the Advanced
Features manual.
See Chapter 7, "Energy Save Timer" in the Advanced Features manual.
Manual E-mail Reception
Follow these steps at any time to
check for incoming E-mail immediately.
Note
❒ This procedure assumes that the
Manual Reception function is
stored in a User Function key beforehand (see P.2 “Operation Panel”). See Chapter 6, "Assigning
User Function Keys" in the Advanced Features manual.
A Press the User Function key (F1-
F4) registered with the Manual Email Reception function.
22
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 23 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Reception
B Press the {Start} key to check for
E-mail.
If there is E-mail, the Communicating indicator will light and the Email will be printed.
D Press the {Start} key.
If there is E-mail, the Communicating indicator will light and the Email will be printed.
Mail Reception:
Press Start
Mail Reception:
Press Start
If there is no E-mail, the following
display appears. Press the {OK}
key.
No Mail Received
Press OK
C The machine returns to the stand-
2
If there is no E-mail, the following
display will appears. Press the
{OK} key.
No Mail Received
Press OK
E The machine returns to the standby mode.
by mode.
Receiving E-mail with the Information
Function
If the Manual E-mail Reception function is not registered in a User Function key, use the following procedure
to receive E-mail.
A Press the {Job Information} key.
B Press 0 or 1 to display "7. Mail
Reception"
Job Information
7.Mail Reception
hi
C Press the {OK} key.
23
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 24 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Internet Faxing
Routing of Received Faxes
When a document is received, its SUB code is compared with Personal Codes
registered in the fax machine and, if a match is found, the document is routed to
the destination whose Personal Code is specified. If the destination specified is
an E-mail address, the received document is routed to that destination as E-mail.
GFJHAP0N.eps
2
New York Branch of Company A
Los Angeles Branch of Customer B
Your machine
E-Mail : [email protected]
FAX No : 212-123-5678
Telephone
Network
G3FAX
[email protected]
FAX No : 310-567-1234
212-123-5678+1111
[email protected]
Provider
Internet
PC
Note
❒ You can route faxes received from any fax machine, regardless of manufacturer.
❒ Before routing received faxes, you must set up the SUB codes and Receiver.
See P.29 “Personal Code List”, and Chapter 7, “Programming the Personal Codes”
in the Advanced Features manual.
24
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 25 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Reception
Transfer of Received Faxes
This machine can automatically forward received faxes to other destinations
registered in memory based on the Own Name, Own Fax Number or E-mail address of the fax originator. If an E-mail address is registered for the destination
station, documents received can be forwarded as E-mail.
GFJTEP0N.eps
New York Branch of Company A
Los Angeles Branch
of Customer B
PC
Internet
2
Los Angeles Branch
of Customer A
Your machine
E-Mai l: [email protected]
FAX No : 212-123-5678
[email protected]
PC
E-Mail address:
[email protected]
[email protected][email protected]
New York Branch of Customer B
Telephone
Network
B COMPANY=212-111-0000
Provider
New York Branch of Company A
G3FAX
Telephone
Network
G3FAX
FAX No : 212-567-1234
FAX Header : B COMPANY
FAX No:212-111-0000
Note
❒ You need to set up the forwarding station beforehand. See Chapter 7, "Forwarding" in the Advanced Features manual.
❒ You can also transfer faxes received from other manufacturers' machines.
25
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 26 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Internet Faxing
Canceling Transmission of an Internet Fax
While the Document is Being
Scanned In
A Press the {Stop} key.
B Remove the document
2
from the
feeder.
For how to clear document jams,
see Chapter 4, "Clearing a Document Jam" in the Basic Features
manual.
Clear Misfed
Original(S)
After the Document Has Been
Scanned In
Note
❒ You cannot cancel transmission of
a message after it has been sent.
Messages not shown in the file list
have been already sent.
A Press the {Job Information} key.
Confirm that "Cancel TX/RX" is
displayed.
Job Information
1.Cancel TX / RX
hi
B Press the {OK} key.
C Use 0 or 1 to move through the
list until the message you wish to
delete appears.
D Press the {OK} key.
26
E Press 0 or 1 to select "Yes".
Note
❒ If you do not want to cancel
transmission, select "No".
F Press the {OK} key.
The machine returns to the standby mode.
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 27 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Reports and Lists
Reports and Lists
The formats of most reports and lists are identical to those printed for the standard fax functions. This section describes only reports and lists that have different formats.
Note
❒ When you send a fax to an E-mail address, the field where the fax number
normally appears in a standard fax report or list is replaced by the applicable
E-mail address.
2
Error Mail Notification
This machine sends this notification to a sender when it is unable to successfully
receive a particular E-mail message. A "cc" of this notification is also sent to the
administrator E-mail address when one is specified.
• See P.7 “E-mail Server Settings” for details on specifying the administrator Email address.
Note
❒ This machine also prints an Error Report when it sends an Error Mail Notification.
Error Report (Mail)
This report is printed on this machine when it is unable to send an Error Mail
Notification.
ZCJR310N.eps
* * * ERROR REPORT (Mail) (JAN.19.2001 11:26AM) * * *
FILE TIME
ADDRESS
FAX HEADER: design
********************************************************************************************************
0009 11:26AM
[email protected] abc.company.com
PLEASE SEND THIS REPORT TO THE ABOVE ADDRESS.
CAUSE OF ERROR:
INVALID FILE (DECODE ERROR)
Server-Generated Error E-mail
The transmitting server sends this error E-mail to the originator of E-mail that cannot be transmitted correctly due to an incorrect E-mail address or some other reason.
Note
❒ After the server-generated error E-mail has been printed, the first page of the
document is printed.
27
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 28 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Internet Faxing
Journal
Note
❒ The Journal is automatically printed out after each 50 transmissions and/or
receptions. You can also print it out manually. See Chapter 2, "Printing the
Journal" in the Advanced Features manual.
2
ZCJR335N.eps
* * * JOURNAL (JAN.19. 2001 3:12PM) * * *
FAX HEADER: ABC.COMPANY
Documents sent as E-Mail
<TRANSMISSION>
DATE
TIME
ADDRESS
MODE
TIME PAGE
RESULT PERSONAL NAME FILE
——————————————————————————————————————————
JAN.19. 10:19AM New York Branch
G3EDM
0’41”
P.1
OK
design
0527
11:43AM New York Branch
G3EDM
0’01”
P.2
OK
0528
11:45AM New York Branch
G3EDM
0’45”
P.2
OK
0529
2:47PM
[email protected] MailDM
1’15”
P.1
——
001
0531
3:06PM
[email protected] MailSMQ 1’05”
P.1
OK
111
0533
3:08PM
[email protected] MailSMA 1’01”
P.1
——
0534
<RECEPTION>
DATE
TIME
ADDRESS
MODE
TIME PAGE
RESULT PERSONAL NAME FILE
——————————————————————————————————————————
JAN.19. 9:37AM
New York Branch
G3ES
0’06”
P.1
OK
design
0526
1:45PM
[email protected] MailSM
1’08”
P.1
OK
0530
3:01PM
[email protected] MailSM
1’01”
P.1
E
001
0532
3:09PM
[email protected] MailSM
1’02”
P.1
OK
111
0535
TX
# :
M:
S :
* :
006535
BATCH
MEMORY
STANDARD
PC
C
L
D
+
:
:
:
:
CONFIDENTIAL
SEND LATER
DETAIL
ROUTING
RX
$ :
@:
F :
Q :
000838
TRANSFER
FORWARDING
FINE
RECEPT NOTCE REQ.
P
E
>
A
:
:
:
:
POLLING
ECM
REDUCTION
RECEPT. NOTICE
❖ [DATE]
Date of communication.
❖ [TIME]
Time communication started.
❖ [ADDRESS]
In the case of E-mail transmission, this column shows the address that was entered manually, or the name assigned to the Quick Dial or Speed Dial that was
used. In the case of E-mail reception, this column shows the address that was
in the From field of the received E-mail. In the case of communication with
another fax, the contents of this column are identical to those of the standard
fax journal.
❖ [MODE]
Letter or symbol indicating the communication mode.
The letter "Q" appears next to E-mail for which Confirm Reception was specified in Mail Options. The letter "A" appears next to mail for which Receipt
Notifications have been sent.
28
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 29 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Reports and Lists
❖ [TIME]
Elapsed time. **' **" is shown if the elapsed time exceeds 99 minutes 59 seconds.
❖ [PAGE]
Number of pages. *** is shown if the number of pages exceeds 999.
❖ [RESULT]
OK
:
All pages sent (fax transmission). When E-mail is specified for Reception Confirmation in Mail Options, and a reception confirmation message has been received from the receiver, "OK" is displayed.
E
:
Error
--
:
Internet fax sent to an E-mail server registered for this machine. This
does not indicate that the E-mail reached the final destination.
D
:
Power outage
2
Transmission interrupted due to service failure such as power outage.
❖ [PERSONAL NAME]
Personal name or Personal Code for communication with Personal Code
specified. The personal name is shown here when one is programmed.
❖ [FILE]
File number (document control number)
Personal Code List
❖ [Pers. Code]
Indicates the personal user codes registered in the machine.
❖ [Personal Name]
The user name corresponding to the personal code.
❖ [Programmed Receiver]
The programmed routing destination.
29
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 30 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Internet Faxing
2
30
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 31 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
3. Registering E-mail
Addresses
Quick Dials
Once an E-mail address is assigned to a Quick Dial key, you can specify the address by simply pressing this key.
In addition, if label insertion is turned on, the name registered for this Quick Dial
is printed automatically on the first page of the document.
Assigning an Auto Document to a Quick Dial key to which a destination is assigned allows you to append the Auto Document to the fax being sent with the
touch of a key.
Reference
See Chapter 3, "Label Insertion" and Chapter 6, "Sending an Auto Document
as an Attachment" in the Advanced Features manual.
To Register or Edit an E-mail
Address in a Quick Dial
For each Quick Dial you can specify
the following:
• Destination E-mail address and
name
• Label insertion (On/Off)
Note
❒ Before you carry out the procedure
below, the Mail Address Input
function must be registered in a
User Function key (see P.2 “Operation Panel”).
❒ See Chapter 3, "Setup" in the Basic
Features manual for how to program ordinary fax numbers.
A Make sure that the machine is in
standby mode.
If any other screen is shown, press
the {Energy Saver/3Clear Modes}
key.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
Confirm that "1. Program / Delete"
is displayed.
User Tools Main Menu
1.Program / Deletehi
C Press the {OK} key. Confirm that
"1. Prog.Quick Dial" is displayed.
Program / Delete:
1.Prog. Quick Dialhi
D Press the {OK} key.
Press Key to Program
(Browsehi)
E Display the number of the Quick
Dial for which you want to register/change an E-mail address.
Press a Quick Dial, or search by
pressing 0 or 1.
31
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 32 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Registering E-mail Addresses
F Press the {OK} key.
a01
Fax No.
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ If a destination is already registered it will be displayed.
❒ If this Quick Dial is being used
for another purpose (such as a
Group), you cannot register a
destination.
3
G Press the User Function key (F1-
F4) assigned with the Mail Address function.
Mail:[abc]
Address
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Note
❒ You can enter up to 127 alphabetic characters for an E-mail
address.
• You can enter the "@" character
and periods with the Quick Dial
keys. Press the {Symbols} key
when you wish to enter other
symbols. Use the {ABC/abc} key
to shift between uppercase and
lowercase characters.
• If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear} key and try again.
• If a destination is already registered it will be displayed.
• To edit an existing address,
press the {Clear} key to delete it,
and then enter the new address.
H Enter
the E-mail address, then
press the {OK} key.
a01
Press OK
[email protected]
I Press the {OK} key.
J Enter a name for this address, and
then press the {OK} key.
a01[ABC]
Name
_kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
• See Chapter 3, "Entering Characters" in the Basic Features
manual for how to enter characters.
• To edit an existing name, press
the {Clear} key to delete it, and
then enter the new name.
K Press 0 or 1 and select "Yes" or
"No".
Label Insert:
[Yes]
No
hi/OK
L Press the {OK} key.
Program / Delete:
1.Prog. Quick Dialhi
Note
❒ If you want to register another
Quick Dial, repeat the procedure from step C.
M Press the {User Tools} key.
The machine returns to the standby mode.
32
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 33 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Quick Dials
-Using Quick Dials to send Email:
You can specify the destination Email address using Quick Dial keys as
follows.
A Confirm that the Immediate Transmission indicator is not lit.
B Place your document face-down
into the feeder, and make any scan
settings you require.
C Press the Quick Dial key for the
registered address you want to enter.
The other party's name or address
is displayed.
D Press the {Start} key.
3
33
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 34 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Registering E-mail Addresses
User Parameters
User Parameters appear on the display as a series of on/off switches that can be
used to configure a number of features.
• When installation of options or functions requires other settings besides User
Parameter settings, make the other settings first before making the User Parameter settings. See Chapter 7, "Key Operator Settings" in the Advanced Features manual.
• The machine's factory default settings are indicated by asterisks.
3
❖ Switches and Bits
Each User Parameter switch represents a bit (digit) of an eight-bit binary
number. Each bit is referred to by its relative position, with bit 0 on the far
right and bit 7 on the far left. Each bit can be either 0 or 1, and the status of
each function is determined by the value of the corresponding bit.
Switch:00 0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 Bit numbers
Note
❒ See Chapter 7, "User Parameters" in the Advanced Features manual for details on making User Parameter settings and printing a list of the current settings.
34
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 35 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
User Parameters
Switch
16
Bit
1,0
Item
Settings
Leave messages on POP *00: No
server after receiving
01: Save all
them (some types of E10: Save only errors
mail server may not support this feature).
Important
Page
P.22 “Reception”
❒ If you choose "Save all" or
"Save errors", check your Email from a PC to remove
messages from the server. If
you do not delete all messages, previously printed
messages may be printed
again at the machine.
3
4
17
2
7
If an error occurs during
E-mail reception, mail
notification to the sender.
*0: Yes
Receive E-mail when the
Night Timer is in effect.
*0: Yes
Respond to requests to
confirm the receipt of
documents.
*0: No
Select the modulation
method used by the data
modem (V34 or V90)
0: V34
1: No
1: No
1: Yes
3
P.27 “Error Mail
Notification”
P.22 “Reception”
P.17 “Confirming Reception”
*1: V90
Note
❒ When V34 is selected, the
maximum communication
speed is 33.6 Kbps for both
transmission and reception.
When V90 is selected, the
maximum communication
speed is 33.6 Kbps for transmission and 56 Kbps for reception.
❒ Selecting V90 may improve
reception speed, but transfer speed may also be reduced depending on factors
such as the line condition,
time of day, and the access
point being used.
35
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 36 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Registering E-mail Addresses
The following table shows User Parameter switches that are used with Internet
Fax mail.
Switch
02
3
06
10
36
Bit
Item
0
Forwarding mark printing
1
Center mark printing
2
Reception time printing
3
TSI printing
4
Checkered Mark printing
0
Normal Fax Header printing
4
Batch transmission
0
Reverse order printing
1
Two in one
Description
This setting specifies whether or not a
forwarding mark should be appended
to images of received E-mail that is forwarded or routed.
Printing of the E-mail address in the
From field of received E-mail.
Mail transmission does not support
batch transmission, but when this
switch is turned on, the same mail is
sent to multiple destinations at the
same time. When this switch is off, mail
is sent to individual destinations one at
a time. See P.16 “When using broadcasting and sequential broadcasting”.
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 37 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
4. Troubleshooting
Error Messages
Internet Fax Display Messages
The following error messages appear on the display of this machine when a
problem occurs. If the advice provided below does not solve the problem, contact your service representative.
Message
Causes and Recommended Actions
Network
Error
[10-45]
• DNS server's IP address is not registered. Check that the DNS
server's IP address is correct. ⇒ P.6
Network
Error
[10-46]
• Cannot find the DNS server. Check that the DNS server is correctly registered. ⇒ P.6
• Confirm setting with your provider.
• Your provider is conducting maintenance.
• Confirm setting with your provider.
Network
Error
[10-60]
• Cannot find the POP server. Check that the POP server host
name/IP address is correct. ⇒ P.7
• Confirm setting with your provider.
Network
Error
[10-61]
• POP server cannot be found. Check whether the POP server's
address is correct.⇒ P.7
• Your provider is conducting maintenance.
• Confirm setting with your provider.
Network
Error
[10-62]
• Cannot login to the POP server. Check whether login name and
password are correct. ⇒ P.7 , ⇒ P.9
• Confirm setting with your provider.
Network
Error
[10-70]
Network
Error
[10-73]
• No SMTP server's address is set. Register an SMTP server. ⇒ P.7
• Confirm setting with your provider.
• SMTP server cannot be found. Check whether the SMTP server's
address is correct. ⇒ P.7
• Your provider is conducting maintenance.
• Confirm setting with your provider.
Network
Error
[10-74]
• No E-mail address is set for the fax machine. Set an E-mail address. ⇒ P.7
• Confirm setting with your provider.
Network
Error
[10-63]
[10-82]
• A line error occurred while sending or receiving data. Make sure
the telephone line is correctly connected to the fax machine.
• Your provider is conducting maintenance.
37
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 38 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Troubleshooting
Message
Network
Error
[10-04]
[10-30]
Causes and Recommended Actions
• Mechanical malfunction has occurred. Contact your service representative.
[10-31]
[10-32]
[10-33]
[10-34]
[10-35]
4
Network
Error
[11-30]
The access point telephone number has not been set. Check that it is
properly registered. ⇒ P.5
Network
Error
[11-31]
• Make sure the telephone line is correctly connected to the fax
machine.
• Your provider is conducting maintenance.
Network
Error
[11-33]
Network
Error
[11-40]
• The access point number is incorrect. Check that it is properly
registered. ⇒ P.5
• Your provider is conducting maintenance.
The user ID or user password has not been set correctly. Check that
they are properly registered.
Important
❒ If your provider is conducting system maintenance, communication errors
will prevent you from connecting. Wait until maintenance is completed and
try again.
38
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 39 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
5. Appendix
Specifications
Network
Public switched telephone network (PSTN)
Private branch exchange (PBX)
Transmit Function
E-mail
Scan Line Density
200 X 100 dpi, 200 X 200 dpi
Document Size
Letter/Legal (Documents wider than 8.5" are reduced for transmission.)
Transmit Protocols
Connection to provider:
PPP connection
E-mail send:
SMTP, TCP/IP
E-mail receive:
POP3, TCP/IP
E-mail Format
Single/Multi-part MIME conversion Attached file forms: TIFF-F (MH
compression)
Compatible model
PDU KIT TYPE 210 or NIC FAX KIT TYPE 500/210/140
Internet
Communication
Send and receive E-mail with PC that has an E-mail address
E-mail Send
Functions
Automatic conversion of send document to E-mail format and transmission of E-mail. Memory transmission only.
E-mail Receive
Functions
Automatic detection and printing of appended TIFF-F (MH) files and
ASCII text. Memory reception only.
Communication
System
Full Duplex (Data communication)
Error Correction
ITU-T V.42 (including MNP4 and LAPM), MNP10
Date Compression
ITU-T V.42bis, MNP5
39
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 40 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Appendix
Communications Speed
Communication
Speed
56000/54667/53333/52000/50667/49333/48000/46667/45333/44000/
42667/41333/40000/38667/37333/36000/34667/33333/32000/30667/
29333/28000 bps (reception only)
33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/14400/12000/
9600/7200/4800/2400/1200/300 bps (transmission)
Communication
Standard
ITU-T V.34/V.32bis/V.32/V.22bis/V.22/V.21
Modulation/
Demodulation
FSK: 300 bps
ITU-T V.90 *1
DPSK: 1200 bps
QAM: 9600/4800/2400 bps
TCM:
33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/14400/12000/
9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
V.90 (reception only):
5
56000/54667/53333/52000/50667/49333/48000/46667/45333/44000/
42667/41333/40000/38667/37333/36000/34667/33333/32000/30667/
29333/28000 bps
*1
The ITU-T V.90 communications protocol supports reception speeds of up to 56000
bps and transmission speeds of up to 33600 bps. For communications at a speed higher than 33600 bps, the host machine must support ITU-T V.90.
The communication standard used by this product for communication at 56000
is ITU-T V.90.
40
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 41 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
Received Images
Received Images
Here is an example of a fax message sent from this machine and received on a
PC using Outlook E-mail software.
RECIMG-N.eps
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
7
8
1. Mail transmitted without specifying a subject or a heading in the mail
options.
2. Mail transmitted with a subject
and heading specified in the mail
options.
3. From
The name (E-mail address) of the sender.
4. Sent
The date and time of E-mail transmission.
5. To
The E-mail address of the recipient.
6. Subject
Shows the priority and subject specified
in the mail options at the time of transmission. If no subject is specified, one is automatically assigned in the format shown in
1 above. From "Own Fax Number" ("Own
Name") (Fax Message NO.document
number)
Note
❒ The format will vary according to
whether the E-mail was sent using
Personal Codes and other settings. See
P.16 “About the E-mail subject”.
7. Viewer URL Information
If you select "Yes" for the "Add ViewerURL" mail option, sites from which viewer
applications can be downloaded are included in the E-mail.
8. Attachments
Any message included by the sender is
displayed as an attached document.
41
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 42 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
INDEX
A
F
Access Point Telephone Number, 5
Address, 28
Administrator Address, 11
Authorized Reception, ii
Auto Mail Reception, 2
Automatic E-mail Reception, 22
B
File, 29
Forwarding, ii
Functions Not Supported by E-mail
Reception, ii
Functions Not Supported by E-mail
Transmission, ii
G
Getting Ready, 1
Group Dial, 21
Backup TX Address, 11
Batch Transmission, ii
C
Canceling Transmission of an Internet Fax, 26
Communication Speed, 40
Communication Standard, 40
Communication System, 39
Compatible model, 39
Confidential Reception, ii
Confidential Transmission, ii
Confirming Reception, 17
D
Date, 28
Date Compression, 39
Dialing with the Dial Option Key, ii
Dial-Up Settings, 4, 5
Display, 12
DNS, 6
Document Size, 39
Domain Name, 8
E
E-mail address, 2
E-mail Format, 39
E-mail Receive Functions, 39
E-mail Receive Interval, 9
E-mail Send Functions, 39
E-mail Server Settings, 7
End receiver, 18
Entering an E-mail Address Manually, 20
Error Correction, 39
Error Mail Notification, 27
Error Messages, 37
Error Report (Mail), 27
42
H
Host Name, 8
I
ID Reception, ii
ID Transmission, ii
Immediate Transmission, ii
Initial Settings, 4
Internet Communication, 39
Internet Fax, i
Internet Fax Display Messages, 37
Internet Faxing, 13
Internet Fax Precautions, i
J
Journal, 28
L
Limit Mail Size, 11
Login Name, 9
Login Password, 9
M
Mail Address, 2, 8
Mail Receive Time 1, 9
Mail Receive Time 2, 10
Mail Reception, 2
Mail Size, 11
Manual E-mail Reception, 22
Memory Lock Reception, ii
MIME, i, 39
Mode, 28
Modulation/Demodulation, 40
Multi-copy Reception, ii
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 43 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
N
Network, 39
O
Operation Panel, 2
P
Page, 29
Personal Code, 16, 24, 29
Personal Name, 29
Polling Reception, ii
Polling Transmission, ii
POP Server Address, 8
Primary DNS Server Address, 6
Programmed Receiver, 29
Provider Settings, 5
Q
Quick Dials, 21, 31
R
T
TIFF-F, i
Time, 28, 29
Time Difference, 10
Transfer of Received Faxes, 25
Transfer Request, 18
Transfer Request by E-mail, 19
Transfer requester, 18
Transfer station, 18
Transmission, 13
Transmit Function, 39
Transmit Protocols, 39
Troubleshooting, 37
U
User Functions, 2
User ID, 6
User Parameters, 34
User Password, 6
W
What is an Internet Fax, i
Received Images, 41
Receiving E-mail, 23
Reception, 22
Reception Confirmation, 17
Reports and Lists, 27
Result, 29
Routing of Received Faxes, 24
S
Scan Line Density, 39
Server-Generated Error E-mail, 27
SMTP Server Address, 7
Specifications, 39
Specified Cassette, ii
Specifying E-mail Options, 14
Specifying Transfer Stations, 21
Speed Dial, 21
Switches and Bits, 34
43
Smt4EN-PDU-F_FM.book Page 44 Monday, September 11, 2000 1:47 PM
MEMO
44
UE
USA
H132
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement